
 
 <\rd:''ivjc 
 
 mm
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 ■f 
 
 ^. •>:' tf 
 
 -—^ 
 
 
 I
 
 A Collection 
 
 of 
 
 Tern lie Traditions, 
 
 FaWes and Proverbs, 
 
 with an English Translation; 
 
 as also some 
 
 Specimens of tlie Autlior's own Teuiiie Compositious 
 
 and Translations; 
 
 to which is appended 
 
 A Temne - English Vocabulary. 
 
 By 
 
 The Rev. C. F Schhnher, 
 
 Missionary of tlifi Chiucli Missionary Society. 
 
 Printed for the Churcli iiissidiiary Sooioty. Salisbury Square. 
 
 LuiiJuii. 1801.
 
 Printer: J. V. Steiukopf in ftiittgart.
 
 PL 
 
 8736 
 S341e 
 
 Preface. 
 
 § 1. 
 
 ibe Collection of Temne Traditions, Fables etc., as contained 
 in tbe I. Part of the following pages, was received by the author 
 from one of the oldest Temne men living at Port-Loko about 
 twelve years ago, who has since died. These Traditions etc. 
 were of course delivered orally not in writing. 
 
 As regards tbe Traditions about the creation of the world, 
 and about the tiist people ; we may discover some traces of hov,' 
 sin and death came into this world; though of course much de- 
 viating from the truth, as represented to us by the Mosaic 
 accounts. 
 
 It seems, however, that some Mohammedan traditions have 
 been mixed up with tbe original Temne ones. 
 
 The translation of these Traditions, etc. in Part I. was made 
 somewhat free; which the author thought himi-clf justified to do; 
 as there is a full Vocabulary appended foi' tliis Collection of 
 Temne literature, by which the literal translation may be made 
 out by the reader himself, if required. 
 
 § 2. 
 
 The signification of the term: Temne seems to be „an old 
 man himself." They derive it, as the author was told, from: 
 o-tem, „an old man, an old gentleman," to which is affixed the 
 reflexive suffix -ne, „self"; because they believe that the Temne 
 nation will ever exist. 
 
 The word ought, therefore, to be written „Temno", and not 
 „Timne", as is often done, or even ,,Timmanee". 
 
 :.*
 
 IV Preface. 
 
 § 3. 
 
 The Temne country, as to its extension, reaches about from 
 11° 15' to 13" 10' of western longitude, and from 8" 15' to 
 9" 6' northern latitude. 
 
 As regards the number of its inhabitants, it is difficult to 
 state a sum which comes near the iruth. The author is, how- 
 ever, of opinion that they will amount to from 90,000 — 100,000. 
 But the Temne is understood in the Bolom country, and in those 
 districts, which border immediately on the Temne country. 
 
 The Temnes have by no means those strong characteristic 
 negro features, which the tribes farther down to the south have. 
 Their features come nearer to those of the Susus and Mandingoes, 
 who live to the north of the Temne country. 
 
 § 4. 
 
 a) The principal Temne tribes are the following: 
 
 1. An-Temne a-tdroh, „the eastern Temnes." 
 
 2. An-Temne a-pil, „the western Temnes." 
 
 3. Am-Mabanta, „the Mabanta Temnes." 
 
 4. An-Kwea, „the Quea Temnes." 
 
 The two latter tribes are on the right bank of the Rokel 
 river; the Mabantas are higher up the river, and the Queas lower 
 down close to the Colony of Sierra-Leone.*) 
 
 b) The Port-Loko territory belongs to the western part of 
 the Temne country, bordering on the Bolom country on the west. 
 
 c) The town Port-Loko is in Temne called Bake Ldko, 
 which signities literally „Wharf of the Lokos." This town is 
 situated at the top, or end of the Port-Loko creek, about 60 
 miles north-east from Freetown. The Lokos are a people of 
 their own, having their own language or dialect. They were 
 formerly inhabiting Port-Loko, from whence they were driven 
 by the Temnes more to the interior north-east, where they are 
 
 *) A tract of the Quoa-Cdiuitry has been lately ceded to the English 
 Goverument at Sierra Leone.
 
 Preface. V 
 
 now living, between the Temne and the Limba country. From 
 this nation the town Port-Loko derives its name. 
 
 d) Also the Baka people were living at Port-Loko in former 
 times; from whence they were driven by Bey Farraa the Con- 
 queror. They then went down to Sierra Leone, and from thence 
 up to the Isles de Loss, where they settled again, and where 
 their descendants are still living. (Cf. Traditions pag. 3.) 
 
 § 5. 
 
 Bey Foki, they say, preceded the first Alikali Kindo, also 
 called Alikali Morba. The Gbara family gave the country into 
 the hands of Morba, and named him Alikali; because they had 
 the government of the Port-Loko territory. They did so, be- 
 cause the country was in a bad state that time. Kindo, or 
 Morba lived before .\lik;ili Fatima's time. Fatima Brema was 
 the predecessor of Namina MOdu, who was Alikali of the Port- 
 Loko territory at the time, when the author was residing at 
 Port-Loko. 
 
 As to the derivation and signification of the term „Alikali'' 
 see the word in the Vocabulary. — It ought properly to be 
 written Alikali, not Ali Kali. 
 
 § 6. 
 
 The Temnes affirm that this present world is the second 
 w^hich God made, and the people inhabiting it the second race 
 of men, and that when the ])resent world comes to an end, and 
 all its inhabitants arc in Hades; God will make another world, 
 and other people in the same way as he had done for the first 
 and second world. (Cf. Traditions pag. 15.) 
 
 As they affirm that the present world is the second, which 
 God made; may we not here have a trace of the flood in Noah's 
 time, by which the first world was destroyed? 
 
 They also affirm that the first people, which God made, 
 were neither white nor black; but of a Mulatto complexion, or 
 of a brown or tawny colour.
 
 VI Preface. 
 
 § 7. 
 
 The traditions about the conduct of the first people, whom 
 God made, are very descriptive of the character of the Temnes; 
 thus they are at this day. Eating and drinking, and the lusts 
 of the flesh, arc still the objects for which they care most. 
 Their God is their belly. These Traditions also serve to show 
 what notions they have of God, or of the Supreme Being, and 
 how contrary these notions are to the attributes of God, as re- 
 vealed to us in the Bible. 
 
 While the author resided at Port'Loko, he was frequently 
 asked by the natives for what they called „child medicine,'' i. e. 
 a medicine to procure children with for persons who were barren. 
 They would have given any thing for it , if he could have pro- 
 cured it for them. Of course he told them that he was not in 
 the possession of such a medicine, and that it was God alone 
 who could give us children, as they where his gift. (Cf. Tra- 
 ditions pag. 17. 19.) 
 
 § 8. 
 If one commits adultery with the woman of another man, 
 they consider it a very serious offence, and the offender is se- 
 verely punished for it. If a man marries a woman, and finds 
 her defloured, or not a virgin, he may send her back to her 
 family; but if he finds her a virgin, he will, a few days after 
 the marriage, send a present to her parents in token of her vir- 
 ginity, which present is called : a-bola, and generally consists of 
 a gun, or of an iron pot, or of tobacco, which is sent along 
 with a white cloth, which latter article is always necessary for 
 this purpose. (Cf. Deut. 22, 13. etc.) 
 
 § 9. 
 The Temnes use to kill deformed children after their birth. 
 The persons, who perform this cruel act, are not the parents 
 themselves; but particular persons called r'a ra-sam, pi. y'etr 
 e-sam, lit. „a holy" or „sacred thing," or „a thing set apart 
 from common use for some particular object;" and then as ap-
 
 Preface. VII 
 
 plied to persons: „pcople set apart from common use for a par- 
 ticular object." Thus the name of the work, which these people 
 do, is api)lied also to the persons who do it, and we have here 
 an Abstractum pro Concreto, as is sometimes the case in Tenme. 
 (For r'a ra-s§m is generally not used of animate objects; though 
 they may say r'a ra-iiPsmn, „a living creature;" but here it is 
 the adjective, which makes the word to signify an animate being.) 
 These persons are said to perform this cruel act at night, when 
 no other person is allowed to be present, while engaged in it. 
 They either burn these unhappy creatures, or strangle them by 
 stopping their breath. . 
 
 This accounts for the circumstance, that we see no deformed, 
 or crippled children or persons among the Temnes, or but very 
 very seldom. 
 
 The reason wliy they act in this manner is no doubt because 
 they attach some superstitious fear to such a deformed offspring, 
 thinking that such a child would not only become an unlucky 
 being itself; but also bring evil or misfortune upon the family. 
 
 § 10. 
 
 a) Of a proper insurrection of the dead on the last day, 
 the Temnes have no idtni; though they believe in some kind of 
 judgment or retribution after death, or that their state after 
 death will depend on tlicir conduct here in this world. They 
 believe that all men. who live in this world will go to the Hades 
 (i.e. ro-kriti,*) ,, place" or „abode of departed spirits"), when 
 they die, and will remain there for ever without a body; some 
 in a happy , some in an unliapjiy state , according to their be- 
 haviour here. They also believe, that they will get their slaves 
 again in Hades; provided they tie a rope round their neck when 
 they die, and let the rope reach out of the grave, fastening it 
 to a stick pinned on the grave for this purpose. (Cf. Traditions 
 pag. 39.) 
 
 b) But the Temnes believe that a person may hy a sort of 
 
 *) See the term: krifi, ro-, in llic Vocab. behind.
 
 VIII Preface. 
 
 transmigration escape from the grave, which they express by the 
 word „falan". They afiirm that some persons having been put 
 to death innocently, have come to life again, and that they were 
 then living in a far country in great w^ealth. E. g. Alikali o dif 
 o-wontr ka Dalu Modu; ktjre falaii, o yi ri ro ka an-tgf fia 
 aii-Sulima; o ba a-trar a-lai, de a-kala a-gbati, o yi o-yola o- 
 bana. „ Alikali put to death a brother of Dalu Modu; but he 
 transmigrated, he is there in the country of the Sulimas: he has 
 many slaves, and much property, and is a great gentleman." 
 
 It deserves to be remarked, that the country, in which these 
 persons are said to live again, is always a very distant one. 
 
 c) They also assert that a child, which has died and been 
 buried, may be born again in a natural way, which they express 
 by the verb kal kom, „bring forth again, bear again." They 
 l)rove this assertion from certain marks on the body of the new- 
 born child agreeing exactly with those which the child had that 
 died. 
 
 d) The place of torment or hell is in Temue called: an'antr, 
 „the tire," or also: an'antr ua-tabana, „the everlasting lire." 
 They also call it: Yahannama; but this is of Arabic origin, and 
 introduced by the Mohammedans. 
 
 e) The place of happiness they call: od'er o-ma-boue, „the 
 place of joy," in opposition to which they call the place of tor- 
 ment also : od'er o-las, „the bad place." Otherwise they call the 
 place of happiness also: rianna, „heaven", and: firdans, „para- 
 dise", which two terms are, however, also of foreign origin, and 
 derived from the Arabic, and have also been introduced by the 
 Mohammedans, (Cf. Temne Gramm. § 6.) 
 
 f) The state or condition of the happy they express by: 
 ma-trama ma-fino, „a prosperous" or „happy condition," and that 
 of the unhappy by: ma-trama ma-las, „a bad" or ,, unhappy con- 
 dition," or also by: rn'one ma-bana, „great misery." (Cf. Tra- 
 ditions pag. 37. 39.) 
 
 g) But the Temnes seem to believe that both places, i. e. 
 the place of happiness and the place of torment, are contained
 
 Preface. IX 
 
 in the Hades itself, and not existing somewhere else, or sepa- 
 rately. (Cf. the word kriti, ro-, in the Vocabulary behind.) 
 
 § 11- 
 
 a) As regards the object of their worshij), it may be said 
 that they believe in the existence of a Supreme Being, which 
 they call: K'liruraasaba, which is the most solemn name of the 
 Deity; otherwise they call this Being also: K'uru,*) which, how- 
 ever, signifies also „sky, heaven; deity." What the sense of the 
 „niasaba" is, which is joined to K'dru, we have not been able 
 to find out. Perhaps it is for: ma sa ba, = sa ma ba, whicli 
 signifies „we have," when the full sense of the word would be 
 „the God we have;" but this is only a conjecture. 
 
 They do, however, not believe that this Being exercises any 
 providence over men. They think that, after having created the 
 world, he does not farther care about it, nor about the concerns 
 of men; and, therefore, they also do not worship him. 
 
 b) The objects of their worship are rather what they call: 
 a-krifi,**) „krifis, tutelary spirits." For these they care much 
 more than for the Supreme Being, and pay them much greater 
 attention; because they believe that these Kritis exercise a much 
 greater influence upon their condition than God, and that their 
 happy or unhappy condition in this world depends on the good- 
 will, or upon the ill-will of these Krifis. Hence the many sacri- 
 fices which they make to tliein, by which they endeavour to keep 
 them well disposed towards them, in order that they might do 
 them no harm. For any evil, which befalls a person, is attri- 
 buted to the ill-will of the Kriti, who, as they say, has been 
 offended by the person, on whom he sent the evil, either by not 
 having made sacrifices to him, or by not having cared for him 
 properly, and the Kriti must tlien be reconciled by sacrifices;- 
 while on the other hand every good, with which one may meet, 
 
 *) Cf. the word k'uru in the Vocabulary. 
 **) See the word: krifi, both the noun and the adjective in the Voca- 
 bulary behind.
 
 X Preface. 
 
 is attributed to the good-Avill of the Krifi, for which they then 
 bring him a sacrifice of thanksgiving. 
 
 c) There are good and evil Krifis, as also male and female 
 ones. Thej' believe that thev not only take care of men, but 
 also of towns, houses, and farms etc., as long as they are well 
 disposed. Hence we frequently meet with a small hut before a 
 town, or at its entrance, which is dedicated to the Krifi, or tute- 
 lary si)irit of the town; before whom they set food from time 
 to time, or at cei^tain periods. 
 
 But the concrete noun o-krifi is also used for the abstract, 
 and they use g-krifi for „luck", as: g ba o-krifi o-fino, „he has 
 good luck," lit. „he has a good krifi;" — o ba o-krifi o-las, 
 „he has bad luck," lit. ,,he has a bad krifi." 
 
 A male Krifi they call: o-krifi o-runi, and a female one: 
 o-krifi o-bera. 
 
 The sacrifices which they bring to these Krifis, and which 
 are called: s'adka*) (which is a word of Arabic origin, and in- 
 troduced by the Mohammedans; cf. Temne Gram. § 6), generally 
 consist of food, as of cooked rice, or of cakes, etc. 
 
 ^ !-'• . 
 
 a) The Krifis themselves, they say, cannot be seen by any 
 body, except by those who have four eyes, as they call it, that 
 is by the: an-soki, „the wizards, the augurers," or by „those 
 possessed of second sight." But they have representatives of 
 these Krifis in their houses, which consist of stones taken from 
 the graves of relatives, never from those of strangers. These 
 stones they call: am-baki, lit. „the dead ones, the manes," or 
 „the shades of the departed." To these stones they bring their 
 sacrifices; and we may often hear them saying: 'a ko trond am- 
 baki, „they go to cook for the dead," or „for the manes;" or: 
 trond o-krifi, „he cooks for the Krifi." 
 
 b) The immortal part of man they call: an'ump.il, pi. am'um- 
 pal, sometimes also: ey'iimpal. It jn-operly signifies „the shadow 
 
 *) See this word in the Vocab. behind.
 
 Preface. XI 
 
 of a person," or „of a tree, as caused by standing in tlie sun." 
 As applied to a person it is said to walk sometimes, hence 
 „departed spirit, soul," = the Gr. to nv^vf.icc. It is also used 
 of the shade of an animal slaughtered for sacrifice, which is said 
 to appear in the Hades in behalf of him, for whom the sacrifice 
 was made. They even apply it to the Deity. 
 
 In the whole they rather dread than revere these Kritis, and 
 try by sacrifices to keep them favourably disposed towards them, 
 so as not to be harmed by them. 
 
 Note. They do not apply the term Kriti to the spirit of man. 
 But from the cii'cumstance that the stones taken from the 
 graves of relatives are the representatives of the Krifis ; one 
 might be induced to believe that these Ki'ifis are their de- 
 ceased ancestors, deified, as it were, after their death, as 
 is the case with the Bassutos in South-Africa. 
 
 a) The Krifis are said to reside in the wood or bush, and 
 sometimes to make a noise before sun-rise, as if one were striking 
 a tin-pan. Some, they say, look like White men, some like the 
 Mori-men (Mohammedans), i. e. of a Mulatto complexion. They 
 assert that God made the Krifis, and that they are invisible; only 
 certain persons (as stated in the preceding section) can see them. 
 
 Sometimes, they say, a shine may be seen like the glimmer 
 of a lamp early in the moniing, which, they say, is the Krifi 
 when passing round the town. 
 
 b} „The diamond snake," or ..tlie devil snake," or ,.the 
 magic snake" called: an -yarn in Temne, they believe to be a 
 Krifi. They affirm that it is able to part the water in two, so 
 that a canoe cannot i)ass on. If a black man sees it, and is 
 able to give something to the snake, the man can get rich, for 
 this Krifi will give him plenty of rice, etc. This yaro is said to 
 come to people in the form of another person, to talk to them, 
 and to tell them: „How do you do?" If he comes to a house 
 at night to sleep with a person, no other person can come to 
 that house; the house, they say, is then very hot. There is a
 
 XII Preface. 
 
 little island on the other side of Port Loko, close to that part 
 of the town Port-Loko, which they call: Old Port Loko, where 
 the Krifis are said to beat drums, and to dance in the day-time ; 
 but no man can see them. 
 
 Many more such superstitious things might be stated of these 
 Krifis by the author; but those given above will suffice. 
 
 Note. As regards the sacrifices of those Temnes, who have 
 become Mori-men, or Mohammedans, and their belief that 
 the shadows of the victims go to the Hades, see „ Church 
 Missionary Record for June 1851, pag. 129." 
 
 § 14. 
 
 The Temnes firmly believe that by witchcraft a person may 
 turn himself into a leopard, or into an alligator in order to hurt 
 others in a secret manner. Yea, they affirm that such persons 
 may come at night to the house of another, rub against the door, 
 and imitate the voice of some person, and pretend to have some- 
 thing to say to the person in the house. But when the person 
 opens, it is a leopard, who then kills him. In the year 1854 
 they burned a man at Port-Loko, because he was charged with 
 having done such a thing. They tied his hands and feet together, 
 thrust a stick through them, and then suspended him over a fire, 
 and burned him to death. 
 
 In April 1850 one was burned at night quite secretly, about 
 which see „ Church Miss. Record fur June 1851, pag. 131." 
 
 § 15. 
 Charms or Amulets are also extensively used among the 
 Temnes, which, they say, are to protect them from evil. Some 
 are to protect the owner against rain; others against the ball of 
 a gun; again others against the stroke of a cutlass, etc. The 
 wearing of such charms seems to prevail much amoug the African 
 tribes. 
 
 § 16. 
 
 As the Temnes ascribe events, as they happen, generally 
 to chance or fortune; we cannot be surprised at meeting with
 
 Preface. XIII 
 
 many words in their language referring to this , such words as 
 convey the sense of „luck, fortune; good luck, bad luck; a good 
 krifi, or a bad krifi." Still we may now and then hear one say 
 at the death of a person: „God has called him away.-' 
 
 Another thing in the Temne language worthy of remark is 
 that many words occur referring to the cultivation of rice, which 
 shows that this is one of their principal articles of food among 
 them, and so it is. 
 
 § 17. 
 The Bondo-Institution among the Teranes called: am-bondo, 
 is a secret institution, where they practise female circumcision; 
 the oldest woman of the king is generally the headwoman of it, 
 whom they call „bom rigba." Every female before getting mar- 
 ried is to be initiated into it. The Temnes have received this 
 custom from the Kossos. A member of this institution is called 
 O-ko-bondo, pi. a-ko-bondo. *) 
 
 § 18. 
 
 a) The Porro Association is a secret society called: am- 
 p(5ro, and a member of it is called: o-ko-poro, pi. a-ko-poro.*) 
 It is for men only, and exists chiefly on the Rokel. AH the 
 members of it are tattooed on their nape. It is chiefly of a 
 political nature, and they assume a great deal of power, and 
 are very violent, especially when oiiended by one not initiated 
 into their society, upon whom they look as unclean, calling him : 
 o-gborka, which signifies „any one not initiated into the great 
 institutions of the country," or „one ceremoniously unclean." 
 Thus a woman not initiated into the Bondo institution is called 
 by that name. The Pgrros will demand satisfaction for all what 
 they may call an offence done to them. 
 
 b) They frequently excommunicate persons by tixing a Gree- 
 gree called: a-poro at their yard, or at their farms, consisting 
 of a stick, at the toj) of which they tie some leaves or grass, 
 
 *) For an analysis of these forms see the Temne Crammar § 23.
 
 XIV Preface. 
 
 and by which they prevent the respective person from leaving 
 his yard, or from touching any thing in his farm, and tlms cut 
 him off from all communication with others. Thus they may say: 
 'a raf ri a-poro, „they fixed there a porro," or „they fixed a 
 pgrro greegree," or „the sign of excommunication there;" — 'a 
 rafar-ko am-poro, „they excommunicated him," lit. ,.they fixed 
 the porrg greegree for him." 
 
 Note. The author was once an eyewitness of the violent cha- 
 racter of these people. Already their look indicates their 
 character. "When the author went once down the Rokel to 
 Sierra Leone, he was obliged to stay at some little town 
 on shore to wait for the tide. One of his boat-crew hap- 
 pened to spit on the foot of such a porro man, not inten- 
 tioially but accidentally. The porro man immediately asked 
 for a satisfaction on account of this offence; and as the 
 Liberated African had nothing to give him, he took away 
 the iron pot in which they cooked their food on shore. 
 To regain the pot the author gave his man some heads of 
 tobacco to redeem the pot with it. It would have been of 
 no use for the author to speak to this saucy person, and 
 the simplest way of settling the matter was to give the 
 desired satisfaction; especially under the circumstances in 
 which he and his crew were then placed. 
 
 § 19. 
 
 a) With regard to the Traditions there are sometimes various 
 readings, which have been given at the bottom of the page. This 
 is also the case with some of the Fables. 
 
 b) As regards the Fables some of them seem to be intended 
 to convey a moral precept ; others to state the occasion, on which 
 an animal assumed its present form, and again others the reason 
 why some animal lives at such and such a place. (Cf. also what 
 has been stated under a, with regard to various readings.) 
 
 § 20. 
 
 Though Proverbs collected from the Natives are in some 
 respects of great use for the acquisition of the language; yet
 
 Preface. XV 
 
 they will not always enable the student to form general rules for 
 the construction of the language; because with Proverbs the con- 
 struction is often very peculiar, and the expressions so concise; 
 as would not be tolerated in common language or conversation; 
 and as regards the collection of materials for a Grammar, Fables 
 and Stories are far more preferable for this purjiose. 
 
 This observation applies at least to nio-t of the Temne 
 Proverbs, and may probably applj' also to those of other African 
 languages. 
 
 § 21. 
 
 With regard to the Temne Addresses in P. IT. Chapt. II. 
 the;\' are expressed in plaiii Temne, the same truth being some- 
 times imparted in dift'orent ways; as ma\ be expected, and ;is 
 was necessary with such an audience as that one was to which 
 they were delivered. 
 
 § 22. 
 
 a) The Vocabulary has been adapted to the Contents of this 
 book only, and those words only (with a few exceptions) have 
 been inserted, w'hicli occur in this publication. The original sense 
 of each word has been given; but not all the other senses de- 
 rived from it. It may be observed here, that what we have 
 called relative verbs, whose suffix is -na, or -a, generally govern 
 two, and sometimes even three Accusatives; one uf which some- 
 times expresses the object in whose behalf, or in whose favour 
 or disfavour the energy of the verb is exercised; and sometimes 
 the instrument bv which the action, indicated bv the verb, is 
 performed; and sometimes the material of which a thing is made. 
 Another class of rel. verbs have the suff. -ar, or -r, which ex- 
 presses various prepositions. As regards verbal nouns witli tlie 
 prefix ka-, see the observation under this prefix in tlie Voca- 
 bulary. 
 
 b) In order to m;ike the Vocabulary more intelligible to the 
 reader, it may be well to notice here in short, what has been 
 stated in the Gronunar mor(^ fully, that the Prefix, which is
 
 XVI Preface. 
 
 prefixed to nouns, might also be called the Article; that it as- 
 sumes various forms, and that it has an indef. as well as a dof. 
 form in both numbers. Most of them are made def. by the vowel 
 prefix a-, and a few by e-, and some by o-, which vowels see in 
 the Vocab in their respective places. But the emph. vowel prefix 
 is sometimes dropped, especially at the beginning of a proposi- 
 tion, or when the connection sufficiently shows that the def. state 
 is intended. It must also be borne in mind, that the prefix, at 
 least as regards the one used with inanimate or neuter nouns, 
 always influences the form of the poss. preposition, and that of 
 all the various pronouns, as of the rel., — dem., — poss., — etc. 
 With animate nouns this is less the case. 
 
 Note 1. The various Forms or Conjugations of the Temne 
 verb are but sparingly represented in the Traditions, Fables 
 and Proverbs; though there is a great variety of them. 
 Note 2. As the Author's Temne Grammar has not yet been 
 published, he has thought himself justified in giving a more 
 copious explanation of certain words in the Vocabulary than 
 he would have done otherwise, in order to make it more 
 useful and intelligible to the reader. 
 Note 3. The author does not think that any word, occurring 
 in the Traditions, Fables etc., has been omitted in the Vo- 
 cabulary; nor is he aware that any word, occurring in the 
 examples of the V^ocabulary itself has been left out; though 
 it is possible that a few may have escaped his notice.*,) 
 
 May the following pages serve, in some measure at least, 
 to promote the spread of Christ's Kingdom in benighted Africa; 
 so that the dark places of this great Continent also may soon 
 become enlightened with the glorious Gospel of Truth! 
 
 C. F. Schlenker. 
 
 Kirchhoim n. Teck, Wurtteniberg , October 15. 1861. 
 
 *) A feAV words omitted in the Yoralmlary will he found under the 
 »A(ldpnda« behind.
 
 XVII 
 
 Pronomiciation of Letters. 
 
 As not every reader of the following pages may have at 
 hand the Standard Aljjhabet of Professor Lepsius of Berlin, ac- 
 cording to which the Traditions, etc., contained in the following 
 pages, as also the Grammar, are written; we subjoin here, for 
 the convenience of the reader, a table representing the sounds 
 
 used in the Temne language 
 
 
 
 
 1. Vowels. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Primary and intermediate vowels 
 
 a 
 
 sounds 
 
 like 
 
 a in — father. 
 
 5 
 
 51 
 
 55 
 
 the ger. a in — Mann. 
 
 e 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 the ger. e in — legen. 
 
 e 
 
 >5 
 
 55 
 
 the ger. e in — wenu. 
 
 e 
 
 51 
 
 55 
 
 the ger. A in — Biir. 
 
 e 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 a in — happv, fat. 
 
 I 
 
 »5 
 
 55 
 
 ee in — see. 
 
 T 
 
 5» 
 
 55 
 
 i in — sin. 
 
 o 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 in — no, home. 
 
 o 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 the ger. o in — von, woUen. 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 a in — all, water. 
 
 Q 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 in — hot, not. 
 
 u 
 
 55 
 
 5) 
 
 u in — rule. 
 
 u 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 00 iu — '■ foot. 
 
 I); Imperfei't voAvel sounds. 
 
 a This is the only one used in Temne, and is a short deep 
 pectoral sound. As to its power it comes nearest to the 
 u iu — but, or in — tub. See Tem. Gram. § IG, l.b. 
 
 b
 
 XVIII Pronounciation of Letters. 
 
 c) Diphthongs. 
 
 ai sounds like the ger. ai in — Kaiser, or like the engl. i in — 
 
 mine, 
 au „ „ ou in — house, or like the ger. au in — Haus. 
 ei „ „ the ger. ei in — leiden, or like the engl. cv in — 
 
 eye. 
 oi „ „ the gr. oi in — xoivog, as pronounced on the Con- 
 tinent, 
 oi „ „ oi in — oil, join. 
 
 ui „ „ the lat. ui in — fui, as pronounced on the Conti- 
 nent; or somewhat like the engl. ui in congruity, if it 
 would he pronounced like a diphthong, 
 ai Both vowels have tlieir proper sound; but are so contracted 
 in pronouncing them as to form a short diphthong. 
 
 2. Consonants. 
 
 a) Simple. 
 
 The letters b, d, f, k, I, m, n, p, r, s, t, have the usual english 
 
 sounds. 
 g like g in — gold. 
 h „ h in — horse. 
 
 n „ ng in — king, or like the ger. ng in — Gesang. 
 s „ sh in — sh(5w, 
 >v „ w in — we, waft. 
 y „ y in ~ year. 
 
 b) Compound. 
 
 Of these there are only two, viz — 
 gb and is. The latter sounds like ch in — church. 
 
 Note 1. Whenever the forms mm, fin, and rr are met with 
 at the end of a word, which is the case with some adverbs, 
 the voice dwells upon them , not on the vowel preceding 
 them, on which account these consonants have been doubled. 
 E. g. t;imm, „very". 
 
 Note 2. Long vowels are marked as usually by ("), as: a, 
 e, etc. Though the short vowels have been marked in the
 
 Pronounciatic^n of Letters. XIX 
 
 preceding table bv the usual sign (") to show their cor- 
 responding sound in other languages; vet for brevity's sake 
 this mark will be left awav in the following pages. It is, 
 therefore, to be borne in mind, that evorv vowel not having 
 the mark of a long one, is short. 
 
 Note 3. Long diphthongs have the usual sign of length placed 
 on the second vowel, thus : ai. When the;^ receive the accent, 
 it is alwavs placed on the last of the two vowels, e. g. atrei. 
 
 Note 4. Extreme length of vow^els has been marked by doub- 
 ling them with the usual mark of length, and when receiving 
 an accent, it is placed on the first of them; e, g. tralil. 
 Diphthongs pronounced very long have been marked in the 
 same way, that is by doubling them, as: lauafi. 
 
 Note 5. If two vowels standing together are to be sounded 
 distinctly or separately, the usual mark of diaeresis has been 
 employed, as: a-rei, „a day." * 
 
 Note 6. If r follows t, and is to be pronounced together 
 with t, as is often the case both at the beginning and at 
 the end of a word; the r is pronounced rather faint, much 
 like tr in „true" or in „truth". 
 
 Note 7. The accented syllable is indicated by the accute 
 accent; e. g. falir. If a word has two accents the stronger 
 one is marked by a double accent; e g. K'urumasaba. 
 
 b*
 
 XX 
 
 Contents. 
 
 Part I. p,g,. 
 
 Collection of Teiune Traditions, Fables and 
 Proverbs. 
 
 Chapter I. Traditions about the ancient Heroes of the 
 
 Temnes 1 — 13 
 
 Chapter II. Traditions respecting the Creation of the 
 
 "World and of the first Men . . . 13—35 
 Chapter III. Traditions concerning the State of Man 
 
 after Death 1. and 2 . . . . 35—41 
 Chapter IV. Fables. 
 
 Fable I. The Iguana and the Dog . . . 41 — 45 
 > II. The Spider, and the Ant- Eater and Mr. 
 
 Tamba 45—57 
 
 » III. The Child and the Bird .... 57—61 
 » IV. The Elephant and the Goat . . . 61—67 
 » V. The Spider, and the Bushgoat, and the 
 Deer, and the Antelope, and the Bush- 
 cow, and the Fillentamba . . . 67 — 73 
 » VI. The Spider, and the Bushgoat, and the 
 
 Ant-Eater, and the Leopard . . 73—87 
 
 » VII. The King, and his Daughter, and Mr. Tamba 87— 97 
 
 Chapter V. Proverbs 98—101 
 
 Part II. 
 
 Specimens of the Author's own Temne 
 Compositions and Translations. 
 
 Chapter I. Colloquial Phrases. 
 
 1. Salutations 105—110 
 
 2. OfAVorsbip . . 110-112
 
 Couteuts. 
 
 XXI 
 
 Temnes. 
 
 3. Of the School 
 
 4. Of the House . . 
 
 5. Of Eating sncl Drinkiug 
 
 Chapter II. Addresses delivered to the 
 1. On John 14, (J. . . . 
 2- On 2 Cor. 5, 10. 20. . 
 
 3. Ou Jude V. 14. 15. 
 
 4. On Luke 10. 10-lG. . 
 
 Chapter III. The ten Comniandmcnts 
 
 Chapter IV. Translation of some Psalms 
 
 Psahn I 
 
 , XXIII 
 
 p CXXVI. .... 
 
 Chapter V. Hymns , . . . 
 
 Chapter YI. The Lord's Prayer 
 
 Part III. 
 
 Temiie English Vocabulary 
 
 rage. 
 
 112-113 
 113—114 
 114—115 
 
 115—119 
 119-123 
 123—127 
 127—131 
 
 132—133 
 
 133 
 
 134 
 
 134-135 
 
 136-138 
 
 138 
 
 139—298
 
 XXII 
 
 Corrigenda et Addenda. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Corrig 
 
 en da. 
 
 
 Page. 
 
 Line 
 
 
 
 
 For 
 
 Read 
 
 15, 
 
 9 
 
 
 from 
 
 top, 
 
 ake 
 
 take. 
 
 24, 
 
 11 
 
 
 It 
 
 11 
 
 me e-siima 
 
 mo e-suma. 
 
 37, 
 
 4 
 
 
 from 
 
 bottom, 
 
 returnes 
 
 returns. 
 
 105, 
 
 10 
 
 
 5i 
 
 „ Nothing but trouble! 
 
 Nothing at all ! 
 
 107, 
 
 1 
 
 
 55 
 
 11 
 
 yefa-i? 
 
 yefa-e ? 
 
 107, 
 
 5 and 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 T) 
 
 sen 
 
 sen'. 
 
 108, 
 
 5 
 
 
 from 
 
 top, 
 
 sen-e 
 
 sene. 
 
 110, 
 
 4. 5 and 8 
 
 from 
 
 bottom, 
 
 sen n;»n 
 
 sen' nan. 
 
 146, 
 
 11 
 
 
 11 
 
 „ a 
 
 rope and rope 
 
 a rope. 
 
 247, 
 
 13 
 
 
 15 
 
 11 
 
 2. Adde 
 
 so, V. n. 
 n d a. 
 
 so, V. a. 
 
 Page. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 105. 
 
 Line 2 
 
 frr 
 
 )m bottom, after: 
 
 „Thou, how ar 
 
 t thou?" add: 
 
 or ,,Thou, Avhat news?" 
 107. Line 1 from bottom road: 
 
 re ma yefa-e? or ) 
 
 ro ma yefa-e? ' 
 168. Fil, V. a. „turn round" (as a sling '; „move" or „turn to 
 
 and fro; swing to and fro" (as a hammock); e.g. tse 
 
 fil ow'ahtjt, „do not turn the child to and fro." 
 179. I, pr. subj. „I"; e. g. I pon ama-pant, „I have done with 
 
 the work." 
 „ I-, pref. indef. „a, an;" its pi. form is always ma-, never e-- 
 
 E. g. i-ydri, „a cat." 
 228. P'in, adj. num. „one kind, one sort;" e.g. pa-la p'in, „one 
 
 sort of rice."
 
 Part I. 
 
 A Collection 
 
 of 
 
 Temne Traditions Fables and Proverbs. 
 
 Temue - Sageu.
 
 — 2 — 
 
 Ara-bomp T. 
 
 Ma-Kane ma-kur traka an-Kelfa a-baki na an-Temne. 
 
 Be Farma o yefa ro-toron, o won ri, o }'i o-kelfa o-b^na. 
 Pa t^si tra-komra tr'eme tra-sas mo o \i tapan. 
 
 o o -~o --I/O* 
 
 An-Io na-tsi an-Temne') na ba he a-pinkar, na bahe a-gbato; 
 ria ba sbo tr'antr, de e-sor, de e-bantra, de ma-seno, de e-boka, 
 de e-lis traka Isim. dim an-tof be. yoka ra-kelfa ro- 
 tdrgn, o tsim an-tof a-torgn, o poii-ni. Kgno mot solo a-kala, 
 de e-pinkar, de p'olpala, de e-gbato, de v'etr e-tsima be. 
 won ro-toron, o tor he lemp ro-Bake Loko. ^; dif a-Limba, 
 de tila-na; o won ri; o dif a-Loko, ko o dim ri tamm. ^) 
 O der ka an-tgf na an-Temne, g yira ro-Belia.*) 
 
 Kg g tsim Be Yare, gwg gbiike, kg g wgn ro-m'antr de 
 afi-wut-n'gn be, de an-kala-iVgn be, de apa-la-p'gn be, de e-sem- 
 y'gn e-trgl be; kg Be Farma g tsia g yira ri; kg g wur, g tsim 
 an-tgf na an-Temne be, g pon-ni. Kg g bal am-Baka, ana yi 
 ro-Bake Lgkg tapan, ha lor ro-bil, ha kgne ro-pil; de am-Marun, 
 de ah-fam be ha ebuke; ko o bal am-B6Iam de ah-Kwea, ha 
 yefa ro-Bake Lgkg; g poh bal ro-Kel be, ka ha be ha gbiike. 
 
 1) See the Preface § 2. 
 
 2) See about the name of this town Preface § 4. c. 
 
 3) Lit. „he destroyed there entirely", i. e. he dispeopled 
 the country so much that it became almost a desert. 
 
 4) A river in the Lgkg country. A town lying near it was 
 called „Yare".
 
 3 — 
 
 Chapter I. 
 
 Traditions about the aiicieut Heroes of the Temnes. 
 
 Bev Fanna came from the East, \\here he was for a long 
 time; he was a great warrior. iMore than three hundred genera- 
 tions have passed away since he Hved. 
 
 At that time the Temnes had no gun, and no cutlass; they 
 had only sticks, and spears, and bows, and arrows, and bill- 
 hooks, and knives to fight with. He destroyed the whole country. 
 He took upon him the office of a captain of the array in the 
 East, and waged war against the East-country, and went all over 
 it. He was the first who got money, and guns, and gunpowder, 
 and cutlasses, and all sorts of arms. He stayed a long time in 
 the East, and did not siraightways come down to Port-Loko. 
 He killed Limbas, and sold (some of) them; he was long there;') 
 he killed Lokos, and he destroyed it (country) entirely. He 
 came into the Temne country, and lived at Bella, 
 
 Then he fought against Bey Yare, who ran,^) and went into 
 the water with all his children, and with all his property, with 
 all his rice, and with all his cattle; and Bey Farma remained 
 and lived there; then he went forth, and waged war against all 
 the Temne country, and went all over it. He expelled the Bakas, 
 who where formerly at Port-Loko, and who went down the river 
 in canoes toward the \Yest;^) and the Maruns,*) and all the 
 people fled; he also expelled the Boloms and the Queas, and 
 they came away from Port-Loko; he entirely expelled (the people) 
 on the whole of the Rokel, and thev all fled. 
 
 1) That is in the Limba country, 
 
 2) Or „fled". 
 
 3) See what is stated about this people in the Preface § 4. d. 
 
 4) By this name the Settlers were called, who first settled 
 at Sierra Leoue. 
 
 1*
 
 — 4 — 
 
 Ko yira ka an-lof na Kwea, o t.sim he so; o fi, ko pa 
 tsia ton, I'la tsiin fo so. Kon' o trori a-fam ka-tsim; ka-tsim 
 ka yi ho Ulpaii. Be Farma o tora am-bantra. ') Farma Tami 
 sek o-p6lo,^j ko fal; o sek o-bal,^) o ko fal, mo o lasi-ko. 
 Tr'ei tra yi he .=o, ko pa won 'a tMin fe so (or: ko pa won 
 ka 'a mota l^im). Ko pa won ka ka-l.sim ka ma der, ha Pa 
 Korombo o yokane o-kelfa; o dim an-tof a-temne be, o tsini 
 ha bek no-Bake Loko. tsim he no-Bake Loko, o tila gbo 
 ka am-p6to. Mo o pal ka-der no-Bake Loko, ka-petr*) aka o dira, 
 yif a-fet a-runi;. o yoka-fia, o kara-na, o re tila. Mo o bap 
 o-komra, o kori o-komra, o wura tr'ola de ma-ber, o son o- 
 komra, o pa ho: „Be ow'an-ka-mu o beka am'olo, I tsi tila- 
 ko." wura a-pinkar, o sQii-ni ka o-runi. Na gbali he dif-ko; 
 'a trap-ko, an-gbato na won fe; 'a siitara-ko a-pinkar, ama-pilor 
 ma wop he ko; o gbali faHr. Be o der ra-pelr, o lonkla ari- 
 fam, tit-iia, o tila-na. An-gbato-n'on iia yi k'ong. 
 
 Korombo o natr, o dim Ira-petr tramal ro kin, ko o pa ho: 
 „I tsim fe so." 0-keifa ka Korombo, Ya Fura, o Irama kadi, 
 ko trap aka-tsim; ko o gbip a-fam, o dif a-fam tankan. An- 
 tof a-tdron na tonkla r'ilfa ra-bana, 'a re gban-ko ka as'on be, 
 ka ar'afa ra trap ka-tsim ro-toron. 
 
 Korombo Fiinti kono yi o-kelfa o-baki, ka 'a tsim an- 
 
 1) Lit. „B. F. brought down the bow", which phrase is 
 equivalent to: „B. F. b. d. the war." They assert that there 
 was no rainbow before his time, and that none was seen till he 
 came; for which reason they call the rain-bow to this very day: 
 am-bautra na Farma, „Farma's bow;" or also: am-b. na k'uru, 
 
 O III 
 
 „the bow of heaven." 
 
 2) The Singular for the Plural.
 
 — 5 — 
 
 Then he sellled in (he Qiiea country, and did no! wage 
 war again; he died, and it remained so then, thcv did not fight 
 again. He taught people the art of war; there was no war be- 
 fore. Bey Farma was the first who waged war. Farina the 
 Conquerer tied white men (Europeans), and went and cut their 
 throat; he tied kings, and went and cut their throat; because 
 he was superior to them. There was no matter again, and for 
 a long time they did not fight again, (or: and it was long be- 
 fore they warred again). It was long before war was coming, 
 till Mr. Korombo rose up as a warrior; he destroyed the whole 
 Temne country, he fought till he reached here to Port-Loko. ') 
 Here at Port Loko he did not fight, he only traded with 
 the Europeans. When he was ready to come here to Port 
 Loko, at the towns, where he slept, he asked for boys; he 
 took them and brought them, and went Jind sold them. When 
 he met with a woman in childbed, he saluted (or: went to see) 
 the woman in childbed; he took on! cloths and palmwine (or: 
 liquor), and gave (them) to the woman, and said: „When thy 
 child is worth the amount, 1 shall sell it." He took out a gun, 
 and gave it to the husband. They were not able to kill him; 
 they chopped him, (but) the cutlas did not enter (his bod_^); 
 they shot at him with a gun, (but) the balls did not hit him; 
 and he was able to fly. When he came to a town, he assembled 
 the people, selected (a number of) them, and sold them. His 
 sword was a turkish sabre. 
 
 Korombo went up the country, and destroyed six towns; 
 then he said: „I do not fight agnin." An officer of Korombo, 
 Ya Fura, he placed himself at the head, he went and began 
 the war; he caught people, and killed many of Ib.em. The East- 
 country collected a large army, they went and prevented') him 
 in all the roads, and the army began war in the F]ast. 
 
 Korombo Funti was an old captain, and ti ev invaded the 
 
 1) It is to be borne in mind that the speaker lived at Port 
 Loko, and that it was written there. 
 
 2) Or: „ way-laid him etc."
 
 _ 6 ~ 
 
 tof a-temne bo; ka 'a ko tsim an-lof a-loko be, ka 'a pon iii dim, 
 ha w'riiii k'in o tsia be ri. Ka 'a kone ka an-tof a-limba, 'a 
 tsim ri so, ka 'a poii-'i; ka 'a pon dim Ira-lof tramat ro iVaiile. 
 An-tof ana beka trofatr-c, Ya Fura o pa ho: „I kone, ar'afa- 
 ra-mi ra lasar." Korombo o pa ronon: „Tse ko;" kere o kone, 
 tsia Korombo o-k'olfa o-baki; ko o ko tsim an-tgf ana beka 
 trofAtr, dim-ni. Ana beka trofatr iVin-e o ko tsim ri, o bek 
 ratrdn. Ka afi-fam, ana o pon bal ka tra-tof tramat ro kin, na 
 kal, lia der na mjinkne Ya Fiira; kere kdno Ir'a he tsi. R'afa 
 
 ' - 7----- o 
 
 ra-bana ra der tsim-ko, na bal-ko; o der yira ratrdn; na der 
 tsim-ko ri, kere na gbali he. Ko o som o-kelfa o-lom ka Ko- 
 rombo traka kane-ko ho: ,,'A tsim-mi, der mar-mi." Kere o- 
 kelfa, owd som, o bap ro-r'on aii-fam, ana mankne Ya Fiira, 
 ka 'a tsim-ko ma-rei tramat ro kin. Kg o-kelfa o-baki o kalane 
 ka Ya Fiira; kere ari-fam-n'oii na kdne ka Korombo, na k^ne- 
 ko ho: ,,'A pon-su ro-r'oii." De o-kelfa o-baki o kg kane so 
 Ya Fiira ho: „Na poii-su ro-r'oii." Ma Ya Fiira g tral atse, 
 g yokane de ar'afa-r'oii be, lia der tsim ro-r'oii y'of ye-ran, 
 kg g fgl-he-tas. Kg Korombo g yefa ro-pil, g der gbaii's Ya 
 Fiira ro-r'on traka mar-ko tra tsim. Ya Fiira ar'afa-r'gii ra yi 
 k'eme k'in; lia bek sg ka-pelr ka-lgm, ka aii-fam na ka-petr na 
 dim-iia. Ka ar'afa, ara yi roraran-e, ra laT, na re las be, ka na 
 sek aii-fam be, na fgl e-set-'e-naii; kere ana 'a gbip, na dif he na. 
 Ka lia der bap sg ka-petr ka-lgm; ana ma trama rodi, lia pon iiadif
 
 — 7 — 
 
 whole Temne country; Ihcn ihey went and invaded the whole 
 Loko country, and destroyed it entirely, so that not one person 
 was left there. Then they went into the Limba country, and 
 invaded it also, and destroyed it; and they destroyed nine coun- 
 tries entirely. Respecting the tenth country, Ya Fura said: „I go, 
 my army is complete." Korombo said to him: „Uo not go;" 
 but he went, and left to Korombo an old captain; then he went 
 and invaded the tenth country, and destroyed it. With regard 
 to the eleventh he went and invaded it, and reached the middle 
 (of it). And the people, whom he had expelled from six coun- 
 tries, returned, they came and way-laid Ya Fura; but he did 
 not know it. A large army came to fight against him, they 
 drove him away; he came and sal down between (them); they 
 came to fight wiih him there, but did not succeed. And he 
 sent some officer to Korombo lo tell him: „They fight against 
 me, come and help me." But the officer, whom he sent, met 
 in the road with the people, who way-laid Ya Fura, and for six 
 days they fought with him. Then the old officer returned to 
 Ya Fura; but his people went to Korombo. and said to him: 
 „They have destroyed*) us in the road." And the old officer 
 went and told also Ya Fura: „They have destroyed us in the 
 road." When Ya Fura heard this. lie rose up and all his army, 
 they came and fought in the road two months, and it was not 
 easy to pass. And Korombo departed from the West, and came 
 to meet Ya Fura in the road, and to help him lo fight. As to 
 Ya Fura's army it amounted to one hundred (men); they arrived 
 again at another town, and the people of the town destroyed 
 Ihem. And the army, which formed the rear,^) was numerous, 
 they came and passed all along, and they tied all the people, 
 and burned their houses; but they whom Ihey look prisoners, 
 they did not kill them. And Ihey came and met again another 
 town; as to those who were in advance,^) they entirely killed them 
 
 1) Or: ^routed." 
 
 2) Lit. „ which was behind". 
 
 3) The avant-guard.
 
 — 8 — 
 
 be; kere a-Iai na bek so, na Isim, ka ha dif an-fam, ria tas. 
 Na der so bap ka-petr ka-loin, ka aha traina rodi, ha yi 
 tr'eme tra-rah, ha dim-ha so be; kere ar'afa ra-lal ronirah 
 
 oo' ' ~ " o o 
 
 ra bek, ha tsim ah-fam, ha dif-ha, ka ha tas. Ma ha ko 
 bap so ka-petr ka-lom, Ya Fura o pa ho: „Mah gbah'sane ka- 
 petr." Ka ha gbah'sane ka-petr ka-tsi, 'a tsim ri ma-rei tramat 
 ro kin; ka 'a pen dif ar'afa ra Ya Fura, ha tsia gbo a-tan. Ma 
 ha der kane ar'afa, aha mahkne Ya Fura ho: „Kor6mbo o bek!" 
 ha gbuke; ka Ya Fura o toT ri be, o tas, o ko bap Korombo. 
 Korombo o kane-ko ho: „Mah kalane; I kane-mu tapah: tse ko. 
 Ma nahk ma ha poh dif ah-wut ha ah-fam-i?" Ka ha kalane 
 so. Aha poh ko kahka Ya Fura, ha tra poh ko na wop, mg 
 Korombo o bek, o der bal ah-fam. Ya Fura, mo o kal-e, o der 
 gbo yira ha o fi; w'uni o dif he ko. Kere atra-petr-tr'gh be 
 w'an duni o yi he ri so, a-fet gbo de a-bom; a-lahba ha yi he ri, 
 ha poh ha dif ro-toroh. Kg Korombo g kal botr a-hihba ri be ka 
 Ira-petr tra-tsi be, kg g tsia sg o-kelfa g-bana son; g tam ah-fam 
 ka 'ra-ra be, am-p6to 6 am-bi 6 be. Ka ka-lapsg ha dif ko. 
 
 Korombo, mg g tam a-fam be, tsiah ha botra-kg yahfa 
 traka memar ko dif. Ka ha soh-ko a-bera a-ebati; 'a kane am- 
 bera ha-tsi, ma ha ma ru-kg ah-fon-e, kama ha kara ah-fon- 
 h'gh. Am-butu, ro g mg botr ara-bomp-r'gh, mg g fanta, ah-lg 
 ha ma kg yak-e, am'anir ama 'a wek, ha botr am'antr ma-tsi ka
 
 — 9 ~ 
 
 all; but many arrived again, and they fought, and killed the 
 people, and passed on. They came and met again another town, 
 and those who were in advance,') amounted to two hundred 
 (men), and they destroyed the whole of them also; but the gross 
 of the army (which was) behind^) arrived, they fought against 
 the people, and killed them, and then passed on. When they 
 went anfl met again another town, Ya Fura said: „Let us sur- 
 round the town." And they surrounded that town, and fought 
 there six days, and they entirely killed the army of Ya Fura, 
 only few were left. When they came and told the army, which 
 way-laid Ya Fura; „Korombo has arrived!" tiiey fled; then Ya 
 Fura burned the whole place, and passed on, and went to meet 
 Korombo. Korombo said to him: „Let us return; I told thee 
 before: do not go. Doest thou see how they have killed the 
 children of the people?" And they returned again. As to those, 
 who had gone and enclosed Ya Fura on all sides, they would 
 have apprehended him, if Korombo had not arrived, who came 
 and drove away the people. As to Ya Fura, when he returned, 
 he just came and settled in a place till he died; nobody killed 
 him. But as regards all his towns there was no youth again, 
 (but) only children and women; young men were not there, they 
 had killed them all in the Fast. And Korombo located again 
 young men every where in all those towns, and he was left the 
 only great warrior again; he vanquished the people in the whole 
 world, both all the white and the black men. At last they kil- 
 led him. 
 
 As to Korombo, because he conquered all people, therefore 
 they acted deceitfully against him in order to try to kill him. 
 They gave him many women, and told those women (that) when 
 they were plaiting his hair, they might bring his hair. As for 
 the pillow, whereon he was putting his head, wlien he lay down 
 (they told them), that when they were going to wash (it), the 
 water which they wring out, they should put that water into 
 
 1) The avant-guard. 
 
 2) That is, the rear!
 
 — 10 — 
 
 a-bilra, iia kero-iia ka am -Mori. Mo o gbak e-sanlrak, o pa 
 ka am-bcra: „Ko fita-mi-yi." Ka na yoka iia kere-yi ka an-fam, 
 ana ten-ko ara-bomp-e. Ma iia kane-ko ho: „Man kone gban- 
 ne;" iia ko gbo ka aii-gbanne lia-l.si. Ko Korombo o ba r'afa 
 ra-Lana; koro ar'afa-r'oii o ba, na poii kg woii yaiifa. Na tonlo 
 Korombo, k;ima o tier Iraka dif-ko; kore kono tr'a he Lsi Ka 
 am-bal iia ten r'afa ra-bana; iia poii kone tralrak ro ka Korombo. 
 Mo der gbanne-iia, ar'afa ra gbalrg ro-kant be; a-bal tramat 
 ro kin iia der yira ka k'antr k'in. 0-baT, owg yi gw'uni-k'gfi 
 gben, g yira ka ak'antr. Mg Korombo g bek, iia kiilg, iia liii- 
 kg, g yfra ka ka-troii ka a-bal na-raii, iia tra kiilo: Korombo 
 g tra kiilg. Na yif-kg hg: „\V'an-ka-sn, ko Ir'eT ira ma poii- 
 su-e?" Kg gwg liii-kg, g botr-kg ka e-laiik-y'gii, g tra kiilg. 
 0-baT g-lgm o noT-ko, o bolr-ko ka e-huik-v'oii. Korombo o 
 lakte, g fanta ka e-laiik ya g-bal, gwg ba a-balma. Kg g-baT 
 ka-tsi g wiira am-balma, g rgk-kg ka ka-lim, g fal-kg; am-bai 
 a-lgm be iia glnike, iia wgii ro-kan!. Korombo g yokane, g pa 
 hg: „Man tsim nmi!-' Kg g dif a-kelfa Irgfatr. Mg g kal botr 
 aii-gbatg-n'gn ka am-bom-iia-lsi, o fiimpg, kg g fi. 
 
 Ar'elr ra gbepar gbeii, kg g fiimpg; ka ma as'etr ra mgtra, 
 iia naiik fe ri so, ha pa beka ma-rei' tramat ro kin. Ana beka 
 ma-rei Iramat de ran, ma ar'etr ra gbepar 'ra-bomp ratrgii, ka 
 ha mgt ri naiik. Kere Korombo, iia poii kg dif; kere g tra 
 gbalap; ha na maiik-kg g tra gbalap. Ka aii-gbatg-ii'gh, w'lini 
 6 w'dni g gbali he hi wiira ka am-bom; ta gw'an-k'gh, kgng der
 
 — 11 — 
 
 a bottle, ') and carr;/ it lo Ihe iMori-men. When he cul Ihe nails, 
 he said to the women: ,.Go and throw them^) away for me." 
 And they took (them), and carried them to the people, who 
 sought his life.^) When they said to him: „Let us go and meet 
 together;" they just went to fh:it meeting. And Korombo had 
 a large army; but his army which he had, had entered into a 
 conspiracy against him They coaxed Korombo, that he might 
 come in order to kill him; but he did not know it. And the 
 kings raised a large army; they had gone to Korombo's place 
 at night. When lie came lo meet them, the army was all 
 around the wood (where they met); six kings came and sat 
 upon one log of limber. A king, who was of his own family, 
 sat upon the log. When Korombo came, they cried, they drew 
 him close, and he r-at between two kings, they were crying; 
 Korombo was crying. They asked him: „Friend,*) why hast 
 thou destroyed us?" And he who had drawn him close, put 
 him upon his lap, and was crying. Another king took him, and 
 put him upon his lap. Korombo looked up, he lay in the lap 
 of a king, who had a dagger. Then tha! king took out the 
 dagger, cut him into the neck, and cut his throat; all the other 
 kings fled, and went into the wood. Korombo got up and said: 
 „Let us fight togother!" And he killed ten captains. When he 
 had put the cutlass again into its sheath, he fell down and died. 
 The sun had just reached the Meridian, when he fell down; 
 and when the sun set, they did not see it again, for the space 
 of six days. On the seventh day, when the sun reached the 
 Meridian, then only they saw it. But as regards Knrombo, they 
 had killed him; but he was (still) twinkling with the eyes; till 
 they buried him he was twinkling with the eyes. As to his 
 sword, nobody was able to unsheath it; except his son, became 
 
 1) That is: ,thcy should put the water, which they wrinj 
 out, into a bottle etc.' 
 
 2) That is ,the cuttings of them'. 
 
 3) Lit.: „wlio sought his head." 
 
 4) Lit. „Our friend etc."
 
 — 12 — 
 
 wura-iii. Mo o pon fi, w'lini 6 w'Qiii o yoka ra-kelfa, ka 
 na tsim. 
 
 Ka-lsim ka pon tabjina, pa tdf'la ka an-lof a-temne be;*) 
 'a tsela am-p6lo, 'a der gbanne. Ka am-bal 6, am-p6to 6, na 
 fnf d'im r'in, na pa ho: „Tr' 'a tse yo so r'afa ra-bana, tambe 
 r'afa Ira-gba tra-ran, do Ira-gba Ira-sas gbo; pa pen. Be w'lini 
 yo r'afa tra-gba Ir'anle, o fumpg k'asi, tr' o ram; pakasifo o 
 jema lasar an-tof. Yo Koronibo o ;>o tapaji, o lasar an-lof. 
 
 Ara-I)oinp 11. 
 
 Ma-Kane ma au-Terane ma-kur traka ka-Trapi ara-Ru 
 de an-Fani a-trdtroko. 
 
 An-kas-'a-su na kane he su o-lai tnika ka-bempa 'ra-ru, na 
 kane-su gbo fo^) mo K'liru o bempa ara-rfl-e, o ren'-ri ka 'ra- 
 bomp ra w'tini bana,^) owg vi rorata. Ow'uni owe kong sara 
 ara-ru. Na kane-sn fg e^'intr be, de ak'erch be, de ey'etr be, 
 eye Igkg ka 'ra-rCi, e yi an-fon iia 'ra-bomp ra gw'uni gwe; 
 de ey'etr e-nesam be e yi atr'ar Ira 'ra-bomp-r'gh.*) Qwg 'a 
 ren tapan ara-ru ka 'ra-bomp-e, g pon fi, w'uni Igm kgng 
 
 1) Or: „tbe whole Temne country became quiet (pacified)." 
 
 2) Or: fg ara-ru are ra reusa ka 'ra-bomp ra w'uni bana, etc., 
 „that this world was on the top of the bead of a giant, etc." 
 
 3) According to some: -ra a-.sem a- bana, „of a large ani- 
 mal, etc." 
 
 4) Or: R'aka 6 rVika ka 'ra-ru be, ak'ereii, de ey'intr be, 
 e yi an-fon-n'gh. E-lop 6 r'a ra-nesam be, ana yi ro-tgf de 
 ro-m"antr iia yi atr'ar-tr'gn. „Every thing in this world, the 
 grass and all the trees are his hair. The fish and every living 
 creature, which is on the earth or in the water, are his lice."
 
 — 13 — 
 
 and nnshealhed it. When he was dead, every one took upon 
 him the office of a captain of the army, and they fought together. 
 War was now al an end for ever, ') and there was peace 
 in all the Temne country; they called the white people; they 
 came and met together. And the kings and the white people 
 made an agreement, they said:^j Let none raise a large army 
 again, except an army of forty, or of sixty (mem only; it is 
 sufficient. If any one raises an army of eighty (men), he be- 
 comes liable to a fine, he must pay (for it); because he wants 
 to spoil the country. Thus Korombo did before, and spoiled 
 the country. 
 
 Chapter 11. 
 
 Traditions of the Temne s respecting the Creation of 
 
 the World and of the first Men, 
 
 Si 
 
 Our fathers did not tell us much about the creation of the 
 world, they only told us that when God made the world, he 
 put it on the head of a giant, who was below (it).*) This 
 person carries the world on the head. They told us that 
 all the trees, and all the grass, and all things, which grow 
 on this earth,"') are the hair of the head of this giant; and 
 all living creatures are the lice of his head. He, on whose 
 head the world was put before, has died, and another man 
 
 1) Little quarrels excepted as mentioned before. 
 
 2) Sense: „And the Chiefs and the Europeans made an 
 agreement to this effect that none should raise an army exceed- 
 ing, etc." 
 
 3) We may head this Chapter also as follows: 
 
 An Account of the Creation of the World and of man 
 
 as received by the Temnes according to the Traditions 
 
 delivered to them by their Ancestors. 
 
 4) The Temnes believe the earth to be a round flat body. 
 In the same way the sacred books of tlic Hindus ro]»resent the 
 earth as resting on the back of a turtle of an immense size, and 
 that earthquakes arise in consequence of a movement of this turtle. 
 
 5) Lit. „iu this world, etc."
 
 — 14 — 
 
 kal sara ara-rfi are. Ma 'a reii-ko 'ra-ru, o yira, o sake ro-toroh. 
 Na kane-su fo bw'uni owe o sake; kere o sake soT, ha a-fain iia 
 gbali he tsi Irara; tcimbe an-lo na mo sake ro-pil, a-fam na 
 Irara-tsi; pakasife an-lo ria-tsi an-lof na bone/) ha e-sel de 
 y'intr e fumpg. An-lo nan ow'uni owe o mo fumpo, o fi-e, 
 ara-ru be ra pon, de r'aka 6 r'dka ka 'ra-ru are ra tra dinne. 
 Pa won gbo-e K'iiru o yoka ara-ru are, kama o kal bolr ra-ru 
 ra-fu. K'dru o bempa he ra-ru ra-bak tabana; pa won o kal 
 botr ra-ru ra-fu. Atra an-fam a-bi, de am-p6to na tra pa traka 
 ara-ril, fo ara-ru are ra tra pen loko lom, tra yi tra-tsen. 
 
 Ka ka-trap, mo K'uru o bempa ara-ru, o bempa a-fam na- 
 ran ka an-tof , ^) o-runi re o-bera. Aii-lo nan K'iiru o bempa 
 'ra-ru, w'uni 6 w'uni o yi he ri ha ka an-rei mo K'iiru o bempa 
 o-runi de o-bera. Mo K'uru o pon bempa-na, na yira gbo, o 
 soil fe na r'a ra-di. Na tralne d'or, ka iia pa ka K'uru: „Ma 
 poll bempa-su; kere ko r'aka sa ma di-e?" Ka an-lo na-tsi ha 
 tr'a he r'aka 6 r'aka. Tsian K'Qru o kane-iia fo o tra son-na r'a 
 ra-di. K'uru o son-na pa-la pa-fera, kama na ;yo-pi a-gbera; nia 
 ma riinkatr re m'anlr, ha yo-hi ka-bo, ha di. ^) Na ta nam fe so 
 
 1) Or: mo o sake gbo ro-pil-e, ara-ru be ra bone, etc., 
 „as soon as he turns towards the West, there arises an earth- 
 quake, etc." 
 
 2) Or: Mo K'iiru o trapi ara-ru be, wiira a-fam ha-rah, etc. 
 „When God created the whole world, he took out two per- 
 sons, etc." 
 
 3) Or: Na tralne d'or, 'a pa ka am-boT (owd mo yo ma- 
 paut ka-troh-ka-hah de ka-troh ka K'uru): „Mo K'iiru o wiira- 
 su and, ko sa ma re di-e?" Am-boi o kdne, o ko kane K'iiru. 
 K'iiru wiira pa-la pa-fera, o son ka am-boI, o kere-pi. wiira 
 tra-romp de tra-dir, o soh ka am-boT, o kara-tsi. Apa-la pia 
 ma ko gbam, 'a ruhkatr-hi re m'antr; hla ha ma di. „They 
 felt hungry, and they said to the servant (who was transacting 
 matters between them and between God): „As God has taken us 
 out here, what shall we go eat?" The servant departed, and
 
 — 15 — 
 
 carries this \vorld again on the head. When thev put the \vorld 
 on him, he was in a silling posture, and turned towards the East. 
 They told us that this person turns himself, but that he turns softly, 
 so that people cannot know it;*) except that time when he turns 
 towards the West, then men know it;^) because at that lime there 
 arises an earthquake,^) so thai houses and trees fall down. At 
 that time when this person falls down, and dies, the whole world 
 is at an end, and every thing in this world will perish. After a 
 long time God will ake this world away, that he may put again 
 a new world. God did not make a world Listing forever; after 
 a long time he will put a new world again. What the black 
 and the white people say respecting the world, that this world 
 will be at an end some day, is truth. 
 
 In the beginning, when God made the world, he made two 
 persons on the earlh, a male and a female. At thai time 
 when God made the world, there was no man in it till the day 
 when God made the male and the female. When God had made 
 them, they just sat down, he did not give them any thing to 
 eat. They fell hungry, and they said to God: ,.Thou hast made 
 us; but what thing shall we eat;" At that time they did not 
 know any thing. Therefore God told them that he will give 
 them something to eat. God gave them clean rice, that they 
 might make flour of it ; this they were to mix with water, and 
 to make a cake of it , and to eat it. They had not yet seen 
 
 went and told (it) to God. ■ God took out clean rice (i. e. de- 
 prived of the liusks), and gave (it) to the servant, and he carried 
 it. lie took out jjestles and mortars, and gave (them) to the 
 servant, who brought them. As for the rice, tliey were to go 
 and beat it to i)owder, and to mix it (i. e. the flour of it) with 
 water; and this they were tu eat." 
 
 1) Or: „are not aware of it." 
 
 2) Or: „are aware of it." 
 
 3) Lit. „the earth moves, etc.
 
 — 16 — 
 
 r'a ra-di ra-lom. K'ura o son fe I'la n'anlr an-lo na-tsi. 
 Ar'a ra-di are iia di k;i-ren k'in. Ka-niran-ka-tsi na \if K'uru 
 so: „Are ria sa ma di gbo loko 6 Igko-i?" ') Tsian K'uru o 
 kane-na: „Tra ba he Ir'el, I tsi son-nu so r'a ra-di ra-lom traka 
 di. Ka ka-ren aka beka tra-ran-e K'uru o son-iia v'etr e-di 
 be,^) de e-sem ana f\ o-16mpi Iraka di; o somra ka am-boT. 
 kama kere-j'i, >'ia na ma kg di. Ka ah-lo na-tsi o trori-na 
 so e-sem, ana ma Ise di-e. E-lgm 'a ma tse di-e, kara-yi 
 be rokin, o gbaski-yi; o botr eye 'a ma di-e toko; eye 'a ma 
 tse di-e, o botr-yi tOko; o trori-na eye 'a ma di, de eye 'a ma 
 tse di. An-lo na-tsi na tr'a he tr'el 6 tr'el, tambe traka ka-di 
 gbo. Ka-raran-ka-tsi K'uru o Irori-iia e-trgl be, de ey'etr be 
 traka yo ma-pant ka an-tof, ka-trala, de a-sapar, de ka-bap, de 
 a-boka; o son-na so n'antr. Na trama a-tsin, na ba he y'etr 
 e-16pra. 
 
 Ma 'a natik na ba y'etr e-di e-lai, na som am-bol, kama 
 kg kane K'uru ho: „Tete sa ba y'etr e-di e-lal; kere sa yi 
 ebo na-ran: tro sa ma vo-e sa vi a-lal-e'i'" K'uru o pa: „Tra 
 ba he tr'el; kar-mi." K'uru o kg ban a-trgi, tra-bot tramat re 
 sas, g sgfi ka am-bgl, kama g kere-tsi, de kama na di-tsi. ^) 
 
 1) Or: Na ta nam fe so r'a ra-di ra-lom. Tsian na kane 
 
 o ~ 
 
 so ara-bgi, kama g kg kane K'uru fg ye: „Eye yia sa ma di gbo 
 Idkg 6 Igkg-i?" „They had not seen as yet any other food. 
 Therefore they told the servant again, that he might go and tell 
 God thus: „These things them we shall eat only always?" 
 
 2i Or: K'uru g kal wiira y'etr e-di be, „God took out again 
 ail sorts of victuals." 
 
 3) Or: Ma na yif K'uru yan-e, K'uru g kalane; kg tete o 
 som am-bgi-n'gn. Am-hgT g kara-na e-trgl e-lgm, kama na di-yi, 
 kama na yi a-lal. „Wheu they asked God thus, God returned; 
 and presently he sent his servant. The servant brought them 
 some medicines, that they might eat them, (and) that they might 
 increase." Or also: Ma ha yif K'liru yah-e, K'uru g pa: „Tra 
 ba he tr'el, kar-mi." Kg K'dru g kg bah a-trgl, tra-bot tramat 
 re sas; atra-rah tra-fera o son ka am-bol, kama g kere-tsi. 
 Am-bgi g kere an-trgl, g kg sgh-ha. 0-bera g pa fg, etc. „Wheu 
 they asked God thus, God said: „It is of no consequence, wait
 
 — 17 — 
 
 any other food. God did not givp them fire at that time. This 
 food they ale for one year. Afterwards they asked God again: 
 „This only we shall eat always?" Therefore God told them: 
 „It does not matter, I shall give you also some other thing to 
 eat." in the second year God gave them all sorts of victuals, 
 and animals which were proper to be eaten; he sent (them) by 
 the servant, that he might carry them, and these they were to 
 go to eat. At that time he showed them also the animals, 
 which they were not to eat. Some they were not to eat. He 
 brought them all together, and separated them; he put those 
 which they were to eat by themselves; those which they were 
 not to eat, he put by themselves; he showed them those which 
 they were to eat, and those which they were not to eat. At 
 that time they did not know any thing but to eat only. After- 
 wards God showed them all kind of medicines, and all sorts of 
 tools to do work with in the ground,') as a hoe, and a digger, 
 and an axe, and a bill-hook; he also gave them fire. They were 
 naked, and had no clothes. 
 
 When they saw that they had plenty of victuals, they sent 
 the servant, that he might go and tell God: „Now me have 
 plenty of food; but we are only two: what (how) must we do 
 to increase?" God said: „It is of no consequence; wait me." 
 God went and fetched medicine, eight pills, and gave (them) to 
 the servant, that he might carry them, and that they might eat 
 them. 
 
 me." Then God went to fetch medicine, eight pills; the two white 
 ones he gave to the servant, that he might carry tlioni. The 
 servant carried the medicine, and gave (it) to them. The woman 
 said that, etc." 
 
 1) I. e. ,agricultm'al implements.' 
 
 Tcmue - Sageu, 2
 
 — 18 — 
 
 Fo K'uru bempa-na na-rafi ria IrSra-tsi; kere iia Ir'a he, ma 
 'a ma yo ria yi a-lal. Ma am-bol o kara e-trol-e, o-byra o pa 
 fo kono mo mot di an-lrol; kere am-boT o selo he traka tsi, o 
 pa: „Kar-mi, kama 1 kg trdri-tsi ka Pa." Tsian o kalane traka 
 kane K'uru, atra o-bera o pon pa-e. K'uru o pa ka am-boI: 
 „Kq soii-ko atra-bana tra-ran, kama o mot tsi di." Ka am-boI 
 kdne, o son-ko-tsi; kg g-bera g di atra-ran. Tsian g-bera 
 g tas traka a-fela; tsian a-bera be na ma trQ k'or, ma an'of na 
 las, taigm ma an'of na fi. *) Am-bgi g wiira an-tramat ro kin, 
 atra tsia, o son o-runi tra-sas re o-bera tra-sas. 0-runi g di 
 an-trgl-iVgn , g mun so m'antr. ^) Ma na pon di e-trgl-e , iia 
 ba fgsa traka sgtg a-wut; kere atr'el atse tra gbaU he yi, tambe 
 'a lekane. K'uru g yif am-bgl fg: „Na di an-trgl-i?" Am-bgl 
 g wosa. Kg K'uru g sgn-kg a-trgl a-lgm, g pa: „Kg botr ma-lap 
 ka gw'uni bom, kg botr ka-bak ra-fgr ka gw'an duni. Tsian a-fam 
 a-runi be na yi a-baki ra-fgr; tsian so a-fam a-bom na ba ma-Iap. 
 An-fela na bak-iia na-ran tra lekane; kere g-bera g gbali he trap. 
 
 1) Or: Am-boI g kdne, g kg bek ka K'uru, g pa: ,,0-bera 
 pa ho kgng mg mgt di an-trgl." K'uru g kdne-kg fg kama 
 yg mg g-bera g yema, kama g mgt di an-trol. E-trol e yi 
 tra-bot tramat re sas: o-bera o yoka atra ta yi tra-bana, g di- 
 tsi. Tsian a-bera be iia yenk he sg ma-der ka an'of a-fi, de 
 ka an'of a-las." The servant departed, and went and came to 
 God, and said: „The woman said that she must first eat the 
 medicine." God told him that he might do as the woman want- 
 ed, and that she might first eat the medicine. The medicines 
 consisted of eight pills : the woman took the two larges ones, and 
 ate them. This is the reason that all women are not well again 
 at new moon, and at full moon." 
 
 2) Or: Ma na na-ran 'a pon di e-trgl-'e-nan, na yerane e- 
 trgl tramat ro kin, eye tsia; g-bera o sdto e-sas, g-runi g sgtg 
 e-sas. Ma ha pon di, etc. „When they both had eaten their 
 medicine, they divided the six medicines, which were left among 
 each other ; the woman got three, and the man got three. When 
 they had eaten, etc."
 
 — 19 — 
 
 That God made them two thev knew it; but they did not 
 know, how (what) they must do to increase. When the servant 
 brought the medicine, the woman said that she must first eat the 
 medicine; but the servant was not willing for it, he said: „\yait 
 me, that I may go and inform the Master of it." Therefore he 
 returned in order to tell God, what the woman had said. God 
 said to the servant: „Go and give her the two large ones, that 
 she may eat them first." And the servant went, and gave them 
 to her; and the woman ate the two. This is the reason that 
 the woman has a stronger (sexual) desire; this is the reason 
 that all women have the menses when the moon is full, or when 
 the moon is new. *j The servant took out the six (pillsj, which 
 were left, and gave three to the man and three to the woman. 
 The man ate his medicine, and drank also water. When they 
 had eaten the medicine, they had power ^) to get children; but 
 this thing could not happen, unless they had a sexual commerce 
 with each other. God asked the servant: „Did they eat the 
 medicine?" The servant answered in the affirmative. And God 
 gave him another medicine, and said: „Go and put modesty on 
 the woman, and boldness on the man." This is the reason that 
 all men are bold; this is also the reason that women are modest. 
 The desire to have a sexual commerce with each other was 
 strong with both of them; however the woman could not begin, 
 
 1) Lit. „is dead", = „is done". 
 
 2) Or „ ability"- 
 
 2*
 
 — 20 — 
 
 lap traka yg-tsi; kere o-runi kgno la baki ra-for, kdng 
 kg trap tra yg-tsi. *) Ma 'a fanta, g-bera o yoke k'or. Ma 
 am-bol g der, o-bera g trgri-kg ak'or; am-bgl g kg trgri 
 K'uru, fg g-bera ak'or- k'gn ka bana. K'lirii g sgn-kg y'etr 
 e-l6pra tra kg sgfi-na, ka g-bora to g-runi. kara-yi, g re 
 sgn-na. Ma ak'or-k'gn ka pofi bak, g kom w'ahet runi o-bi. 
 kal joka k'or, kg g kom w'ahet bera g-fera, O-bera g kal 
 sg yoka k'or, g kom tra-bari, w'ahet runi re w'ahel bera; g-runi 
 g ji g-fera, kg g-bera g ji o-bi. Ma am-bgi g der, 'a kane- 
 ko, kdma o ko kane K'uru fo: „Sa sdto a-fam iVanle." Am-boI 
 g kgne, g kg kane K'uru, fg an-fam, ana g bempa, iia pou sgtg 
 a-wut; ana-runi ha rah, de aha-bera ha ran. ^ ) Mo o ko kane 
 K'uru, K'uru g yif fg: „Tro ha yi-e?" Kg g pa hg: „ O-runi 
 g bi, g-bera g fera, kg g-runi g-lgm g fera, de g-bera g-lgm g 
 bi; tsiah 'a pa, kama I re yif-mu fg tro 'a ma yg-ha-e." K'uru 
 pa: „Kgne, kg gbaski-ha; kere aha-fera ro-m'antr rayer; aha- 
 bi botr-ha ro-gbah." Am-bgl g der, g gbaski-ua, g yg mg K'uru 
 g som-kg; g kg trgri K'uru fg: „I poh yg ma ma poh pa." 
 K'uru g wura y'etr be, g sgh sg ka am-bgl, g pa „Kgne". Aha 
 ro-gbah g sgh, kdma g kere-ha y'etr e-ydna ma-pant be ro-tgf; 
 
 1) Or — — kdng yg-tsi. Ka-rarah-ka-tsi g bera o yoka 
 k'or, kg g kom w'ahet runi g-bi. O-bera g yoka sg k'or, kg 
 g re kom w'ahet bera g-fera. Aka beka ma-sas-e g kdm tra- 
 bari, g-runi g fera, g-bera g bi. Am-bgl g der, 'a kane, etc. 
 
 „ he did it. After this the woman conceived, and she brought 
 
 forth a black boy. The woman conceived again, and she brought 
 forth a white girl. At the third time [lit. (at the parturition; which 
 amounted to three (times)] she brought forth twins, the boy was 
 white, and the girl was black. The servant came, they told, etc". 
 
 2) Or: Ma am-bgl g der, g nahk-ha, g kgne, o kg kane 
 
 K'uru, fg ah-fam ha rah. Tsiah K'uru g som-kg 
 
 sg, kama g gbaski ah-wut. Kg g der, g gbaski ah-wut a-fera 
 ka ah-wut a-bi." When the servant came, and saw them, he 
 
 left, and went and told God, that the people were two. 
 
 Therefore God sent him again, that he might separate the chil- 
 dren. And he came, and separated the white children from the 
 black children."
 
 — 21 — 
 
 she was ashamed to do it; but the man he was more bold, he 
 began to do it. When they lay do\\n, the woman conceived. 
 When the servant came, the woman showed him (her) pregnan- 
 cy ; *) (and) the servant went and informed God, that as for 
 the woman she was pregnant.^) God gave him clothes to go 
 and give them to them, to the woman') and to the man. He 
 brought them, (and) came and gave them to th(>m. When her 
 pregnancy had come to the full time, she brought forth a black 
 boy. She conceived again, and brought forth a white girl. The 
 woman conceived once more, and brought forth twins, a boy 
 and a girl; the boy was white, and the girl was black. When 
 the servant came, they told him, that he might go and tell God: 
 „We have got four persons." The servant left, and went and 
 told God, that the people, whom he had made, had got children; 
 the boys were two, and the girls were two. When he went to 
 tell God, God asked him: „0f what kind are they?" And he 
 said: „A boy is black, and a girl is white, and another boy is 
 white, and another girl is black; therefore they said, that I 
 might come and ask thee what (how) they must do with them." 
 God said: „Go and separate them;') carry the white ones to 
 the water side; as to the black ones locate them in the country." 
 The servant came, and separated them, he did as God sent^) him 
 (to do); and went and told God: „I have done as thou hast said." 
 God took out all sorts of implements, and gave them to the servant, 
 and said: „Go." For those in the country lie gave (to the servant), 
 that he might carry to them all sorts of agricultural implements;*^) 
 
 1) lAt. „the woman showed him the belly." 
 
 2) Lit. „that the woman her holly was great" or „big". 
 
 3> To this day, when a girl gets betrothed to her future 
 husband, the latter gives her clothes, as she wears none before 
 that time. 
 
 4) Lit. „Depart, go and separate etc." 
 
 5) Or: „caused him etc." 
 
 6) Lit. „things to do all sort of work with in the ground."
 
 — 22 — 
 
 aha ro-m'antr, o ko yer-ha y'elr e-yona ma -pant be ro- 
 m'antr. Ka ah-fera o son a-fam a-lrol, de ana sot-an, de aha 
 gbal. Aha ro-gbah, o soh-ha a-kabi. Ah-fam a-trol ha benipa 
 p-spt tnlka ah-fam a-fera, de Ira-bil fra-p6to Iraka kol ro-bah, 
 kama ha solo a-kala, ko kama ha yi a-yola; ko o botr-ha ro- 
 m'antr rayer. Ah-wut a-bi o botr ro-gbah, de ka tra-tseh, de 
 ka Ira-gbghko; o fak'sa-ha traka bempa e-set e-nepal, de e-set 
 e-sor, de traka baf k'or, ko o yo-ha tra yo ma-panl ma-baki be; 
 kere a-fam a-fera ha ba he ka-yo 'ma-panl ame, ha ba he ka- 
 yo e-trol, ha tupas he; ama-trei ame be 'a botr-ha ka ah-fam 
 a-bi gbo. Tsiah ah-fam a-fera, K'liru o reh-ha rokom ka ah- 
 fam a-bi Irak' a-fdsa 6, trak' a-kala 6, traka ka-lsemp 6; tsiah 
 w'uni fera, hali o yi gbo w'ahel runi, a-fam a-bi ha yi-kg ro- 
 rata, ha minta he ko. Atra-bona be ka ra-ru are ha yefa ka 
 ah-wut ahe a-fera, de ka ah-wul ahe a-bi. 
 
 Am-boT ko kane K'uru fo: „I poh yer-ha." Mo o poh 
 gbaski-ha, aha-fera ha ko kom a-wiil tramat ro kin, aha-bi ha 
 kom tramat ro kin; aha-fera a-bera a-sas de a-runi a-sas ; aha- 
 bi a-runi a-sas de a-bera a-sas. Ma ah-\Yut ha-tsi ha poh bak, 
 ha kal so kom, ahe tramat ro kin, ahe tramat ro kin. Aha-bi 
 ya ha kom so, aha-fera ya ha kom sq. Am-boi o ko kane 
 K'uru fo: „Ah-fam ha ma la-ah." K'uru o pa ka am-boi:
 
 — 23 — 
 
 as to those close the water side, he went and gave them all 
 sorts of shipping implements. *) To the white people he gave 
 artisans, and tavlors, and clerks. As to those in the country he 
 gave them blacksmiths. The artisans made houses for the white 
 people, and ships ^) for to walk on the sea; that they might get 
 money, and that they might be gentlemen; and he put them close 
 the water side. The black children he put in t!ie country, and 
 on hills, and in forests; he taught them to make grass-houses 
 and mud-houses, and to make farms, and he made them to do 
 all laborious work; but white people have not to do this work, 
 they have not to make country-medicines,^) they do not practise 
 divination;*) as regards all these things, he put them only on 
 the black people. Therefore, as regards the white people, God 
 made them superior to the black people in power, and in pro- 
 perty, and in intelligence; therefore, as regards a white person, 
 although he be but a boy, black people are inferior to him, 
 they dare not vie with him. All nations in this world descend 
 from these white children, and from these black children. 
 
 The servant went and said to God: „I have shared out to 
 them."^) When he had separated them, the while (people) 
 went and brought forth six children, the black (people) went 
 and brought forth six children; the white ones three females 
 and three males; the black ones three males and three females. 
 When those children had grown up, they also brought forth 
 children again, these six, (and) these six. The black ones 
 brought forth black children again, '^) the while ones brought 
 forth white children again. ^) The servant went and told God: 
 „The people are increasing." God said to the servant : 
 
 1) Lit. „ things to do all sort of work with at sea." 
 
 2) Lit. „ white man's canoes," or „european canoes." 
 
 3) Or „ charms, amulets." 
 
 4) Or „ fortune telling." 
 
 5) That is ,the various objects, as artisans, blacksmiths etc' 
 6 1 Lit. „the black (or white) ones in the same way they 
 
 brought forth again.
 
 ^ 24 — 
 
 „Ko yer-na (ra-bona," kdne, o ko yer tra-bona senk. Ana- 
 fera ria ba tra-bona-tra-nan, o-bt'ra re o-runi o-k'in, o-bera re Q- 
 rflni o-k'in. Ana-bi, o ko yer-na tra-bona, mo o pon yer aiia- 
 fera be; kere ana-fera iia yi ra ka-petr k'in, de ana-bi iia yi 
 ra ka-petr k'in. Ma na ma b(^ka a-lai-e, am bol o ko kane 
 K'uni fo: „An-fam-'a-mu 'a gbali ton-e." K'riru o pa: „Tr' 'a 
 ko son-na an-tof na tra-bona-tra-nan." Mo o dcr-e, o yer am- 
 pule tra-tof Ira-ebante be; o kal ver an-fam a-bi tra-tof tra- 
 gbantg, ma tra-bona tra yi tra-lal. 
 
 Ka ka-trap, mo K'uru o bempa w'uni, a-fam na yi fe traka 
 fi, me e-suma ye ka ra-tril, de ka ka-bansa ma-der. An-lo na- 
 tsi ra-tru ra yi he, ra-fi ra yi he. Ari-lo ha-Isi an-fam, ana 
 K'uru mot kara ka ra-rfi-e, na tra kali ka-bak ka-bana; a-lom 
 
 - - ^ ooo o'- 
 
 na kali na beka tra ren tr'eme tramat ro kin,M a-lom tr'eme 
 tramat re sas, a-lom na tasa yi;^J na fi he, K'uru o som gbo, 
 'a re ban-na. K'urumasaba o botr tapaii m'etr ma-boli ka w'uni 
 6 w'uni, re ban he kg lemp. Be K'uru o yema yoka w'lini, 
 mot som am-boi-n'on ronon, owg mo re kane-ko, fo K'uru 
 som-ko Ira re kori-ko, de traka kane-ko, fo an-lgkg-n'on ria 
 pon, kc4ma g benene. Ow'uni, ma am-bgi g pon kane-kg yah-e, 
 g beneno traka aka-trel an-nan; g som ka an-fam-h'gn be, de 
 an-mane-ii'gn, g lemne-na. Mg g pon yg yan-e, ma an-lgkg 
 ria-tsi na bek-e; am-bgl na K'uru g der so, ow'uni g yokane, 
 g kgne gbo re am-bgl, g nank fe ra-fi. Ye pa yi traka w'lini 
 6 w'uni afi-lo na-tsi. 
 
 1) Or: a-lgm na bak tra-refi tr'eme tramat ro kin, „some 
 got six hundred years old," etc. 
 
 2) Or: a-lgm na tasi; „some exceeded (this age)."
 
 — 25 — 
 
 „Go and divide fhem into nations." He left, and wcnl and di\id- 
 ed all Ihe nations. The white (people) had their nations, always 
 a woman and one man at a time.') As to ihe hlaek (people), 
 he went and divided them into nations, as he had divided all 
 the white ones; bnt the white ones were in one town, and the 
 black ones were in another town. \Vh*^n they were amounting 
 to many, the servant went and said to God: „Thy people are 
 numerous now." God said: ,.Lel them go and give them the 
 country of their nations." When he came, he gave to the white 
 people all (their) various countries; (then) he returned and gave 
 to the black people (their) various countries, because the nations 
 were numerous. 
 
 In the beginning, when God made man, men had not to 
 die, as at this time by sickness ;ind by bodily pain. At that 
 time there was no sickness, there was no death. At that time 
 the people, whom God brought first into the world, were living 
 to a great age; some were living (till) they reached six hundred 
 years, some eight hundred, some more than that; they did not 
 die, God only sent, (and) they came to fetch them. God fixed 
 formerly a long time for every person, he did not come to 
 fetch them quickly. ^) When Cod wanted to take away a per- 
 son, (then) he first sent his servant to him, who was coming 
 to tell him, that God had sent him to come and see him, and 
 to tell him, that his time was up, that he might make himself 
 ready. The man, when (after) the servant had told liim thus, 
 made himself ready (or the departure from his family; he sent 
 to all his people, and to his friends, and bad farewell to them. 
 W^hen he had done thus, (and) when that time (spoken of) 
 arrived; the servant of God came again, the man got up, and 
 just went with the servant, he did not see death. Thus it was 
 with every person at that time. 
 
 1) Lit. „a woman and one man, a wnman and <ine man," 
 or: „a woman with one man, etc.;" i. c. each couple formed 
 one nation, as one the French, another the English, etc. 
 
 2) Or „ abruptly".
 
 — 26 — 
 
 Kppp ka a-ldko Inm 'a re kom n-lahba, owd vi w'uni las, 
 de w'uni kasra; kono yi so w'liiii biina, o ba a-kala a-gbati, de 
 a-lrar a-lal, de y'elr e-trol e-laT, de e-bol e-lal; oy/6 tse trara 
 w'uni 6 w'lini r'dka, g yo gbo mo o yema; o botr ni'dne ka 
 an-nan be: kono re trapi ka-fi ka 'ra-ru. Mo K'liru o son-ko 
 a-fosa a-bana, o yi o-kelfa, g yi g-yola. Am-bgl o kg kane 
 K'iiru fg. „Ow'an-ka-mu g yi w'uni las." Kiiru g pa ka am- 
 bol: „Kgnc, ban-kg; kane-kg, fg an-lg-n'gn na pon." Ma am- 
 bol g der trdka gw'uni gwe tra re ban-kg, g kane-kg mg K'uru 
 g sdm-kg; kere g pa: „I seig he, I kg he; min' lanba ras."*) 
 Ka tra-ren tra-lal am-boi o der tra bari-ko Idko 6 Idko; kere o 
 selg he; kg g pa ka ka-lapsg fg g gbali he ri kg koko. Am- 
 bgl g kalane, g kg kane K'uru f g ; „Ow'an-ka-mu g selg he 
 Iraka der." Mg K'uru g tral atse, g pa hg: „Yao, pa bdne-mi 
 ma ma kane-mi atse; kere I tsi som a-fam a-lom." K'uru o 
 wura a-fam a-lal, g pa rgnan: „Kg na ban-kg." Na der, na 
 lal, na pa: „Pa, sa re ban-mu." pa: „I kg he ri." Na pa 
 sg: „Sa trel fe mu, man kdne." TMan g yokane, g sap-na. 
 Na kalane, 'a kg kane K'iiru hg: „Pa, gw'an-ka-mu g sap- 
 su, g fg! he kara." K'uru g pa: ,,Yira nan, 1 tsi som gwd 
 mg kg ban-kg g-tdfal-e; I tsi som e-bgl iia-ran, ana ma kara- 
 ko sol." Tra-ren tra -ran tra tas, o som fe w'iini; ka-reh 
 ka-lgm, aka beka tra-sas-e, K'uru o mot som Pa Ra-trQ, g 
 pa: „Kg wop -kg, trama kadi, g-na-mu g tra bap-mu."^) 
 
 1) Or: T.si'an, ma am-bgi g der traka gw'uni gwe tra re 
 ban-kg, g selg he tra kg re am-bgl, ma an-ldkg-ii'gn na pun. 
 Ka tra-ren tra-laT, etc. ..Therefore, when the servant came for 
 this man to fetch him, he was not willing to go with the servant, 
 when his (appointed) time was up. For many years, etc." 
 
 2) Or: Yah K'uru o mgt som Pa Ea-tru, kgn' o yi w'Qni 
 baki; g kdne ka ah-set ha gw'uni, g wop-kg, g pa: „I re bah- 
 niu;" kere ha nahk fe kg koko. Ow'uni g fanta, g gbali he so 
 yOkane, g gbali he Sc4ke. Ka ka-bat Pa Ra-fi, gwd yi, etc. 
 „Thus God first sent Mr. Sickness, he was an old person; he 
 went into the house of the person, took hold of him, and said: 
 „I come to fetch thee;" but they did not see him at all. The
 
 _ 27 — 
 
 But at a certain lime a man was born, who was a wicked 
 person, and a violent person; he was also a great man, he had 
 plent^y of money, and many slaves, and plenty of cattle, and 
 many servants; who did not care for any one,') and did just 
 as he pleased, and tronbled all his people: he became the author 
 of death in the world. ^) As God gave him great power, he 
 was a warrior, (and) he was a gentleman. The servant went 
 and said to God: „Thy child is a bad person." God said to 
 the servant: „Go and fetch him; tell him, that his time is up." 
 When the servant came for this man to fetch him, he told him 
 as God caused him (to say); but he said: „I will not, 1 do 
 not go; 1 am still a young man." For many years the servant 
 came to fetch him from time to time; but he was not willing; 
 and at last he said that he would not go there at all. The 
 servant relumed, and went and told God: „Thy child is not 
 willing to come." When God heard this, he said: „Well, I am 
 glad that thou didst tell me this; but I shall send other people." 
 God picked out many persons, and said to them: „Go ye and 
 fetch him." They came, they were many, and they said: „Sir, 
 we come to fetch thee." He said: „1 do not go there." They 
 said again: „W^e do not leave thee, let us go." Therefore he 
 got up, and beat them. They returned, and went and told God: 
 „Sir, thv child beat us, he is not easv to bring awav." God 
 said: „Sit ye down, I shall send one who will go and fetch him 
 quietly; I shall send two servants, who will bring him away softly." 
 Two years passed away, he did not send a person; the next year, 
 which was the third, God first sent Mr. Sickness, and said: „Go, 
 take hold of him, go thou before, thy companion will meet thee." 
 
 man lay down, he could not get up again, nor could he turn 
 himself. In the morning llr. Death, who was etc." 
 
 1) Lit. „who (lid not l^now any tiling fur any person." 
 
 2) Lit. „lie came to begin dying in the world."
 
 — 28 — 
 
 Pa Ra-lru o vi wi'ini ))aki; o kone ka aii-sel na ow'fmi, o bap-kg 
 fanla ka an-Ujnla-iVon; o pa ronon: ,,I wop-mu tenoii. Ma 'a 
 re ban-mu, ma kasi, mi'na Ra-tru I re baii-mu, 1 wop-mu tenon." 
 Ow'Qni )'6kane, Q kali-kali, o nank fe w'imi. t.sela am-boT- 
 iVon, pa: „Tsela an-fam-'a-mi be.-' Am-bol o t.sela-na; aii-fam 
 ria der, na re yira ka an-set be, na yif-ko: „Ko ne-e?" pa: 
 „Pa Ra-trfi o wop-mi; kere I nam fe ko." Pa Ra-tru o pa ho: 
 ,.Mina wop-ko; mo o la ka^i fo o ko he, tsian o tru, I wop- 
 ko tenon." An-fam be, ana yi ri, na tral ar'im ra Pa Ra-tru; 
 kere na nank fe ko koko. Ow'dni o fanta, o soko gbes, o dira 
 he, gbijli he so yokane, o gbali he sake. Aka-bat Pa Ra-tru 
 pa ho: „Ra-trQ ra bak-mu-e." Ka ar'etr ra-bat Pa Ra-fi, owo 
 yi o-lahba, o bek. Ma Pa Ra-fi o der, o kane o-m^ne-k'oii Pa 
 Ra-tru, fo ow'uni o-kasra owe o gbali he yira so and o-boli, fo 
 kon' gbali he ba-ko i-nol, fo o gbali he piara and tenoii, fo 
 tra kere-ko. Na be ro-sel iia tral ar'im-ra-naii; kere na gbali 
 he nank-iia. ') Ma Pa Ra-fi o poii pa yaii-e, o yoka an-iiesam 
 
 1) Or: Ka ar'etr ra-bat Pa Ra-fi o bek. Mo o der-e, o pa 
 ho: „Pa Ra-fi o bek, ma Pa Ra-tru o wop-mu; kere mina I 
 bek, ma piara he and tench, T tsi kere-mu." Na be iia tral 
 atra-fof-tra-han ; kere iia nank fe ha. Pa Ra-fi o wiira tete ah- 
 hesam ha ow'uui, ha kdne, ha ko trdri K'urumasaba ho: „Sa 
 poh ama-pant, ama ma soh-su." Am-boT o yif K'lirumasaba ho: 
 „Tro ma yO-e, mo ow'iini o fi-e?" K'liru o wiira y'etr e-besa 
 ro-tof, soh-ko; o wiira yVtr e-16pra, de e-gbata, o pa: „Be 
 afia-fera etc." At the early sun Mr. Death arrived. When he 
 came, he said: „Mr. Death has come, because Mr. Sickness took 
 hold of thee; even I have come, thou wilt not be here to day 
 all day, I shall carry thee away." They all heard their words; 
 but they did not see them. Presently Mr. Death took out the 
 breath (life) of the man, they left, (and) went,*) and said to God: 
 „We have done with the work, which thou gavest us (to do)." 
 The servant asked God: „How must they do, as the man is 
 dead?" God took out tools to dig in the ground with (i, e. 
 digging tools), and gave (^them) to him; he took out clothing, and 
 mats, and said: „If the white (people) etc." 
 
 *) That is Mr. Sickness and Mr. Death went, etc.
 
 — 29 — 
 
 Mr. Sickness was an old person; he went into the house of 
 the person, and met him Iving down in his liammock ; he 
 said to liim: „I take hold of thee to dav. As thev came to 
 fetch thee, (and) thou didst refuse, I Sickness come to fetch 
 thee, I take hold of thee to dav." The man got up, and looked 
 all about; (but) he did not see anv person. He called his ser- 
 vant, and said: „Call all my people." The servant called them; 
 the people came, they sat down all over the room, they asked 
 him: „What is the matter?" He said: „Mr. Sickness took hold 
 of me; but 1 do not see him." Mr. Sickness said: „l took 
 hold of him; as he always refused and did not go, there- 
 fore he is sick, I look hold of him to day." All the people, 
 who were there, heard the voice of Mr. Sickness; but they did 
 not see him at all. The man lay down, he was awake all night, 
 and did not sleep, he could not get up again, and could not 
 turn (himself). In the morning Mr. Sickness said: „The sick- 
 ness is getting heavy ujion thee." At the early sun*) Mr. Death, 
 who was a young man, arrived. When Mr. Death came, he told 
 his friend Mr. Sickness, that this violent man would not live here 
 again long, that he would have no pity on him, that he would 
 not be here all day to day, (and) thai he would carry him away. 
 They all in the house heard their voice; but they could not see 
 them. When Mr. Death had said this, he look away the breath 
 
 1) i. e. ,when the suu was not up long get', or , early'.
 
 — Bo- 
 na ow'uni, ko ow'iini o fi, Na kone, iia Mne K'liriimasaba fo 
 ha pon yg ama-pant-ma-iian. fo o\\'iini o pofi fi. 
 
 Ka au-fam-non be, de an-wut-n'oh, de an-trar-n'on, na trap 
 tra ki'ilg, na pa ho: ,,0-kas-ka-sii o fi! 0-kas-ka-sn o fi!" Fo 
 ah-lo na-tsi na ta tr'a he bok traka w'uni fi. 
 
 An-lo ua-tsi am-bol o kane K'liru: „Ow'uni o fi, Iro 'a ma 
 yo-ko-e?" K'uru o wura ;y'elr e-besa e-lgm, a-sapar, de ka- 
 trala, g sgn-yi ka am-bgl; g wiira so tr'ota, de a-gbata; g Irgri- 
 kg so, Iro ma yg-e traka bene owg fi-e, g pa: „Be ana-fera 'a 
 fi-e, tr' 'a bempa k'uma, 'a botr-kg ri, 'a maiik-kg ro-tgf; be 
 w'uni bi g fi-e, tr' 'a bes, 'a botr-kg ka tr'ota. de a-gbata, 'a 
 mank-kg; be w'uni mgri g fi-e, tr' 'a wgn's-kg ^''aiikra \'in, de 
 r'uma r'in, de a-lapra n'in, 'a mank-kg." Tsiah am-bgi g kara 
 ey'etr ka an-fam, g Irgri-ha, atra ma yg traka 'ra-fi. Afi-Ig na- 
 tsi na trara traka mank a-fam, e-bona be ka 'ma-ygs-ma-nan; an- 
 fam a-fera ka tr'iima; an-Temno ka a-gbata, de tr'ota, de tr'anlr. 
 Traka gwg fi-e, K'uru g pa: „Kg na bene-kg, na wgn's-kg ey'etr 
 e-16pra." Na kgne, na kg bene-ko. Ma 'a pon kg bene, 'a kg 
 kane K'liru fg. „Sa pon kg bene." Kuru g kg wura a-bitin, de 
 k'ehke, de ma-ber, g sgn-ha, o pa: „Tra ha kg bok-hg, kama ha
 
 — 31 — 
 
 of Ihe man, and the man died. (Thfnj lliey went/) and told God 
 that they had done their work, (andj that \b.e man was dead. 
 
 Then all his people,^; and all his children, and his slaves, 
 began to cry, they said: „Our father is dead! Our father is 
 dead!" For at that time they did not yet know to weep (mourn) 
 for a dead person. 
 
 Then the servant said to God: „The man is dead, how 
 must they with do him ?" God took out some digging tools, 
 a digger, and a hoe, and gave them to the servant; he also 
 took ou* clothing, and a mat; he also informed him, how they 
 must do in order to bury the one who died, he said: „If the 
 while people die, let them make a coffin, and put him into 
 it, and bury') him in the ground; if a black man dies, let them 
 dig, and put him into clolhes, and into a mat, and bury him; if 
 a Mori man dies, let them put him on a pair of trowsers, and a 
 shirt, and a cap, and bury him."*) Therefore the servant brought 
 the things to the people, and showed them, what they must do 
 with the one who died.^) At that time they knew to bury 
 people, every nation according to their customs; the white 
 people in coffins; the Temnes in a mat, and with clolhes, and 
 sticks. With regard to the one who died, God said: „Go ye 
 and bury him, and put him on the clothing." They left, and 
 went and buried him. When they had buried him, they went 
 and told God: „We have buried him." God went and took out 
 a drum, and a cymbal,*^) and liquor, and gave it') (to the 
 servant), and said: „Let them go and bewail him, that they 
 
 1) That is Mr. Sickness and Mr. Death went etc. 
 2i i. e. ,the people of the man who died.' 
 
 3) Or lit. „hide him etc." 
 
 4) In this way they bury the respective persons to this very 
 day, the sticks, which are used for the burial of Tt'nuie people, 
 are laid across the grave over the corpse, leaving sonie space 
 between the corpse and the sticks, and the earth is then put 
 upon the sticks; so that the earth does not fall on the corpse. 
 
 5) Lit. „with the death." (Abstract urn pro concreto.) 
 
 6) See the word k'ehke in the Vocabulary. 
 
 7) i. e. ,the liquor.'
 
 — 32 — 
 
 mun ma-ber, kama 'a Isis, kama 'a tomo, kama 'a \se so nesa." 
 Ma ra-fi ra yi ra-ninis-e, a-fam na won ra-nes: tsian o som am- 
 boI-iVoh, pa ronon: „Kere ey'elr evR, kama o-ninis o pon." 
 Tsfaii d'or 6 d'er w'uni o fi, 'a pulr ara-fi, 'a tra fer, 'a tra 
 tdmo, 'a Ira mun ma-ber. Tra won ka a-fam a-bi be, be w'uni 
 fi, 'a fra wol, 'a tra tdmo- 
 
 Ka ka-raran-ka-lsi K'uru, mo o kdli a-fam o-ndsi nel, o 
 somra so r'aka ka 'ra-ru, An'emi, ana balane ma a-tenla; tsa o 
 nane, fo w'uni lom g gbali he so yokane mo owg yi tapan. 
 An'emi ane na yi tra yenkas so w'uni ma-der, be o tru. Be 
 w'uni lom o true, 'a botr-ko ka an'emi, 'a lahka-kg, o tra kal 
 yenk ma-der. Am-boi o son an'emi traka a-fam be; kere w'uni 
 kasra o yi so, owg son fe an'emi ka w'uni 6 w'uni, ma 'a ma 
 Iru; kere g mank an'emi ka ak'uma-k'gn. Mg K'uru g nank-tsi, 
 lasar an'emi ka ak'iima, ro o mank-ni-e, ow'Qni o tr'a he Isi. 
 Tsian mo kgng-konone g Iru, g som kama na wiira an'emi ka 
 ak'uma tr§ka yeiikas-kg ma-der; kere ma na kara-ni, 'a botr-kg 
 ri, 'a Ia,nka-ko win-e; ara-bena ra an'emi ra pima, kgn' g fiimpg 
 ro-tgf, g fi. 
 
 Ka ka-raran ak6 K'uru g son a-fdsa ka Ra-tru de ka Ra-fi, 
 kama na kgt d'er 6 d'er ka 'ra-ru be; t^ni Igko lom wuni lom 
 g yokane, o yg sg mg gwe g yg tapan-e. Am-bgT ha K'uru, mg 
 K'uru g som-kg, g kg k^ne Ka-tnl de Ra-fi tra wop w'uni Igm. ') 
 Ah-lg ha-tsi a-fam ha liatral, fg gw'uni gw^gtru; lete sg'atratral, 
 
 1) Or: Ka ka-rarah ake Ra-tru de Ra-fi ha ba fgsa ka 
 ra-ru ; de am-bgl ha K'uru, mg K'uru etc. „After this Sickness 
 and Death had power in the world; and the servant of God, as 
 God etc."
 
 — 33 — 
 
 may drink liquor, that they may be drunk. Ihal they may dance, 
 (and) that they may be no more afraid." As dealh is terrible, 
 people became alarmed (at it): therefore he sent his servant, 
 and said to him: „Carry these things, that the terror may have 
 an end." This is the reason, that everywhere, where a person 
 dies, they make the death known. ') they are making music, they 
 are dancing, (and) they are drinking liquor. It became fashion 
 among all black people, if a person dies, they are playing and 
 dancing. 
 
 After this, God, as he looked with pity upon people, sent 
 again something into the world, (viz.) the Nemi, which resembled 
 a hammock; for he thought, that another person would not arise 
 again as the one who was before. This hammock was to make 
 a person well again, if he was sick. If some one was sick, they 
 put him into the hammock, they swung him, (and) he was getting 
 well again. The servant gave the hammock for all people; but 
 there was again a violent man, who did not give the hammock 
 to any one, when they were sick, but (who) hid the hammock 
 in his box. When God saw it, he spoiled the hammock in the 
 box, where he hid it, the man did not know it. So when he 
 himself got sick, he sent that they might take out the hammock 
 from the box to make him well again; but when they brought 
 it, and put him into it, and swung him once; the rope of the 
 hammock broke, (and) he fell down on the ground, and died. 
 
 After this God gave power to Sickness and Death, that they 
 might walk all about ^) in the whole world; lest some time 
 another person arise, and act again as this one did before. The 
 servant of God, as God sent him, went and told Sickness and 
 Death to take hold of some ^j person. That time people were 
 hearing, that this person w, is sick; presently also liiey were hearing, 
 
 1) Thus the Tcmncs do to this veiy day. As soon as one 
 dies, they discharge muskets, making known the death thereby. 
 
 2) Or: „ every where in etc." 
 
 3) Or: „of such and such etc." 
 
 Teiuue - Sagcn. 3
 
 — 34 — 
 
 fo fi. Kere lonip fe fo w'lini 6 w'lini o yo o las; pak^sife 
 a-fam tramat re sas na rap-ko; na-ran ria y\ ka ka-tra-k'on ka- 
 dio; fia-ran na vi ka ka-lra-k'on ka-mero; na-ran na yi rodi; 
 iia-ran na vi roraran-k'on, mo w'uni o mo kol. Afie na ma 
 kane K'uru Ir'el 6 tr'el alra w'Qni mg yo: na ma mar an-fam 
 a-fera ka ka-tsim, de ka tr'el tra-las be. Tsian a-fam a-fera na 
 
 o o o o 
 
 tupas he, na fak he g-krifi, na sek he a-trol, na ba he a-sena 
 traka tsim; kere na Ira lam ka ka-tsim. 
 
 O / — Q O 
 
 Ara-Jbomp III. 
 
 Ma-Kane raa an-Temue ma-kur traka 'ma-Traraa') ma 
 Wtini ka-raran ka ra-Fi. 
 
 Be w'uni o fi bat, o piara'ro-krifi pali, o kal ra-foi, o trasam-trasain. 
 Ah-lo na-tsi a-fam na yif-kg: „Tro pe-e?" wosa, o pa ho: „Tr'el 
 6 tr'el, baki gbo!" 'A pa so: „Ma ma piara ro-krifi pali, ma kal 
 so, ko r'aka ra yo-mu-e?" ^) wosa so: ^) „ An-fam a-baki be na 
 der ban-mi, ko o-kas-ka-mi o bal-mi, opa ho: „Kalane, kg kane-na: 
 
 1) Or: ma-yi, „ state". 
 
 2) Or: Ko r'aka ra ban'sa-mu-e? „What thing did hurt 
 thee?" 
 
 3) Or: Be w'uui o fi bat, o piiira pali ro-krifi. An-lo ar'etr 
 ra toflo gbo, o trasam. An-lo na-tfei aii-fam a-baki na tra ko 
 ron'on: na yif-ko: „Ko tr'el ma naiik ka ro-krifi-e? Kane-su. 
 Ma ma piara ro-krifi ha ma kal so der, ko tr'el tra ma kal-e?" 
 Tete w6sa-na: „I kal he tr'el 6 tr'el, 'a som-mi gbo." An- 
 Idko na-tsi g kane-na atra g nank, ro g pi;ir'-e; be g uank d'er 
 g-ma-bgne, g pa-t^i; etc. etc. „If a person dies in the morning, 
 he spends all day iu Hades. When the sun gets cool, he sneezes. 
 At that time the old people are going to him, and ask him: 
 „What thing didst thou see in Hades? Tell us. As thou hast 
 been in Hades till thou didst come back again, why didst thou 
 return?" Presently he answers them: „I did not return for any 
 matter, they just sent me." At that time he tells them what
 
 — 35 — 
 
 that he was dead.*) Bui it is not proper for any one to act 
 wrong; because eight persons surround him; two are at his 
 right hand; two are at his left hand; two are before (him); 
 (and) two are behind him, when he is walking. These are tel- 
 ling God every thing which man does; they are helping the 
 white people in the war, and in every danger. Therefore white 
 people do not use country fashion, they do not set up a Krifi,^) 
 they do not tie on amulets,') (and) they have no Greegree for 
 war; but they are victorious in battle. 
 
 Chapter 111. 
 
 Traditions of the Temnes concerning the State of 
 
 Man after Death. 
 
 1. 
 
 If a person dies in the morning, he spends the whole 
 day in Hades, he returns in the evening, and sneezes repeatedly. 
 Then people ask him: „How is it?"^) He answers, and says: 
 „Nothing but trouble!""') They say again: .,As thou wast all 
 day in Hades, and didst return again, what thing happened to 
 thee?" He answers again: „A11 the old people came to fetch 
 me, and my father drove me, he said: „Return, and tell them: 
 
 he saw, where he was all day; if he saw a place of joy (glad- 
 ness), he states it; etc. etc." 
 
 1) This may also he given as follows: „Thc servant of God, 
 when God sends him, goes and tells Sickness and Death to tr.ke 
 hold of such and such a person. Then peoi)le will haw, that 
 this person is sick; land soon afterwards again they will hear, 
 that he is dead." 
 
 2i That is for worshijjping it. 
 
 3) Or „charms", lit. „medicine". 
 
 4) Or: „What newsV" 
 
 5) Lit. „Every trouble, it is but hard!" 
 
 3*
 
 — 36 — 
 
 w'uni 6 w'Qni Ira o nosa K'urumasiiba, tra o nesa 'ra-ru, Ira o 
 tse }'Q tr'eT Ira-las, tra o nesa so w'uni bom; 'J Ira o nesa w'uni 
 mone') de w'uni baki." ') 
 
 „Be w'lini bom o bala, tra o nesa o-wos-k'on; be o nesa 
 he o-wos-k'on-e, o yo hf kg o-lot-e; m'one ma-bana ma tra 
 kar-ko ro-krifi, be o pori fi. Be g-bera g botrar he am-mera ka 
 g-wos-k'gn; be g fi, g tra sglg m'gne ma-bana ka ro-krifi. Runi 
 sg, be g nantra g-bera, gwg yg-kg Ir'ei tra-fino, be g-wos-k'gn 
 g sap-kg ka-tsin; kere g-rani-k'gn g nal he kg, g voka he a- 
 piire, kg be g-wos-k'gn g bolrar he am-mera ka g-rani-k'gn; be 
 ow'uni ka-tsi o fi, o tra kdne ka an'antr, ka m'dne ma-bana." 
 
 „Tnjka pa-la sg iia som-mi tra kane-nu, kama na botrar am- 
 mera traka pa-la, kama na tse lasar pa-la. Be w'uni g lasar 
 pa-la, g tra kgne ka an'antr, be g fi. Ma a-fam na ma lasar 
 apa-la;^) tsia som K'dru g tora e-lama de ts'er tra hjsar apa-la." 
 
 An-lg na-tsi g kane-na sg alra g nank, ro g piar'-e. Be 
 g nank d'er g-ma-bgne, g pa-tsi; be g nank d'er g-las, g pa- 
 tsi. pa: „I nank d'er g-ma-bgne, ma-panl 6 ma-pant ma 
 yi he ri, ma-bgne gbo ; 'a piara gbo ha bontras aiVes na K'uru- 
 masiiba pali gbes." 
 
 „Atse, atra ria pa, 1 der tra trgri-nu." Mg g pon pa atse, 
 gw'iini g fi sg, g kalane ro-krifi; g gbali he fgf ka an-rei a- 
 mgta, ka ah-rei a-trandg, ka an-rei ana beka ma-sas, han na 
 beka ma-rei m'ahle o mgta fgf ro-krifi. 
 
 1) The Singular for the Plural. 
 
 2) Or:„Because people are wasting rice; therefore etc."
 
 — 37 — 
 
 Every man Id him fenr'j God; Id him IV;ir (ho world; kt him 
 not commit sin, lei him also honour women; let him honour 
 the poor people and the old people." 
 
 „If a woman marries, let her lionour her husband; if she 
 does not honour her husband, and does not do him good; great 
 trouble will await her in Hades, when she is dead. If the wo- 
 man does not care for her husband; when she dies, she will 
 get great trouble in Hades. \ man also, if he marries a woman, 
 who treats him well, if her husband beats her without cause; 
 but his wife does not abuse him, and does not take a lover, and 
 if her husband does not care for his wife; if that man dies, he 
 will go into the fire (hell), into great misery " 
 
 „Concerning rice also they sent me to tell you, that ye 
 should take care of rice, that ye should not spoiP) rice. If 
 one spoils rice, he will go into the fire (hell), when he dies. 
 As people were wasting the rice; therefore God sent down lo- 
 custs and rats to spoil the rice." ') 
 
 At that time he tells them also what he saw, where he 
 was all day; if he saw a place of gladness (joy), he states it; 
 if he saw a bad place, he slates it. He says: „I saw a place 
 of joy, no work whatever is there, nothing but joy; Ihey are 
 only engaged in praising the name of God all day (and) all 
 night."*) 
 
 „These (words), which they said, I came to tell you." When 
 he has said these (things), Ihe man dies again, and relurnes 
 to the Hades; he is not able to speak on the first day, nor on 
 the second day, nor on the third day, till on the fourth day 
 then only he can speak again in Hades. 
 
 1) Or also: ,, honour, respect etc." Sense: ,,let every one 
 fear God etc." 
 
 2) Or: „waste." 
 
 3) Lit. „this caused God to bring down locusts etc." 
 
 4) Lit. „they spend all day only they praise the name of 
 God all day all night."
 
 — 38 — 
 
 2. 
 W'lini vi ri ka an-lo na Fiitima Brema. aii'es-n'on Len- 
 sene, owo fi ro-Raka, ^) ka 'a kara-ko ro-Kabata, 'a bene-ko ri; 
 ko pa won mo o-trar-k'on o fi ro-Gbonko. fi gbo, o bap Pa 
 Lensene ro-krifi. Pa Lensene o pa rofion: „KaIane, I tsi som- 
 mn. Be ma ko-e, kane Mori Lamina traka tra-bap, atra ha ma 
 tens-e, tra yi rorarmi. Tra na lafti an-sar, tra ua bes ri; di-an 
 Ira-bap tra-p6to tra yi, di-an an-tasale na yi; tra na kdii an- 
 sar, ana fair ro-kuiik-e, kama na fali-ni, kama na bes ri; di-an 
 tra-bap tra-temne tra yi. Tra na ko kali ro-bat, ha hatr aka- 
 bat, ha ko kali ka atr'antr tra-bana, kama ha kali ak'olo, ro 
 alr'antr tra gbijp'trano; ri-ah ak'uma ka yi; tr' 'a kg wura-ki. 
 Be 'a wura-ki, Mori Lamina tra o bene-ki traka Lahai ow'an- 
 k'oh. Be tra bene ak'uma, tra o ten a-troko a-fera, de a- 
 gbera, kama o bempa ak'uma sehk, kama o soh-ki ka ow'^n 
 k'oh, be soto a-mera.*) Kane so Mgri Lamina: „„Be ma ba 
 traka ram w'iini a-kala, ram-ko o-fino. Mine, me I tse ba ra- 
 be! ra w'uni,^) I bap o-fino ro-krifi."" Kane-tsi a-yola sehk, 
 be w'flni o ba a-kala ha vv'iini,*) be o ram fe; ka-lrak ka-baki 
 ka yi ro-krifi traka tr'oh. Tra ha nesa yahfa; w'iini 6 w'uni 
 owo tse nesa yahfa, be o fi-e, o tra Irama ka m'one ma-bana 
 ro-krifi." 
 
 1) The camp of Fatima Brema while engaged in a war. 
 
 2) Lit. „when he gets sense." 
 
 3) Lit. „ because I had no debt of a person." 
 
 4) Lit. „if one has money of a person," = „if one owes 
 money to a person."
 
 — 39 — 
 
 9 
 There was a man in the time of Fatima Brenia,*) whose 
 name was Lensene, who died in the Camp, and the}' brought 
 him to Kabata, and buried him there; and it is long since his 
 slave died at Gbonko. As soon as he was dead, he met Mr. Len- 
 sene in Hades. Mr. Lensene said to him: „Return, 1 will send 
 thee. When thou goest, tell the Mori -man Lamina about the 
 axes, which thev were seeking, Ihey are behind. Let them turn 
 up the stone, let them dig there; there are the European axes, 
 (and) there is the pray-ketlle; -) let them look at the stone, 
 which is near to the fence, that they may move it away, and 
 that they may dig there; there the country axes are. Let them 
 look at the brook, and go up at the brook, and go and look al 
 the large timber trees, that they may look at the hollow, where 
 the tin)ber trees join together; there the box is; let them 'ake 
 it out. When they take it out, Lamin;i the Mori-man shall 
 keep (preserve) it for Lahai, his son. When he is keeping the 
 box, let him look for a white fowl, and for rice flour, that he 
 may perform all the ceremonies requisite for the keeping of the 
 box,^) that he ma^ give it to his son, when he arrives at the 
 ^ears of discretion. Tell also Lamina !he Mori-man: „„lf thou 
 hast to pay money to one, pay him well. I, because 1 did not 
 owe a debt to a person, fared well in Hades,"" Tell it to all 
 gentlemen, if one has to pay money to a person, and does not 
 pay, there is a heavy palaver for him in the future world. Let 
 them be afraid of deceitful dealing; every one who is not afraid 
 of deceitful dealing, will he in great misery in the future world." 
 
 1) Fatima Brema was the predecessor of Namiua Modu, the 
 late Alikali, or Chief at Port-Loko, who was Alikali there, when 
 the author resided at that town. 
 
 2) It is a brass -pan used by the Mohammedans for their 
 ablutions. 
 
 3.) That is by making a sacrifice of the fowl and flour iu 
 behalf of the person, who buried the box, and who sent the 
 slave, and by putting the sacrifice a little while in the box for 
 the Krili.
 
 — 40 
 
 0-1rar o der ka Mori Lamina, o kane-ko ama-trel ame be; 
 ko mo pon kano senk, o pa ho: „M6j I fi-e, 1 tsi wur he so 
 ro-kri'fi, I kono Ion labana." Mo o pon pa atse, o fi so, o kal 
 he so der. 
 
 Ara-l)omp IV. 
 M'ump. 
 
 An'nmp I. 
 Pa Kamu de Pa Tran-an. 
 
 o 
 
 *) Pa Kamu de Pa Tran na }i ri tapan. Pa Kamu o yi 
 ro-kanl ro-petr raver; Pa Tran o ^-i ro-petr. Pa Kamu o Ira 
 tral ar'im ra Pa Tran Idko 6 Idko ro-pelr, o tral 'a tra bonlr- 
 ko an'es loko 6 Igko. Mo o nank Pa Tran-a, o pa ho: „W'an, 
 mun' mari-lr'ei ro-petr!" Pa Tran o pa: „Yao, man kone." 
 Na kone ro-petr. Pa Tran o pa so: „I Isi rana-mu, ma ma 
 
 1) Or: Pa Kamu o yi ri tapan. tral 'a tra tsela Pa 
 Tran loko 6 loko. Pa Kamu o tsela Pa Tran, o pa ho: „Pa 
 Tran, mun' mari-tr'cl!" Pa Tran o pa ho: „Miu' mari-tr'el-i?" 
 w6sa-ko a-lg u'iu, ka Pa Tran o pa ho: „Man kone, rensa- 
 mi ro-mut." rensa Pa Tran; o kere-ko ra-gbdnkto. Na yoka 
 ka-lapatr, 'a nap-ko-ki ro-iuut. Pa Kamu g fai, g pa hg: „0 
 baki, Pa Tran!" Pa Tran g pa hg: „Ma uank-i? baki-mi, 
 be I kgt-e; mihig ma nank gbo 3'an-e, ma pa hg miu' mari- 
 tr'el: tsTa som ma nank yan."*) Pa Kamu g paT ro-tgf, g wgn' 
 do-kant. 
 
 *) Lit. »it sent thou didst see thus (so).<s
 
 -_ 41 — 
 
 The slave came to Lamina the Mori-man, and told him 
 all these things; and when he had told all, he said: „When 1 
 die again, 1 shall not come out again from Hades, I shall now 
 go for ever." When he had said these (words), he died again, 
 and did not come back again. 
 
 Chapter IV. 
 Fables. 
 
 Fahle I. 
 
 The Iguana and the Dog^^) 
 
 There was once an Iguana and a Dog. The Iguana was 
 in the hush close to the town; the Dog was in the town. The 
 Iguana was always hearing the voice of the Dog in the town, 
 he heard that they were always calling him by his name. When 
 he saw the Dog, he said: „Friend, thou art fortunate in town!" 
 The Dog said: „Yes,^) let us go." They went into the town. 
 The Dog said again: „I will carry thee on my back, as thou 
 
 1) Or: There was once an Iguana. He heard that they 
 were always calling the Dog. The Iguana called the Dog, and 
 said: „Mr. Dog, thou art lucky!" The Dog said: „I lucky?" 
 He answered to him once in the affirmative,*) and the Dog said: 
 „Let us. go, get on my back." He got on the back of the Dog, 
 be carried him into a kitchen. They took a burning stick, and 
 knocked him with it on the back. The Iguana got a burn, and 
 said: „It is hard, Mr. Dog!" The Dog said: „Docst thou see? 
 It is bard for me, when I go about; as for thee, it only ap- 
 peared so to thee**) (when) thou saidst that I was lucky: this 
 is the reason that thou hast made such experience." The Iguana 
 jumped down to the ground, and went into the bush. 
 
 *) Or: »he was willing for liim for oncOj« i. c. cither granting that 
 ho was lucky; or to take the Igiuuia oiice with him to town. 
 **) Lit »thou, thou only seest thus, thou saidst that I otc.« 
 
 2) Lit. „Mr. Iguana and Mr. Dog." 
 
 3) Or: „Well, let etc."
 
 — 42 — 
 
 tse trara ro-petr-e." nina-ko, o kere-ko ra-gbonkto; iiabap') 
 'a botr o-sem ka k'aro. Pa Tran o yoka o-sem ro-k'aro. Ow'a- 
 het pa lio: „0 gbo , ya! Pa Tran o AOka o-sem!" 0-borko 
 yoka ka-lapatr, o sap Pa Kamu ro-inut ka Pa Tran. Pa Tran 
 gbiike (0 ba Pa Kamu), na ko yira rokan. 'A botr a-nak a- 
 lan, 'a re son Pa Tran-aii ; kere an-nak, ma na yi a-tan, lia be' 
 he Ira na na-ran. Ma 'a poh som o-sem 'a wura tra-banl, 'a 
 re faka Pa Triin-an. Pa Tnin-an o pa ka Pa Kamu: „W"an, 
 man di o-sem." Pa Kamu o pa: „0-sem-'o-mi taho; I ba he 
 e-sek fra som tra-bant. Ma Pa Tran o pon som tra-bant, o 
 pa: „Man kone rolenken." Na kg bek roleiiken, na bap') 'a 
 Ira di. Pa Tran o ko mun am'antr; 'a yoka k'elr, 'a gbanta Pa 
 Kamu; mo o rensa Pa Tran, ak'eir ka be' ^) he Pa Tran. Pa 
 Tran o Avur, na ko yira rokan. Pa Kamu o pa ho : „I yema 
 kone." Kere Pa Tran o pa: „Tse ko, w'an; min' mari-tr'el. 
 ma tra sdlo tenon a-boya." 'A ba tra-bant, 'a re faka-na-tsi. 
 
 o o - - - ^ o 
 
 Pa Tran o pa: „W'an, der, sa re som o-sem." Pa Kcimu o 
 pa: „Di gbo; mina, I ba he e-sek." Pa Tran, mo o pon som 
 atra-bant, o pa: „Man kone rolenken." Na ko bap ^) rolenken 
 'a tra ros. Pa Tran o ko Ion am'antr, 'a yoka k'etr, 'a sap- 
 kg; kere Pa Kamu kgng mo sgtg ka-sap gbo, 'A bal-bal Pa 
 Tran-an, g gbiike. Pa Kamu g pa sg: „I yema kone." Pa 
 Tran g pa: „Tse kg, an-lambe-'a-su na yi rodi, man kone." 'A 
 kone rolenken , 'a bap ') 'a tra di. Pa Kamu g yi ro-mut ka 
 Pa Tran-an. Pa Tran o ko Ion am'antr, 'a Mop Pa Tran-an, 
 
 1) For: bap-fia 'a etc., „met them they etc." 
 
 2) Or: bap, „meet." 
 
 3^ For: bap-na r. etc., „raet thcra etc."
 
 — 43 — 
 
 doest not know how to shift for thyself in town." He carried 
 him on his back, and carried him into a kitchen; they met them 
 putting meat into a bowl. The Dog took the meat in the bowl. 
 The child said: „0 dear, mother! The Dog took the meat!" 
 The damsel took a burning stick, and knocked the Iguana on 
 the back of the Dog. The Dog ran (he had the Iguana), and 
 they went and sal without. They put a little cooked rice 
 (into a bowl), and came and gave (it) to the Dog; but the rice, 
 as it was a little, was not sufficient for both of them. When 
 they had eaten the meat, they took out the bones, and ^vent 
 and threw (them) for the Dog. The Dog said to the Iguana: 
 „Friend, let us eat the meat." T!ie Iguana said: „This is no 
 meat for me, V) I have no teeth to eat bones." When the Dog 
 had eaten the bones, he said: „Let us go yonder." They went 
 and came to the other yard, they met them eating. The Dog 
 went and lapped the soup; they took a whip, they beat the 
 Iguana: as he was on the back of the Dog, the whip did not 
 reach the Dog. The Dog went out, they went and sat with- 
 out. The Iguana said: „I want lo go away." But the Dog 
 said: „Do not go, friend; I am lucky, thou wilt get a present 
 to day." They had bones, they came and threw them for them. 
 The Dog said: „Friend, come, we will eat the meat." The 
 Iguana said: „Do but eal; as for me, I have no teeth." The 
 Dog, when he had eaten the bones, said: „Let us go yonder 
 to the other yard." They went and met them taking out boiled 
 rice from the pot^) in the other yard. The dog went and upset 
 the soup; they took a whip, and flogged him; but the Iguana only 
 was getting the whipping. They drove the Dog away, he ran. 
 The Iguana said again: „I want to go away." The Dog said: „Do 
 not go, our present is before, let us go." They went into the other 
 yard, they met them eating. The Iguana was on the back of the Dog. 
 The Dog went and upset the soup; they took hold of the Dog, 
 
 1) Lit. „My meat not at all etc ," or „M('at of me not 
 at all." 
 
 2) Or „ serving up boiled rice etc."
 
 — 44 — 
 
 'a sap,*) 'a wura ko rokaii ka sap-an. Pa Tran o gbuke, o 
 kone ro-kant, ro 'a yefa, na Pa Kamu-e. Pa Tran o pa: „M;m 
 kone." Pa Kamu o pa: „I kg ho so, o baki ro-petr." Pa 
 Kamu gbiike, o ko mankne. Pa Tran o pa: „I kone." Pa 
 Kamu pa: „K6ne , o baki ro-petr, I der he so." Pa Tran 
 pa: „Der, sa kone, ma ma pa min' mari-tr'el ro-pelr-e." 
 Pa Kamu o pa: „I ko he so." 
 
 Tsian Pa Kamu o minta he so w'uni, g der he ro-petr; o 
 yi gbo ro-kant. Pa Tran o nank gbo so Pa Kamu, o gbip-ko, 
 kara*) ro-petr, 'a re poh-kg som. 'A yif Pa Tran-a fo: „Ko 
 ne ma ma ki'ra Pa Kamu-e?" Kon' o pa: „I trdri-ko ka-mar- 
 tr'ei; mo o pa min' mari-tr'ei." Tsiah Pa Kamu o minta he so 
 w'uni; o minta he so Pa Tran-ah; o minta he so ro-petr. 
 
 An'ump II. 
 
 Pa Nes-ari, na Pa Trank-an, na Pa Taba. 
 
 ') Ye taho Pa Nes o ^fi ri iapan-i? O-bal o 
 trol Ira-na-tr'on, ka Pa Nes o ko kali alra-na; 
 
 1) Object: ko, „him" dropped, as is somctiug the case. 
 
 2) Or: 0-bai o trol tra-na-tr'ofi, ka Pa Nes o ko kali-fia, 
 ko re kane Pa Taba fg: ,,0-ua ka g-bal g-baua, man kg dif- 
 kg." Pa Taba g pa hg : „Tro sa ma yO-e?" Kere Pa Nes g 
 pa fg: „Mina trara sot; be pa pen bia, man kone." Ma a-fam 
 na poii dfra, g kg tami Pa Taba, g pa hg: „Mari kgue" Kg g 
 yokane, na kone. Ma iia kg bek ka g-na-e, Pa Nes g sut g-na, g pa:
 
 — 45 — 
 
 Ihey flogged (Innij ;<nd pulled him out while flogging. The Dog 
 ran, and went into the hush,') from whence they came, he 
 and the Iguana. The Dog said: „Let us go." The Iguana said: 
 „I do not go again, it is hard in town." The Iguana ran, and 
 went and hid himself. The Dog said: „I go." The Iguana said: 
 „Go, it is hard in town, I do not come again." The Dog said: 
 „Come, let us go, because thou saidst I was lucky in town." 
 The Iguana said: „I do not go again." 
 
 Therefore the Iguana does not dare again to come near a 
 person, he does not come to toun; he is onlv in the bush. 
 As to the Dog, as soon as he but sees again the Iguana, he 
 catches him, and brings (liimj to town, (and) they come and 
 devour him entirely. They asked the Dog: „\Vhy art thou 
 troubling the Iguana?" He said: „I show him (what) luckiness 
 (is); because he said I was lucky." Therefore the Iguana does 
 not venture again to come near a person; he does not venlure 
 again to come near a Dog; he does not venture to town again. 
 
 Fable II. 
 
 The^) Spider, and the Ant-Eater, and Mr. Taba. ') 
 
 Is i! not so that there was once a Spider? A (certain) king 
 look care of his cows, and the Spider went to look at the cows; 
 
 1) Or: „wood." 
 
 2) Lit. „Mr. Spider, and Mr. Antcater etc." 
 
 3) The name of a fabulous person. 
 
 4) Or: A (certain) king took care of his cows, and the Si-ider 
 went to look at them, and he came and told Mr. Taba: „As to 
 the large cow of the king, let us go and kill it." Mr,. Taba 
 said: ,,How shall wc manage (it)?" But the Spider said: „I 
 know an artifice; when it has got dark, let us go." After people 
 had gone asleep, he went and awoke Mr. Taba, and said: „Let 
 us go." And he rose up, (and) they went away. "When they 
 came to the cow,*) the Spider stroked**) the cow, and said: 
 
 *) Lit. »When they went and arrived at the cow etc ,« or »wheu 
 they go arrive at the cow etc.« 
 **) Or rather: » rubbed. «
 
 — 46 — 
 
 kg mo nauk o-na o-bana; o der kane Pa T^ba fo: ,,0-na ka 
 o-bal, owo yi o-bana, man kone ilif-ko tra som." Pa Taba o 
 pa: ,:1 minta he, Iro sa ma yo-e?" Pa Nes o pa: „Mina, 1 
 trara sot." Pa Taba g pa: „Ko a-sgt nan ane-e?" Pa Nes g 
 pa: „Man kone ro-lal, ro atra-na na ma wgnt-e." Na kone 
 ro-lal, na kg bap Pa Trank-a, g tra bes ro-tgf. Pa Nes g pa 
 rongn: „Ma mam bes ang-a? Be atra-na tra g-bai na wgn ka 
 am-bi-e, ma tra sgtg a-pa de ka-trak." Ma Pa Trank-a g Iral 
 atse, g nesa, g kone roleiiken, g kara e-tgf tra botr ka am-bi, 
 ana g bempa. Pa Trahk g pa sg: „I yema kg fotane.-' Pa 
 Nes g pa: „Man kone ro rgmu, ro man dira-e." Kere g bolra 
 Pa Trank-a yanfa, kama g trara, ro g mg dira. Na kg sg. Ma 
 na kg be' ri-e, Pa Nes g pa hg: „I tsi kalane." Pa Trank-a 
 g pa hg: „Kgne, ma-re ma ba-mi." Pa Nes g kone, g kg ban 
 g-na g-bana ka g-bai, g kara-kg, g re wgna-kg ro-bi; gd'er, ro 
 Pa Trank-a g fanta, g fatr ri, g kalane ro-petr. 0-bai g pa 
 ka an-fet-iVgh: „Kgne nan, kaU atra-na ro-lal, pa yema bia." 
 Na kg bafi-iia. Na kg bap g-na g yi ro-bi, g wiira gbo 'ra- 
 bomp. Afi-fel na gbuke, na kg kane g-bai fg: ,,0-na g wgii 
 ro-bi, g yema fi." Mg Q-bal g tral atse, g tsela an-fam be, g 
 
 „Na site! Na site!" Kg g-na g site, na ^Ygn' etc.
 
 — 47 — 
 
 and ^vhen he saw a large cow, he came and told Mr. Taba: 
 „As to the cow of Ihe king, which is large, come let us kill 
 it to eat (it)." Mr. Taba said: „I do not dare, how shall we 
 manage (it)?" The Spider said: „As for me, I know an arti- 
 fice." Mr. Taba said: „\Vhal artifice is that?"') The Spider 
 said: „Let us go to the grass-field, where the cows are grazing " 
 The;v' went to the grass-field, thev went and met the Anl-Eater, 
 he was making a hole in the ground. The Spider said to him: 
 „Wh;y art thou digging here?^) if the cows of Ihe king get into 
 the hole, thou wilt get a mailer and a palaver." When the 
 Ant-Ealer heard this, he was afraid, and went to some distance, 
 and brought earth to put (it) into the hole, which he had made. 
 The Ant-Ealer said again: „I want to go and rest myself." The 
 Spider said: „Let us go yonder to thy place, where thou doest 
 sleep." But he acted deceitfully against the Ant-Ealer, that he 
 might know, where he was sleeping. They went again. When they 
 reached Ihere,^) the Spider said: „I shall return." The Ant-Eater 
 said: „Go, I am sleepy." The Spider left, and went and fetch- 
 ed the large cow of the king, he brought it, and came and 
 put it in!o the hole; the place, where the Ant-Ealer lay down, 
 was near to it, (and) he returned to town. The king said to his 
 children:*) „Go ye, and look after the cows on the grass-field, it 
 wants to get dark." They went to fetch them. They went and 
 met a cow in the hole, she only put forth the head. The children 
 ran, and went and told the king: „A cow got inio a hole, and is 
 about to die." When the king heard this, he called all the people, and 
 
 „Cow, break the wind! Cow break the wind!" And the cow 
 broke the wind, (and) they went into etc." 
 
 1) Lit. „Wliat artifice that this?" 
 
 2) Seems rather to be an elliptical expression, for: ,,What 
 art — — here forV (Take care what thou art about.) If the 
 cows etc." 
 
 3) Lit. „When they go reach there," or „when they went 
 and reached there etc." 
 
 4,) Or „boys".-
 
 — 48 — 
 
 pa roiiaii: „Mari kone ^^ul"a nan o-na ro-bi." Na be na ko ri, 
 fia bao o-na o fi ton. An-fam na bes, na wi'ira o-na ka am-bi. 
 
 or—— o 
 
 O-bal pa ho: „Atr'ei atse tra kela-mi, o-na o-bana o der fi 
 and; ko Ir'el-e?" Pa Nes o pa ho: „Tr' 'a tsela Pa Traiik-a, 
 kono ;^'i ro-lal." Na pa ho: „Ma sa tse trara ro o yi-e." 
 Pa Nes pa so: „Tr' 'a tsela-ko, o fair and," 0-bai o tsela- 
 ko; Pa Trank-a o wosa. O-bai o pa so: „Der ba letnp-a!" 
 Pa Trank o bek. Q-bal o pa so: „Wan-ka-mi, der ba, kaU 
 Ir'el-a!" Mo o bek ri, o-bal o pa roridn: „Kane }o ama-pant 
 ame, kama o-na-ka-mi o der fi re-e?" ?& Trank o pa ho: 
 „Mina yo ama-pant ame; kere min' laho kara g-na cind; min' 
 taho dif-ko." Pa Nes o kg fatr Pa Taba, g kane-kg sgi: „Pa 
 Trank-a, sa tra sgm-kg tengri." O-bai de Pa Trank 'a tra 
 tonka. 0-baI g pa: „Pa Nes, Pa Trank-a kgn' lahg yi ro-lal-i?" 
 Pa Trank g pa: „Mina yi ro-lal; kere min' tahg dif g-sem." 
 Pa Nes g pa ho: „Ma Ira tdnka-i? Me 1 la kane-mu-e: tse 
 bes ro-lal, ri-an e-sem ha ma wgnt; be g-na g der gbo, g wgri 
 ro-bi-e, g fi gbo-e, miing dif- kg." 0-bal g yif Pa Trank -a: 
 „Mung bes e-bi y'anle eye-i?" wosa. 0-bal g pa sg: „W'an, 
 ma difa-mi o-na!" Pa Nes o kdne sgi ka g-sanlki, g kg kane- 
 
 o 
 
 kg: „Wop-kg nan, kgng dif g-na." Pa Trank-a g tra tonka de 
 g-bai-an. 0-santki g wop Pa Trank-a, g pa: „Ma tonkas g-bai 
 ka-tsin;" o pa: „Mg o dif g-na ka g-bai-an, tr'a dif-kg nan."
 
 — 49 — 
 
 said to Ihem: „Lf't us go, and pull out the cow from Ihe hole." 
 They all went there, they found that the cow was dead already. 
 The people digged, and pulled out the cow from the hole. The 
 king said: „This thing puzzles me, the large cow came and died 
 here; how is this?" The Spider said: „Let Ihem call the Ant-Eater, 
 he is on the grass-field." They said : „\Vhen we do not know where 
 he is."') The Spider said again: „Let them call him, he is close 
 by." The king called him; the Ant-Eater answered. The king said 
 again: „Come here quickly!" The Ant-Eater arrived. The king 
 said again: „My friend, come here, look at soniething!" When 
 he came there, the king said lo him: „\Vho did this work, that 
 my cow came to die here?" The Ant-Eater said: „I did this 
 work; but it was not I who brought the cow here; it was not 
 I who killed it." The Spider went and came near to Mr. Taba, 
 and told him softly: „As for the Ant-Eater, we shall eat him 
 to day." The king and the Ant-Eater were debating the matter. 
 The king said: „Mr. Spider, was it not the Ant-Eater who was 
 on the grass-field?" The Ant-Eater said: „I was on the grass- 
 field; but it was not I who killed the beast." The Spider said: 
 „Art thou expostulating? When I used to tell thee: do not 
 dig at the grass-field, there beasts are grazing; if but a cow 
 comes, and goes into the hole, and dies, thou doest kill it." 
 The king asked the Ant-Eater: „Uidst thou dig these four holes?'' 
 He answered in the affirmative. The king said again: „Friend, 
 thou hast killed me the cow!" The Spider went softly to the 
 minister of the king, he went and told him:^J „Take ye hold 
 of him, he killed the cow." The Ant-Eater was expostulating 
 with the king. The minister of the king took hold of the Anl- 
 Eater, and said: „Thou doest expostulate in vain with the king;" 
 and said: „As he killed the cow of the king, let them kill him " ^) 
 
 1) That is: „When w^e is (how can we call hiniVj" 
 
 It is rather an elliptical expression. 
 
 2) Lit. „lie go tell liiui: (as the Lib. Africans say) == „he 
 went to tell etc." 
 
 3) Lit. „let them kill him ye." 
 
 TemiiL' - Fabulu. ^
 
 — 50 — 
 
 Pa Nes pa: „Awa, ti' 'a dif-ko;'' mo o veina di ') Pa Trank-a. 
 Na dif Pa Trank. 0-baT o pa: „Man kere-ko, kama sa ko 
 bene-ko lo-petr." Kere Pa Nes o pa: „Tr' a tse ko bene ro- 
 petr, bene-ko ka ro-lal ka ka-petr-k'on." Ma Pa Nes o pa 
 \an-e, na bene Pa Trank ka am-bi, ro o-nii o fi. Ma na pen 
 bene-kg, o-bal o pa; „Mah kone nan ro-petr, kania 1 ko yer 
 o-na." Na ko bek ro-petr, o-bal o ver o-na sehk. 0-bai o 
 pa so: „Pa Nes kono som 1 trara owo difa-mi o-na-e, tr' 'a 
 sgfi-ko a-lank." Na son-ko. Ah-fam na sakane, 'a kdne fanta. 
 Ma an-ffjm na pofi dira-e, Pa Nes o wur, o Isela Pa Taba; na 
 ko ban Pa Trank ro-lal, na kere-ko ka aii-set-n'on roraran; na 
 ko pon ko tsen senk, g ver Pa Taba. Ka Pa Taba g pa hg : 
 Pa Nes, ma foT he tr'el!" Pa Nes g pa: „Me I pa ma Ir'a he 
 sgt-i?" Ka na sgm-kg ha ah'of na fi. Pa Taba g pa hg : 
 ,,Yawe, an-lg lian ka-sgm g-sem!" Pa Nes g pa: „Man kar 
 tani tratrak, sa tra som anina o-sem." Ma pa bia, ka a-fam na 
 pon dira, g kg tsela Pa Taba; ha kgne, na kg bap tra-na tra 
 g-bai, ha kotar-ha. Pa Nes g wiira an-trgl-h'gh, g kg sut g-na 
 g-bcina, g pa: „Na, site! Na, site!" O-na g site, ha wgn' do- 
 k'or-k'gh, ha Pa Taba. Pa Nes o trgri Pa Taba ka ka-but, g 
 pa hg: „Tse gbak ang." wiira a-tis, g sgh Pa Taba; kere 
 
 1) Or: sgni, „devour".
 
 — 51 — 
 
 The Spider said: „W{'1I, let tlirm kill liiin;" because he wanted 
 to eat the Ant-Ealer. They killed the Ant-Eater. The king said: 
 „Let us carry him away, that we may go and bury him in the 
 town." But the Spider said: „Lel them not bury him in town, 
 bury him on the grass-field in his town." When the Spider said 
 this, they buried the Ant-Eater in the iiole, where the cow died. 
 When they had buried him, the king said: „Let us go to town, 
 that I may go and share the cow." They went and arrived 
 at the town, (and) the king shared out the whole of the cow. 
 The king said again: „As to the Spider, he caused me to know 
 who killed me the cow, let them give him a leg." They gave 
 (it) to him. The people dispersed, they went and lay down. 
 When the people had gone asleep, the Spider went out, and 
 called Mr. Taba; they went and fetched the Ant-Eater at the 
 grass-field, they carried him behind his house; they went and 
 cut him up entirely, he shared (the meat) with Mr. Taba. 
 And Mr, Taba said: „Spider, thou doest not joke!"') The 
 Spider said: „When I said that thou didst not know cunning?" 
 And they ate of it (meat) till the month was done. Mr. Taba 
 said: „0h dear, that lime (of) eating meat (is over)!"^) The 
 Spider said: „Let us wait till to night, we shall eat meat to 
 uiorrow." When it got dark, and people had gone asleep, he 
 went and called Mr. Taba; they left, and went and mot !he 
 cows of the king, they had lied them on.') The Spider took 
 out his medicine, and went and stroked') a large cow, and said: 
 „Cow, break the wind! Cow, break the wind!" The cow broke 
 the wind, and they went into her belly, he and Mr. Taba. The 
 Spider showed Mr. Taba the heart, and said: „l)o not cut 
 here." He took out a knife, and gave (it) to Mr. Taba; but 
 
 1) Lit. „Mr. Spider, thou uuiivcst no joke of a tiling,'' or 
 „thou doest etc.!" 
 
 2) This is an ellii)tical expression. 
 
 3) That is the kings people had tied them on. 
 
 4) Or „rubbed". 
 
 4*
 
 — 52 — 
 
 Pa Taba o pa: „I tr'a he tsi;') gbak, kaina I kali." pa: 
 „Yao, kara ka-mote." Pa Nes o tra gbak, o son Pa Taba; kono 
 botr ka ka-mote. Na lasar ka-mote. wura so an-trol, o sut 
 o-na, pa: ,.Na site! Na, site!" Q-na o site, na wur, na ko 
 di o-sem ka-tsi ma-rei m'afile. A-lokg lorn tratrak Pa Nes o 
 ko tsela Pa Taba, o pa: „Man kdne." Na ko bap atra-na tra 
 o-baT. Pa Nes o der, o vviira an-trol, o sut o-na, o pa: „Na, 
 M'le! Na, site!" O-na o site, na won-ko ro-k'or. Pa Nes o 
 Avura a-lis, o son Pa Taba, o kane-ko to ho: „Ko ka tsen-an 
 ro-kapatr." Kon' o kdne ka Isen ka an-fi-an. Pa Taba o ko 
 
 ore ___. 
 
 bap m'aro nia-lal ka ka-but, o ko gbak ara-bena ra ka-but; o- 
 na fumpg, o fi. Pa Taba o tr'a he tsi; kere Pa Nes o Irara- 
 tsi. Pa Nes o pa ho: „Pa Taba, o-na o fi!" Pa Taba o pa: 
 „Tro sa ma yo-e, mo o-na o fi-e?" Pa Nes o pa: „Ma mank- 
 ne: mina, I tsi mankne ka am'im." Pa Taba o pa: „Mina, me 
 1 tse trara sot-e, I tsi yira and." Pa Nes o mankne ka am'im; 
 Pa Taba o won ka am-piitu. Ma pa pen sok bat, an-fet na 
 o-bal na pa: „0 gbo, Pa, o-na o fi!" Na ko tsen o-na. Ma 
 na ma tsen o-na, 'a trapa ka-bap ka tra-sak. Pa Nes g pa ro- 
 k'or ka o-na: „Tr' 'o ma Irap-mi-e! Tr' 'o ma trap-mi-e!" Mg 
 pa yan-e, na nesa; 'a kg kane g-bal, fg r'aka ra fgf ka o-sein 
 rokor. 0-baI g bek, o pa: „Trap na ba sg-a!" Kere Pa Nes 
 
 li Or: I tr'a he yi; „T do not know thus," = „I cannot 
 do this."
 
 — 53 — 
 
 Mr. Tabji said: „I do not know it; cut, that I may look at." 
 He said: „Yes,*) bring tlie basket." The Spider was cutting, 
 and gave (the meal) to Mr. Taba; he put (it) in the basket. 
 Thev filled the basket. He pulled out again the medicine, and 
 stroked^) the cow, and said: „Cow, break the wind! Cow, break 
 the wind!" The row broke the wind, they came out, and went 
 and ate of thai meal for four days. Another time at nighl the 
 Spider went and called Mr. Taba, and said: „Lel us go" 
 They went and met the cows of the king. The Spider came, 
 he took out the medicine, he stroke^) the cow, and said: „Cow, 
 break the wind! Cow, break the wind!" The cow broke the 
 wind, they went into her belly. The Spider took out a knife, 
 and gave (il) to Mr. Taba, and told him now: „Go and cut at 
 the breas'." He he went and cut at one of the loins. ^) Mr. Taba 
 went and met with much fat at the heart; he went and cut 
 the heart-strings; the cow fell down, and died. Mr. Taba flid 
 not know it; but the Spider knew it. The Spider said: „Mr. Taba, 
 the cow is dead!" Mr. Taba said: „How must we di), as the 
 cow is dead?" The Spider said: „Let us hide ourselves: as 
 for me, I shall hide myself at the liver." Mr. Taba said: „As 
 for me, because 1 do not know cunning, I shall sit down here." 
 The Spider hid himself at the liver; Mr. Taba went into the 
 rectum. When it had fully dawned, the children of the king, 
 said: „0h dear, Sir, the cow is dead!" They went and cut 
 up the cow. When Ihey were cutting up the cow, they chopped 
 with an axe at the ribs. The Spider said within the cow : 
 „Mind, that thou doest not chop me! Mind, that thou doest not 
 chop me!"*) When he spoke thus, they were afraid; they went 
 and told the king, that something talked within the beast. The 
 king came, and said: „Chop ye now here again!" But the Spider 
 
 1) Or: „WelL bring etc." 
 
 2) Or „rubbed". 
 
 3) Lit. „Go in iby) cutting at the breast." lie he went in 
 (by) cutting at the loin. =^ „Go be cutiing at the breast." lie 
 he was cutting etc. 
 
 4) Lit. „Not that thou ohup me! Not that me!"
 
 — 54 — 
 
 kal inankne rolenken ka ro-k'or. Ma ha \)oi\ Irap-e, 'a ko 
 nan'-ko de ka-motc-k'oh; 'a vvura-ko de ka-mole, na kg sek- 
 ko. Ma 'a poh tsen o-sem sehk, na ko sap Pa Nes-ah. 
 bal pa: „Pa Nes-an, konoh mo p6ha-mi o-sein, tr' 'a sap-ko." 
 Ma 'a gbanta-ko win-e, o kiilo, o pa: „Sya Taba, sya yi! Sya 
 Taba, sya yi!" 0-baT o pa: „Tr' 'a trel ba ka-sap-ko-a, Ir' 'a 
 yif-ko ba." Na yif Pa Nes : „Nya kane der tra dif o-sem-e?" 
 pa: „Sya Taba, sya dif o-sem." Na pa: „Kona Taba?" 
 pa: ,.I Ir'a he ro o ko-e." Kg g bal o pa: „31a yemsa Taba; 
 mun' son, mung dif-kg " Kero Pa Taba g yi ka ain-putu, g 
 mankne. Na^ wiira am-putu, 'a sgh ah-fet tra kg yak ro-bat. 
 Na kgne ro-bat, ha kg gbal am-piilu, ha wgn am-putu ro-m'anlr. 
 Ma ha wgn-hi ro m'antr yah-e, Pa Taba g wur, g kg tralpe 
 romgri, g pa hg: „Ko na yg-mi yah-e?" Ah-fet ha pa: „0 
 gbo, Pa-ka-mi, sa tr'a he Isi!" Wahel o-lgm g kg trori-tsi ka 
 g-bal; g-bai g der, g kali Pa Taba, g pa rghgh: „Ko he-e?" 
 Pa Taba g pa: „ Ah-fet ha yg-mi gbo ka-tsih, ha sakar-mi gbo 
 e-nin ya g-nii!" O-bal g kg bah r'lima, de y'ahkra, g kara, 
 g sgh Pa Taba, g pa: „Bukg, \v'8n-ka mi!" Mg g poh bukg, 
 ha wiir ro-petr. Pa Nes g pa sg: „Pa Taba sya yi." Kere 
 kgn' g pensa. Na pa hg: „Tbela g-rani ka Pa Taba, kama sa
 
 — oo — 
 
 hid himself again in anothor place of the belly. When thev 
 had done with chopping, they went and saw him and his 
 basket; they pulled him out and the basket, and went and 
 tied him. When they had cut up the whole of the beast, they 
 went and flogged the Spider. The king said : „The Spider, 
 he was destroying me the beast, let them flog him." When 
 they struck him once, he cried, and said: „1 and Taba, we 
 were together! 1 and Taba, we were together!"*) The king 
 said: „Let them leave off now from flogging him, let them ask 
 him now." They asked the Spider; „Thou and who^) came 
 to kill the beast?" He said: „I and Taba. we killed the beast." 
 They said: „Where is Taba?" He said: .,1 d'ont know where 
 he went to." And the king said: ..Thou doest tell a lie about 
 Taba; thou alone, thou didst kill it." But Mr. Spider was in 
 the rectum, he hid himself. They look out the rectum, and 
 gave (it) to the children lo go and wash (it) at the brook. 
 They went to the brook, and went and burst the rectum, and 
 shook out the bag into the water. While they thus shook it 
 out into the water, Mr. Taba came out, and went and jumped 
 to the other side, and said: „Why treat ye me in this way?" 
 The children said; „0h dear. Sir,*) we did not know it!" Some 
 child went and informed the king of it. The king came, he 
 looked at Mr. Taba, and said to him: „Whal is the matter?" 
 Mr. Taba said: „The children treated me but in a vile manner, 
 they just bespattered me with cow-dung!" The king went and 
 fetched a shirt, and a pair of trowsers, and brought (them), 
 and gave (them) to Mr. Taba, and said: „Wash thyself, my 
 friend!" When he had washed himself, they went into the 
 town.*) The Spider said again: „It was Mr. Taba and I." But 
 he denied (it). They said: „Call the wife of Mr. Taba, that we 
 
 1) Lit. „We Taba, wc were! We T. we were!" But the 
 Plur. form is in such cases used also for the Singular; and the 
 copula implied in the pronoun. 
 
 2) Lit. „Ye who came etc.?" 
 
 3) Lit. „my Sir." 
 
 4) That is: „they went out (tVoui the water) into the town.''
 
 — 56 — 
 
 yif-ko." Ma na tsela-ko, na ;)if-ko. pa ho: „Pa Taba o dira 
 he and, ar'etr ra lal (lis ino o wur ro-set, o Rone." 0-baI o 
 pa ho: „Pa Nes konon; mo o pa fo Ron' de Pa Taba na dif 
 o-na-e, o yeinsa-ko gbo." Pa Taba o pa: „Kali-mi and; o 
 yeinsa-mi; be sya \i nan-e, na bt^p-mi ka ro-k'or ka o-na." 
 
 Na pa to: „Tr' 'a sap Pa Nes-an, kdno dif o-na." Na 
 kere-ko ka a-balr, 'a gbak ka-rdnko ka am-bair, 'a sapa-ko ka- 
 rdnko. Tsian o \vur Ir'atrak tra-hiT. 0-baT o pa: „Tr' 'a tser- 
 ko." Ma na tser-ko, o kdne, o ko tril; o vokane, o ba tr'atrak 
 tra-gbati; o gbiike, o kdne ro-kant. 
 
 Ah'uiiip 111. 
 
 Ow'ahet de am-Bami>an. 
 
 Wahet yi ri tapaii, o gbatr ma-teli ka a-tan' data, ko o 
 sapas a-bamp. Amba, mo o pon ko som, g kal so Idmpar ama- 
 leli, kg g kal s^pas a-bamp; kg g gbiike g kdisi ambamp, kg 
 kere-kg ro-baiika; kcre g-kara-k'gri g bal-kg ro-gbanfrani tra 
 kg bal e-bamp. Kg gw'ahet g pa hg: „Ya, tgfsa-mi'j am-bamp." 
 O-kara-k'gii g pa hg: „Iv6d." Amba, mg gw'ahet g kdne, g-kara- 
 k'gn g dif am-bamp, kg g liisi-kg, g kg tgls-kg, g sgm-kg larap. 
 Mg gw'ahet g der-e, kg g yif g-kara-k'gn tra am-bamp, o-kara-k'gii 
 g pa hg: „I pon kg sgm." Kg gw'ahet g bok, g pa hg: „Bom, 
 sgn-mi am-bamp-'a-mi! Bom, sgn mi am-bamp-'a-mi, gwd I dif ro- 
 lan'dala, lania, lan'data!"^) Amba, o-bom o soii-ko tra-mahk, ko 
 
 1) Or: „broil." 
 
 2) The preposition ro- before the tirst tan' data belongs here 
 also to the following tanta and tan' data.
 
 — 57 — 
 
 may inquire of her." When they had called her, thev inqinred 
 of her. She, said: „Mr. Taba did not sleep here; the sun was 
 slill high yesterday when he went out of the house, and went 
 away." The king said: „It is the Spider; when he said that he 
 and Mr. Taba killed the cow, he only told a lie against him." 
 Mr. Taba said: „Look me here; he told a lie against me; if it 
 had been 1, ').ye would have met me in the belly of the cow." 
 They then said: „L('l them flog the Spider, he killed the 
 cow." They led him to a young jialm-tree, and cii! a branch 
 from the young palm-tree, they flogged him with the palm-leaf.^) 
 This is the reason that he got many legs. The king said: „Let 
 him go."') When they left liin). he departed, and went and 
 was sick; he recovered,*) he had many legs; he ran, and went 
 away into the bush. 
 
 Fal)le III. 
 
 The Child and the Bird. 
 
 There was once a child \\ho set a trap under a root, and 
 he cauglit a bird. Well, when he had eaten il, lie returned 
 and set the trap again, and he again caught a bird; and he 
 ran and loosed the bird; and carried it into the hul ; but his 
 mother drove him to the outskirts of the farm to go and drive 
 birds away. And the child said; „Mother, roast me the bird." 
 And his mother said: „Yes." Well, when the child was gone, 
 his mother killed the bird, and plucked it, and went and roasted 
 it, and ate it entirely. When the child came, and asked his 
 mother for the bird, his mother said: „I have eateu it." And 
 the child cried, and said: „Mother, give me my bird! Mother, 
 give me my bird, which 1 killed under the root, at the water- 
 fall, under the root!" Well, the molher gave him maize, and 
 
 1) Lit. „if it were wc," but the Plural is here used for the 
 Singular. 
 
 2) Or: „palm-branch." 
 
 3) Lit. „Let them leave him." 
 
 4) Or: ,,he got up."
 
 — 58 — 
 
 ren-lsi ro-lakat rokom; ke me e-morka na pon Isi som, ow'ahet 
 pa ka e-morka: „Morka, son-mi Ira-mank-tra-mi! Morka, son- 
 mi tra-mank-lra-mi, alra o-bom o son-mi! 0-bom o som am- 
 bamp-'a-mi, owol dif ro-fan' data, lanta, Ian' data." Amba, e-moika 
 ha sala-ko e-bol; ko o kere-yi ro-bat ka ka-lanta traka kut. Ka ma 
 ka-lanta ka ma vvotr e-bol eyan, o pa ho: „Tanta, soh-mi e-bol- 
 'e-mi ! Tanta, son -mi e-bol-'e-mi, eye e-mdrka na soh-mi! 
 E-morka ha som Ira-mahk-tra-mi, atra o-bom o soh-mi; o-bom 
 som am-bamp-'a-mi, owg 1 dif ro-tan' data, tanta, tan' data." 
 Ka-lanta ka soh-ko a-fak; ka ma a-bar o mo yoka-ko, o pa ho: 
 „Bar, soh-mi ah-fak-'a-mi! Bar, soh-mi ah-fak-'a-mi, owo Tanta 
 0^) soh-mi! Tanta o ') wotr e-bol-'e-mi, eve e-morka ha sala- 
 mi; e-morka ha som tra-mahk-tra-mi, atra o-bom o soh-mi; o- 
 bom som am-bamp-'a-mi, owo 1 dif ro-tan' data, tanta, tan' 
 data." Amba am-bar o faka-ko k'hpo k'in. Amba, ma ah-fef 
 ha ma kere-ki, o pa ho: „Fef, soh-mi ak'upo-ka-mi! Fef, soh- 
 mi ak'upo-ka-mi, aka aih-bar o soh-mi! Am-bar o som ah-fak- 
 'a-mi, owo tanta o soh-mi; tanta o wotr e-bol-'e-mi, eye e- 
 morka ha sala-mi; e-morka ha som tra-mahk-tra-mi, atra o-bom 
 soh-mi; o-bom o som am-bamp-'a-mi, owo 1 dif ro-tan' data, 
 tanta, tan' data." Amba, ah-fef ha koha-ko ma-lel ma-lal. 
 Amba, ma tra-wolo ha poh di ama-lel-e, o pa ho : „W6lo, sgh- 
 mi ama-lel-ma-mi, ama ah-fef ha kona-mi! Ah-fef ha kere 
 ak'upo-ka-mi, aka am-bar o soh-mi; am-bar o som ah-fak-'a-mi, 
 owo tanta o soh-mi; tanta o wotr e-bgl-'e-mi, eye e-mdrka ha sala- 
 mi; e-mdrka ha som tra-mahk-tra-mi, atra o-bom o soh-mi; o-bom 
 som am-bamp-'a-mi, owd 1 dif ro-tan' data, tanta, tan' data." 
 
 1) The Cataract ish^re personified, hence the pronoun o, „he".
 
 — 59 — 
 
 he put it on the lop of the stump ol a tree; and when the 
 termites had eaten it, the chikJ said to the termites: „Ter- 
 mites, give me my maize! Termites, give me my maize, which 
 the mother gave me! The mother ate my bird, which I kiUed 
 under the root, at the water-fall, under the root." Well, the 
 termites made') him earthen pots; he carried Ihem to the 
 brook at the water -fall to scoop water with. And when the 
 cataract was breaking those earthen pots, he said: „Calaract, 
 give me my earthen pots! Cataract, give me my earthen pots, 
 which the termites gave me! The termites ate my maize, which 
 the mother gave me; the mother ate my bird, which I killed 
 under the roof, at the water-fall, under the root." The cataract 
 gave him a skate (fish); and when a hawk was taking it away, 
 he said: „Hawk, give me my skate! Hawk, give me my skate, 
 which the cataract gave me ! The cataract broke my earthen 
 pots, which the termites made') for me; the termites ate my 
 maize, which the mother gave me; the mother ate my bird, 
 which I killed unler the root, at the water-fall, under the root." 
 Well, the hawk dropped a feather for him. Well, when the 
 wind was earring it away, he said: „Wind, give me my feather! 
 Wind, give me my feather, which the hawk gave me! The 
 hawk ate my skate, which the catanict gave me; the cataract 
 broke my earthen pots, which the termites made for me; the 
 termites ate my maize, which the mother gave me; the mother 
 ate my bird, which 1 killed under the root, at the water-fall, 
 under the root.*' Well, the wind made many country -beans 
 to fall down for him. Well, when baboons had eaten the 
 beans, he said: „ Baboon, give me my country -beans, which 
 the wind made to fall down for me ! The w ind carried away 
 my feather, which the hawk gave me; the hawk ale my skate, 
 which the cataract gave me; the cataract broke my earthen 
 pots, which the termites made for me; the termites ate my 
 maize, which the mother gave me; the mother ate my bird, 
 which I killed under the root, at the water-fall, under the root." 
 
 1) Lit. ,.formed".
 
 — 60 — 
 
 Amba, ra-w6to o pa ho: „I ba ho r'aka traka son." Ko o sek 
 ara-M6lo; ko mo o pon ko sek, o kere-ko ro-petr. 
 
 A n ' 11 111 p IV. 
 
 Pa Rank re Pa W'ir-aii. 
 
 Pa Rank de Pa W'ir na yi ri tapan ; ka na gbakane ka- 
 wont ro-lal. Pa Rank, kono pa ho: ,.Mina tas-mu traka ka- 
 wont." Pa W'ir-an o pa ho: „De, ma yema; niina (as-mu." 
 Pa Rank o pa ho: „Tro ma tas-mi-e?" Pa W'ir-an o pa ho: 
 „Ma soko wont, sa piara wont." Pa Rank o pa ho: „Man kg 
 ka Pa Sonala, kama sa tonka." Amba, na kdne ka Pa Sonala. 
 Pa Souala o pa ho: „Pa Rank, ko ne-e, m\ der-e?" Pa Rank 
 pa ho: „Pa W'ir o farki-mi; Pa W'ir o lol, mina bana; o pa 
 fo tas-mi ka-wont." Pa Sonala o pa ho: „1 ta rok he am- 
 pa; man kone nan ro-lal." Pa W'ir o pa ho: „Be sa tra ko 
 ro-lal-e, man trap nan ano-kant ka-wont." Pa Rank g pa ho: 
 „1 selo." Pa Sonala o pa ho: „A\va!" Pa Rank o yi ka ka- 
 tra ka-dio ro-r'on; Pa W'ir o \i ka ka-tra ka-mero; Pa Sonala 
 trcima ro-r'on. Pa Rank o kere ka-tra rokom, o sim ey'i'ntr, 
 
 tra som e-bgpar-ya-tsi, ko o pa hg: „Pa W'ir g kolone ka-tsifi, 
 
 1 tas-kg." Pa W'ir g pa hg: „Man kg gbo, be pa yi hg ma tas-mi." 
 Pa Sonala g pa hg: „Man kg nan gbo, nyafi I me kali-an." Ka 
 ar'etr ra ka-tro Pa Sonala o pa ho: ,,Ma wnr nan ro-lal." Ma na 
 bek ro-lal-e, Pa W''ir-an gpahg: „Ma wgnt nan, man gbakane nan."
 
 — 61 — 
 
 Well Ihe baboon said: „1 have nolhing to give." And he tied the 
 baboon, and when he had tied him, he carried him into the town. 
 
 Fable IV. 
 
 The Elephant and the Goat. 
 
 There was once an Elephant and a Goat; and Ihe.y eon- 
 tended with each other in grazing on the grass-field. As to the 
 Elephant, he said: „I surpass thee in grazing." The Goat said: 
 „No, thou doest tell a lie; I surpass thee." The Elephant said: 
 „How doest thou surpass me?" The Goat said: „Let us graze 
 all night and all day."') The Elephant said: „Let us go to 
 the Lion, that we may debate the case together." Well, they 
 went to the Lion. The Lion said: „Mr. Elephant, what is the 
 matter that ye come?" The Elephant said; „The Goat despises 
 me; the Goat is little, I am big; he said that he surpasses me 
 in grazing." The Lion said. ,.I do not yet decide the matter; 
 let us go to Ihe grass-field." The Goat said: „If we are going 
 to the grass-field, let us begin grazing here in the bush." The 
 Elephant said; „I am willing." The Lion said: „Yery well!" 
 The Elephant was to the right hand of the road; the Goal was 
 to the left hand; the Lion stood in the road. The Elephant 
 put up the trunk,*) he broke the trees, and was eating the 
 leaves of them, and said: „The Goat boasts in vain, I surpass 
 him." The Goat said: „Let us but go, whether it be so that 
 thou surpass me." The Lion said: „Let us just go, it is you 
 I am looking at." About 4 o' clock ^) the Lion said: „Let us 
 go out to the grass-field." When they arrived at the grass- 
 field, the Goat said: „Let us graze, let us vie with each other."*) 
 
 1^ Lit. „Let us graze all iii.nlit, we graze all day", or rather: 
 „let us spend all night in grazing, wc spend all day in grazing." 
 
 2) Lit. „tlio hand," but here „the proboscis of the Elephant." 
 
 3) Lit. „At the sun of beating rice (fur supper)," that is 
 about two hours before sun-set, when they begin to beat rice for 
 supper. 
 
 4) That is: „Iet us contend with each other in grazing."
 
 — 62 — 
 
 Ar'^tr ra woii, ka Pa Wir o pa ho: „Mina, I tn n^m'ra he." 
 Pa Rank o pa ho: „Sa ma fanta he o-tan-i?" Pa Wir o pa: 
 „Ma wgnl nan ha ka-ren' datron ka bek." Ka-ren' dalron ka 
 bek-e, ka Pa Sonala o pa ho: „Man kone ton ro-gbalan." 
 
 An-gbalan 'a bana, e-buma e yi he ri traka wgnl. Na wur 
 ka an-gbalan ralron gbeu. An -Sonala o pa ho: „Ma folane 
 nan, man dira nan o-tan." Na fan!a ro-gbalan. Pa Rank o ko 
 fanta ka an-gbalan, ro na \i a-fino; Pa Wir o kg fanta, ro an- 
 gbalaii na gbope, dl-ah ') g botr ara-bomp-r'gn. Pa Rank g 
 dira; Pa Sonala g dira; Pa Wir g dira; kere g tra trgm. Pa 
 Sonala g tame, g tral Pa Wir g tra trgm marat-marat. Pa 
 Sonala g pa hg, „Pa Wir, ko man sgm-e?" Pa Wir g pa 
 ho: „I ta nam'ra he." Pa Sonala g pa hg: „Pa Rank, ma tral 
 ma Pa Wir g mg sgm-i?" Pa Rank g pa: „Ko g mg sgm-e?" 
 Pa Sonala g pa hg: „I tr'a he ar'a ran g mg sgm-e, yif-kg." 
 Pa Rank-a g pa hg: „Ma sa fanta ka an-gbalah ratrgn, e-buma 
 e yi fe ri. Pa \N"ir, ko ma ma sgm-e?" Pa Wir g pa hg: 
 „I tsi sgm ah-gbalah, i nam fe e-buma." Pa Rank g pa hg: 
 „Be ma pon an-gbalah-e, ko ma ma sgm-e?" pa hg: „I tsi 
 sgm r'a ra-bgti-sgm." Pa Rank g jokane, g kg rodi, g kg 
 fanta. Pa Sonala g pa hg: „Ma fatrane nan, mi'na yi tra rgk 
 an-tdnka, I ta rgk he ni." Na kgne ka Pa Rank, na kg fatr- 
 kg; halisa Pa Wir g Xra trgm gbo marat-marat. Pa Rank g 
 pa hg: „Man kgne nan ka wgnt-an!" Pa Sonala g pa hg: 
 „Awa, ma rap nan an-gb^an ka wgnl-an." Ma na pon wgnt be, 
 
 1) Or: di-a.
 
 — 63 — 
 
 The sun set. and Ihe Goat said: „As for me, 1 have not vet 
 enough." The Elephant said: „Shall nip not lie down a little?** 
 The Goat said: .,Lel us graze till midnight comes." Midnight 
 came, and the Lion said: ,.Let us now go on the rock." 
 
 The rock was large, there was no green for grazing. They 
 went out to the very middle of the rock. The Lion said: „Let 
 us now rest, (and) let us sleep a little." They lay down on 
 the rock. The Elephant went and lay down on the rock where 
 it was good;') the Goat went and lay down, where the rock was 
 rugged, there he put down his head. The Elephant slept; the 
 Lion slept; the Goat slept; but he was chewing the cud. The 
 Lion awoke, he heard that the Goat was chewing the cud mak- 
 ing m.arat-marat.^) The Lion said: „Mr. Goat, what art thou 
 eating?" The Goat said: „I am not yet satisfied." The Lion 
 said: „Mr. Elephant, doest thou hear how the Goat is eating?" 
 The Elephant said: „What is he eating?" The Lion said: „1 
 d'ont know that thing which he is eating, ask him." The Ele- 
 phant said : „\Vhen we lay down on the middle of the rock, 
 there was no green there. Mr. Goat, what art thou eating?" 
 The Goal said: „I am eating the rock, 1 do not see green." 
 The Elephant said: „When thou hast done with the rock, what 
 wilt thou eat?" He said: „I shall eat something sweet to 
 eat."^) The Elephant rose up, and went forwards, and lay 
 down. The Lion said: „Let us come close together, I have 
 to settle the matter, 1 did not yet settle it." They went to 
 the Elephant, they went near him; the Goat was but still 
 chewing the cud making maral-marat. The Elephant said: 
 „Let us go grazing!" The Lion said: „Well, let us go round 
 the rock while*) grazing." When they had grazed all about, 
 
 1) That is „even'* or „smooth, not rugged". 
 
 2 1 This is an onomatopoetic adverb. See it in the Vocab- 
 ulary. 
 
 3) Or: „ something delicious to eat." 
 
 4) Or: „in grazing."
 
 — 64 — 
 
 na wur ro-gbalan, na trama. Pa W'ir o sfiiine, o pantne, o 
 tra trgm. Pa Rank o pa ho: „A, w'an owe mo nam'ra he!" 
 Tsia ba Pa Sonala o pa ho: „An-ldko iia ka-rok an-tonka nia 
 bek-aii. Pa W'ir-an, tse wiira-ko ro-petr ka a-fam; mo g tse 
 nam'ra, kama a-fam na mar-ko tra son-ko y'etr e-di." Pa Son- 
 ala bolr Pa Rank ro-kant. Pa Rank o nesa Pa W'ir-an, o 
 gbuke-ko. Pa Sonala o pa ho: „Ko ne-e?" Pa Rank o pa ho: 
 „I minta ho Pa W'ir-an ka-wont-k'ofi; o Ir'a he ar'a ran o mg 
 sgm-e; g tra clira, g tra wont." Pa Sonala g pa ka Pa Rank: 
 „Ma ebali he yi rokin re a-fam, ma tra lasar e-set ya a-fam, 
 
 "oDo — <J - - o' oooo- •-' o' 
 
 de e-kunk; a-fam na minta he mu: yi ro-kant; ma tana he Pa 
 W'ir ka-wgnt. Ma Pa W'ir g pon sgm an-gbalan, g tra sgm- 
 mu." Tsian Pa Rank g gbiike, g kgne ro-kant, g wur he sg 
 ro-pelr. 
 
 kg nal Pa Si'p-an, g pa rgngh: „Sa gbakane ka-wgnt, 
 mi'na de Pa W'ir-an, kg g Lnn mi sgm; g sgm e-biima; sa kg 
 fanta ra-gbalaii, kg g sgm an-gbalan. Ro an-gbalan iia gbope- 
 gbope, di-aii Pa W'ir g fanta, g pa hg: „Be I poii sgm an- 
 gbalaii, I tsi sgm r'a ra-bgti sgm." Tsian Pa Rank g gbiike, g 
 kg nal Pa Sip-aii, g pa rgii'dii: „Gbipa-mi Pa W'ir-an; tankaii, 
 ro ma naii'-kg be, gbip-kg. 1 Ir'a he ro sa ma gbanane, I 
 minta he kg sg; lansa ro sa ma gbanane, g tra poii mi sgm. 
 I boya-mu Pa W'ir-an, gbipa-mi-kg." Tsiaii g-Sip g mg gbip 
 ton Ow ir; Pa Rank kgng boya-kg tapaii ka Pa Sip-a. Pa Raiik
 
 - 65 - 
 
 they went out on llie rock, and stood. Tho Goal bent himself 
 down, and raised himself again, and was ruminating. The Ele- 
 phant said: „Ah, this boy is not satisfied!" Therefore the Lion 
 said: „The time of settling the matter arrives. As regards Ihe 
 Goat, do not take him ou! from to\\n with the people; because 
 he does not gel satisfied, that people may assist him io give 
 him food." The Lion located the Elephant in the \Nood (bush). 
 The Elephant was afraid of the Goat, and ran away from him. 
 The Lion said: „What is the matter?" The Elephant said: „1 
 do not dare to vie with the Goat (as regards) his grazing; he 
 does not know thai which he is eating; he is sleeping, and is 
 grazing."') The Lion said to the Elephant: „Thou canst not 
 be together with people, thou art spoiling people's houses, and 
 fences; people do not dare to cope with thee; be thou in the 
 wood; thou art not able to keep up with the Goat in grazing. 
 As the Goat has eaten (of) the rock, he will devour thee." 
 Therefore the Elephant fled, and went into the wood, and did 
 not come out into town again. 
 
 He went and challenged the Leopard, and said to him: 
 „We were contending with eacli other in grazing, 1 and the 
 Goal, and he almost devoured me; he ale green; we went and 
 lay down on a rock, and he ate (of) the rock. Where Ihe 
 rock was very rough, there the Goat lay down, and said: „lf I 
 have eaten the rock, I shall eat something delicious to eat." 
 Therefore the Elephant fled, and went and challenged the Leo- 
 pard, and said to him: „ Catch me the Goat; at all times, where- 
 ever thou doest see him, catch him. 1 do not know where we 
 may meet each other, I do not dare to cope with him again; per- 
 haps where we are meeting each o!her, he will entirely devour 
 me, I make thee a present of the Goal,^) catch him for me." 
 Therefore the Leopard is now catching the Goat; the Elephant he 
 made formerly a present of him to the Leopard. The Elephant 
 
 1) Tkat is „hc is grazing even while he sleeps". 
 
 2^ That is „I deliver him up to thee" or: „iuto thy hand." 
 
 Temne - Fabeln. 5
 
 ^ Q^ — 
 
 nano ho ro na gbanne gbo, Pa W'ir o Ira pofi ko som; tsiari 
 nPsa, tsian o sgii-ko ka Pa Sip-an. 
 
 An limp V. 
 
 Pa Nes-an, na Pa Bo-afi, na Pa Trak-aii, na Pa K'^lma, na 
 Pa Paiikal, na Pa W'or-ah. 
 
 Pa Nes-an o kane Pa Bo: „Man kere-mi ka-sokane!" Pa 
 Bo pa ho: „I selo." Kere Pa Nes o bolra-ko a-ldnto- Ma 
 Pa Nes ko bap a-sar ro-kant , na loko k'ek-e, o pa ho: „0 
 gbo, i-sar na loko k'ek-e!" Mo o pa yah, o fumpo, piara ri 
 pali, time to ra-fol. Tsian o botra an-nan a-.yanfa traka som- 
 na: tsian o ko tsela Pa Bo: „Mah kone sokane." Na kone, iia 
 Pa Bo. Ma na bek ka an-sar-e, Pa Nes-a o kane Pa Bo: „Ko 
 kar-mi ka an-sar; 1 ko bom." Pa Bo o ko yira ka k'antr, o 
 kali ah-sar, ana ba k'ek-e; kere Pa Nes o ko he tra bom, 
 ko trama gbo; kama Pa Bo o mot-ko bek ka ah-sar. 
 Mo der-e, o pa ho: „Pa Bo, man kone." Kere Pa Bo 
 pa ho: „Kah, ma ah-sar ha loko k'ek-e!" Ma Pa Bo o 
 pa .yah-e, o fumpo ri; ka Pa Nes o yoka-ko, k^re-ko 
 roh'oh, kg poh ko di, kon' de ah-wut-h'oh. ') Mo poh 
 di Pa Bo-ah-e, o tsela Pa Irak, o pa ho: „Mah kere-mi 
 ka ka-sokane." Na kone, ha Pa Trak-ah. Ma ha fatr ka ah- 
 sar-e. Pa Nes o kane Pa Inik: „Tas rodi, mina, 1 tsi sole." 
 
 1) That is the Spider and his children consumed him.
 
 — 67 — 
 
 thought that where thev would but meet, the Goat will entirely 
 devour him; therefore he was afraid; therefore he gave him to 
 the Leopard. ^) 
 
 Fable V. 
 
 The Spider, and the Bush-goat, and the Deer, and the Antelope, 
 and the Bushcow, and the Fillentamha. 
 
 The Spider said to the Bushgoat: „Come now with me for 
 a hunting!"^) The Bushgoat said: „1 will." But the Spider 
 put a snare for him. When the Spider went and met a stone 
 in the bush,^) which grew a beard/) he said: „0h strange, a 
 stone grew a beard!" When he had said Ihus,^) he fell down, 
 and was there all day, and awoke in the evening. This is the 
 reason that he dealt deceitfully towards his companions in order 
 to devour them; therefore he went and called the Bushgoat, 
 (saying): „Let us go hunt." They went, he and the Bushgoat. 
 When they came near to the stone, the Spider told the Bush- 
 goat: „Go and wait me at the stone; 1 go to ease myself." 
 The Bushgoat went and sal upon a log of timber, and looked 
 at the stone, which had a beard; but the Spider did not go in 
 order to ease himself, he only went and stood; that the Bush- 
 goat might reach the stone before him. When he came, he 
 said: „Mr. Bushgoat, let us go." But the Bushgoat said: „Look 
 how the stone grew a beard!" When the Bushgoat had said thus, 
 he fell down there, and the Spider took him up, and carried 
 him to his place, and went and ate him entirely, he and his 
 children. When he had eaten the Bushgoat, he called the Deer, 
 and said: „Come with me to the hunting." They went, he and 
 the Deer. When they came near to the stone, the Spider said 
 to the Deer: „Go on before, as for me 1 shall make water." 
 
 1) Or: „he gave him into the hand of the Leopard." 
 
 2) Or: „Come now, carry me to a hunting!" 
 
 3) Or: „wood." 
 
 4) That is „a spider's web". 
 
 5 ) The Aorist for the Pluperfect, which is sometimes the case. 
 
 5 *
 
 — 68 — 
 
 Pa Trak o tas, o ko Irama o tra kali aii-sar. Pa Nes o der, 
 pa ho: „Man kdne." Kere Pa Trak o pa ho: „Pa Nes, kali, 
 ma an-sar na lokg k'ek-e!" Ma Pa Trak o pa .\ah-e, o fumpo 
 ri; ka Pa Nes o y6ka-ko, o kere-ko roiVon, o ko di-ko, kon' 
 de an-wut-h'on. 
 
 Lgko loni Pa Nes o tsela Pa K'alma, o pa ron'oii: „Mafi 
 kone sokane." Na kone, na Pa K'alma. Ma na bek ka aii- 
 sar-e, Pa Nes o kane Pa K'alma: „Trama kadi, 1 ko gbak a- 
 rasa." Pa K'alma o ko trama, o tra kali ati-sar. Pa Nes o bek, 
 pa loii'on: „Man kone." Pa K'alma o pa ho. „Kgli, ma an- 
 sar na loko k'ck-e!" Mo o pa jan-e, o fumpo li. Pa Nes, 
 mo kali o tana he yoka Pa K'alma, mo o yi o-b^na, o kdne 
 ka gbuke o ko tsela an-wut-n'ofi. Na der, na re ban-ko, na 
 ko pon kg di. Pa Nes g kal Isela Pa Pankal, g:*) „Man kone 
 sokane." Pa W'gr g pa hg: „Atr'ei atse tra keta!" An-iian 
 ria pa: „Ko ne-e?" Pa W'gr g pa hg: „Ka-sgkane ake, ma 'a 
 tse kal sg!" Pa Pankal g pa hg: „Man kone, Pa Nes!" Na 
 kdne. Pa W'or o tran-na; kere na nam fe ko. Ma na bek ka 
 an-sar-e. Pa Nes g pa ka Pa Pankal: „Kg kar-mi ka ak'aiitr 
 ka-bana, 1 ko bom." Kere Pa W'or o mankne ro-kant, o Ira kali- 
 na. Pa Pankal o ko trama, o kali an-sar Irann. Ma Pa Nes 
 bek-e, o:') „Man kdne. Pa Pankal! Ko ma ma kali-e?"^) 
 Pa Pankal g pa hg: „Kali, ma an-sar na ba k'ek-a!" Mg g pa 
 yari, g fiimpg ri. Pa Nes g kdne lemp, g kg ts61a ari-wut-fi'gn; 
 
 1) This is for: g pa, or for: g pa hg: „he said:" 
 
 2) Or: Ko man kali-e?
 
 — 69 — 
 
 The Deer passed on, and went and stood,') and was looking 
 at the stone. The Spider came, and said: „Lpt us go." But 
 the Deer said: „Mr. Spider, see, how the stone grew a beard!" 
 When the Deer had spoken thus, he fell down there; and the 
 Spider took him up, and carried him to his place, and ate him, 
 he and his children. 
 
 Another time the Spider called the Antelope, and said to 
 him: „Let us go hunt." They went, he and the Antelope. 
 When they came near to the stone, the Spider said to the 
 Antelope: „Go on before. I go to cut a rassa branch."^) The 
 Antelope went and stood, and was looking at the stone. The 
 Spider arrived, and said to him: „Let us go." The Antelope 
 said: „Look, how the stone grew a beard!" When he had spoken 
 thus, he fell down there. The Spider, as he saw that he was 
 not able to take the Antelope, because he was large, went away 
 running, and went and called his children. They came, they 
 fetched him. and went and ate him altogether. The Spider 
 called again the Bushcow, he (said): „Let us go hunt." The 
 Fillentamba said: „This matter is puzzling!" His companions 
 said. „Why?"^) The Fillentamba said: „This hunting, because*) 
 they do not return again!" The Bushcow said: „Let us go, 
 Mr. Spider!" They departed. The Fillentamba followed them; 
 but they did not see him. When they came near to the stone, 
 the Spider said to the Bushcow; „Go and wait me at the large 
 log of timber, I go to ease myself." But the Fillentamba hid 
 himself in the bush, and was looking at them. The Bushcow 
 went and stood,') and looked steadily at the stone. When the 
 Spider arrived, he (said): „Let us go, iMr. Bushcow! What art 
 thou looking at?" The Bushcow said: „Look, how the stone 
 has a beard!" When he had said thus, he fell down there. 
 The Spider departed quickly, and went and called his children; 
 
 1) Or: „ stopped". 
 
 2) See the word rasa in the Vocabulary. 
 
 3) Or „What is the matter?" 
 
 4) Or „ — when they do not etc.!"
 
 — 70 — 
 
 ka ma 'a re ban Pa Paiikal, iia ko som-ko. Ma Pa Wor-a o 
 nank yaii-e, o kone, o ko kane aii-nan be. 
 
 Loko lorn so Pa Nes o ko kane Pa W'or-a, o pa ho: 
 „Man kone sokane." Pa Wor o pa ho. ,,I selo, man kdne."' 
 Na kone. Ma na bek ka afi-sar-e, Pa Nes o pa ho : „Pa \N"or, 
 ko kar-mi ka ak'antr ka-bana, I ko bom." Ma Pa Wor o bek 
 ri, tas, o ko trama rodi ka an-sar. Ma Pa Nes o bek, o pa 
 ka Pa \V'or-a: „Ri-a I pa nan ho ma kar-mi-i?" Pa Wor g pa 
 ho: „Ar'6n' taho-i?" Pa Nes o pa so: „Der ba." Pa Wor 
 der; na trama ka an-sar. Pa Nes o pa ho: „Ma ma trarik- 
 a?" Pa Wor o pa ho: „Tro me pa-e?" Pa Nes o pa so: 
 „Muno, ma nank fe-i?" Pa Wor o pa: „I nank fe r'aka." 
 Pa Nes pa so: „Muno, ma tsemp he." Pa Wor o pa: „I 
 tsempi." Pa Nes o pa so: „A, Pa Wor!" Kon' o pa ho: „A, 
 Pa Nes!" Pa Nes o pa so: „Kali ba lon-a!" Pa Wor o pa 
 so: „Kali ba toh-a!" Pa Nes-a o pa so: „Pa jeneu." Tsian 
 Pa Wor pa: „Tro me pa-e?" Pa Nes o pa to: „R'dka ra 
 loko r'aka." Pa Wor o pa: „R'aka ra loko r'aka." Pa Nes g 
 pa ho: „Pa ba tgn-a!" Pa Wor g pa: „Pa ba tgn-a!" Pa Nes 
 g pa ho: „A, Pa Wor, mung, ma keta! Pa yenen tgkgn!" Pa 
 Wgr g pa: „Tro me pa-e?" Pa Nes g pa hg: „Pa ba: Sar-lg-." *) 
 Pa Wgr g pa yi. Pa Nes g pa sg: „Pa ba: A-sar ria Igkg k'ek." 
 Pa Wgr g pa yi; ka na na-rafi na fumpg ri. Pa yi aka-bat, ma 
 na na-rari na fiimpg ri, ka ar'etr ra yema wgri, ma na kal yo- 
 kane. Ma na yokane, Pa Nes g pa hg: „Pa Wgr, ko ne ba-e?" 
 
 1) These two words, as will be seen, form an imperfect 
 beginning of the phrase: „ A-sar na Igkg k'ek-e!"
 
 — 71 — 
 
 and they came to fetch the Bushcow, and went and devoured 
 him. When the Fillenlamba saw this, he departed, and went 
 and told (it) to all his companions. 
 
 Another time again the Spider went and [old the Fillen- 
 tamba saying: „Let us go hunt." The Fillentamba said: „1 am 
 willing, let us go." They went. Wlien they came near lo the 
 stone, the Spider said: „Mr. Fillentamba, go and wait nie at 
 the large log of limber, I go to ease myself." When the Fillen- 
 lamba reached there, he went on, and went and stood beyond 
 the stone. When the Spider arrived, he SHid to the Fillen- 
 tamba: „Is it there I told thee to wait me?" The Fillentamba 
 said: „Is not this the road?"') The Spider said again: „Come 
 here " The Fillentamba came; they stood at the stone. The 
 Spider said: „Why art thou silent?" The Fillentamba said: 
 „What shall I say?" The Spider said again: „Thou, doest thou 
 not see?" The Fillenlamba said: ,.I see noihing." The Spider 
 said again: „As for thee, thou liasl no sense." The Fillentamba 
 said: „I have sense." The Spider said again: „-4h, Mr. Fillen- 
 tamba!" He said: „Ah, Mr. Spider!" The Spider said again: 
 „Look here now!" The Fillentamba said again: „Look here 
 now!" The Spider said again: „Speak now." Therefore the 
 Fillentamba said: .,What s!;all I say?" The Spider said now: 
 „Something grew something?" The Fillentamba said: „Something 
 grew something." The Spider said: „Speak then now!" The 
 Fillenlamba said: „Speak then now!" The Spider said: „Ah, 
 Mr. Fillentamba, as for thee, thou art puzzling! Speak then 
 now!" The Fillentamba said: ,.What shall I say?" The Spider 
 said: „Say now: Sar-lo-." The Fillentamba said il.') The 
 Spider said again: „Say now: A stone grew a beard." The 
 Fillentamba said it; and they both fell down there. It was in 
 the morning, when they both fell down there, and the sun was 
 about to set, when they rose up again. When they had got 
 up, the Spider said: „Mr. Fillentamba, what is the matter now?" 
 
 1) Or: „Is not here the roadV" Lit. „The road not lit)?" 
 
 2) Lit. „thus" or „so".
 
 — 72 — 
 
 Pa W'or pa: „Tr'ei Ira yi he ri." Pa Nes o pa ho : „Tro 
 me pa-e?" Tsian Pa W'or o pa: „Tro me pa-e?" Pa Nes o 
 pa: „Pa; An-sar na Igko k'ek." Ma Pa Nes o pa yafi-e, o 
 fumpg ri; kore Pa W'gr o pa he yi so; o kone, o ko kane an- 
 fam-n'on be, o pa ho: „W'uni 6 w'uni, be Pa Nes o ba-mu 
 ka ka-sokane, Q pofi mu som. Be ma ko ro-kant-e, ma naiik 
 a-sar, na ba k'ek-e, mam pa fe ho:') ,A-sar na loko k'ek!' Be 
 ma pa ;>!, ma tra fiimpo ri. Pa Nes o tra pofi mu sQm." 
 
 An' limp VI. 
 
 Pa Nes-a, na Pa Bo-an, na Pa Trank-an, na Pa Sip-an. 
 
 Pa Nes kono mo ko ka lasar Ir'ei-an; Isian 'a ma ;yo-ko o- 
 baki, 'a bun ko dif; tsian o tra kane Pa Bo loko 6 loko: ,,'A 
 bun mi dif!" Pa Bo o yif-ko: „Ko yi ka-bun fi-e?" Pa Nes 
 o pa: „Ma tr'a he ka-bun fi-i?" A-ldko lom Pa Nes o kone, 
 ko kela ka g-bal; 'a wop-kg ri, 'a pa: „Tr' 'a dif-kg." O-bai 
 g pa: „Tr' 'a tser-kg, tie kg dif." Pa Nes g kalane, g kg bap 
 Pa Bo rgn'gn. Pa Bo g pa hg: „0 gbo. Pa Nes! Ko yg-mu 
 yah-e?" Pa Nes g pa: „I bun fi." Pa Bo g pa sg: „Ko yi 
 ba ka-bun fi-e?" Kgn' g pa hg: „Kar-mi, I tsi trgri-mu anina 
 ka-bun fi." Na dira. Ka ka-bal Pa Nes o pa ka Pa Bo: „Man 
 
 o o *■ 
 
 kgne, 1 kg Irgri-mu ka-bun fi; man kgne ba ro-lal ka ah-wul- 
 a." Pa Bo g Ir'a he Isi, fg Pa Nes g kere^) an-wut-n'gi 
 
 on 
 
 1) For: ma ma pa fe hg etc. 
 
 2) The Aorist for the Pluperfect.
 
 — 73 — 
 
 The Fillnitamba said: „TIiere is nothing the matter." The Spider 
 said: „How shall I say?" Therefore the Fillentamba said: „How 
 shall 1 say?" The Spider said: „Say: The stone grew a beard." 
 "When the Spider had spoken thus, he fell down there; but the 
 Fillentamba did not say so again; he left, and went and told 
 (the matter) lo all his people, he said: „Any one (of you), if 
 the Spider has thee at the hunting, he will entirely devour 
 thee. If thou doest go into the bush, and thou seesl a stone, 
 which has a beard, thou must not say; ,A stone grew a beard!' 
 If thou doest say so, thou wilt fall down there, and the Spider 
 will devour thee altogether." 
 
 Fahle VI. 
 
 The Spider, and the Bushgoat, and the Ant-Eater, and the Leopard. 
 
 The Spider he was going about spoiling a thing; therefore 
 they dealt hardly with him, and almost killed him; therefore he 
 was always telling the Busiigoat: „They almost killed me!" The 
 Bushgoat asked him: „Wha! does ahnnst dying mean?"*) The 
 Spider said: „Doest thou not know (what) almost dying (means)?" 
 Once the Spider departed, and went to steal at the king's place; 
 they took hold of him there, and said: ,.Lel them kill him." 
 The king said: „Let them set him at liberty, do not kill him." 
 The Spider returned, and went and met the Bushgoat at his 
 place. ^) The Bushgoat said: „0h dear, Mr, Spider! What did 
 hurt thee thus?" The Spider said: „I almost died." The Bush- 
 goat said again: „W'hat is now (the meaning of) almost dying?" 
 He he said: „Wait me, 1 will show thee to morrow (what) al- 
 most dying is." They slept. In the morning the Spider said 
 to the Bushgoat: „Let us go, I go lo show thee (what) almost 
 dying is; let us now go to the grass-field to the trap." ^) The 
 Bushgoat did not know, that the Spider had carried his children 
 
 1) Lit. „What is almost dying?" 
 
 2) That is at the Bushgoat's place. 
 
 3) Or „ noose".
 
 — 74 — 
 
 ro-lal, ko wona-na ro-bi, na ba e-tis. An-wut na Pa Nes, o- 
 baki, aiVes-n'on: „Gbanne-Yon-a;" ') an'es iia o-lgm: „Nant-eFuk- 
 an;"*) de ah'es na o-fet: „Gbapne Nant ro-Kos."^) Na kdne, 
 na Pa Bo; na bap ton ka-lgme ka o-bai o yi ro-bi, o wiira gbo 
 ara-bomp-r'on; an-fel na Pa Nes na wop-ko roraia; ri-an o kere 
 Pa Bo-an. Pa Nes o bek gbo, o pa: „Maii kone irama rodi." 
 pa: „0 gbo, Pa Bo! Kali, ma ka-lome ka o-baT o mo won 
 ro-bi-a!" Ka Pa Bo o wop ara-bomp, ka Pa Nes o pa: „Kar- 
 mi, I tsi ko ebak k'anlr." Pa Bo o tr'a he, fo an-wul na Pa 
 Nes na vi ro-bi Ma Pa Nes o mo gbnk k'anfr van-e, an-wut- 
 ii'on na lin aka-ldme ro-bi. Pa Bo o wop ara-bomp, an-wut ria 
 Pa Nes na gbak aka-lim ka ka-lomo. Pa Bo o lin, o wura 'ra- 
 bomp ra ka-lome fas. An-fet na kone ka gbiike, lia kg wur 
 ka am-bi; a-lom*) na kone rgnan ro-k'gr. Pa Bo g tra ts61a: 
 „Pa Nes-e! Pa Nes-e, der-o!" Pa Nes g bek, g pa: „Ko ne-e?"' 
 pa hg: „I gbgli ara-bomp ra ka-lgme!" Pa Nes g pa: „A 
 w'an! I kane-mu nan hg: kar-mi!" Pa Nes g som gw'ahet-k'gh 
 g-lgm ro-petr, g kg kane g-bal, fg Pa Bo g gbgti ka-lgme-k'gn 
 'ra-bomp. O-bal g der de afi-fam-iVgn, g pa hg: „Ko ne-e?" 
 Pa Nes g pa: „Pa Bo g gbgti aka-lgme 'ra-bomp." Pa Nes g 
 kal kane Pa Bo sgi: ,,'A trama traka wop-mu; be na yema 
 wop-rnu, gbuke, ma won ka am-bi na Pa Trank." O-bal g pa: 
 .,Tr' 'a wop-kg." Pa Bo g gbiike, g kone; "a bal-bal-kg, o 
 
 1) Or: Gbanne ka-Ygn, lit. „Carry a Ygn." See Ygh, ka- 
 in the Vocabulary behind. 
 
 2) Lit. „ Remove Chaff." 
 
 3^ Lit. „Apply oneself Snot to the Cheeks." The prefix is 
 dropped with the nouns. 
 
 4) Or: na-raii na kone etc., „two went to etc."
 
 — 75 — 
 
 to the grass-field, and [uit Ihcin into the hole, having knives."') 
 As to the children of the Spider, the oldest, his name (was): 
 „Gbanne Yoh-a;" the name of the second (was): „Nant-e Fuk- 
 ah;" and the name of the youngest (was): „Gbapne Nanl ro- 
 Kos." They went, he and the Bushgoat; Ihey then met one of 
 the king's sheep in the hole, it only stretched out its head; the 
 children of the Spider took hold of i( below; thilher he led the 
 Bushgoat. As soon as the Spider came, he said: „Lpt us go 
 and stand before."') He said: „0h dear, Mr. Bushgoat! Look, 
 how one of the sheep of the king was going') into the hole!" 
 Then the Bushgoat took hold of the head, and the Spider said: 
 „Wait me, I shall go and cut a stick." The Bushgoat did not 
 know, that the children of the Spider were in the hole. While 
 the Spider was thus cutting a stick, his children pulled the 
 sheep into the hole, tlie Bushgoat held the head, tise children 
 of the Spider cut the throat of the sheep. The Bushgoat pulled, 
 and all at once pulled out the head of the sheep. The children 
 went away running, they came out from the hole, some went 
 to their own place in the farm The Bushgoat was calling: 
 „Mr, Spider! Mr. Spider, pray come!"*) The Spider came 
 and said: „What is the matter?" He said: „I plucked off the 
 head of the sheep!" The Spider said: „Ah frien'l! I told thee: 
 wait me!" The Spider sent his other child into the town, he 
 went and told the king, thai the Bushgoat had plucked off the 
 head of one of his sheep. The king came with his people, and 
 said: „What is the matter?" The Spider said: ,.The Bushgoat 
 plucked oil the sheep's head." The Spider returned and told 
 the Bushgoat softly: „They are about apprehending thee; if they 
 want to apprehend thee, run,^) and go into the hole of the 
 Anl-Eater." The king said: „Let them apprehend him." The 
 Bushgoat fled, and went away; they pursued after him, and he 
 
 1) Lit. „they had knives." 
 
 2) Or: „Let us go before." 
 
 3) Or: „\vas getting into etc.!" 
 
 4) Like the Germ. „komm doch!" 
 
 5) Or: „flee."
 
 — 70 — 
 
 won ka am-bi. 'A ko tra tens-ko; kere aii-fam iia tr'a he fo 
 won ro-bi. Pa Nes o kone, o ko s^nne ro-bi, o pa ho: „Pa 
 Bo, ma yi re-i?" Pa Bo o wosa: „I yi re and." Pa Nes o 
 wura a-fok iia m'rr, o son Pa Bo, o kane-kg fo: „Be ha yema 
 mu gbip tenon-e, ana ma der wop-mu-e, feh-ha am'ijr ro-fgr." 
 Mg g poh pa yan-e, g pa ka an-fam: „Kali-kg ang!" kal 
 sanne, g kano Pa Bo ho: „Be ma fen') am'er ro-fgr-e, be 'a 
 bal-bal ow'uni ka-tsi; wur, ma kdne romi ro-k'or." Aii-fam be 
 na pen bek ro-bi, w'lini 6 w'lini g tr'a he ma 'a ma yg-e, ha 
 tr'a he bes Ira wura Pa Bo-ah. A pa: „Pa Nes, tro sa ma 
 yg-e?" pa hg: „Ma sa yi be, sa tr'a he bes; tr' 'a ko tsela 
 Pa Trahk-a." Na som g-lahba, g kg tsela Pa Trahk, kg g bek. 
 0-bal pa hg: „W'an-ka-mi, Pa Trahk, besa-ini ang, ma wiira- 
 mi Pa Bo!" Pa Trahk g selg; kg g trap aka-bes. Ma Pa 
 Trahk-ah g mg bes-e, Pa Nes g som an-wul-h'gh, ha wura aka- 
 lome, ha kere-kg ro-k'gr; g-baT g Ir'a he tsi. Pa Trahk g bes 
 hah g kg byp Pa Bo. Pa Bo g yoka m'er ma-lal, g bolr ka 
 ka-sah-k'gh, g feh Pa Trahk am'er ka e-fgr-y'gh. Pa Trahk-a 
 g pa: „E-tgf e wgh-mi ro-fgr." 0-bai g pa hg: „Feh-kg nan, 
 na wura-kg e-lgf ro-fgr " 0-hinba g feh e-fgr-y'gh; e-kant e 
 wur, e wgh g-lahba ro-sah. 0-lahba g pa: „A, Pa Trahk g ba 
 e-kant e-bgti gba!" Ka Pa Nes g pa hg: „Traka e-kant tslah 
 
 1) The Aorist for the Perfect tense.
 
 — 77 — 
 
 went into the hole. They went to look for him; but the people 
 did not know that he had gone into the hole. The Spider left, 
 and went and bowed himself down at the hole, and said: 
 „Mr. Bushgoal, art thou here?" The Bushgoat answered: „l 
 am here." The Spider took out a parcel of sail, and gave (it) 
 to the Bushgoal, and said to him: „W'hpn they want to caUh 
 thee to day, as to those who come to apprehend thee, blow 
 Ihem the salt into the eyes." When he had spoken thus, he 
 said lo the people: „Look him here!" He bowed himself down 
 again, and said to the Bushgoal: „When thou hast blown the 
 salt into the eyes, (and) when they pursue after that person;') 
 come out, and go to my place in the farm." All the people had 
 arrived at the hole, (but) none knew how they must do, they 
 did not understand to dig to bring out the Bushgoat. They 
 said: „Mr. Spider, how must we do?" He said: „As for us 
 all,^) we do not know to dig; let them call the Ant-Eater." 
 They sent a young man, he went and called the Ant-Kater, and 
 he arrived. The king said: „My friend, Mr. Ant-Eater, dig me 
 here, and take me out the Bushgoat!" The Ant-Eater was 
 willing; and he began with the digging. While the Ant-Eater 
 was digging, the Spider sent his children, and they took out 
 the sheep, and carried it into the farm; the king did not know 
 it. The Ant-E^ater digged till he came and met the Bushgoat. 
 The Bushgoat took much salt, and pul (it) into his mouth, and 
 blew the salt into the eyes of the Ant-Eater. The Ant-Eater 
 said: „Earth got into my eyes." The king said: „Blow ye on 
 him, and lake out the earth from his eyes." The young man 
 blew into his eyes, some gum of the eye came out, and got 
 into the young man's mouth. The young man said: „Ah, the 
 Ani-Ealer has a very sweet") gum of the eye!" And the 
 Spider said: „ About the gum of the eye, about this (only) 
 
 1) That is the Ant-Eater, the owner of the hole. 
 
 2) Or: „As for us individually, we etc." Lit. „As we are 
 all, we etc." 
 
 3i Or: „ delicious."
 
 — 78 — 
 
 ma Irara-i?" O-bal o pa: „Mam pa yan-a?" Pa Nes o pa so: 
 „Ma na nank e-kant e-bdti, Pa Trahk kdno konone kdno ta bot." 
 O-bal pa: „Pa Trank, der ba, 1 memar-a!" Pa Trank o 
 pensa, o der he. O-bal o ko ri, o ko fen-ko ro-for, e-kant e 
 won o-bal ro-san, o pa: „A w'an, mun' boti gba!" Pa Trank 
 wur ka ka-bes, o ko trama ro. 0-bai o pa: „W'an, derba!" 
 Pa Trank o pa: „1 der he so; ma ma pa min' boti." 0-baT 
 ko ri; Pa Trahk o gbuke, ha bal-bal-ko de ka-bor-k'oh be, 
 na pen aii-lal, na batr Pa Trahk. Pa Nes o pa: „Tr' 'a dif- 
 ko, kama na trara, mo o yi ka-bot-e." Na dif Pa Trahk, Ma 
 ha ma tsen-ko-e, Pa Nes g pa: „1 kgne, I kg bah ka-mgte-ka- 
 mi." kgne, g kg bap Pa Bo, g yi ro-bi (ro Pa Trahk g la 
 nah bes-e); g kane-kg: „Wur, ma kgne ro-k'gr." Pa Bo g 
 kgne. Pa Nes g kalane, o kg bap 'a poh tsen Pa Trahk-a. 
 O-bai g pa: „Pa Nes, de yer g-sem, miing som-a sa sgtg g- 
 sem gwe." Pa Nes g pa: „A, g-bal g mg yira he, g-!ahba 
 yer g-sem!" 0-baT g pa: „I selg." 'A wura a-lahk, ha sgh 
 Pa Nes, de a-fi, de aka-leha, ha sgn-kg. Na poh yer g-sem 
 sehk. O-bal g pa: „Mah kal nan trah ro, kama sa kg wiira 
 Pa Bo." Pa Nes g pa: „Awa, mah kgne nah!" Na kg bek ri. 
 0-baI g kg kali ro-bi, g pa hg: „Pa Nes, derba, kali-a! Kali ba, 
 mg w'uni g kgt ang-bi-a!" Pa Nes g pa: „0 gbo! Pa Bo kongh;
 
 — 79 — 
 
 thou knowest fsomelhing to say)?" The king said: „Why doost 
 thou say so?" The Spider said again: „As ye find the gum of the 
 eye to be sweet, the Ant-Eater himself he is (still) sweeter." The 
 king said: „Mr. Ant-Eater, come here, that I may try!" The Ant- 
 Eater refused, he did not come. The king went there, he went 
 and blew into his eyes, some gum of the eye got into the king's 
 mouth, and he said: „Ah friend, thou art very sweet!" The 
 Anl-Eater came out from the digging, ') and went and stood 
 at some distance. The king said: „Friend, come here!" The 
 Ant-Eater said: „I do not come again; because thou saidsl that 
 I was sweet." The king went there; the Ant-Ealer fled, they 
 pursued after him with all his people,^) they went all over the 
 grass-field, and seized the Ant-Eater. The Spider said: „Let them 
 kill him, that ye may know how sweet he is." ^) They killed 
 the Ant-Eater. When they were cutting him up, the Spider 
 said: „l go away, 1 go to fetch my basket." He left, and went 
 and met the Bushgoat, he was in the hole (where the Ant-Eater 
 used to dig); he said to him: „Come out, and go to the farm." 
 Tlie Bushgoat went. The Spider returned, he went and found 
 that they had done with cutting up the Anl-Eater. The king 
 said: „Mr. Spider, come share the meat, thou wast the cause 
 that we got this meal." The Spider said: „Ah, the king 
 is not sitting down, and a young man shares the meal!" 
 The king said: „I am willing." They took out a leg, and 
 gave (it) to the Spider, and one of the loins, and the tail, 
 they gave (them) to him. They had done with sharing the 
 whole of the meat. The king said: „Let us (now again) fol- 
 low yonder, that we may go and take out the Bushgoat." The 
 Spider said: „Well, let us go!" They went and reached there. 
 The king went and looked into tl)e hole, and said: „Mr. Spider, 
 come now, look! Look now, how somebody walked here in 
 the hole!" The Spider said: „0h dear! It is the Bushgoat; 
 
 1) That is from the place where he dug. 
 
 2) That is with all the kings people; lit. „all his domestics etc" 
 
 3) Lit. „how he is sweetaees."
 
 — 80 — 
 
 kone'." O-bal o tr'a he tsi, fo kono o ko kano Pa Bo 
 ho: ,.Kdne romi ro-k'or." O-bal o pa: „Man kal n;in ro- 
 petr." Na ko bek ro-petr. Pa Nes o kone ro-k'or, o ko ban 
 Pa Bo, kara-ko, o re mank-ko ka an-kant roraran. 0-bal o 
 kal tsela Pa Nes-aii, o pa ronoii: „Man tensa-mi Pa Bo, muno 
 trara ma-sol!" Pa Bo, konoii 'a ma len ') be, 'a nam fe kg. 
 Pa Bo tral mo o-bal o mo bansa ro-petr, o minta he so wiir 
 ro-pelr. Pa Nes o ko pa ka Pa Bo: „Tro pe-e? Tro pe-e?" 
 Pa Bo pa: „A, 1 bun fi ro-bi, Pa Nes!" Kono pa: „Ma Irara 
 lenoh ka-bun fi-i?" Ko o pa: „Afi, I trara." Pa Nes o pa 
 so: „Ma ta tr'a he ka-bun fi." Pa Bo o minta he so wnr ro- 
 pelr. Pa Nes o pa: „Kar-mi, I tsi trgri-mu ka-bun fi, kargbo!" 
 Pa Nes kone ro-kant, o kg nank an-wut na Pa Sip-a. 
 kalane, g bek ka Pa Bo, g pa ho: „Ra-bomp-ra-mi ra ban; Pa 
 Bo, mam paia-mi, I kg wont a-trgl " Na kg bap aii-wut na 
 Pa Sip-a, ha na-rah, na fanta. Pa Nes-a g kane Pa Bo: „Kg 
 fgkia-mi an'antr anan, (ro tra-sip na-raii iia fanta)." Pa Bo g 
 kg narik-na, g tsela Pa Nes-a. Pa Nes g bek, g pa: „0 gbo! 
 Ko e-.sem na iie-eY" Pa Bo g pa: „Mam ba-na." Pa Nes g 
 pa sg: „Mam ba-ha." Na yoka-ha. Ma ha kone g-tan-e, Pa 
 Nes g pa: „Man dif-ua." Na dif-ha. Pa Nes g kal kane Pa 
 Bo, g pa ho: „Kgne rgmii ro-k'gr, 1 l.si bap-mu tele." Pa Bo 
 
 1) Or: kgn' 'a ina ton. etc, „liim they were seeking etc."
 
 ^ 81 ^ 
 
 he is gone!" The king did not know, that he had gone and told 
 the Bushgoal: ,,Go to mv place in the farm." The king said: „Lf"l 
 us return to town." They went and came into the town. The 
 Spider went into the farm, he went and fetched the Bushgoat, he 
 brought him, and came and hid him in the wood behind. The 
 king called the Spider again, and said to him: „Come now, seek 
 the Bushgoat for me, thou art acquainted with artifices!" As 
 lo the Bushgoat, him they were seeking all about; (but) they 
 did not see him. The Bushgoat heard how angry the king was 
 in town, and dared not lo come out again into (he towji. The 
 Spider went and said lo the Bushgoat: „How doest thou do? 
 How doest thou do?"*) The Bushgoal said: „Ah, 1 almost died 
 in the hole, Mr. Spider!" He said: „Doest thou understand 
 now (what) almost dying (is)?"^) And he said: ,.Yes, 1 under- 
 stand (it)." The Spider said: „Thou doest not yet know (what) 
 almost dying (is)." The Bushgoat did not venture again to come 
 out into town. The Spider said: „\Vait me, I will show thee 
 (what) almost dying (is), only wait!" The Spider went away 
 into the wood, and went aiid saw the children of the Leopard. 
 He returned, and came to the Bushgoat and said: „My head 
 aches; Mr. Bushgoat, come, go with me,^) 1 go to look for 
 medicine." They went and met the children of the Leopard, 
 they were two, they lay down. The Spider said to the Bush- 
 goat: „Go bark me thai tree.*) (where the two leopards lay)." 
 The Bushgoat went and saw them, (and) he called the Spider. 
 The Spider came and said: „0h dear! What beasts are these?" 
 The Bushgoat said: „Lel us have them." The Spider said also: 
 „Let us have them." They look Ihem. When they had gone 
 a little (way), the Spider said: „Let us kill them." They killed 
 them. The Spider told the Bushgoat again, saying:^) „Go to thy 
 place in the farm, 1 shall meet Ihee presently." The Bushgoat 
 
 1) Lit. „now is it? II(jw is itV" 
 
 2) Lit. „Doest thou know to day almost dying?" 
 
 3) Lit. „he said etc." 
 4) 
 
 Tuiniii: - Fabchi. g
 
 — 82 — 
 
 kone ro-k'or. Pa Sip-a o bek ro o bolr an-wut-iVon, o nank 
 fe ria so; ko mo o tranane am-bontr ro 'a kere-na, o ko bek 
 ro-k'or ka Pa Bo; o bap Pa Bo o tra lap an'anlr. Pa Nes o 
 der, mankne, o tra kali Pa Bo; mo o pon Irara, fg Pa Sip 
 tra der tra ten an-wut-n'oii. Pa Sip o der ten an-wut-n'gn, 
 pa ho: „Pa Bo, kane kara an-wut-'a-mi ang-eV" kg ;)'6ka- 
 na, 'a pon fi tgfi. pa sg: „Pa Bo, miing dif an-wut-'a-mi-i?" 
 Pa Bo g gbi'ike. Pa Sip g pi;ira kg bal-bal pali. Pa Bo o kg 
 mcihkne ka g-bal ra-fgl. Pa Sip g bek, g pa ka g-bai: „Pa Bo 
 g bek ang-i?" O-bal g pa: „0 yi re." yif sg Pa Sip: 
 „Ko ne-e?" Pa Sip g pa sg: „0 pon dif aii-wut-'a-mi." 0- 
 bal pa ho: „Kali-ko roniran; o dif lo non ka-ldme-ka-mi." 
 Pa Sip g kg ri roraran. Pa Bo g gbuke, g tran-kg tra ka- 
 bal-bal-kg, haii g kg mankne ka Pa Nes; Pa Sip g nank fe 
 kg sg. Pa Sip g kal kgne ka g-bal, g yif- kg sg hg : „Pa 
 Bo g bek ang-i?" pa: „I nank fe kg." Pa Nes g kgne, 
 g kg yoka an-wut na Pa Sip, g kg kal-na, g patr-iia; g treT 
 an-fatr ro-k'aran, g kgne ro-petr, g bap Pa Sip-a, na Ira 
 pa re g-bai-an traka an-wut. Pa Nes g pa rgnan : „Ko tr'el 
 Ira na ma pa ang-e?" Pa Sip g pa sg : „Pa Bo g poii dif 
 afi-wut-'a-mi." Pa Nes g pa: „A, Pa Bo! Yg g yi gbo 
 t^nkan; g dif Ig ngn an-wut-'a-mi!" 0-bai g pa ka Pa Sip:
 
 — 83 — 
 
 weni to the farm. The Leopard came to the place uhere 
 he') had put his chiklren, (and) he did not see them again; 
 and as he followed up the scent (in the wav), where Ihey carried 
 them, he went and arrived at the farm of the Bushgoat, he met 
 the Bushgoat stirring up the fire. The Spider came, he hid 
 himself, and was looking at the Bushgoat; as he had learned, 
 that the Leopard was coming to look for ^j his children. The 
 Leopard came in order to seek his children, and said: „Mr. Bush- 
 goat, who carried my children to this place?" He went and 
 took them up, they were dead then. ^) He said again: „Mr. 
 Bushgoat, didst thou kill mv children?" The Bushgoat fled. 
 The Leopard spent the whole day in pursuing after him. The 
 Bushgoat went and hid himself with the king*) in the evening. 
 The Leopard ciime, and said to ihe king: „Did the Bushgoat 
 arrive here?" The king said: „He is here." He asked the 
 Leopard again: „\Vhal Is the matter?" The Leopard said: „He 
 has killed my children." The king said: „See him behind (the 
 yard); he killed the other day a sheep of mine." The Leopard 
 went there behind. The Bushgoat fled, he followed him in order 
 to pursue after him, till he went and hid himself at the Spider's 
 place; (and) the Leopard did not see him again. The Leopard 
 went back again tu the king, and asked him again: „Did the 
 Bushgoat come here?" He said: „I did not see him." The 
 Spider left, and went and look the cliddren of Ihe Leopard, and 
 went and broiled then), and cooked them; he left liie iron pot 
 on the fire-place, and went into the town, and met the Leopard, 
 they were talking v, illi the king about thi' children. The Spider 
 said to them: „\Vhat mailer are ye talking about here?" The 
 Leopard said again: „The Bushgoat has killed my children." 
 The Spider said: „Ah, the Bushgoat, thus he is but always; he 
 killed mv children the other day!" The king said to the Leopard: 
 
 1) Lit. „Thc Leopard arrived where he etc." 
 
 2) Or „to seek etc." 
 
 3) Or „ already." 
 
 4) Or „at the king's pkice etc." 
 
 6*
 
 — 84 — 
 
 „Tens-ko." Pa Sip o wiir, o kdne traka ka-ten Pa Bo; o ko 
 gb^nne-ko ro-r'on; o bal-bal-kg. Pa Bo o ko mankne so ro- 
 karit, Pa Sip o nafik fe ko so; kere Pa Bo o ko mankne ro- 
 raran ka Pa Nes. Pa Nes o trala-ko ri, o ko nan'-ko ri, o pa; 
 „Man kone di, I pon patr." Pa Bo o pa: „1 minta he, o-bai 
 pon mi wauki." Pa Nes o pa so: „I kcira-mu e-nak ano-i?" 
 Pa Bo pa: „Yao, kara and." Pa Nes o kere-ko e-nak; na 
 yira gbo, ria di. Pa Nes o pa so: „Tro pe-mu-e, Pa Bo?" 
 Pa Bo pa: „l Liin fi; na bini mi dlf " Pa Nes o pa so; 
 „Ma trara tenon ka-btm fi-i?" pa: „I trara-ki tenon." Pa 
 Nes pa ho: „Ma ma pa nan fo ma tr'a he ki nan-a." Pa 
 Bo pa so: „Kere I trara-ki tenon." Pa Nes o pa so: „Man 
 di lemj) lemp, kiima ma gbuke. Be Pa Sip o trala am-bontr- 
 'a-mu-e, ro ma ko be, o tra tran-mu; kdne o-bdli." Pa Bo 
 gbuke so (ma na pon di), o kdne o-bdli. Pa Sip o tens- 
 ko, han o lamrg; o kdne so ka o-bal. Pa Nes so, mo o trara, 
 fo Pa Sip kdne ka o-bal, o ko ri so. bap Pa Sip, o tra 
 pa-lsi so traka Pa Bo. 0-bal o pa ka Pa Sip: „Ro ma n§iV- 
 ko be, batr-ko, ma kara-ko romi." Pa Nes o pa so: „Ro ma 
 nan'-ko be, gbip-ko, ma kara." Kon' so o kdne, o ko ban 
 Pa Bo; o k^ne-ko, fo ka-trak ka pon. Ma na bek ro-petr-e, 
 Pa Nes k^ne Pa Bo: „Tran and, hima ma kg wur rorarah 
 ka g-bal." Kgn' q kal kdne ka Pa Sip-an, o pa ho: „Kdne ro- 
 raran ka g-bal, ma ko mankne ro-r'on; Pa Bo, I pon kara-ko."
 
 — 85 — 
 
 „Seek him/' The Leopard went out, ;ind went away in order 
 to seek the Bushgoat; he went and met him in the road; he 
 pursued after him. The Bushgoat went and hid himself again 
 in the bush, (and) the Leopard did not see him again ; but the 
 Bushgoat went and hid himself at the back-part of the Spiders 
 place. The Spider heard him there, and went to see him there, 
 and said: „Let us go to eat, I have cooked." The Bushgoat 
 said: „l do not dare, tlie king has outlawed me." The Spider 
 said again: „Shall 1 bring thee the rice here?" The Bushgoat 
 said: „Yes, bring (it) here." The Spider carried the rice to 
 him; they just sat down, and ate. The Spider said again: 
 „How art thou, Mr. Bushgoat?" The Bushgoat said: „I almost 
 died; the_>' almost killed me." The Spider said again: „Doest 
 thou know now (what) almost dying (is)?" He said: „1 know 
 it now." The Spider said: „Because thou saidst before that 
 thou didst not know it." The Bushgoat said again: „But I 
 know it now." The Spider said again: „Lel us eat very quickly, 
 that thou mayest flee. If the Leopard gets the scent of thee, 
 wherever Ihou goest, he will follow thee; go far away." The 
 Bushgoat fled again (when they had eatenj, and went far away. 
 The Leopard sought him, till he was tired;') and he went again 
 to the king's place. The Spider also, when he knew, that the 
 Leopard had gone to the king's place, went there too. He met 
 the Leopard, he was talking over again the matter about the 
 Bushgoat.^) The King said to the Leopard: „Wherever thou 
 seest him, seize him, and bring him to me." The Spider also 
 said: „Wherever thou seest him, catch him, and bring (him)." 
 He also left, and went to fetch the Bushgoat; he told him, that 
 the palaver was done." When they came to the town, the 
 Spider said to the Bushgoat: „Follow here, that thou mayest 
 come out behind the king's place." He went again to the Leo- 
 pard, and said: „Go behind the king's place, and go and hide 
 thyself in the road; as to the Bushgoat, I have brought him." 
 
 1) Lit. „till he was overcome." 
 
 2) Lit. „he was talking it over again about etc."
 
 — 86 — 
 
 Pa Sip o ko iriaiikne ri; Pa Bo o bek; Pa Sip o wop-ko. Pa 
 Bo ki'ilo. 0-bal o pa ho: „Ko ne-e? Kane mo kulo roraran- 
 e?" Pa Sip pa: „I solo Pa Bo." O-bai o pa: „Kara-ko." 
 Pa Sip kara-ko, 'a dif-ko. Ma na pon dif Pa Bo-e, Pa Nes 
 bek. 0-bai o pa: „Tro sa ina yo-ko-e?" Pa Sip o pa: 
 „Tr' 'a tsen-ko; mg o pon som an-wut-'a-mi, mina, I tsi som- 
 ko." Na pon-ko tsen senk. Pa Sip g pa ho: „Tr' 'a yer Pa 
 >es-a o-laT, kgng som I sgtg-kg." 0-bal o pa ka Pa Sip so: 
 „Ro ma nank a-bo be, gbip-kg." 
 
 Tsiah Pa Sip g Ira gbip tra-bo, na ma nankane he so 
 lankan ; ro o nan'-ko, g gbip-kg. Tsian so an-wul na Pa Bo, 
 iia trgri Pa Yari fg: „Be ma nank Pa Nes-afi, gbip-ko, w'rini 
 las won." Tsian sg g-sip g nank gbo a-bo-e, g gbip-kg, g pon 
 kg som; de a-yari, be g nank gbo a-nes-e g sgm-kg. 
 
 An' limp VII. 
 
 0-BaT re O'wan-k'gn g-bera, de Pa Tamba. 
 
 0-baI g-lgm g kom lapan w'ahet bera, kg o yi o-fino tanka 
 be, kg g ruasm-kg, ban g pon bak; ka a-fam a-rtini na yema- 
 kg. Kg g-yola g re ten-kg, g pa: „0-rani-ka-mi won." Kg 
 g sgn a-kala a-gbati ka g-bai, g-kas ka 6-bera; kg g-kas-k'gn o 
 pa hg: „Botr an-kala-'a-mu; be ma bonlr ar'aka, ara yi ka ari- 
 sebe rok'6r-e, g-bera ma nanlra-kg." Kere g tr'a he ar'aka.
 
 — 87 — 
 
 The Leopard went and hid himself there; the Bushgoat came, 
 (and) the Leopard took hold of him. The Bushgoat cried. The 
 king said: „Whal is the roatler? Who is crving behind?" 
 The Leopard said: „I have got the Bushgoat." The king said: 
 „Bring him." The Leopard brought him, (and) Ihe/y killed him. 
 When Ihey had killed the Bushgoat, the Spider arrived. The 
 king said: „>Vhat shall we do with him?" The Leopard said: 
 „Let Ihem cut him up; as he has devoured mj children, 1 shall 
 devour him." The/y had cut up the whole. The Leopard said: 
 „Lel them give much lo the Spider, he caused me to get him." 
 The king said to the Leopard again: „Wherever thou seesl a 
 bushgoat, catch him." 
 
 This is the reason I hat the Leopard is catching bushgoals, 
 thev never meet each other again face to face; where he sees 
 him, he catches him. This is also the reason that the children 
 of the Bushgoat told') the Cat: „When thou doest see the 
 Spider, catch him, he is a bad person."^) This is also the 
 reason that as soon as a leopard sees a bushgoat, he catches 
 it, and enlirel;y devours it; and a cat, as soon as it sees a 
 spider, it devours it. 
 
 Fable VIL 
 
 The King and his Daughter, and Mr. Tamba. 
 
 A certain king begat once a girl, and she was exceedingly 
 fair, and he brought her up, till she was grown up; and men 
 wanted her. And a gentleman came and tried to get her,^) he 
 said: „She is my wife."*) And he offered much money to the 
 king, the father of the woman; and her father said: „Put down thy 
 money; if thou doest name the thing, which is within the amulet, 
 thou shalt marry the woman." ^) But he did not know the thing. 
 
 \) Lit. „informed." 
 
 2) Lit. „a bad person that." 
 
 3* Lit. „carae to seek" or „canie to obtain her." 
 
 4) Lit. „My wife that one." 
 
 5) „(,as for) the woman, tlinu marriest her."
 
 — 88 — 
 
 ara \i ka an-sebe rok'6r-e; ko o-kas ka o-bera o pa: „Ma lamro, 
 kalane." Ko o-^ola o-lom o der so, o re fen o-borko, ko o 
 son so a-kala a-gbati. O-kas ka o-bera o pa so: „Botr an- 
 kala-'a-mu; be ma bonlr ar'aka, ara ^yi ka an-sebe rok'6r-e, ma 
 nanlra o-bora." Kore o-l^nba g tamro, o tr'a he ar'aka, ara ^-i 
 ka an-sebe rok'or, ko o-kas o pa: „Kalane." Ka afi-fam be ka 
 an-tof na der memar, ka na tamro; na tr'a he ar'aka, ara yi 
 ka an-sebe rok'or. Ko Tamba o yefa ro-toron o-boli, g re ten 
 g-bgrkg, g pa hg: „I Isi sgtg-kg, g-nini-ka-mi wgn." Ka afi- 
 fam na pa hg: „Tamba, ma yema, ma tana he kg sgtg, ma a 
 ;y6la be na pon tamrg." Ko mg g kgne, g ba e-trgkg, g ba 
 pa-la pa-fera, de pa-la pa woma; kg g ba w'ir, g ba ma-vante, 
 de m'aro, de e-liik ya pa-la. Kg mg o kgne, g bap Pa Ra- 
 bem-an, ') d'or ra baki-na; g yif-na: „Ko rie-e?" Napa: „D'or 
 ra baki-su." Kg g sgii-na e-tuk. Ma na pon di-yi, g tas, o 
 kg bap Pa Kwl-aii, g pa: ,.Ko ne-e?" Kgn' g pa: „D'or ra 
 baki-mi." wiira gw'ir, kg g sgn-kg. tas, g kg bap Pa 
 R'gf-an, g pa: „Ko ne-e ma fanla ang-e?" Pa R'gf g pa: 
 „D'or ra baki-mi." Tamba g wiira e-trgkg na-ran, g sgn-kg. 
 Ma Pa R'gf-an g pon di e-trgkg, g wiira a-trgl, g sgh Pa 
 Tamba. An-trgl, an'es-na-tsi hla yi: ka-w6so. pa hg: „Be 
 a-bok g nan w'uni, an-trgl arie riia ma yo, nia w'uni mg mun; 
 
 1) The Singular is here used for the Plural, or for the 
 whole species; hence the plur. form of the pron. in the follow- 
 ing sentences.
 
 — 89 — 
 
 which was within the amiilel; and the father of the woman said: 
 „Thou art disappointed, return." Then another gentleman came 
 again, he came and tried to get") the damsel, and he offered 
 also much money. The father of the woman said again: „Put 
 down thy money; if thou doest name the thing, which is within 
 the amulet, thou doest marry the woman." But the young man 
 was disappointed, he did not know the thing, which was within 
 the amulet; and the father said; „ Return." And all the people 
 in the country came to try, and they were disappointed; they 
 did not know the thing, which was within the amulet. And 
 Tamba came from the east a far way off, he came and tried to 
 get') the damsel, and said: ,.I shall get her, she is my wife."^) 
 And the people said: „Tamba, thou doest tell a lie, thou art not 
 able to get her; when ^) all gentlemen have been disappointed." 
 And as he went along, he had fowls, he had clean rice, and 
 rice in the husk; and he had a goat, he had penne seed,*) and 
 palm-oil, and rice-straw. And as he went, he met the Hedge- 
 hog,'') hunger was heavy upon them; he asked them: ,,\Vhat is 
 the matter?" They said. „Hunger is heavy upon us." And 
 he gave them straw. When they had eaten it, he passed on, 
 and went and met the Alligator, and said (to him): „\Vhat is 
 the matter?" He said: „Hunger is heavy upon me." He took 
 out the goat, and gave (it) to him. He passed on, and went 
 and met the Cerastes, and said (to him). „What is the matter 
 that thou doest lie here?" The Cerastes said: „Hunger is 
 heavy upon me." Tamba took out two fowls, and gave (them) 
 to him. When tfie Cerastes had eaten the fowls, he took out 
 a medicine, and gave (it) to Mr. Tamba. As to the medicine, 
 the name of it is: ka-w6so. He said: „lf a snake biles a per- 
 son, this medicine they must make, this one must drink; 
 
 1) Or: „to obtain." 
 
 2) Lit. „my wife that one." 
 
 3) Or: „ because all etc." 
 
 4) A kind of millet. 
 
 5) ()i : „ Grass-cutter." Sec the word in the Vocabulary.
 
 — 90 — 
 
 ksma pa lof'lo-ko." Pa R'of-ah o pa so: ,.Tr' 'a ko len ma- 
 fit^) ma w'uni \anfa, tr' 'a botr-na ka an-trol." Tamba o tas, 
 kg bap Pa Tr'ak-na, o pa ronon:^) „Ko fie-e?" pa:^) 
 „D'or ra ban-su.'' vvura ma-yante, de m'aro, o son ka Pa 
 Tr'ak-na, na di. tas, o kone, o ko bek ro ka o-bai, o-kas 
 ka ow'ahet bera, o pa ronoii fo: „I der ten ovv'ahL'l bera traka 
 nantra-ko. 0-santki ka o-bai o pa ho: „A Tamba, miino yai 
 owe ma der ten o-bera owe-i?" Tamba o pa: ,,I tsi nantra- 
 ko, o-rani-ka-mi won." D'or ra baki ka a-boT na o-bai, kg 
 Tamba g wiira pa-la, g sgn-kg. Ma am-bgl g pon di-e, ,g kgne 
 ro ka Pa Tamba, g kg bonlra-ko ey'etr, eye yi ka an-sebe ro- 
 k'6r-e; na kg dira. Ka-bat 'a kg yira traka pa tra ka-nantra. 
 O-kas ka g-bera g yif Tamba ho: „Ma yema g-bgrkg-i? Bontr 
 ar'aka, ara yi ka an-sebo rok'or." Tamba g pa: „I trara-tsi; 
 kere I minta he." O-kas g pa so: „Bontr-yi, Ira ba he Ir'el." 
 pa: „1 selg." Tamba g pa ho: „An-fon na Pa, mg g yi g- 
 fet-e lapah, de aka-bonl-k'on, de e-santrak-y'gii, yiah yi rok'or 
 ka an-sebe." Ma Tamba g pa yafi-e, g-saniki g pa: „Ma 
 yema." Kg g yoka-kg, kg g trand-kg. Kg g-bai g pa: „Yao, 
 ka-sQ-ka-mi ka dinne tapan ro-lal; be ma wiira-ki, ma nanira 
 
 1) Tlie indefinite form for the definite one, as it cannot be 
 misunderstood. 
 
 2) Or: rgnan, „to them." See the word k'ak, which is the 
 Sing, of tr'ak in the Vocabulary behind. 
 
 3) Or: Na pa: „t.hey said:"
 
 — 91 — 
 
 thai if may gel belter with him.') The Cerastes said again: „Let 
 them go look for the brains of a deceilful person, (and) k't Ihem 
 pul them into the medicine." Tamba passed on, and went and 
 met the Ants,*) and said to him:^) „\Vhal is tlie matter?" He 
 said:^) „Hunger troubles us." He took out penne seed, and palm- 
 oil, and gave (them) to the Ants, (and) they ale. He passed on, 
 and left, and went and came to the king, the father of the girl, 
 and said to him: „1 come to look for*) the girl in order to marry 
 her." A minister of the king said: „Ah Tamba! Thou, such a 
 worthless fellow, 5) thou doest come to look for this woman?" 
 Tamba said: „I shall marry her, she is my wife." '^) Hunger 
 was heavy upon a servant of the king, and Tamba look out 
 rice, and gave (it) to him. When the servant had eaten, he 
 went to Mr. Tamba, and \\enl and named to liim the things, 
 which were within the amulet; (and) they went to sleep. In 
 the morning they went and sat down to talk about the marriage. 
 The father of the woman asked Tamba: „Doest thou want the 
 damsel?^) Name the thing, which is within the anudet." Tamba 
 said: „1 know it; but 1 do not dare (to name it)." The father 
 said again: „Naine them, il is of no consequence." He said: 
 „I will." Tamba said: „The hair of the Master, when he was 
 a young child formerly, and his navel-string, and his nails,®) 
 these (things) are within the amulet." As Tamba spoke thus, 
 the minister said: „Thou doest tell a lie." And he took him, 
 and chained him. And the king said: „\Vell, my pipe was once 
 lost on the grass-field; if thou doest find it out, thou shalt marry 
 
 1) Lit. „tliat it may get easy with him," — „tliat he may 
 become easy," or „get out of danger." 
 
 2) Lit „implying the whole species." 
 
 3) The Singular for the Plural. 
 
 4) Or: „to obtain." 
 
 5) Lit. „Thou, this worthless one, thou etc." 
 
 6) Lit. „my wife that." 
 
 7) Here is an ellipsis of a few words, as: „Doest thou want 
 the damsel? If so, name the thing etc." 
 
 8,1 That is ,cuttiugs of them'.
 
 — 92 — 
 
 o-bera." Tainba opa: „Yao, I tsi wura-ki." Ko mo o kone ro- 
 lal, ko bap Pa Ra-bem-an, o yif-ko: „Re man ko-e, Tamba?" 
 
 pa: „1 ko ten aka-sQ ka o-bal, ka dinne tapafi-e." Pa Ra- 
 bem-a o pa ho: „Kar-mi, 1 ko bana-mu-ki." ko ban-ki, o 
 son Tamba. Tamba o kere ka-sil ka o-bal. Kere o-santki o 
 pa ho: „Ma jema, ki lahg." Kg o wop-ko, o vo-na 'a sap- 
 ko. Kg g-bal g pa: „Tser-kg nan.-' Na Iser-kg. Kg g-bal g 
 pa sg: „Ak'gnle-ka-mi ka Jinne lapah ro-ban; be ma wura-ki, 
 
 1 tsi sgii-mu g-bera." Tamba g pa: „I tsi wura-ki." Tamba 
 g kgne, g kg bap Pa KwT-an; kgn' g pa ho: „Tamba, ko iie- 
 e?" pa: „I kg wiira ak'gnte ka g-bal, aka dinne tapan ro- 
 ban." Pa Kwl-a g kgne tete, g kg wura-ki, g sgn Tamba. 
 Tamba g kara-ki ka g-bal, g re sgn-kg. O-santki g pa hg: „A, 
 w'uni las! Tr' 'a bal-kg!" 0-bal g pa: „De, I bal he kg." 
 0-baI g pa sg: „Tamba, apa-la-pa-mi an-fel na pon pantrane-pi 
 de ma-}'ante; be ma pori wiira ama-yanle ka pa -la, ma tra 
 nantra g-bgrkg." Tamba g pa: „l selg, I tsi wiira-na." Tamba 
 g pa: „Tr' 'a kara apa-la." Na kara-pi. yira ro-set, g tra 
 wiira apa-la ka ama-^anle. Mg g mg yo ama-panl ame, Pa 
 Tr'ak *) g bek, na gbati, na yif Tainba: „Ko ma yg ang-e?" 
 Tamba g pa hg: ,,0-bal g sgh-mi ama-panl ame, kama I wiira 
 
 1) Here Pa is in the Sing., and Tr'ak in the Plur. ; the 
 following pron. is governed by Pa, and therefore in the Singular. 
 See the word k"ak in the Vocab. behind.
 
 — 93 -^ 
 
 the woman."') Tamba said: „Yes, I shall find it out." And 
 as he went to the grass-field, he happened^) to meet the Grass- 
 cutter, who^j asked him: „ Where art thou going to, Tamba?" 
 He said: „1 go to look for*) the pipe of the king, it was once 
 lost." The Grass-cutter said. „\Vait me, I shall fetch it for 
 thee." He went and fetched it, and gave (it) to Tamba. Tamba 
 carried the pipe to the king. But the minister said: „Thou 
 doesl tell a lie, it is not this." And he seized him, and caused 
 them to beat him. The king said: „Let him go." Thev let 
 him go. And the king said again: „My cymbal •') was once lost 
 in the sea;^j if thou doesl find it out, I shall give thee the 
 woman." Tamba said: „I shall find it out." Tamba left, and 
 happened to meet the Alligator; he said: „Tamba, what is the 
 matter?" He said: „1 go to find out the cymbal of the king, 
 which was formerly lost in the sea."*^) The Alligator departed 
 directly, and went and found it out, ") and gave (it) to Tamba. 
 Tamba brought it to the king, and came and gave (it) to him. 
 The minister said: „Ah, a bad person! Let them drive him 
 away!" The king said: „No, I do not drive him away." The 
 king said again : „Tamba, as regards my rice the children have 
 mixed it with penne-seed; when thou hast taken out the penne- 
 seed from the rice, thou shalt marrv the damsel." Tamba said: 
 „1 will, I shall take it out." Tamba said. „Let them bring 
 the rice." They brought it. He sat down in the house, and 
 was taking out the rice from the penne-seed. As he was 
 doing this work, the Ants^) came, they were numerous, (and) 
 they asked Tamba: „What doesl thou do here?" Tamba 
 said: „The king gave me this work, that 1 might take out 
 
 1) Lit. „thou marriest the woman." 
 
 2) Lit. „he went (and) met etc." 
 
 3) Lit. „he asked etc." 
 
 4) Or: „to seek." 
 
 5) See the word k'onte in the Vocabulary. 
 
 6) Or: „in the water." 
 
 7) Or: „took it out." 
 
 8) The wole species is implied.
 
 — 94 — 
 
 apa-la ka ama-yfinte ame." Pa Tr'ak o pa: „Yira, kar-su." 
 T6te iia pon wiira apa-la ka ma-yante be; apa-la pa-fera ra ka- 
 balai k'in, ama-vanle ra ka-balai ka-lom. Tamba o yoka aira- 
 balai tra-ran atse, o ko tramar-tsi ka o-bal, o pa: „I poh." 
 0-santki o pa ho: „Tamba o yi w'uni las, tr' 'a fai-ko." Na 
 yoka-ko, iia sap-ko, 'a trand-kg. 0-baI o kane an-riHii-iVoii 
 iVcinle, pa: „Kone, na ko kuta-mi m'anir, 1 yeina biiko." Na 
 kone, de w'ahyt bt-ra g-lgm, g beka trainat. Ma na kg-e, Pa 
 R'gf g gbatr-na') be, lambe gw'ahol bora g gbalr'j he ko. 
 Ow'ahet g gbiike, g de kane g-bal hg: „Pa R'gf g gbatr ') am- 
 bgrkg be ro-bal." 'A kgne, 'a kg bah-ha, 'a kara.^) W'uni 6 
 w'uni g Ir'a he an-trgl traka yenkas-na ma-der; na pon pika 
 be, na fanta. 0-bai g pa: ,.Tr' 'a tsela Tamba, kgng Irara tr'el." 
 Na tsela Tamba; g der, g-bal g pa rgfigh : „Tamba, kali afi- 
 rani-'a-mi, na tra fi; Pa R'gf g gbalr-na;') ma trara an-lrgl na- 
 tsi-i?" Tamba g pa hg: „I trara." 0-bal g pa so: „Ygna-mi 
 an-trgl-e." Tamba g pa: „Tr' 'a kg ten ma-fit^) ma w'uni yanfa; 
 miah me ygna-hi; tete ha tra yokane." 0-baI g pa: „I malane." 
 yoka a-bar, g siit-hi g-sj'uilki ra-bomp, ma-fil^) ma wur; ha 
 yoka-ha, ha-sgh Tamba; kgn' g yoka-ha, g ruhkatr-ha ka an- 
 trgl. sgh-hi ka g-bera g-kin, g yokane. 0-baT g pa: „Ba- 
 sara-mi, w'an-ka-mi!" Tamba g pa sg: „Tena-n i ma-fit^) ma 
 w'iini y^hfa, ame ma poh." 0-biil g yg 'a sut g-santki g-lgm 
 ka 'ra-bomp sg; ma-flt ^) ma wur, ha soh-ha ka Tthnba; g yoka, 
 g botr ka an-trgl traka g-bera g-lgm; g sokane sg. O-bai g 
 pa sg: „>V'an-ka-mi, ramara-mi Ig lemp ah-rani-'a-mi ha-rah, 
 
 1) Or: hah, „bit." 
 
 2) The Ulycct is dropped here. 
 
 3) The iiidehnite form for the definite one, as it cannot be 
 misunderstood.
 
 — 95 — 
 
 the rice from this penne-seed." The Ants said: „Sit down, (and) 
 wail us." Present!)' thev had talien out the rice from all the penne- 
 seed; the clean rice in one basket, (and) the penne-seed into 
 another basinet. Tamba took these two baskets, and went and put 
 Ihem bef(ire the king,') and said: „I have done." The minister 
 said: „Tamba is a bad man, lei Iheni cut his throat." The;>' took 
 him, and beat him, and chained him. The king lold his four 
 wives, and said : „Depart ye, and go and scoop water for me, 
 I want to bathe." They went, and another girl, making five. 
 When they went, the Cerastes knocked (stung) all of them, 
 except the girl he did not knock (sling) her. The girl ran, and 
 came and told the king (saying): „The Cerastes has knocked 
 (stung) all the young women at the brook." They left, and 
 went to fetch them, and brought (them). No one knew the 
 medicine to cure them; they had all fainted, and lay down. The 
 king said: „Let them call Tamba, he is clever."^) They called 
 Tamba; he came, (and) the king said to him: „Tamba, look at 
 my wives, they are dying; the Cerastes knocked (stung) them; 
 doesl thou know the medicine for it?" Tamba said: „1 know." 
 The king said again: „Make me the medicine." Tamba said: 
 „Lel them go and look for the brains of a deceitful person; 
 with them 1 must make il; (and) directly they ^vill get up 
 again." The king said: „1 agree (to it)." He took an iron 
 bar, and knocked a minister on the head with it; the brains 
 came out, they took them, and gave (them) to Tamba; he took 
 them, and mixed them with the medicine. He gave il to one 
 woman, (and) she gol up. The king said: „Go on for me, my 
 friend!" Tamba said again: „Gel me the brains of a deceitful 
 person, these are finished." The king made them knock again 
 another minister on his head; the brains came out, they gave 
 them to Tamba; he look (them), and put (Ihem) into the med- 
 icine for another woman ; (and) she gol up also. The king 
 said again: „IVly friend, heal me now quickly my two wives, 
 
 1) Lit. „placed them before etc. 
 
 2) Lit. „he knows something."
 
 — 96 — 
 
 an^ tsia." Tamba o pa so: „Tr' 'a kara ma-fit ma w'uni vanfa." 
 kal sut o-santki o-lom, 'a wiira ma-fit-m'on, 'a son Tamba; 
 kon' yoka-na, o bolr ka an-trgl, o son am-bera na-rah, ana 
 tsia; ria jenk tele ma-der, iia yokane. Kere an-santki a-lom 
 na o-bal, ana tsia, na gbiike, iia kone. Ma an-santki, ana tsia, 
 na gbiiko, na pon kone; o-bal o wiira y'etr e-l6pra, o son 
 T^mba; g son-ko so g-borko, gwg o der tijpan tra re len-e. 
 0-baI g \M'ira sg kii-Ienken ka-lgm ka ka-pelr-k'gii, g sgn-ki ka 
 Tamba. wiira so tra-petr tra a-trar tra-ran, de an-trar be, 
 
 - -or u o ' ~ ~' 
 
 g sgh-tsi Tamba; kgn' g sake sg g-y6la g-bana. Kg g-bal g 
 bak; mg g pon bak yan-e, g sgn Tamba an-tgf-h'gn, g pa hg: 
 „Be I fi-e, Tamba, kgng na ma pglg g-bal." Mo g-bal g re 
 fi-e, na wiira 'ra-bal, na son Tamba; kgn' g kal sg sotg a-fgsa, 
 de a-kala, g tas g-bal tapan.
 
 — 97 — 
 
 who are left."') Tainba said again: „Lel them bring the brains 
 of a deceitful person." He knocked again another minister, they 
 look out his brains, they gave (them) to Tamba; (and) he took 
 them, and put them into the medicine, and gave (it) to the 
 two women, who were left;') they got well directh, and got 
 up. But the other ministers of the king, who were left,') 
 fled, and went away. When the ministers, who were left.') 
 had fled, and gone away; the king took out ^j clothing, and 
 gave (it; to Tamba; he gave him also the damsel, for whom 
 he came formerly to obtain her. Tlie king also took oul^) some 
 neigbouring yard in his town, and gave it to Tamba. He also 
 took oul^) two slave-towns, with all the slaves, and gave them 
 to Tamba; (and) he also became a great gentleman. And the 
 king got old; when lie had grown old thus, he gave Tamba his 
 country, and said (to his people): „W'hen I am dead, Tambi, 
 him ye must make king." When the king came to die, they 
 took the kingdom, and gave (it) to Tamba; (and) he also got 
 again power, and property, more than the former kiiig.^) 
 
 1) Or: „who remained." 
 
 2) Or: „tool<," or „pioked out." 
 
 3) Lit. „he surpassed the king before." 
 
 Temne-Fabeln.
 
 — 98 — 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 Proverbs. 
 
 The following ones were met with by the author: — 
 
 1. As'ani Ira wop ko, lit. „The state of having set the 
 teeth on edge holds hini," = „One's teeth are set on edge." 
 Sense: „A burned child dreads the fire." Or somewhat like: 
 ,, Bought wit is best." Or: „One learned wit." Or like the 
 Germ, proverb: „Durch Schaden wird man klug." Thus if for 
 instance one goes to a place, of which he was told before that 
 some evil will befall him there; but still goes, and the evil, 
 which he before scorned at, comes upon him, on his return he 
 may say: as'ani tra m op-mi; and if asked to go to such a place 
 again, he will refuse to do so by saying: I ko he ri, as'ani tra 
 wop-mi, „1 do not go there, I learned wit." 
 
 2. Mer, pa ronkat, pa wosi; lit. „Swallovv, it is bitter, it is 
 dry." Sense: Take a thing patiently, however trying it may be." 
 Or like the Germ, proverb: „Was ich nicht andern kann, nehm' 
 ich geduldig an." 
 
 Note. The pronominal form pa, as used with the verb wosi, 
 which is the long form of wos, „get dry, be dry," and which, 
 therefore, according to analogy ought to be o; can only be 
 accounted for on the ground that it is used with a proverb; 
 where greater liberty is allowed with regard to the form of 
 words, than in other common language. Another reason for 
 which this form seems to be used, is to make it agree with 
 the form of the preceding pronoun. The short form of wosi 
 could not have been used here, because it is a positive 
 proposition ; but wos has the sense of „get dry" ; only in 
 negative propositions it has also the sense of „be dry". See 
 the Note after wos, v. n. in the Vocabulary. 
 
 For the better understanding of this proverb it may be 
 observed, that ronkat has reference to the acerb taste, which 
 unripe fruit has las unripe limes), which makes it very un- 
 pleasant to swallow; and wosi refers to dry food (as dry 
 rice), which will not go down the throat so easily, as when
 
 — 99 — 
 
 moistened with palaver-sauce, as this is made lubricous by 
 a vegetable called ocra by the Liberated Africans in Sierra- 
 Leone, which forms one of its ingredients. 
 
 3. Sene Tsempi o las am-bal ka-l.scmp; lit. „8enge the 
 Wise exceeded kings in wisdom." Sense: „Thou art wiser than 
 I, 1 will not contend with thee." 
 
 Note. Senge is a fabulous person, said to have lived in the 
 first world, and to have been greatly renowned on account 
 of his wisdom, i Cf. the word tftempi, adj. in the Yocab.). 
 
 4. Ak'or ka-fot ka tana he an-kapatr; lit. „The empty belly 
 (stomach) is no match for the chest." Sense; „A man cannot 
 work well without eating." 
 
 5. Telma ModuV) o bentr a-tsik ka-tas; lit. „A loquacions 
 person (a babbler) hinders strangers from going on;" i. e. „he 
 must talk to Ihem before they go on." 
 
 6. Far-far o yi he kot.sine; lit. „Making far-far does not loose 
 itself," or: „One making far-far does not loose himself," or: ,,does 
 not make himself free." Or; „The far-far does not loose himself." 
 
 " o o 
 
 Note 1. This proverb is taken from the catching of a bird 
 in a trap. It often hai)pens that a bird is caught by one 
 of its feet only; if so, it will struggle hard to get loose; 
 but the more it struggles, the more it will be entangled. 
 "While thus struggling it makes a noise by the flapping of 
 its wings resembling the sound of fiU'-far, whence this word 
 is taken; the sense of which is that a man will not free 
 himself from a difficulty by much struggling. 
 
 Thus if one has a palaver at the court, and then wants 
 to talk again and again without being called upon to do so, 
 thinking that by so doing he will extricate himself from his 
 difficulty; one of the old men at the court, or the king, may 
 say to him: „Far-far o yi he kotsine." 
 
 Note 2. As to the form of this word, it is either an adjec- 
 tive, when w'uni, „a person" is to be understood; or it 
 might be a name for an individual of that class of persons, 
 who behave in this way as stated abone. If it is taken as 
 
 1) See the word M(3du in the Vocabulary, as also Telma. 
 
 7*
 
 — 100 — 
 
 an abstr. noun in o-, we must suppose the prefix to be 
 dropped; but it may be observed here, that the term fgr-far 
 was otherwise only met with as an adverb in connection 
 with the verb yo, „make," used in reference to a bird 
 caught in a trap, which struggles to get loose. (Cf. the Note 
 at the 8"'. the proverb below.) 
 
 7. Ma bar gbo Isiimne, ma tra bar sap; lit. „T!.e more thou 
 struggles!, the more thou \\ilt be caught." The sense of this 
 is much the same with the preceding one. The more a person 
 struggles to extricate himself from a palaver at the Bare, or 
 Court-house, by talking much and passionately ; the more he will 
 get entangled in it, by his incautions and unguarded expressions. 
 
 8. Trama kadi o gbip he bom-an; lit. „To stand ahead does 
 not catch a \\onian;" or: „The being first does not etc.;" or: 
 „One being first does not catch a woman;" or: „A being first 
 does not citch a wiman," that is the one who asks first for 
 a woman to marry her, does not always get her. Sense: ,.He 
 w ho hurries for a thing will miss ii ; but he who tnkes time, 
 will get it." Or something like: „Nolhing good is done in a 
 hurry." Or like: „Hasten slowly fair and softly goes far in a 
 d:)y." Or like the Germ, proverb. „EiU' mil >Veile." 
 
 Note. As regards the form trama kadi, the greater part of 
 what has been stated about the form far-far in the 6*^^. pro- 
 verb above, applies also to this: Trama kadi is either to 
 be taken as an abstr. noun with the prefix o-, which, in 
 that case, we must suppose to be dropped here ; or it is to 
 be looked upon as a verbal adjective, when w'uni may be 
 understood. The latter sujjposition seems to be the correct 
 one. The form trama kadi might possibly be an Infinitive 
 absolute, in which case the pronoun o would be the ii-rela- 
 tivc or impersonal one. See the Preface § 20. 
 
 9. Aii-kil bentr a-mera gbcUitane; or: Pii Kil o bentr a- 
 mera^) gbantane;^) lit. „The ground-pig prevents a mind spread- 
 ing itself," that is „hinders an agreement, or „a harmony of mind." 
 
 1) Or: „plan, design." 
 
 2) Or: „making itself known," or: „diffusing itself."
 
 ~ 101 -^ 
 
 Sense: „He who \^orks in seiret (as (he groiiiid-[)iy does under 
 the ground), prevents unity, being inlent upon, bv secret machi- 
 nations, to sow the seed of disunity among those, wlio were 
 likely to become of one mind about a thing or mailer." 
 
 10. Irand o-poto; o rak-rak, kere o bakar; lit. „He is 
 like a European; he is of a delicate constitution, yet he is 
 strong." This may be spoken in reference to a person, who 
 is of a delicate health, but nevertheless able to do a great deal; 
 because they say that Europeans in Africa are in general of 
 delicate health, but ye! able to accomplish a great deal in war 
 and also otherwise.
 
 i
 
 Pait IL 
 
 Some Specimens 
 
 the Anthor's own Temne ( : 
 
 Translations.
 
 Chapter I. 
 Colloquial Phrases. 
 
 1. Salutations. 
 
 a) On first meeting a jjerson in the forenoon, or about noon, 
 the usual salutations are as follows: 
 
 A. Kori-'u, Pa! (Va! Wan!) A. „I salute thee. Sir! (Madam! 
 
 Child!)'' 
 
 B. Amba! K6ri-'u, Pa! (Ya! B. „Vcry well!') 1 salute thee, 
 
 Wan!) Sir! (Madam! Child!)" 
 
 A. Tro pe-e? A. „Hovv is it?" or „Whal 
 
 or: ( news?-' or: 
 
 Tro pa \i-e? ) „How art thou?" 
 
 or: or: 
 
 Tro pe-mu-e? „How art thou?" 
 
 B. Ail ail! Miino, tro pe-e? B. „So so! Thou, how art 
 
 thou?" or: 
 „Tolerablv well! Thou, how 
 etc.?" 
 or: or: 
 
 Tr'el 6 Ir'ei! Miino, tro „NothJng but trouble! Thou. 
 
 pe-e? how art thou?" 
 
 or: or: 
 
 baki ybo! Miino, tro „li is but hard! Thou, how 
 
 pe-e?" art thou?" or: 
 
 „Onl_v trouble! Thou, how 
 art thou?" 
 or: or: 
 
 Tr'el 6 tr'el tra ;)i he! Mii- „Ver;y well!'j Thou, how 
 
 no, tro pe-e? art thou?" 
 
 1) Or: „Thank you! I etc.!" 
 
 2) Lit. „ There is nothing the matter!"
 
 — 106 — 
 
 A. Jin dira-i? or: Ma dira-i? „Hast Ihou slept well?" 
 
 B. Yao, 1 dira. iMung, ma „Yes, 1 did sleep well. 
 
 dira-i? Thou, didst thou sleep well?" 
 
 b) If a person is not well he may say: 
 
 B. De, I dira he; ra-tril ra B. „No, I did nol sleep; 1 am 
 
 baki-mi tenon. ver^y ill to day." 
 
 A. Ko bansa-mu-e? A. „>Vhat hurts thee?" or: 
 
 „W'hat pains thee?" 
 
 B Ra-bomp-ra-mi ra ban. or: B. „My head aches." or; 
 Ra-boinp ra baii-mi. or: „The head pains me." or: 
 
 Ma-der-ma-mi ma ban be. „My skin hurs me all over." 
 
 or: or: 
 
 1 soko wonane. ,J had fever all night." 
 
 A. Ma ba tra ten e-trol. A. „Thou must look for medi- 
 
 cine." 
 
 B. Yao, I ko len-yi. B. „Yes, I go to look for it." 
 
 A. Re man ko-e? A. „Where art thou going to?" 
 
 B. 1 ko ro-k'or. or: B. „l go to the farm." or: 
 I ko ro-pelr. „1 go to town." 
 
 c) On parting they may say : 
 
 A. Mam piar'-6, Pa! (Ya!) A. „Lel us live (be) well all 
 
 day. Sir! (Madam!)" or: 
 „Goodbye,Sir! (Madam!)" 
 
 B. Amba! Mam piar'-6, Pa! B. ..Very well!') Let us live 
 
 (Ya!) (be) well all day, Sir! 
 
 (Madam !)"' or: „ Very well! 
 Goodbve, Sir! (Madam!)" 
 
 1) Or: „ Thank you! Let us etc.!" or „ Thank you! Good 
 bye etc.!"
 
 — 107 — 
 
 d) If it is toward evening, one does not say: Mam 
 piar'-6, etc.! but: 
 
 A. Man d1ra-6, Pa! (Ya!) A. „Let us sleep well, Sir! 
 
 (Madam !j" or: 
 „Good night, Sir! (Madam!)" 
 
 B. Amba! Man dira-6. Pa! B. „Very well!') Good nighl, 
 
 (Ya!) Sir! (Madam!)" or: 
 
 „Verv well!^) Let us sleep 
 well, Sir! (Madam!)" 
 
 e) If one has met a person already in the earlier part of the 
 
 day, and happens to meet him again, he does not use the 
 
 same salutation: K6ri-'u, etc.! but: 
 
 A. Piine-mu, Pa! (Ya!) or: A. „I have met thee, Sir! 
 Pane-mu-6, Pa! (Ya!) (Madam!)" 
 
 B. Amba! Pane-mu, Pa! (Ya!) B. ,.Very well! 1 have met thee, 
 
 Sir! (xMadam!)" 
 
 A. Am piar'-i? or: A. „Hasl thou been well?" or: 
 Ma pic4r'-i? „Hast thou lived well?" 
 
 B. Yao, I piar' o-lan! B. „Yes, 1 have been pretty 
 
 well!" 
 
 f) To one who just returned from a journey, or to a stranger 
 just arrived, the salutation is : 
 
 A. Sen-o, Pa! (Ya!) or; . , 
 
 , „ \ A. „>\elcome, Sir! Madam!/' 
 
 Sene-6, Pa! (Ya!) S 
 
 or: or: 
 
 Sen-o! Sen-6, Pa! (Ya!) or:. ^Welcome! Welcome, Sir! 
 
 Sene! Sene-o, Pa! (Ya!) i (Madam!)" 
 
 0-tem, sen-o! „Sire, welcome!" 
 
 B. Amba! K6ri-'u, Pa! (Ya!) B.. „Very well!') I salute thee. 
 
 Sir! (Madam!)" 
 A Ro ma vefa-i? A. „ Where doest thou come 
 
 from?" 
 
 1) Or: „ Thank you! etc !"
 
 — i08 — 
 
 B. I yefa ro-Bake-Lgko. B. „1 came from Porl-Loko." 
 
 or; or: 
 
 I yefa ro-Kamp. „1 came from Freetown " 
 
 gi If one sneezes, they say: 
 
 A. Sen-e! A. „God bless thee!" Germ. 
 
 „Zur Genesnng!" 
 
 B. Amba! B. „Ver;>' well!" or: „Thank 
 
 you!" 
 
 h) If one visits a sick person, he addresses him thus: 
 
 Seke-o! or: ^ „l am sorry!" or: ^ 
 
 Seke 6! i „I pity thee!" i 
 
 or: or: 
 
 Seke-o! Seke!^ „1 am very sorry!" or: . 
 
 Seke-o! Seke!J „1 pity thee very much!" J 
 
 or: or: 
 
 Woi! Trankgbo,') Pa! (Ya!) „Alas! Be but quiet, Sir! 
 
 or: (Madam!)" or: 
 
 Wol! Woi! M;> tru ra-tru, Pa! „Alas! Alas! Thou art ill in- 
 
 (Ya!) or: deed, Sir! (iMadam!)" or: 
 Woi! Wot, Pa! (Ya!) Ma Iril „Alas! Alas, Sir! (Madam!) 
 
 ra-tru!^) Tliou art ill indeed!" 
 
 i) If they want to show their sympathy with one, or to condole 
 with one on the death of a near relative, they say: 
 
 Trank gbo,*) Pa! (Ya!) „Be but quiet, Sir! (Madam!) 
 
 or: or: 
 
 Trank gbo!') Trank gbo. Pa! „Be but quiet! Be but quiet, 
 
 (Ya!) or: Sir! (Madam!)" or; 
 
 Woi! Woi! Trank gbo. Pa! „Alas! Alas! Be but quiet. Sir! 
 
 (Ya!) (Madam!)" 
 
 1) Lit. „Be but silent. Sir! (Madam!)" 
 
 2) Or: Ma tru tra-tsen ! „Thou art ill truly!" or: „in 
 fnith!"
 
 — 109 — 
 
 j) If one goes on a journey, he niny have to tell compliments 
 from others; as one would say to one going to Port-Loko: 
 
 Namina Modu 6, (1) kori-kg; „Tell Namina Modu and Ali 
 Ali Bondo 6, (Ij kori-ko. Bondo how do you do for 
 
 me." 'j 
 Lit. „As to Namina Modu, sa- 
 lute him; as to Ali Bondo, 
 salute him." 
 
 k) One coming from Port-Loko might say to one: 
 
 A. Namina Modu o kori-mu. A. ..Namina Modu salutes thee." 
 
 B. Ambd! Amba! B. „Very well! Very well!"') 
 
 o o , 
 
 1) Or on meeting the messenger one would ask him: 
 
 A. Namina Modu o yi ri-i? A. .,Is Namina Modu there?" 
 
 B. yi ri; o kori-mu. B, „Heisthere; hesalutesthee." 
 •A. Ambii! A. „Very well!" Or: ,.Thank 
 
 you!" 
 
 m) If an aged person, or one of superior rank is addressed, 
 
 the salutation is: 
 
 A. 0-tem, kori-'u! or: K6ri-'u. A. .,Sir. I salute thee!" 
 o-tem! or: or: 
 
 0-tem haki, k6ri-"u! „Sire, I salute thee!" 
 
 K6ri-'u, bom!^) or: „I salute thee, Madum!" or: 
 
 Bom, kori-'u!*) „Madam, I salute thee!" 
 
 n) If an aged person, or a superior, speaks to one. and tlie 
 person addressed does not distinctly hear, what he said, 
 
 he says: 
 
 Tro ma pa-e? or. „How doesi thou s;iy?" or: 
 
 Ko r'aka-e? or: „\Vhal is it?-' or: 
 
 1) Or: „Salute N. M. and A. B." 
 
 2 1 Or: „Thank you! Thank you!" 
 
 3) Or: K6ri-'u, o-hom! 
 
 4) Or. 0-bom, kori-'u!
 
 — 110 — 
 
 Pa? or Pa-i? „Sir?" 
 
 Ya? or Ya-i? or Na? „Mam?" or „Madain?" 
 
 o) In sending one's compliments to a gentleman by his domestics, 
 
 one may say to them: 
 
 K6ri Pa-n! or: . „Saliite the Master!" or: ^ 
 
 Kori Pa-aii! ) „Remember me to thy Master!") 
 
 Kori Ya-'n! or: » „Salule the Mistress!" or: 
 Kori Ya-an! 
 
 . „Salule the Mistress!" or: \ 
 
 J „Reniember me to thv Mistress!") 
 
 p) If the Plural is to be expressed, the forms are as follows: 
 
 K6'i-nu, Pa-iia! „1 salute you, Sirs!" 
 
 K6'i-nu, Ya-iia! • „1 salute you, Madams!" 
 
 K6'i-nu, a-fel! „1 salute yoii, children!" 
 
 Mam piar' nan-6, Pa-na! „Good bye. Sirs!" 
 
 Mam piar' nan-6, Ya-na! „Good bye, Madams!" 
 
 Man dira naii-6,') Pa-na! „Good night, Sirs!" 
 
 Man dira nan-6, Ya-na! „Good night, Madams!" 
 
 Tro pe nan-e? „How are ye?" or „How do 
 
 ye do?" 
 Pane-nu, Pa-na! „1 have met you, Sirs!" 
 
 P^ne-nu, Ya-na! „1 have met you, Madams!" 
 
 Sen nan-6! „Welcome ye!" or „Welcome 
 
 to you!" 
 Seke-nan-o! or: . „I am sorry for you!" or: | 
 
 Seke nan-6! J „1 pity you!" > 
 
 Sen nan! „God bless you!" Germ. „Zu 
 
 eurer Genesung!" 
 Sen nan-o! Sen nan-6 ! „Ye are very welcome!" Lit. 
 
 „Welcome ye! Welcome ye!" 
 
 2. Of Worship. 
 
 A. Man der nan r.4mne K'uru- A. „Lel us pray to God." or: 
 masaba. „Let us worship God." 
 
 1) Lit. „Let us sleep ye, etc.!"
 
 Ill 
 
 or: 
 
 Ma leiVsir nan K i'lrumasaba. 
 
 B. Man kg ro-niisidi. 
 
 A. Kar-mi, 1 tsi karane aii-reka- 
 
 'a-mi. 
 
 B. Tsimone ton lemp. 
 
 A. Miino, ma Irara karan-i? 
 
 B. I Irara k'in k'in. 
 
 or: 
 Aiiko, i trara o-tan. 
 
 A. Ma Ir^ra karan Ira-lenme-i? 
 
 o o 
 
 B. An, 1 Iraia o-tan. 
 
 o ' 
 
 A. Matnira ama-leii nia-t6mnp- A, ,.Do('st thou know the Temne 
 
 i? hymns?" 
 
 B. An, 1 Irara-na gbaiaii. B „Y('s, 1 know llicni well." 
 
 A. Ma tral atra-ramno iok'6r-i? A. „Doest Ihoii understand the 
 
 o o 
 
 meaning^) of the prayers ?" 
 
 B. I tral k'in k'in; kere 1 Iral B. „I understand a word now 
 
 ■ or. 
 
 „Lel us praise God by sing- 
 ing." 
 B. „Let us go to Church." 
 
 A. „Wait me, I will bring my 
 book with me." 
 
 B. „Make great haste then." 
 
 A. „Thou, canst thou read?" 
 
 B. „I know single (words)." ') 
 or: 
 
 „Yes, 1 know a little." 
 
 A. ,. Canst thou readTemne?" ^j 
 
 B. „Yes, 1 can a little." 
 
 aka-ramne ka g-Rc^bu gbar- 
 an. 
 
 A. An-reka na K'uru, ma bdtar- 
 
 ni-i? 
 
 B. An, 1 bdtar-ni taiika be; an- 
 
 reka ane na las e-reka e- 
 lom be, 
 
 A. O-poto gbalr-su ka-wandi 
 
 ka-fino tenon. 
 
 B. An, trori-su ar'im ra K'liru B. „Ye.s, he shows us the word 
 
 tra-tseh. of God in truth." 
 
 and then;*) but 1 under- 
 stand the Lord's prayer 
 perfectly." ^) 
 
 A. „As to the book of God, 
 
 doesl thou like it?" 
 
 B. ,:Yes, I like it very much; 
 
 this book exceeds all othf-r 
 books." 
 A. „The white man gave us a 
 good address to day." 
 
 I 
 
 1) Lit. „I know one one." 
 
 2) Lit. „Doest thou know to read Temne?" 
 
 3 1 Lit. „Doest thou understand the pr. in the inside (within?" 
 
 4) Lit. „I understand one one, etc." 
 
 5) Or: kere ka-ramne ka o-Rabu, I tnd-ki gbarari; ,,but 
 as to the Lord's prayer, I perfectly understand it."
 
 112 
 
 A. Tenon kia o lapso gbaia-su 
 
 ka-wandi; o kalane so ton 
 ka an-tofj ana 'a komar- 
 ko, traka kal bakasne ma- 
 der. 
 
 B. K^nko K'uru o mar-su tra 
 
 wop ar'im, nra o pon 
 trori-su e-'dko e-lal; kdma 
 sa tse yi ebo a-tral; kere 
 kama sa yi so a-vo na atra 
 sa pon tral! 
 
 or o 
 
 A. „To day he preached the 
 
 last time to us; he returns 
 now again to his native 
 country, ') to recruit his 
 health again." 
 
 B. „May God help us to hold 
 
 the word, Mhich he has 
 shown us many times; 
 that we may not be hearers 
 only; but that we may 
 also be doers of what we 
 have heard!" 
 
 3. Of the School. 
 
 A. Re man ko-e, w'ahet? 
 
 B. 1 kone ka g-karamgko Ira 
 
 takas ka-karan a-reka. 
 
 o o o 
 
 A. Trdri-mi an-reka ana ma 
 
 o 
 
 takas-e, 
 
 o o 
 
 B. Kali-ni; an-reka ane an-reka 
 
 na K'liru nan. 
 A. Trdri-mi od'er, ro ma k^- 
 
 — — — y Q 
 
 ran-e. 
 B Kar-mi, I tsi lafti a-bdpar; 
 kali od'er ov\d I karaii. 
 
 o _ — _ - 
 
 A. Ma takas ka-gbal-i? 
 
 o o o o a 
 
 B. De, I ta takas he ki o-fino. 
 
 A. „ Where art Ihou going to, 
 
 child?" 
 
 B. „I go to the schoolmaster 
 
 to learn to read a book." 
 
 A. .,Show me the book which 
 
 thou art learning." 
 
 B. „See it; this book is God's 
 
 book."^) 
 
 A. „Show me the place, where 
 
 thou doest read." 
 
 B. „Wait me, 1 will turn over 
 
 the leaf; see the place 
 where 1 read." 
 
 A. „Hasllhou learned to write?" 
 
 B. „No, 1 did not learn it well 
 
 yet." 
 
 A. Pa trui he, be ma memar- A. „It will not be hard, if thou 
 
 ki o-fino. doest try it well." 
 
 B. I l^ne-tsi; kere I trap gbo B. „1 believe it; but I only just 
 
 ras. began." 
 
 1^ Lit. „to the country where they bare him. 
 2) Lit. „this book the book of God that."
 
 113 — 
 
 A. Ma ba k'airi, de d'liba, de 
 
 k'upo-i? 
 
 B. All, 1 ba ey'etr eve, 
 
 A. Ma takas ka-len ma-len ma- 
 
 o o o o 
 
 temne-i? 
 
 B. An, I trara ka-len-na. 
 
 A. Ma trara ka-Ioin-i? 
 
 o o - 
 
 B. De, 1 trap gbo ras Ira takas 
 
 ka-lom. 
 
 o 
 
 A. Basar o-fiiio, kama ma trara- 
 ki lemp. 
 
 A. „Hasl (hou paper, and ink, 
 
 and a pen?" 
 
 B. „Yes, I have these things." 
 
 A. „Hast thou learned to sing 
 
 Temne hymns?" 
 
 B. „Yes, I can sing them." 
 
 A. „Doest thou know arith- 
 
 metic?"') 
 
 B. „No, I onl^y just began with 
 
 learning arithmetic." 
 A. „Continue (persevere) with 
 well, that thou mayest 
 learn it soon." 
 
 4. Of tlie House. 
 
 A. K6ri-'u, Pa! 
 
 B. Amba! K6ri-'u! Ma yema 
 
 woii-i ? 
 
 A. An, I I si won. 
 
 B. De vira, kali ka-wan ka yi 
 
 ri. 
 
 A. M'amo, o-tem; I tsi yira 
 
 ano ka am-mesa raver. 
 
 B. Tse yira ro-rare rayer, a- 
 
 fef a-baki na yi ri. 
 
 A. Tra ba he mi tr'el, o-traiik 
 
 gbali he mi wop. 
 
 B. Ma yema fanta ro-tenta, ta- 
 
 lom ka an-gbata-i? 
 
 A. „1 salute thee, Sir!" 
 
 B. „Thank you! I salute thee! 
 
 Will thou come in?" 
 
 A. „Yos, I shall come in." 
 
 B. „Come sit down, look there 
 
 is a chair." 
 
 A. „Thank you, Sir;^) I shall 
 
 sit down here near the 
 table." 
 
 B. „Do not sit near the door, 
 
 there is a strong draught 
 there." 
 
 A. „!t is no matter to me, 1 
 
 shall not catch cold." 
 
 B. „Doest thou wish to lie down 
 
 in the hammock, or on 
 the mat?" 
 
 1) Lit. „Doest thou know counting?" 
 
 2) Or: „Much obliged to you, Sir; etc, 
 
 Teiuue - Phrasuu.
 
 114 — 
 
 A. De, pa ta lela he mi. 
 
 B. Kali a-bilin , be ma vema 
 
 fanta o-tan. 
 
 o 
 
 A. De, I vema gbo vira ro- 
 
 gbantan. 
 
 B. Be ma yema r'aka, tsela 
 
 ow'ahet. 
 A. M'amo, Pa! 1 tsi jo-tsi. 
 
 A. „No, I do not yet feel tired." 
 
 B. „Look a sofa,') if thou doesl 
 
 wish to He down a little." 
 
 A. „No, 1 only wish to sit down 
 
 in the piazza." 
 
 B. „lf thou doest want any 
 
 thing, call the child." 
 A „Thank you, Sir! 1 shall 
 do it." 
 
 5. Of Eatin? and Drinking. 
 
 A. De yira ro-mesa. 
 
 or 
 
 A. „Come sit down to the table." 
 
 Mail gbelgbetne ka ka-di. 
 B. Ma ramne K'uru tra ruba B. 
 ey'etr-'e-su e-di. 
 
 A. Kali r'a ra-bdti-di, a-nak-6, A. 
 
 a-saka-6. 
 
 o 
 
 B. 1 botar he a-saka, yer mi B. 
 
 o-sem o-tols. 
 
 A. Ma yema o-sem o-nakat-i? A. 
 
 B. De, I tsi di an-troko a- B. 
 
 patr. ') 
 
 A. Ma bdtar he ka-di ka-lop- A. 
 
 o — o o * 
 
 •i? 
 
 B. De, 1 di he ka-lop. B. 
 A. Mina, d'or ra ba-mi, 1 tsi A. 
 
 di o-sem o-salkar, de ma- 
 lei. or: 
 
 or: 
 „Let us recline to the eating." 
 „Lel us pray God to bless 
 
 our food." 
 „See there is something de- 
 licious to eat, rice, and 
 palaver sauce." 
 „1 do not like palaver-sauce, 
 
 give me roast beef." 
 „ Doesl thou want fried beef?" 
 „No, I shall eat of the stew- 
 ed fowl."*) 
 „Doest thou not like to eat 
 
 of the fish?" 
 „No, 1 do not eat fish." 
 „As for me, 1 am hungry,*) 
 I shall eat salt meat and 
 beans." or: 
 
 1) That is a sofa made of mud. 
 
 2) Or: „boiled fowl." 
 
 3) Or: owQ 'a patr, „which they stewed." 
 
 4) Lit. „hunger has me."
 
 115 — 
 
 Mi'na, 1 tsi di o-sem o-kal, 
 de ka-lop ka-kul. 
 
 B. Yentra-mi am'er, de tra- 
 gbei'ibe. 
 
 A. Am bolar e-yoka, de e-ku- 
 
 B. An, I bdtar-yi tanka be. 
 
 A. KiUi a-lis a-lom; ma yema 
 
 ka-bep-i? 
 
 B. De, I yema he ka-bep. 
 
 A. Ma vema mun ma-ber-i? 
 
 B. De, I Isi mun m'anlr. 
 
 „As for me, I shall eat 
 broiled beef, and smoked 
 fish." ') 
 B. „Hand me the sail and the 
 pepper." 
 
 A. „Doest thou like cassada, 
 
 and Mandingo \ams?" 
 
 B. „Yes, 1 like them very much." 
 
 A. „ See there is another knife ; 
 
 doesl thou want a spoon?" 
 
 B. „No, I do not want a spoon." 
 
 A. „Doest thou wish to drink 
 
 liquor?" 
 
 B. „No, I shall drink water." 
 
 Chapter n. 
 Addresses delivered to the Temnes. 
 
 1. 
 
 On John 14, 6. 
 
 „Yisua pa ronon: Mine yi ar'oii, de atra-tseii, de aii-hesam; 
 w'uni 6 w'uni o tana he der ka o-kas, lambe ka ka tra-ka-mi." 
 Yon U. 6. 
 
 1 poii der and tra Irori-nu ar'on' da-fiitia r'in, ara K'uru o 
 kane-su ka ar'im-r'on; pakasife K'iiru o yema kama a-fam be 
 d'er 6 d'er iia Irara ar'oii are, ria tral ar'im-r'oh. T>sa K'iiru o 
 botr w'luii ka 'ra-ru are, kama o leiiki-ko, kama o yikis owd 
 bempa-kg. Traka Isi K'lirumasaba mo o bempa w'lmi, o bempa- 
 ko o-fino de o-tot; Ir'ei 6 tr'ei Ira-las tra yi he roiidh. Kere 
 w'uni lasar an-toii iia K'urumasaba, t.sia ba-lsi iia kanta ar'dn' 
 
 - o o - ' 
 
 da ro-rianna, ka ra-fi ra won ka 'ra-iu be; pakasife a-lam be iia 
 yi a-las, fia be na poii sake a-gbeiia iia K'iiru ro-mera. Kere 
 
 1) Or: „dried fish." 
 
 2) Or: ma-uei-i? „couutry-yams ?" 
 
 »*
 
 — 116 — 
 
 hali w'lini o lasar an-ton iia K'uru, K'uru o bdtar-ko halisa, o 
 botar he ka-nan'-ko ka aii-fosa iia ra-fi, de ka aii-fdsa iia Set^ni; 
 
 b^na-ko i-nel, kg o kanti r'on' da-lorn ro-rianna. 
 
 Ka ari-ton na Musa K'uru o pa ho: Be ma yo at'rei atse 
 ma Ira kali. Kere ka-raraii ka mo w'iini o pen lasariie, o ba 
 
 ooo -- o - -* oo-'" 
 
 he so a-fgsa Ira }o ma-trei ma K'lirumasaba, kama pa tesane-ko; 
 am-mera na w'uni na vi a-las hali: w'uni 6 w'iini o yi he owo 
 gbali wop an-ton ha K'uru o-ffno. Traka Isi w'uni 6 w'iini g 
 gbali he kisi, g gbali he kg ro-rianna traka ra-bomp ra ma-ygs- 
 moh ma-fino. Ma-vos-ma-su nia-fino ma ebali he kanti ri^nna 
 tra trassu; K'uru g trara-tsi g-fino. son-su an-tgh-hgn kama 
 sa nahk elaraii ra-yai-ra-su, de ma-his-ma-su; kama sa trara sa 
 ba he a-fgsa tra wop an-tgn-iigh g-fino, ma pa bgne-kg, de kama 
 sa nank sa ebali he won ro-rianna traka 'ma-yos-ma-su; tsa 
 a-fam be ha poh lasar an-tgh ha K'liru e-lgkg e-lal. Tsiah g 
 kanti r'on' da-lgm Ira trassu ka ka-sgmpane de ka 'ra-fi ra Yisua 
 gw'an-k'gh gbeh. Ar'dh are ra yi ar'dn' da i-nel. Sya be sa 
 yi a-fiim a-las rodi ka K'lirumasaba, w'iini 6 w'uni g yi he g-fino 
 de g-tratseh rodi ka K'uru; kere sya be sa gbali kisi ka ar'oh 
 are, ara K'liru o poh Irgri-su ka ar'im-r'gh tsia yi mo ho ye 
 ka ka-lane Yisua. W'Qiii 6 w'uni gwg yema der ka K'uru ka 
 r'on' da-lgm, tsia yi lig traka ama-ygs-mgh ma-fino gbeh, o tana 
 ho der rghgh tabana, g tra dinne gbo. W'iini Igm g \i he, g- 
 nabi g-lgm g yi he, gwg liina mar-nu tra kg ro-rianna, tambe 
 Yisua gwVm ka K'lirumasaba. Kong yi atra-tseh, kgng yefa ka 
 k'uru tra trgri-su ama-seig ma K'liru g-kas-k'gh, de traka fi 
 tra trassu. 
 
 W'iini 6 w'iini, g-nabi 6 nabi, gwg mg Ise trgri-nu atie, atra 
 
 1 poh trgri-nu, g trgri-nu ra-yem, kg g pa he tra.tseh. W'uni 
 6 w'iini gwg tse lane gw'an ka K'rirumasaba, g beka K'lirumasaba 
 ra-yem, pakasife lane he at'amasere, atra K'uru g poh sgh-su traka 
 gw'an-k'gh. K'iiru o kane-su kaar'i'm-r'ghfggtrasgh-sua-hesama- 
 tabana traka ra-bomp ra Yisua gw'an-k'gh gbo son. W'iini 6 w'iini 
 gwd lane gw'aii ka K'firumasaba, o tra sgtg a-hesam a-tabana; 
 kere w'iini 6 w'uni o^vg tse lane gw'an ka K'lirumasaba, g gbali 
 he soto a-hesum a-tabana. K'iiru, g-kas, g som gw'an-k'gh, kama
 
 — 117 — 
 
 bdni ara-rfi; pakasife o-malpfka o maleika o tdiia he su mar, 
 o-nabi 6 nabi o tana he su mar: w'dni 6 wTini o tana he wop 
 an-ton na K'dru o-fino. Mahamadu kon' so o lasar an-toi'i iia 
 K'uru, ma a-fam a-lom na pon yo; Visua kon' son o ba he Irel 
 6 tr'el tra-las. Afi-nabi be, aha K'uru o poh som ka a-fam 
 tapaii ha-hane so lia ba ka-kisi traka ra-bomp ra Ylsua, ha ba 
 ka-sdto ka-Icipar ka ma trel-ma-hah ina-Ias ka ma-tsir ma Ylr^ua; 
 
 o - - r o o 
 
 pakasife w'uni u w'dni o ba ma-trel ma-Ias rodi ka K'dru 
 Mahamadu o ba ka-kisi traka ra-bomp ra Ylsua gbo son. Yisua 
 kon' son o ba he tr'el 6 Ir'ei tra-las , pakasife o vi ow'an ka 
 K'drumasaba. 
 
 Mo K'dru kono-kgnone o poh botr ar'dh are tra trassu. sq 
 ba ka-lane fo ar'dh are ra beki-su, sn ba ka-wop ar'dn' da-tsi, 
 ka sa gbali trara tra-tseh, fo K'dru o pensa he w'dni 6 w'dni, 
 owQ der rohdh ka ar'dh aie. paka.sife K'dru o tana he venia. 
 W'dni 6 w'dni owd lane fo Ylsua o vi ow'an ka K'dru, K iiru 
 tra bdtar-ko; kere w'dni 6 w'dni gwd pensa, fo Yisua o vi 
 ow'an ka K'drumasaba, owd pensa, fo Yisua n poh der ka ra- 
 ni tra bani-su, gw'dni owe o gbeha K'liiu, ko K'uru o bahsar- 
 ko, tra sdm'ra-ko ro-vahannama. Kere w'dni d w'lini owd 
 lane Yisua, o ba ka-wop rso an-toh-huh, aha o poh trdri-su ka 
 ar'im-r'oh, kia vi ho ka am-beibal; pakaMfe ak'afa ake gbo son 
 kia yi gbo ak'afa ka Kiiru. 
 
 Yisua kane-su fo sa ba ka-bdlar K'dru ka am-mf-ra-'a sn 
 be, de ka ah-fdsa-'a-su be; fo sa ba Ira memar, kama sa verane 
 atr'ei tra-fino, aira Yisua o sdtpna-su ka ra-fi-r'oh. W'dni d 
 w'dni owd vema K'dru Ira ba-ko i-nei. o gbali hi sdto traka ra- 
 bomp ra Yisua gbo son. K'dru o tra malane aka-raitme-ka-nu 
 ka ah'es ha Yisua gbo; be na ramne he K'dru ka ahes ha Yisua, 
 K'dru selo he tra Irala-nu. na lanme gl)o ka-tsih Iral. 
 
 - - - o - o 
 
 A-fam ha poh wdra s'on' tra-lal traka det ka K'uru. A-lom 
 ha tens w'dni, taldm o-nabi Iraka kasa-ha ratrdh ; a-lom so ha 
 nane ha gbali der ka K'dru Ira 'ma-yos-ma hah ma-fino. de 
 tra ka-wop-ka-hah a-sum. Kere ar'dn' d'in ra yi ri gbo; Yisua 
 kdno vi ar'dn' da-tratseh, ara ma gbali kere a-fam ro-riiinna. 
 Kdno-kdngne pa hg: W'dni 6 w'dni o gbali lie der ka Kinu,
 
 — 118 - 
 
 o-kas, tambe ka ka-tra ka-mi. Sya be sa ba tra nasi ama-trei- 
 ma-su ma-las ka ma-tsir ma Yisiia; sa ba tra lane-ko traka ka- 
 lapar ama-trel-ma-su ma-las be. 0-ruhu^) ka Kiiru o ba tra 
 saki e-mera-'e-su. W'uni lorn o yi he owo tana yona-su ama- 
 trei ame tambe Yisua. Traka tsi n'es a-lom ha yi he, a-fosa 
 a-lom na yi he, aha gbali fdlia-su, tambe Yisua son. R'aka 
 6 r'aka ra tana he kere-nu ro-rianna ka-rarah ka ra-fi, tambe 
 
 Q — — o 
 
 ama-lsir ma Yisua , ama o poh loh traka 'ma-trel-ma-su ma-las. 
 Sya be sa ba ma-trei ma-las ma-lal; kere K'uru o selo tra lapar- 
 su traka ra-bomp ra Yisua, be sa nemtene-ko traka tsi. Be sa 
 yema he K'uru tra lapar-su traka ra-bomp ra Yisua, o gbali he 
 tsera-su ama-trei-ma-su ma-las koko, sa gbali he woh ro-rianna 
 tahkah. 
 
 A-mane-'a-mi! I nemtene-nu, tse na lane ama-yos-ma-nu 
 traka ka-fritia-nu; tse na lane o-nabi traka ka-fiitia-nu, ha gbali 
 he futia-nu kl 6 ki! Kere lane nan Yisua son traka ka-fiitia-nu. 
 I trara fo na ta lane he Yisua traka ka-futia-nu; kere trap nah 
 tenon tra yo-tsi; trohkiir nah rohoh lemp, tani ah-lokg a-fino^) 
 ha tas tra trannu, tani na fi ka 'ma-trei-ma-nu ma-las, na dinne 
 tabana. Be Yisua o nasi ama-trel-ma-nu ma-hjs ka ma-tsir-m'oh, 
 na tra ba ma-tdfal ka e-mera-'e-nu, pa tra fgl-nu tr'ei, na Ira 
 yi ma a-fam, aha poh wur n'imisa na-bana, na gbali he so nesa 
 ra-fi. Hiili na trara nah na tra fi aninah, na gbali he nesa, 
 pakcisife na trara. na tra ba ma-bdne ma-bana^) ro-rianna ka- 
 rarah ka ra-fi. Kere be na lane he Yisua, be n;i lane Maha- 
 madu, be na ramne-ko, na gbaU he fiiti . na tra nesa ra-fi; 
 pakasife K'uru o poh trori-su fo r'on' d'in dia yi ri gbo traka 
 a-fam be. 0-p6to 6. w'uni bi 6, o-yola 6, o-mdne 6, ha be 
 ha ba ka-fiiii traka Yisua ow'an ka K'Urumasaba son; ko w'uni 
 6 \\'{m'\ owd tse lane Yisua gbo son traka fulia-ko, o gbali he 
 fuli tabana, o ba gbo tra kg ro-yahannama. 
 
 1) Or: Ah'umpal ha K'Qru ha ba etc. 
 
 2) Or: a-foT-tr'el, „ convenient, seasonable." 
 
 3) Or: ba ma-trama ma-fiuo, „be in a happy state" =- „be 
 well off."
 
 — 119 — 
 
 Me I vefa no ka-lapso , I iiAne he fo I t.si dor so ka an-1of 
 afie, pakasife ra-tru ra-baki ra wop-ini. Kere pa tcsano R'l'iru 
 tra kara-mi so ano, de Ira Irdri-nu so ariin ra K'liiu! I vi and 
 tra-ren tra-lal, I trgri-nu ar'on' da K'uru e-loko e-Iai; kere na 
 wop he rj, pakasife na bolrar he e-niera-'e-nn ka ma-trel ma 
 K'uru na botrar e-mera-'e-nu Ira e;y'etr ya no-ru. Tsla ba-tsi 
 pa ban'sane aii-fam, ana pon som-su and tra Irdri-nu ar'ini ra 
 K'uiu, ka ha selo he kama o-poto g vira so re; kere ha \enia 
 he nu no! dv'im ra K'uru be, ha Ira (re! r;ts w'uni k'in and tra 
 gbair-nu ka-wandi, be pa yi ho nyah tseinpi Ira tral ar'hn ra 
 K'uru, de Ira wop-ri so. Ke mine so 1 tsi der win win tra 
 gbaia-nu ka-wandi. Kere 1 tsi vira d'er 6-lom Ira k;11i, be pa 
 yi ah-fam, aha vi ri, ha selo Ira nialan*^ ar'hn ra K'urii, ara me 
 ko irdri-ha; Isa K'uru o yema kama a-f: in be d'er 6 d'er ha 
 tral ar'im-r'oh. 
 
 o 
 
 A-mane-'a-mi! 1 ntjmtene-nu, be na bdtar am'>unpal-n)a-nu, 
 lane niih Yisua, w6pne-ko nan tnjka futia-nu! Kahko K'uru o 
 mar-nu tra yo alr'el atse I kane-nu lemp; tani na fi ka ina-trei- 
 ma-nu ma-las, na poh fe tsi yd, tani na dinne labana. Ka-fi 
 ra ma der-ah tra trassu be, ko be na poh lie solo ka-h\par ka 
 'ma-trel-ma-nu ma-las ka ka-tra ka Visua. hah ma na vi ano-rfi, 
 na gbali he futi, na ba ka-dinne labana! Kere be Yisua o i.oh 
 Isera-n'j ama-lrel-ma-nu ma-las, na ebali he n("»sa ra-fi, na gbali 
 he nesa ka-rok an-!dhka ka ah-rtVi a-lapso, n,i tra fi nio ho na 
 ko dira, ka na trara fo na Ira wur so ka tra-bdma-lra-nu ka an- 
 re'i a-lapso, na tra ko rd-riiinna tra yfra ri ka ma-bone ma-bana, 
 ama gbali he poh tahkah 6 lahkah. 
 
 On 2 Cor. 5, 19. 20. 
 
 E-mera-'e-su de ar'hn ra K'uru ra Irdri-su fo K'urumasaba 
 kdno mg sgh-su ey'etr e-fino be. Ka ka-trap K'uru g benipana 
 w'uni e-tof, kg kdng mg sgh-ras w'uni d w'uni a-iK'sam. K'uru 
 bolr ah-lg ha ka-kom-ka-su, de od'er to 'a kdmar-su; kdng 
 mg sgh-su r'dka 6 r'aka ara sa ba. Kdng mg bene-su ra-tr'ei 
 6 Ir'ei.
 
 — 120 — 
 
 Ka-bani-ka-su ka 'ra-lrar ra setani ka vi ama-panl ma K'lirii. 
 Kong wura asadka tra bani-su. soni ow'an-k'oh, o ren-ko 
 ama-lrei-ma-su ma-las be; kg K'flru g malane as'adka, atra Yisua 
 kara tra trassu. Yisua g kane e-letu-y'on tra tramas arim 
 ra-tgt are ka a-fam be. An Ig na-tsi R'Qru g bempa w'uni, 
 w'uni g yi g-mane ka K'drumasaba; kere w'uni g lasar an-tgn 
 na K'iiru, t^a ba-tsi R'Qru g ban's§r-kg, kg w'Qni g nesa R'Qru. 
 Ama-las ma w'Qni ma l|sar ama-mane ka-lrgh ka R'liru de ka- 
 trgn ka w'Qni. E-mera-'e-su e la ma-gbeiia tr§ka R'uru, kg 
 R'liru g bafi'sar-su traka 'ma-trel-ma-su ma-las. A-fam be 'a 
 gbena R'liru ka e-mera-'e-nan, na yo ma-trel ma-las ma-lai. 
 Rere R'Qru g wiira s'adka. kama kgn' de syan s§ mane so. 
 Sya sa gbali he yg kama R'firu de syan sa kal m^ne ; kere 
 R'dra kono ?bali vo-tsi. O ba-su i-nel, o som Yisua ow'an- 
 k'gn gwg yrikane ma-der, gwg kasa-su ralrgn. de gwg wop an- 
 tgn na R'Qru o-fino tra trassu, ka ka-belan-ka-su; pakasife sya 
 sa lasar-ni Igkg 6 Igkg. R'Qru g som gw "an-k'on kama g sgmpane, 
 kama g fi; kama R'Qru g gbali su tsera 'ma-trei-ma-su ma-las. 
 Yisua kgn' g ba he tr'ei 6 Irel tra-l§s. kgn' g sompane gbo ka 
 ka-belan-ka-su. Yan R'Qru g kala ma-mane ka-lrgn ka a-fam 
 de ka-trgh-k'gn. yema he su sg ren ama-trel-ma-su ma-las, 
 be sa w6pne-kg, be sa wop ar'im-r'gn. R'Qru g selg tra lapar 
 ama-trei -ma-su ma-las traka ra-bomp ra Yisua, be sa lane Yisua, 
 be sa wopne gw'an ka R'uru. 
 
 R'Qru g yema kama kgn' de syan sa kal mane; g tsela a- 
 fam be ka ka-san ka e-telu-v'on. o nemtene-su ka ka-sah-ka-hah 
 kama sa malane ama-mane-m'on. kama sa lane Yisua. Yisua 
 kgng gbali fdtia-su kgn' son. 
 
 I pen der rgnu, R'liru g som-mi rgnd, kama I trgri-nu ar'im- 
 r'gn. Na gbali he katr k'ere. be na wop he ri , pakasife na 
 trara-ri: na gbali he kane R'dru ka aii-rei a-lapsg: ,.1 Ir'a he 
 nail ar'im-ra-mu-e." R'dru g tra tghkas-nu ka ar'im, ara I trgri- 
 nu loko d Idko; J trdri-nu atra na ba ka-yo, kama na kisi; be 
 na kisi he, nvan nva ba-tsi. Sva be sa yi a-fam a-las rodi ka 
 Rdrumasaba; w'dni 6 w'dni ka-trgri-ka-nu g pon lasar an-tgn
 
 — 121 — 
 
 iia K'Qru e-lokg e-lai; w'Qni 6 v'uni ka-tron-ka-nu o vo ma- 
 trei ma-las ma-lai, 
 
 A-mane-'a-mi ! Botrar nan am-mera, na ba ra-bei ra-bana ka 
 K'uru, na gbali he ram-ko-e raka 6 raka! Kere Yisua kono 
 •wop ara-bel-ra-nu , kono gbali ram-ri, be u§ laue-ko. Rdni o 
 selo Ira lapar ama-trel-ma-nu raa-las tr^ka ra-bomp ra Yisua. I 
 der ronii ka an'es na Yisua de ka ka-belan-k'on, I nemtene nu 
 kama na malane ama-mane-m'on. Be na lane Yisua. be na 
 malane ka-fQli-k'gn mo ho a-bova. be na vema futi ka ma-tsir 
 ma Yisua gbo, ama o Ion tra trannu be: K'Qru o selo tra lapar- 
 nu. K'Qru o gbali he malane wiini 6 w'Qni. tambe owo mo 
 der ronon ka an'es na Yisua ow'an k"on. K"Qru o pa ho : 
 „Kone nail ka 'ra-ru be, tramns nan ari'ra ra-tot ka a-fam be. 
 W'Qni 6 w'Qni o>vd lane, 'a matas-ko, V) o Ira fiili: kere w'lini 
 6 w'uni owo tse lane, o tra dinne." Be na basar ka-t.se-vop 
 ar'im ra K'Qru. na lane be Yisua: K'Qru o Ira sompa-nu ka- 
 sompa ka-bana ; be na malane he ka-s6m-ka-mi, na farki ka-som 
 ka K'lirumasaba, kg K'Qru g tra som-nu ro-yahannama tra sgmpane 
 ri tabana taiikaii. Na ba tra wop ar'im ra K'uru ano-rfi: pnka>ife 
 be na pon fi. na gbali he wop-ri so. K'Qru g sgn-su a-lgkg 
 ang-ru gbg traka benene tra rianna. 
 
 Be g-bal g-lgm g yeraa me^r w'Qni mgne: kere gw'Qni ka- 
 tsi g pensa, g malane fe ar'i'm ra g-bal. g farki ama-lgt ma o- 
 bai: g-bal ka-tsi mg baii'sar he kg-i? Kere K'lirumasaba g yema 
 sgn-nu ara tas r'aka 6 r'aka ara g-bai g gbali sgn-nu. >YQni 
 6 w'fini g gbali he lapar ama-trei-ma-nu ma-las; kere K'Qru g 
 selg tra lapar-nu. be na lane Yisua; kere g gbali he lapar-nu 
 tambe na lane Yisua gw'an ka K'lirumasaba. 
 
 Pakasife K'liru g pa: .,Kgne nan ka 'ra-ru be. tramas nan 
 ar'im ra-tgt ka a-fam be;" I pon der rgnii. 1 pon trei g-kas- 
 ka-mi. de an-mane-'a-mi, de an-tgf ana a k6mar-mi, I pon der 
 ka an-tgf-'a-nu, ro tra-tru-tra-Iai tra wop-mi. ro a-poto a-gbati 
 na fi ka der-ka-fian gbo ka an-tgf ane; kere Irei 6 tr'ei tra gb§li 
 
 li Or: patar-kg m'antr , ^.baptize him (with water by 
 sprinkling;" m§tas is: „ baptize by immersion.'*
 
 — 122 — 
 
 he mi bentr; pakasife 1 \ema trori-nu ar'on' da K'iini, kama na 
 trara-ri, kama na wop-ri, kama na solo ma-bone ma-bana ro- 
 rianna. 
 
 Be na wop ar'i'm ra K'liru, ara 1 trori-nu, pa bone-mi hali, 
 1 tsi miilsi K'uru mamo traka tsi. Kere be na wop he ar'im 
 ra K'firumasaba, ara 1 Irori-nii loko 6 loko, nvan nya ba-lsi, 
 nyaii nya ba ka-wosa-tsi, K'uru o Ira sompa-nu traka tsi, 
 
 R'on' d'in ra yi ri gbo traka fufi; r'on' d'in ra yi gbo, ara 
 kg ro-rianna; a-fam be na ba tra kot ka ar'on are, am-p6to de 
 aii-fam a-bi. K'uru o trori-su ar'on are ka ar'im-r'on, ara I 
 Iramas-nu, K'uru o son fe vv'uni tr'afa Ira-ran, kere k'afa k'in 
 gbo ; ka a-fam be 'a ba tra wop ak'afa ake ; w'Qni 6 w'uni owo 
 mo tse wop ak'afa ake, o gb^li he kg ro-rianna, o Ird di'nne gbo, 
 K'liru tra som-ko ro-yah;innama tra sgmpane ri tankan tabana, 
 A-laT ka-trgn-ka-nu na ma pa hg: „An-reka, ana sa ba, nia yi 
 hg alukrana. iia vi a-fino tra trassu, lia beki aii-fam a-bi; ka 
 ak'afa ka-p6to kia yi ka-fino tra am-poto, ka beki am-p6to." Pa 
 yi he van. An-reka-'a-nu nia yi hg alukrana, de an-reka a-poto 
 e-yi fe win ; kere e peskiane. Alukrana iia trgri-nu ar'im ra 
 w'uni gbo; kere an-reka ana 1 kara-nu, ha trgri-nu ar'im ra 
 K'liru tra-tseh. K'uru o gbali he son a-fam e-reka ye-rari e- 
 peskiane, ar'im ra K'uru ra yi tra-tseh tahkah tabana. W'lini 
 6 w'lini gwg karah ah-reka a-p6to de ah-reka ha Mahamadu 
 a-mera fino, g gbali trara fo ah-reka a-p6to ha lasi alukrana; 
 ah-reka a-p6lo hia yi gbo ar'im ra K'liru. 
 
 A-mane-'a-mi! Botrar nah am-mera! Yfsua kdno mo tonkas- 
 nil ka ah-rei a-lapsg, be na wop ar'im-r'gh 6, be na wop he ri 
 6, g tra tghkas-nu! Hali na wop he ar'im-r'gh ang-rfl, na ba 
 tra trama rodi ka Yfsua, kama g tghkas w'iini 6 w'uni ka-trgh- 
 ka-nu. Ak'afa-ka-nu ka trgri he nu alr'eT atse; kere ak'afa ka K'uru 
 ka kane-su-tsi, ka kane-su fg Visua gw'an ka K'rirumasaba g tra 
 tghkas-nu ka') ah-reka-hgh, hia yi hg ka') am-beibal; pa yi he 
 ka ah-reka-'a-nu, hia yika') alukrana. Alukrana ha kane he nu 
 fg Yisua g yi gw'an ka K'lirumasaba. Mahamadu g pa fg kgn' 
 
 1) Or: mg etc.
 
 -^ 123 — 
 
 bana o tas Yisua; kere kolone gbo ka-tsin, o vema gbo; K'uru 
 som he ko koko, N'es a-lom ria vi he ri, ana gbali fiitia-su, 
 tambe an'es na Yisua; ko wiini 6 w'Qni owo mo pensa-ko, o 
 tra dinne gbo. - 
 
 Mahamadu o tihkar a-fam Iraka wop ar'im-r'on, o dif-ria be, 
 aha tse selo tra wop-ri. Kere K'uru o gbena atr'el atse, o >ema 
 he sa tihkar a-fmn tra wop ar'hTi-r'oh ; o kane-su gbo: Be na 
 wop ar'im-ra-mi, be na lane Yisua, na tra soto ma-bone ma- 
 bana ro-rianna ; kere be na wop he ar'im-ra-mi, be na lane he 
 Yisua; na Ira dinne gbo. na tra sompane ka an'antr tahkah 
 tabana. Yo o pa, kere o tihkar he w'uni 6 w'uni, mo Mahama- 
 du poh vo tapah. 
 
 Kahko K'uru o mar-nu, kama na tse gbo tral ar'im-r'oh ka- 
 tsih, ara I Irori-nu; kere kama na \o-ri so; kama na won ro- 
 rianna, de kama na soto ri ma-trama ma-fino tahkah 6 tahkah. 
 
 3. 
 
 On Jude v. 14. 15. 
 
 Fo a Igko ha tra der mo K'uru o tra tohkas a-(am be mo 
 ama-yos-ma-hah, K'Qru o poh gbal-t.si ka am-mera ha a-fam be. 
 Sa nahk a-fam a-lai aha ma vo ma-trei ma-las ma-lal, taldm ma- 
 trei ma-fino, ha soto he ;.-ram traka tsi ano-ru; k»jre ha tra 
 
 - - — Q O 
 
 soto-hi ka 'ra-ru ara ma der-e. 0-nabi Enok, owo kali pa \\on 
 he k=i-rarah ka 'ra-fi ra Adam, de ah-fam aha vi ka 'ma-rei 
 ma-tsi, ha trara, fo K'uru o t;a rok e-tohka va a-fam ka ah-rei 
 a-lap'so. Enok kono tramas-tsi, o pa hg : „Kali, o Rabu o mo 
 der-e re e-wul e-lai \a am-maleika-hoh tra rok e-tohka ya a- 
 fam a-las be traka 'ma-lrel-ma-hah ma-las, ama ha \o;" kg o 
 man ah-fam, aha vi ka 'ma-rei ma-tsi, kama ha tubi, Enok o 
 kane-su ig Yisua o Ira der so ka ah-rei a-lap'sg. O trgri-su 
 fo Visua tra tsela a-fam be Iraka tnima rohdh rodi, fo o tra 
 ram a-fam a-las be mo am'dlo ma ama-yos-ma-hah. E-telu va 
 Yisua be ha pa r'im r'in, ha kane-su fg sya be sa ba tra Irama 
 ka Yisua rodi, kama g rgka-su e-tghka. Na kane-su fg \ isua 
 kgng mo rgk an-tghka ha ah-kali de ah-fi. K"Oru g yrnir ka-
 
 — 124 - 
 
 rok an-tonka ka afi-rei a-lap'so ka Yisua; pakasife o y'\ ow'an 
 ka w'uni. Kdno fi (raka a-fam be, ko o tra der so mo ow'an 
 
 — — O C' o ~ 
 
 ka vi'uni ka e-biinl ya k'liru. Enok o kane-su fo o Ira der re 
 am-maleika-non, ana ina paia-ko ka e-bunl ya k'lini. E-wul e- 
 lal na tra tor ka k'uru de kon' tra bundas an-yiki ha ah-rei na- 
 tsi, de tra yikis-ko owo trapi-ha. Ka-der ka Yisua ah-lo ha-tsi 
 ka tra tas ka-der-k'oii ka-trdtroko, mo o der Ira sake ma-der, 
 de tra sompane tra trassu. 
 
 Sa ba tra bolrar am-mera, kama sa benene traka an-rei ha- 
 tsi , kama sa ban-ko o fino. Yisua o tra der tra tonkas a-fam 
 be, \M\ yi he tra trori aii-yiki-non gben; kere tra rok an-tgnka 
 ha a-fam ka an-tof be. Ah-fam be aha poh kali ka 'ra-ru are, 
 de w'iini 6 w'uni owo 'a tse ta kom ka 'ra-ru are, Yisua o tra 
 tsela-ha rohoh rodi. Am-baki de ah-fet, ah-yola de ani-mdne, 
 ha be ha tra wur ka tra-boma-tra-hah, de aha yi a-kali ah-lo 
 ha-tsi ka an-tof, ha be ha ba tra trama ka Yisua rodi. Q tra 
 gbehgbeh w'Oni 6 w'iini , o tra tunt ama-yos-m'oh, o tra haibi 
 e-nane e-mankne ya am-mera-h'oh be. Ah-ldko ha-tsi aha Yisua 
 mo fetar am-mera,') ha Ira kg ro-rianna ; kere aha Yisua g 
 mg hap,*) ha tra bal-ha, kama ha yefa ro-d'er-k'gh kadi. Yisua 
 tra halra ah-fam-hoh ro-rianna; kere aha tse l^ne-ko, o tra 
 fita-ha ka an'antr na-tabana. Yisua g tra tdhkas a-fam Ira-lseh. 
 Be sa fdfar a-fam traka 'ma-trei-ma-hah ma-las ha katrne tr'ere, 
 
 O " O U o 'J 
 
 Kere Yisua kdno-konone o tra v\6pa-ha I'amasere, o tra trdri- 
 
 — — ------ o* '■J 
 
 ha ara-yal ra atr'ere-tra-hah . g tra haibi ama-ygs ma-las, ama 
 ha yg-e, as'im tra-las atra ha fgf-e, de e-nane e-las eye yi ka 
 e-mera-'e-hah ka t'amasere tra tra-tseh, ha ha gb§.l! he pensa. 
 E-letu ya Yisua so, aha tramar-ha ar'im ra K'liru, ha tra wura 
 t'amasere traka trahhah. Yisua owd mo tdhkas-su, g trara gd'er 
 ro a-fam ha yo ama-trei-ma-hah ma-las ma-mahkne be, kg g Ira 
 tihkar-ha tra wosa atra-tseh tra ka-rok-k'oh an-tdhka, aka som- 
 
 o 
 
 ha ka an'antr na-labana. 
 
 Ka ah-rei ha ka-rgk e-tdnka ya a-fam Yisua g tra botr ama- 
 
 1) Or: g mg sgh ma-mari, ha etc. 
 
 2) Or: g mo sgh ma-teri, ha etc.
 
 — 125 — 
 trdma ma-taMna ma w'uni 6 w'iini. A-tan na yi '"' Rbo, an^ 
 
 o 
 
 ma nane atrVi atse. A-fam a-lal na kjjli mo ho lia ba tra kali 
 tabana ano-rO. Be w'uni o fi ra-fi ra-simtar, na nane ho atse 
 Ira gbali he yone ronan. Na mar tra benene traka 'ra-fi loko 
 6 loko; kama be ara-fi ra der, na Ise ri nesa, kama ra Ise der 
 ronii, ma na tse ri nane. Kere be na v\6pne he Yisua, be na 
 _>ema he fuli ka 'ma-tsir-m'on gbo, na pon he benene traka ra- 
 fi; pakasife K'liru g ta pon he lap^ir ama-trei-ma-nu ma-hjs; kg 
 be K'diu g pon fe Isera-nu ama-trel-ma-nu ma-las, ra-fi ra tra 
 yentr-nu ka an'anir na-tabana ro-yahannama. Ya sa ba tra kali, 
 de tra bolrne Igkg 6 Igkg, mg hg sa kar ka-der ka Yisua a-rei 
 6 a-rei, kama sa ebali ba ma-bdr.e ka ka-der-k'on. Ya sa ba 
 tra kali a-rei 6 a-rei, mg hg ma sa ma yema tra pen kaH, ma 
 ra-fi ra fatrar. 
 
 o 
 
 A-mjine-'a-mi! Pa mar-nu tra Iran ka-benene traka an-rei 
 na-tsi lemp. Tra-reri e-wul tramat tra pon tas, mg Enok g fgf 
 as'im tra-tsi traka ka-der ka Yisua, ke e-tetu ya Yisua be iia 
 pa rim r'in; iia kane-su fg Yisua, gwg yi tra tgnkas-su, g fatrar 
 lemp. tra der tsentsene, be ah-lgkg, aiia K'uru g poii botr, 
 iia bek. Kere Yisua g fair w'lini 6 w'uni, pakasife ma ra-fi ra 
 bap-su, vail ka-rok an-tdiika ka ma bap-su so. Be na kali ka- 
 tubi-ka-nu, a-paiik iiaii; pakasife na tra he a-lgkg reke ra-fi ra 
 ma der tra trannu ; be pji yi ka ka-reii ka-lgm, talgm ka aii-rei 
 a-lgm, talgm ka aii-gbelen a-lgm, na tr'a he tsi. Traka tsi benene 
 nan traka ra-fi, fale naii ka ar'6n'-da-nu ra-las; kdne naii ka 
 Yisua ka e-mera-'e-nu be, kaina na gbali ba ma-bgne rongii 
 rodi, be g der-e. Riimne naii K'Uru, kama g saki e-mgra-'e-nu, 
 de kama na sake a-wul iia K'l'iru. 
 
 o o - 
 
 Sya be sa poii lasar an-tgii iia K'liru ka e-nane-'e-su, ka 
 as'im-tra-su, de ka 'ma-ygs-ma-su. Kane gbali lapar ama-trei-ma- 
 su ma-las-e? Kane gbali nasi ama-trei-ma-su ma-las ka aii-reka, 
 aiia K'liru o gbal Iraka tr'ei 6 tr'ei sa yo-e? Am'anlrar-ma-su ma 
 gbali he yg-tsi, r'aka 6 r'aka la gbali he yO-lsi, tambe ama-tsir 
 ma Yisua; kdno gbali vak-su ka 'ma-trel-ma-su ma-las be, kdno 
 gbali lapar ama-ygs-ma-su ma-las be; be kgn' g yak fe su, sa
 
 — 126 — 
 
 tra fi ka 'ma-trel-ma-su ma-las, ka sa ba tra sompane ara-ban' 
 da K'uru ro-vahannama tankan 6 taiikan. 
 
 Ten's nan a-ni na ka-fiiti, aka Yisua o pofi waia-su ka 'ma- 
 tsir-m'on ; tse na ineinar tra botr ama-vos-ma-nu ma-fino ka ka- 
 
 - ' o ~ o *-■ 
 
 belah ka 'ma-tsir ma Yisua, K'uru o gbali he malane-na. Kere 
 ana ma lane Yisua, na gbali kar an-rei ha ka-der ka Yisua re 
 ma-bone; pakasife kon', gwo mo tohkas-ha, o waia-na 'ma-lsir- 
 m'oii gben; pa yi kon' owo ha lane, Qwg ha wopne, owo poh 
 nasia ma-lrel-ma-hah ma-las ama-tsir-m'oh, Yisua kono-kgnone, 
 gwg mg tghkas-ha, g tra trama-ha rarah, g Ira pa rghah : „Der 
 nah, aha g-kas-ka-mi g poh ruba, sgtg nan ak'e ka 'ra-baT, ara 
 ha poh benene traka trannu!" Aha lane Yisua ha tra trama 
 rghgh rodi re ma-bgne; kere aha tse lane-kg, aha tse trala-kg, 
 ha gbali he trama rghgh rodi, g-ninis g-bana g tra wop-ha, 
 pakasife Yisua g tra som-ha ka an'antr na-tabana. 
 
 Wuni gwg tse benene traka ra-fi, g ba tra nesa ra-fi, pa- 
 kasife ra-fi ra tra yentr-kg ka ka-sgmpane ka-bana ro-yahannama. 
 Kere w'uni gwg poh benene traka ra-fi, kgng yi g-fgi-tr'ei ; 
 pakasife be g fi, g tra futi ka-sgmpane ka ra-ru are be tahkah 
 tab^na, kg g tra yira ka K'uru rokgm tahkah 6 tahkah, 
 
 Tete ma na ba a-hesam, trap nah kci-benene traka ra-fi; 
 be na poh he benene, be ra-fi ra bek-e, na ba he so a-lgkg 
 traka benene ka-rarah ka ra-fi; na gbali he sg yg ma-pant, na 
 ebali he so tiibi ka-nirah ka ra-fi. Sa sak e-santr ka 'ra-ril 
 
 O o ~ ~ o o o 
 
 are, kere ka ra-ru ara ma der-e sa tra rgk eye sa poh sak. 
 
 A-mane-'a-mi! Bolrar nah am-mera, kama na sak e-santr 
 e-fino traka 'ra-ril ara ma der-e, kama na gbaU sg rgk a-yiki 
 a-tabana ro-rianna rokgm, kama na gbali ba ma-bgne, be Yisua 
 g der sg ka ah-rei a-lap'sg tra tghkas a-fam be. Be na bgtar 
 am'umpal-ma-nu, benene nah traka ra-fi; ah-hesam-'a-nu ang-ru 
 ha yi a-burap; k«jre ah-hesam aha sa ba ka ra-ru ara ma der-e, 
 ha ba he g-lilane, ha tra wgn tahkah tabana; kg w'uni 6 w'uni 
 gwg tse poh lane Yisua, g Ira kg ro-yahannama tra sompane 
 ri tabana; kere ^^'uni 6 w'uni, gwg poh wopne Yisua traka ka- 
 futi, tra ko ro-rianna tra sdto ri nia-bdne ma-tabana. Be ra-fi
 
 — 127 — 
 
 ra bap-nu, na pon he benene. nji tra tiibi traka t.si ka-rdran 
 ka ra-fi; kere an-lo fia-t.si na tra tiibi gbo ka-tsin. 
 
 An-fam ana pon bt-nene lete traka ra-fi, a-fam a-tsempi de 
 a-inari-tr'el nan; pakasife be ra-fi ra bek, ain-maleika na K'uru 
 na Ira kere am'un)pal-ma-nan ro rijinna tra yir^i ri tankan 6 
 
 — 1 o 
 
 tankan; kere an-fam ana lie pon benene, a-fam a-pnnk nan; 
 pakahife be na fi, setani o tra kere am'umpal-ma-nan ro- 
 yahannama tra soinpane ri ka-sompane ka-bana tankan tabana. 
 
 K'anko K'liru kama na fi ar'on' tla-fino, de kiima sya be 
 sa gbanne-so ka ka-tra ka-dio ka K'lirumasaba rokom ka an-rei 
 a-l^p'so traka yira ronon ro-rianna tankan 6 tankan! 
 
 4 
 
 On Luke 10, 10—16. 
 
 Yisua pa ka an-karandi-hoh, mo o som-ria Ira gbal ka- 
 wandi: „Be na won ra ka-petr, ka na malane he nu; wur nan 
 ka as'oii Ira ka-petr ka-tsi, ka pa nan: Hali ka-bof ka ka-petr- 
 ka-nu so, aka gbap'sa-su, sa konkon-ki roni'i; kere trara nan 
 alse fo ara-bai*) ra K'uru ra pon fatrar-nu. Ke I kane-nu, fo 
 alr'ei tra an-fam na ro-S6dom tra tra yi fisa ka ah-rei ha ka- 
 
 o o «/ 
 
 rok aii-tohka, pa tas atr'ei tra ka-petr ka-tsi. Owo mo Inila- 
 nu trala-mi; ko owd Irala-mi, o Irala owd som-mi; ko owd 
 farki-nu, o farki owo som-mi." 
 
 Kota mo Yisua o yo ma-yos ma-kab^ne ma-lai ka-troh ka 
 an-fam na an-Yehudi, kota mo o lak'sa-na ka-lsemp ka-bana, de 
 a-fosa a-bana; aha Icihe-ko mo ho ow'an ka K'lirumasaba, ha yi 
 ebo a-tan. Yisua o Irara-tsi o mdia trap ka-tak'sa-ha. Traka 
 tsi kane ah-karandi-hnh, fo a-fam ha tra yo-ha, ma ha yo- 
 ko; kg kane-ha atra ha ba ka-yo traka ka-petr, aka Ise ha 
 malane; o kane-ha fo ha ba tra (rori ah-fam ha ka-petr ka-tsi 
 fo ara-ban' da K'liru ra rensa-ha; paka,sife ha nii'dane fe ar'im 
 ra K'uru. Ko Yisua kono-kgnone g trgri-su ka-sgmpa, aka ma 
 der-e ka tra-petr be, aira tse wop ar'im-r'gh. Yisua g kane- 
 
 1) Or: ka-gbaka ka K-, „the reign of etc."
 
 — 128 — 
 
 su \v'uni 6 w'uni owo t.se wop ar'im-r'on, o tra sompane ro- 
 vahannama tabana. Sodom ka y\ ka-peir ka-bana tapan; kg 
 pakasife an-fam iia ro- Sodom na yo ma-trei ma -las ma-lal, 
 K'liru dim-na ka an anlr, ana tor ka k'uru. K'uru o som fe 
 ar'im-r'on ka an-fam na ro- Sodom, o man fe na tra fale ka 
 ar'6n'-da-nan ra-las; kere pakasife ila yo ma-lrel ma-las ma-lai, 
 dim-iia. Kere ronii K'uru o poii som ar'im-r'oii ka ka-saii- 
 ka-mi; I poii der ronii, ko K'uru o niaii-nu ka ka-saii-ka-mi, 
 kania na wop ar'im-r'oii; o trori-nu atra o poii _>ona-nu, o Irori- 
 nu fo poii som Ylsua ow'an-k'oii tra futia-nu ka ka sompane- 
 k'oii, de ka 'ra-fi-r'oii. Ak'afa ka K'uru, kia \i ho am-beibal 
 ka kane-su fo: „Ya K'liru o bdlar ara-ru, ha o sond ow'an-k'oii 
 kom ro-k'or son; kania w'uni 6 w'uni gwd lane-ko, o tse dinne, 
 kere kama o soto a-nesam a-tabana. " Yisua o fi tra trannu 
 mo ho s'adka traka ra-bomp ra ama-tref-ma-nu ma-las. Ama- 
 
 - - o 1 o 
 
 IreT ame be an-fam ha ro-Sodom na Ir'a he na tapaii; traka tsi 
 
 " o ~ o r ' o 
 
 be nyaii na wop fe ar'im ra K'liru, ara o som romi ka ka-tra- 
 ka-mi, o tra sompa-nu, pa tas aii-fcim iia ro-S6dom. Yisua o 
 kane aii-karandi-iioh tra koiikoii ka-bof ka Ir'atrak-tra-iian ka 
 
 ~ - o 
 
 an-fam, aria tse wop ka-som-k'oii; o kane-iia tra trgri-iia, fg 
 K'uru g ban'sar-iia hall. Yisua, mg g iiatr ro-rianna, g kane 
 aii-karandi-ri'gii, kama na kg ka 'ra-ru be, tra tramas ar'im-r'on 
 ra-tot ka a-fam be, tra saki a-fani be a-karandi-ii'on. kane- 
 iia, fg w'iini 6 w'uni gwg lane-kg, g tra fiiti; kere w'uni 6 
 w'uni gwg tse lane-kg mg gw'an ka K'urumasaba, de gwg tse 
 wop-kg mg g-futia ka a-fam, g tra dinne gbg. Be K'uru g 
 sgmpa ari-fam ria ro-S6dom g-baii, pakasife na yd ma-trel ma- 
 las, hrili ma na tse ba ar'im-r'gii; g tra sgmpa-nu pa tas-na, be 
 na farki ka-som ka Yisua, ow'an ka K'urumasaba, de be na kasi 
 
 o ' ~ ' o 
 
 tra vvop-ki. Be g-bal g-lgm g sOm a-telu ka aii-fam-n'gn tra 
 kere r'im ronan, an-fam iia-tsi na ba tra wop ar'im ra an-tetu 
 mg ar'im ra g-bai; kg be iia farki ar'im ra an-lelu, iia farki 
 ar'im ra g-bal, gwg som-kg. Ye pa yi sg, be a-fam na wop 
 he ar'im ara e-lelu ya Yisua iia Iramar-na ka an'es iia Yisua, 
 iia farki Visua kgng-kyngne, gwg som e-tetu tra tramas ar'iiii- 
 r'gii; kg gwg farki ar'im ra Yisua, g farki ar'im ra K'urumasaba,
 
 — 129 — 
 
 pakasife kdno som Yisua gw'an-k'on Ira futia-su ka ka-sompane- 
 k'on, de ka 'ra-fi-r'on. Be a-fam na faiki an-telu na o-baT, o- 
 bal owon o Ira sompa an-fam na-tsi Iraka 1m. Ye pa \i so, 
 K'urii Ira sompa w'iini o Nv'uni, owo t.se wop ar'i'm ra Yisua, 
 ow'an-k'on, owg l.se ko lane, de Qwg farki ar'im-r'oh ; o tra 
 sdmpa-ko, pa las an-fam na ro- Sodom, ana K'lini o dim ka 
 an'anlr, ana tor ka k'uru. Hiili ma a-fam a-laT na t.se lane 
 Yisua, tra Idsar ar'im-r'on. ara o pa: ,.\V'imi o w't'ini osvo 
 mo lane, q tra kisi; ktjro w'lini 6 \v'iini owg rug Ise lane, o 
 tra dinne." Ar'i'm ra K'uiu ra vi Ira-t.sen, hiUi ma a-fam be 
 na tse ri lane. Pa be' he tra tral ar'im ra Yisua gbo, tra nane- 
 ri ra-fino de ra-trat.sen, na ba tra vo-ri so. Be w'lini, gwg ba 
 ra-tru, g sgtg e-trgl, g ba tra di-_\i. be g vema sgto ka-yeiik 
 ma-der. Ye pa yi sg, be sa yema sgtg ma-trei ma-ffno ka 
 ar'im ra K'uru, sa ba tra \o atra o trdri-su ka ar'im-r'on. Be 
 na gbali na nank ama-vi ma an-fam, ana vi ro-S6doin tapan, 
 be na gbali na naiik ka-kulo-ka-naii, de ka-nak-iiak-e-.sek-kt- 
 nan, na tra nanka naii an-fam iia-tsi i-nei. Kere kota ka- 
 «gmpane-ka-nan ka yi ka-baii; ka-sgmpane ka ana ma farki, ana 
 ma tse wop ar'im ra Yisua, ara I poii tramar-nu e-lgkg e-lal 
 tapan, ka tra tas g-bana. Be na wop ar'im, ara 1 tramar-nu, 
 na wop he ar'im-ra-mi gbeii; kere na wop ar'im ra K'uru, gwg 
 som-mi rgnii; ka be na wop he ar'im, ara 1 trgri-nu. na nop 
 he ar'im ra K'uru; ka trara naii, be na yg yaii-e, na tra ba 
 k'asi ka-bana rodi ka K'liru. K-lgkg e-lal I poii der rgm'i tapaii, 
 I pon der ka aiVes iia Yisua tra tramar-nu arim ra-tgl. tra 
 mah-nu, kama na malane ka-fiiti-k'gn. aka o poii's Ira trannu 
 sg, de kama na torane rodi ka K'liru traka 'ma-trei-ma-nu ma- 
 las; kama Yisua o ebali Lsera-nu-iia. Mine vi a-letu iia Yisua, 
 kgng s6m-mi rgnu tra t.sela-nu ka ka-belan-k'gh; kama na lane- 
 ko, kama na wop ar'im -r'oii ka tra-tsen. Be na Irala fe mi, 
 na trala he Yisua, ov\d sdm-mi ronu, na farki owg tana kisia- 
 nu son; na farki owd mo re tdiikas-nu ka aii-rei a-lap'sg; na 
 farki gwg mg re gbak ama-trei-ma-nu ka-rjiraii ka ra-fi. W'uni 
 6 w'Uni owd tse tral ar'im ra Yisua, Yisua o tra tramar-kg ka 
 ka-tra-k'on ka-mgrg ka an-rei a-lap'sg; ka aiia ma Irama ka ka- 
 
 Temne - Ansprachen. 9
 
 — 130 — 
 
 mero-k'on be, tra som-na ro-}ahannama, ka an'^ntr na-tab6na. 
 Be a-fam na farki an-tetu na o-baT, na farki o-bal; pakasife an- 
 tetu vi ka-san ka o-baT. Ye pa ;yi so, be a-telu na Yisua 
 Iramar-nu ar'im ra K'uni, Yisua kono konone kono fofar-nu 
 ka ka-san-k'on. Traka tsi be a-tetu ha Yisua o Irori-nu ka-som 
 ka Yisua, pa yi mo ho Yisua kono-kgngne g tor ka k'Qru tra 
 trori-nu-ki. Tra yi tr'cT tra-bana Ira-fino tra tral ar'im ra K'uru- 
 masaba, E-vvul e-l^'T va a-fain ha gbali he tral-ri, pakasife e- 
 tetu ya Yisua ha der he rghah. A-lai ha tra selo nan tra wop- 
 ri lemp de ma-bgne, be pa \i ha gbali Iral-ri gbo. Be ah-fam 
 ha ro-S6dom 'a pon' nan tnil tapah, atra nyah na poh tral, ha 
 tra pon' na tubi tsenlsene. Traka tsi alr'ei tra ah-fam ha ro- 
 
 o I^ - - - o o 
 
 Sodom tra tra vi fisa ka au-rei a-lap'so, pa tas atr'ei tra aha 
 ma tral ar'im ra R'uru; kere ha yo fe atra ha poh tral. Nyah 
 na poh tral ar'im ra K'Qru; kore n.j yg fe atra na poh tral. 
 E-wul e-lal ya a-fam, aha yi ro-krifi, ha tubi hali; pakasife ha 
 poh farki ar'im ra K'uru ang-ru; ke be pa gbali na yi ha tra 
 kal so ang-ru, ha tra wop nah ar'im are lemp de ma-bgne; 
 kere ha gbali he so kal. 
 
 A-mane-'a-mi! Botrar nah am-mera ka 'ma-trei ame! Tete 
 
 - o o 
 
 na ba a-ldko a-fol-tr'el tra tubi, de tra ko ka Yisua traka sgtg 
 ka-lapar ka 'ma-lrel-ma-nu ma-las, Lansa na ba he so a-lgkg 
 traka l.si ni'nah. Wiini 6 w'iini owd fMi an-tgh ha Mdsa, na 
 dif-kg, ha ba he kg i-ne!. Kere ka-sgmpane ka aha ma farki 
 Yisua, gw'an ka K'llrumasaba, de aha ma farki ama-tsir ma 
 Yisuii, ama g loh traka trahhah, ama gbali felar-ha son; — ka- 
 sdmpane ka ah-fam ha-tsi ka tra las o-bana. Pa yi he tr'ei 
 Ira-lol tra farki ama-!. sir ma Yisua, owd \ira tete ka ka-dig ka 
 K'lirumasaija rokgm, gwd mg kal der tra tdhkas a-fam be, de 
 owd ba ata-gbaka tete ro-rianna de ka an-lgf, ha g botr aha 
 gbeha-kg be ka ma-nl-m'gh rata. 
 
 A-fam a-mari-tr'ei hah, aha ma tral ar'im ra K'uru, de 
 aha ma wop-ri sg! A-fam a-mari-tr'el hah, aha ma sdna Yisua 
 Ira-wu ang-ru re ma-bgne; kama ha tse ba tra sdna-kg tra-wu 
 ka ah-rei a-lap'sg de g-ninis ro-yahannama! 
 
 Tengh kia 1 lap'sg gbaia-nu ka-w^ndi, pakasife I tsi k^lane
 
 — 131 — 
 
 ka an-tof a-p6to, ke 1 tsi lemne-nu tenon. Tra-ren Irofatr Ira- 
 ran tra pon tas, me I mo'a der ka an-tof 'a-nu tra Iramai-nii 
 ar'i'm ra K'liru, ko I pen gbair-nu ka-wandi o-loko o-lai. Kere 
 hali I poll gbaia-nu ka-wandi e-lgko e-lal, w'Qni k'in o \i he 
 ka ka-tron-ka-nu, qv.6 wop as'ini-tra-nii traka tescjs am-mera-mi. 
 Na pon Iral ar'i'm ra K'urii e-loko e-lai; kere na tral-ri gbo, na 
 pon fe ^^op-ri. Nyan na ba atr'ei atse, n.yan na ba tra \\6sa 
 ka K'urumasaba tnika ka-tse-wop ar'im-r'on, ko o tra sompa-nsi 
 traka tsi. Na ebali he katr k'ere, na ebali he pa ka K'liru ka 
 an-rei a-lap'so fo ye: „Sa tral lie nan ar'im-ra-mu, sa tr'a he 
 nan ama-selo-ma-inu;" paka.sife na pon tral ar'im-r'on, na poii 
 trara ama-selo-m'on; e-tetii ya Yisua na pon Irori-iui ar'im-r'oii 
 de ama-selo-m'on; kere na yema he ri wop. I kane nn fg 
 K'uru pon som ovv'an-k'on gben ka 'ra-ru are tra (i uAka a- 
 fam, kama na tse ba ka-dinno; kere kama na gbali soto ka- 
 lapar ka 'ma-trei-ma-nan ma-las, de kama na gbali ko ro-rianna. 
 Be na lane Yisua, be na seline-ko, be na wop ar'i'ni-i'on. be 
 na Irei ka-yo ma-lrel ma-las; K'uru o tra tsera-nu ama-trel-ma- 
 nu ma-las, o tra soii-nu a-nesam a-tabana ro-riiinna. 
 
 A-nicine-'a-mi ! Botrar nan am-mera, trap nan tenon tra 
 wop ar'i'm ra K'uru, ara i pon trori-iui; kama na t.^e dinne 
 tab^na; kere kama na fiiti ka 'ra-ban' da Kriiumasaba. Nem- 
 tene nan K'uru, kama o mar-nu tra lane-ko, Ira wep ar'im- 
 r'on, de tra y(l tr'el o tr'el, atra o pon kane-nu ka ar im r'gn. 
 Nemlene-ko nan tra fiilia am'umpal-ma-nu, de tra ba-nu i-nel, 
 de tra tanas-nu, kama na gbali sake roiidn; tsa pa \i he ka 
 an-fgsa na nyari na gbali sake ka K'iiru; kono ba tra mar-iui 
 traka vo-tsi. 
 
 Kanko K'uru na sake ka Yisua Ira-tsen, kama o sake ronii, 
 de kama na sdto ma-trama ma-fino ro-rianna. Rianna o vi 
 
 - o - - o 
 
 od'er g-ma-bone; ka-sgmpime 6 ka-sompane ka yi he ri, ra-tru 
 6 ra-tru ra yi he ri, m'gne 6 m'gne ma yi he ri: kere ina- 
 bdne gbo tankan 6 tankan. 
 
 9*
 
 — 132 — 
 
 Chapter III. 
 The ten Commandments. 
 
 (E-toh trofatr.) 
 
 K'urumasaba o fof as'im aire be, o pa ho: 
 
 1. Mine yi Yehofa Ok'uru-ka-mu, owo Miira-mu ka an-lgf 
 iia Misra, ka an-set na ra-tiar. Tse ba tr'riru tra-lom tdmbe 
 ininan. ') 
 
 2. Tse bempane a-ron 6 a-ron a-fo8, taloin ra-b^lane 6 la- 
 b^lane ra r'aka 6 r'clka ara yi ka ak'uru rokom, talom ara y\ ka 
 an-tof rt/kom, talgm ara )i ro-m'antr ka an-lof rorata. Tse 
 sona-^i Ira-wii, de tse lehki-j^i: t.sa n)ine Yehofa Ok'uru-ka- 
 niu I \i K'urii owd ba ka-tnitr, owd ram ama-trei ma-las ma 
 an-kas ka tra-bomp tra an-wul ha ka 'ra-komra, ara beka Ira- 
 sas de ara beka tr'anle ka ana gbena-mi; de owd ba i-nel Iraka 
 e-wul ya ana botar-mi, de ana wop e-loii-'e-mi. 
 
 3 Tse bonlr an'es na Yehofa Ok'Qru-ka-mu ka-tsin; Isa 
 Yeliofa 0" gbali he nank w'iini, owd bontr an'es-iion ka-tsiii, mo 
 w'lini pani-tr'el. 
 
 4. Nane an-rei na an-Sabat tra wop-ni a-sam. Ma-rei 
 Iratnat ro kin ma 'vi tra yo ma-pani, de ma yi tra yo ama-pant- 
 ma-mu be; krre an-rei, aha beka Iramat de ran, na vi an-Sabat 
 ha Yehofa Ok'uru-ka-mu : ka ah-rei ahft ma gbali he yo ma- 
 pant 6 ma-pant, pa vi he miino, pa yi he ow'an-ka-mu o-runi, 
 pa yi he ow'an-ka-mu o-beia, pa yi be am-bol-'a-mu a-riini, pa 
 yi he am-boT-'a-mu a-bera, pa yi he tra-sem-tra-mu tra ka-petr, 
 pa yi he o-lsik, owd yira ka Ira-pelr-tra-mu: Isa ka ma-rei 
 Iramal ro kin Yehofa o bempa atr'dru de an-tgf, de ka-bah, de 
 r'aka 6 r'aka ara yi ri rok'or, ko g fdtane ka ah-rei aha beka 
 tramal de rah: tsiah Yehofa g ruba ah-rei ha ah-Sabat, kg g 
 samas-hi.') 
 
 1) Or: tr uru Ira-tsel rayt'i-ka-jui; „ strange gods beside me. 
 
 2) Or: yg-hi a-sam; „he made it sacred."
 
 — 133 — 
 
 5. N6sa o-kas-ka mu de o-kara-ka-mu; kamn ma bol an- 
 h^sam-'a-mu ka an-tof, aha Yehofa Ok'uru-ka-mu o sgh-mu. 
 
 o 
 
 6. Tse dif. 
 
 7. Tse yo ka-rap. 
 
 8. Tie keia. 
 
 9. Tse son I'amasere tra ra-ycm Iraka o-fatrane-ka-mu. 
 10. Tse ba a-fela traka an-set ha o-fafrane-ka-niu; Ise ba 
 
 a-fela tr^ka o-rani ka o-fatranp-ka-mu. pa vi he traka am-boT- 
 n'oh a-runi, pa yi he tnika am-bol-h'oh a-bera, pa yi he traka 
 o-na-k'oh, pa vi he tr^ka ah-sofali-h'oh, pa vi he Inika r'aka 
 6 r'aka, ara o-falrane-ka-inu g ba. 
 
 Chapter IV. 
 Translation of some Psalms. 
 
 Ah-iSitlma 1. 
 
 1. >\'*uni m^ri-lr'el won, ovvg tse kgl ka ka-mah ka ah- 
 fam a-las, de owd tse Irama ka ar'on' da ah-fam aha yo o-las, 
 de owg tse yira ka ka-wah ka ah-fam a-sel-tr'el. 
 
 2. Kere gwd lesa traka an-lgh ha Yehofa. de owo trani- 
 tramne an-tgh-h'oh ra-yah de tratrjik-ah. 
 
 3. balane mo h'antr ana 'a tsep ka tia-bat tra m'anir 
 rayer, aha son ama-komi-ma-tsi ka ah-lokg-ha-tsi; de e-bopar- 
 ya-lsi e gbali he yimra, de Ir'ei 6 tr'ei atra g yg o nafas-tsi. 
 
 4. Pa yi he yah traka ah-fam a-las; kere (ha yi) mg e- 
 fuk, eye ah-fef ha falira. 
 
 5. Tsiah ah-fam a-las ha gbali he trama ka ka-rgk an- 
 tghka, pa yi he ah-fam aha yg g-las ka ah-gbanne ha ah-fam 
 a-tratseh. ') 
 
 o -' 
 
 6. Tsa Yehofa g trc\ra ar'on' da ah-fam a-tratseh;^) kere 
 ar'on' da ah-fam a-las ra dinne. 
 
 1) Or: ha an-tratseh; „of the righteous." 
 
 2) Or: da an-tratseh; „of the righteous."
 
 — 134 — 
 
 An-8alnia 28. 
 
 1. Yehofa o yi o-lrol-ka-mi; I gbali he pan r'aka. 
 
 2. \o-mi I fanta ra tra-lal tra k'eren ka-fino; o k^re- 
 mi') ka am'antr ma o-fotane raver. 
 
 3. kal bakas aiVumpal-'a-mi;') o kere-ini ka as'on' tra 
 ma-16mpi tiaka ra-bomp ra aiVes-ii'on. 
 
 4. Ankg, kota mo I kot^) ka ka-gbohkal ka aii-foTr iia ra- 
 fi, I gbali he nesa tr'ei 6 Ir'el tra-h]s: pakasife*) muno ma yi 
 romi; ka-sote-ka-mu^) de ka-trak-ka-mu tra befat-mi. 
 
 5. Ma beneua-mi a-mesa traka ka-di rod'er ka an-gbena- 
 'a-mi kadi-/) am-poti-'a-rai na la pai.^) 
 
 6. ]^la-tol de ma-boiia ma tra tram-mi gbo ama-rei ma an- 
 liesam-'a-mi be; ke 1 tsi yira ka an-sel na Yehofa tabatia. 
 
 An-8alma 12(i. 
 
 A-leii na tra-t>ik. 
 
 1. Mo Y'ehufa o kala e-fiinti ya Slou, sa yi mo ho ana ma 
 worap. 
 
 2. An-lo iia-lsi tra-saii-lra-su tra lasane ma-sel, de tra-mer- 
 tra-su (Ira hisane) nta-len : ah-lo na-tsi na pa ka-lron ka ari- 
 kafri: Yehofa o pon yona-na ma-trei ma-bana. 
 
 3. Yehofa o pen ygna-su ma-trel ma-bana; pa bone-su.^) 
 
 1) Ur: botrar-mi aui-mera ka etc., „he takes care of me 
 at etc.'' 
 
 2) Or: an-nesara-'a-mi. 
 
 3) Or better: Ye pa yi so, me I kot etc.; „thus it is also 
 when I walk etc." 
 
 4) Or: tsa etc. 
 
 5) Or: ak'autr-ka-mu. 
 
 6) Or: rod"er ka ana gbena-mi kadi. 
 
 7) Or; na la ha ha loha. 
 
 8) Or: sa ba ma-bone. Or: tsTa som pa bone-su.
 
 — 135 — 
 
 4. Kala so, o Yehofa, e-funti-'e-sn, mo*) atra-baf Ira an- 
 tgf na ka-dio! 
 
 5. Ana s^ka e-santr m'tintror, na Ira re roka ma-bone. 
 
 6. Na wur na tas ka bok-an, na banane e-santr, na kalane 
 so na der re ma-bone, na karane ama-gbon-ma-nan. 
 
 Note. The first verse, if translated literally is as follows: „When 
 the Lord brought back the captives of Zion etc,;" according 
 to the sense of the common Engl, version. But according to 
 a learned Commentator the Hebr. 211^' in Kal is always to 
 be taken intr. in the sense of „return", or „return to", 
 when the place to which one returns follows also often in 
 the Ace. This assertion he founds on the principal passage 
 of Deut. 30, 2. 3. where this expression first occurs, and in 
 the first six verses of which 2W occurs several times, and 
 only once it is given tr. by „turn, bring back"; but even 
 there it will give a better sense in rendering it by „ return 
 to", as V. 2. : „And shalt return unto the Lord thy God, 
 and shalt etc." v. 3.: „Then the Lord thy God will return 
 to thy captivity etc." This observation applies also to the 
 other passages where Iliti' is given tr. in the common ver- 
 sion; but where it will give a very good sense when ren- 
 dered by „returnto"; viz. in Ps. 14, 7. 85,4. and Jes. 52, 8. 
 
 When taken intr. the Engl, version of the P'. verse of 
 the preceding Psalm would be as follows: „When the Lord 
 turned himself to the returning li. e. conversion) of Zion, etc.;" 
 and in Temne : Mo Yehofa o sake ka ka-sake ka Sion, etc., 
 or more fully: ka ka sake ka am-mera ka Sion etc. 
 
 As SItS' has also the sense of „be converted", n2'']i/ may 
 be given by conversion, hence mZ!"'!^*' 2^\lf = „return to the 
 returning," or „return (turn oneself) to the conversion;" and 
 ni2ti' 2Wi „return to the captivity," or fig. „to the misery 
 of etc." 
 
 1) Or: Kalane so, o Yehofah, ka ra-funti-ra-su, mo etc.; 
 „ return again, o Jehova, to our captivity, as etc."
 
 — 136 — 
 
 Chapter Y. 
 Hymns. 
 
 1. Ain-Bosne traka Rianna. (2 Cor. 5, 1.) (C. M.) 
 
 1. 
 
 Sa ba a-set na yi rokom. 
 Na fas e-set no-ru; 
 Ke be sa fi sa kdne ri, 
 
 — o o ~ 
 
 Tra yira ri rokom. 
 
 2. 
 Na ji a-set a-bakar gban, 
 Na yi he ka an-tof; 
 Na tel he me e-sel e-lom, 
 Na vi ri ro rokom, ') 
 
 3. 
 
 Yehofa kono bempa-ni, 
 A-fam na sal he iii; 
 
 o 
 
 An-sel ane iia yese he, 
 A-fam na sim he ni. 
 
 o 
 
 4. 
 Ah'umpal-'a-mi na bosne gba, 
 Tra bek an-sel na-tsi; 
 Na yema trei an-set ng-rfl, 
 Tra ba ana rokgrn. 
 
 5. 
 
 Sa kar ra-fi, pa bdne-su; 
 Tsa ria yo sa trel 
 An-set-'a-su a-yal ane, 
 Tra won an-set a-fu. ') 
 
 1) Or: Na won na tas 'ra-ru. 
 
 2) Or: Tra won an-set rokom.
 
 — 137 — 
 
 2. Ama-B^tar de ama-Tot ma K'Qrumasaba. 
 (P. M. Or like : Though troubles assail etc. *) 
 
 1. 
 
 Yehofa rokom, 
 
 O yO-mi o-tot; 
 
 dis-nii, o muns-mi, o losir-mi so, 
 botrar-mi 'mera. o nanka-mi 'nel; 
 Ha r'aka ra ghuli he jo-mi o-baii. 
 
 2. 
 Yehofa rokdin, 
 
 b^'mpa-mi gbeir; 
 
 bani-mi so ka 'ra-1rar ra o-las; 
 
 vn-mi ow'an ka o-kas-k'on rokom; 
 
 .0 tser-ini 1 uatr ro-riaiina b' I ft. 
 
 3. 
 Yehofa rokom, 
 
 Aii-fosa-n'on sun. 
 
 Na beiic-ini tot ania-rri-ma-ini be. 
 
 yo-iiii 1 fan' a, I dira so gbes, 
 
 \o-nii I tame, 1 yokane ras. 
 
 4. 
 Yehofa rokom, 
 
 kali-mi lot ; 
 
 yona-mi alr'ei Ira-kabane tra-fsi, 
 Ow'an-k'on o fi ka ka-belah-ka-mi; 
 
 1 trara ton krtno mo bolar-mi gba. •) 
 
 5. 
 Mo kono mi ba. 
 I nesa he so; 
 
 Tsa r'iika ra-sompa ra gbali he fair; 
 bumar-mi Idko 6 loko Ira-lk'n. 
 
 — o 
 
 Ka r'aka ra-fino I gbali he pah. 
 
 1) Or according to the Germ, tune: „0b Triibsal uns krankt, 
 
 etc." 
 
 2) Or: I trara ton kono ino tena-mi gba.
 
 — 138 — 
 
 6. 
 Yehofa rokom 
 
 Ka-lapso ka-lsi, 
 
 som a-maleika tra k^re-mi ro, 
 
 Ro Ylsua vira rokdm ka ka-wan, 
 
 Ro m'dne 6 m'gne ma gbali he won. 
 
 3. Doxology. (L M.) 
 
 (Praise God from whom etc.) 
 
 1. 
 K'llru son e-rfiba be, 
 Man lehsir-ko, — tse tsi p^'ne, 
 Tok-ko a-farn be ka 'ra-ru, 
 Nva a-maleika na k'uru. 
 
 2. 
 K'uru o-Kas, m:in leiisir-ko; 
 Lensir Ow'cin-k'on kom gbo son; 
 K'uru o-Riihu lensir nan, 
 Ra-Sas ra-sam man lensir nan. 
 
 Chapter YL 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 (Ka-ramne ka o-Rabu.) 
 Pa-ka-su, owo vi ro ka rianna, kanko *) an'es-'a-mu na vi 
 a-sam; kanko ') ara-bal-ra-mu ra bek; kanko*) ama-selg-ma-mu 
 ma ygne ka an-tof, ma ma ,\Qno ro ka rianna. Yer-su lenon 
 ar'a-ra-su ra-di, ara bekl. Tsera-su ama-trel-ma-su ma-las, ma 
 svan sa tser so ana ma vo-su o-las. Tse su wona ka r a ra- 
 gbosa; kere wura-su ka ma-treT ma-las. Tsa muno ba 'ra-baT, 
 de an-fosa, de an-yiki lankan 6 t^iikan. Amma. 
 
 1) Or: tra, „let".
 
 Part m. 
 
 Temne - English Vocabulary. 
 
 Note. See the Preface § 22.
 
 Abbreviations explained. 
 
 a. 
 
 active. 
 
 log. 
 
 logical. 
 
 abbr. 
 
 abbreviated. 
 
 u. 
 
 neuter. 
 
 abr. 
 
 abruptive. 
 
 n. 
 
 noun. 
 
 abs. 
 
 absolute. 
 
 obj. 
 
 objective. 
 
 abstr. 
 
 abstract. 
 
 obs. 
 
 obsolete. 
 
 adj. 
 
 adjective. 
 
 onom. 
 
 onomatopoetic 
 
 adv. 
 
 adverb. 
 
 part. 
 
 particle. 
 
 aux. 
 
 auxiliary. 
 
 pass. 
 
 passive. 
 
 caus. 
 
 causative 
 
 pers. 
 
 personal. 
 
 cf. 
 
 confer. 
 
 pi. 
 
 plural. 
 
 comp 
 
 compound. 
 
 poss. 
 
 possessive. 
 
 concr. 
 
 concrete. 
 
 postp. 
 
 postposition. 
 
 conj. 
 
 conjunction. 
 
 pr. 
 
 pronoun. 
 
 contr. 
 
 contracted. 
 
 pref. 
 
 prefix. 
 
 def. 
 
 definite. 
 
 prep. 
 
 preposition. 
 
 dem. 
 
 demonstrative. 
 
 prob. 
 
 probably. 
 
 dim. 
 
 diminutive. 
 
 prop. 
 
 proper. 
 
 doubl. 
 
 doubly. 
 
 prox. 
 
 proximate. 
 
 emph. 
 
 emphatic. 
 
 rad. 
 
 radix. 
 
 eiiph. 
 
 euphonic. 
 
 recipr. 
 
 reciprocal. 
 
 expl. 
 
 expletive. 
 
 IX'ti. 
 
 reflexive. 
 
 fig- 
 
 figuratively. 
 
 reL 
 
 relative. 
 
 freq. 
 
 froiiuentative. 
 
 rem. 
 
 remote. 
 
 inch. 
 
 inchoative. 
 
 revert. 
 
 revertive. 
 
 indef. 
 
 indefinite. 
 
 sing. 
 
 singular. 
 
 impers. 
 
 impersonal. 
 
 spec. 
 
 specific. 
 
 insep. 
 
 inseparable. 
 
 spunt. 
 
 spoutive. 
 
 int. 
 
 interjection. 
 
 subj. 
 
 subjective. 
 
 intens. 
 
 intensive. 
 
 sufl". 
 
 suffix. 
 
 inter. 
 
 interrogative. 
 
 V. 
 
 verb. 
 
 irrel. 
 
 irrelative. 
 
 verb. 
 
 verbal. 
 
 lit. 
 
 literally. 
 
 vow. 
 
 vowel. 
 
 loc. 
 
 local. 
 

 
 A-, pref. indef. „a, an"; e. g. a-sef, „a hoiisf". 
 
 A-, pref. einph. vow. to make compound indef. prefixes, as: ka-, 
 ma-, na-, etc. or k', tr', etc. definite; e. g. ama-bdne, „the 
 joy", from ma-bone, ,.jo.Y"; ak'antr, „the slick", from k'antr, 
 „a slick". See Pref. § 22. b. 
 
 -A, suff., being a weaker form of -an, used relalively only. It 
 may be affixed to nouns, pronouns and lo some local adverbs; 
 e. g. kia. „il", from ki, „it". 
 
 -A, suff., often added at the end of a proposition for the pur- 
 pose to make ihi' last vowel sound agree with a preceding 
 vowel sound a, or to cause a sort of quibble. Sometimes 
 it is used after exclamatory sentences, as: der ba lemp-a! 
 „comc here (iuickly!" 
 
 -A? inter, suff., depending on euphony, and used with ma? me? 
 and mo? when having the sense of „why?" e. g. mam bes 
 and-a? „why doesl thou dig here?" — For its other uses 
 see the Grammar. 
 
 -A? inter, loe. sulT. „wherc?" implying the subsantive verb 
 „be"; it is affixed lo nouns and pronouns like the Hebr. \n:- 
 — E. g. an-tis-a? „where is the knife?" or: an-lis I'li-a? 
 lit. „lhe knife where is it?" ==: ni-a an-lis-a? lit. „ where 
 is it the knife;" mun'-a? „where art thou?" = the Hebr. 
 nS^X Gen. 3, 9.; Iri-a? or t.si-a? „ where are they (spoons, 
 slicks etc.)?" for tria-a? or tsl'a-a? More particulars about 
 the use of Ihis sulT. will be found in the Temne Grammar. 
 
 A! int. ,,ah! oh! now! well!" It is expressive of wonder, dis- 
 like, censure, and approval, also of joy or grief, pain and 
 compassion; e. g. a w'an! „oh boy!" 
 
 'A, abbrev. form of iia, pr. subj. „lhey, it;" e. g. 'a sap-ko, 
 „lhey flogged him." 
 
 'A-mi, pr. poss. abbr. „my", for: na-mi, lit, „of me;" e. g. 
 an-set-'a-mi, „my house."
 
 — 144 — 
 
 'A-mu, pr. poss. abbr. „thy", for: na-mu, lit. „of thee;" e. g. 
 an-sel-'a-mu, „th}' house." ,^ 
 
 'A-nan, pr. poss. abbr. „their", for; iia-han, lit. „of them;" e. g. 
 an-set-'a-nan, ..their house." 
 
 'A-nu, pr. poss. abbr. „\our-', for: na-nu, lit. „of you;" e. g. 
 an-sel-'a-nu, „yonr house." 
 
 'A-su, pr. poss. abbr. ^oui", for: na-SM. lit. „of us;" e. g. an- 
 sel-'a-su, „our house." 
 
 Aka-, def. pref. -- ka-, „lhp"; c. g. aka-bep, ka-bep, „ihe 
 spoon;" but ka-bep, „a spoon." 
 
 Aka, pr. rcl. „which"; e. g. ka-bep aka I wal, „the spoon which 
 I bought." 
 
 Ake, pr. dem. prox. „this"; e. g. ak'an!r ake, „this slick." 
 
 Alikali, n. title of the kings of the Port-Loko territory. Lit. 
 „lhe chief judge." It seems in the first place to be derived 
 from the Mandingo Alkali, „a!caid", or „alcalde", and ulti- 
 mately from the Ar. ^J6ls, ^^-t Judex, and with the article: 
 
 summus judex. In Temne the i is inserted after the Arab, 
 article al- for the sake of euphony. The Chiefs of the Sikhs 
 in India are called: akali, which no doubt comes from the 
 same root. 
 
 Alukrana, n. „the Koran." From the Ar. ^jlyJf, coranus. 
 
 Am, euph. form of ma, „lhou", used before b, m and p with 
 interrogative propositions; e. g. am pon di-i? „hast thou 
 eaten?" — See ma in loco. 
 
 o 
 
 Am-, pref. def. „the", used before the letters b, m and p; e. g. 
 am-bitra, „the bollle." 
 
 Ama-, pref. def. „the"; e. g. ama-ber, „th6 liquor." 
 
 Ama, „pr, rel. „which"; e. g. ma-lemre ama I ba, „the limes 
 which 1 have." 
 
 Amba! int. and adv. „well! thank you!" Cf, for examples Col- 
 loquial Phrases, pag. 105 etc. 
 
 Ame; pr. dem. prox. sing, and pi. „this, these;" e. g. ama-lrel 
 ame, „these things,"
 
 — 145 — 
 
 Amina, j adv. „amen", „so be it." From the Ar. ^a^,^ amen. 
 Amini, \ ita sit. The Temnes say amini, the Mori-men amina. 
 An-, pref. def. „the", used before the letters d, n and t; e. g. 
 
 an-tis, „the knife." 
 An, euph. form of ma, „thou", used before d, n and t with 
 interrogative propositions; e. g. an dira-i? „hast thou slept?" 
 An, pref. def. „the", used before all consonants excepting b. m 
 
 and p, as also d, n and t; e. g. an-gbata, „the mat." 
 -An, suff. , indicating with verbs a continuance of the energy 
 of the verb, with which it is used, while one speaks of it, 
 as: na ma dr-an, „they are eating." It is generally used 
 with participial propositions. If a verb, having more than 
 one syllable, terminates in a, then the vowel of the sufl. is 
 cut off, as: kono me tila-'n, „hhn I am selling." 
 -An, suff., used with pronouns, when it makes them emphatic, 
 or rather absolute. This form moy, however, be also used 
 relatively; but the weaker form -a, which see above, is never 
 used absolutely. It is also used with a few local adverbs. 
 When used with nouns or names, it seems to be used as 
 a sort of expletive or euph. particle, or as a sort of insep- 
 arable dem. pr. , at least it contains the element of it. An 
 is sometimes yet followed by the snffix -e, and thus, be- 
 comes a compound one, and may be thus used with verbs 
 and nouns; e. g. nlah, „it", from ni; as: an-lis-'a-mi nian, 
 „lhis is my knife," lit. ,,my knife it." 
 An, euph. form of ma, „thou", used before g and k with inter- 
 rogative propositions; e. g. an ko ro-petr-i? „art thou going 
 to town?" 
 An, adv. „yes", used with a nod of the head. It is an almost 
 inarticulate sound; e. g. o-kas-ka-mu o yi ri-i? An, Q yi 
 ri; „is thy father there?" „Yes, he is there." 
 An an! int. or adv. „so so! tolerably well! nothing particular! 
 pretty well!" It is an almost inarticulate .^ound. See Colloq. 
 Phras. p. 105. 
 
 Teiiine - VVorterbuch. tO
 
 — 146 — 
 
 An^, pr. rel. „ which"; e. g. na-bena ana I kdra, „ ropes which 
 
 I brought." 
 Ana-, pref. def. „the"; e. g. ana-set, „the house." 
 Ana, pr. rel. sing, and pi. „who, the;^' who; which." When 
 
 referring to a noun of place, it may be given by „where"; 
 
 e. g. afi-set ana o sal, „the house which he built." 
 Aiiai-, pref. def comp. „the"; as anai-yari, „lhe cat," = an-yari. 
 Ane, pr. dem. prox. „this"; e. g. an'antr ane, „this fire." 
 Arie, pr. dem. prox. sing, and pi. „this, these";" e. g. an-fam 
 
 ane, „this people." 
 Anan, pr. dem. rem. sing, and pi. „that, those." Sometimes 
 
 merely liah, which see; e. g. „an-fam aiian, „those persons." 
 Anina, ^ = nina, or ninan, adv. „fo morrow"; e. g. aninan loko 
 Aninan,) wunon I tsi kone, ,,to morrow about this time I shall 
 
 go." The longer form may be used absolutely. 
 Aiiko, adv. „yes"; e. g. ma kone ro-k'or-i? Anko; „doest thou 
 
 go to the farm?" „Yes." 
 And, adv. emph. „here"; e. g. o yi fe and, „he is not here." 
 And, prep. prox. „here at, here in, here from, here to." It 
 
 implies the adv. „here"; e. g. ano-petr, „here in this town." 
 Apa-, pref. def. „the"; e.g. kara pa-la apa-fino, „ bring the rice 
 
 the good one," 
 Apa, pr. rel. „which", e. g. pa-la apa I wal, „rice which I 
 
 bought." 
 Ara-, pref. def. „the"; e. g. ara-beha, „the rope." 
 Ara, pr. rel. „which"; e. g. ra-bena ara I gbak, „a rope and 
 
 rope which I cut." 
 Are, pr. dem. prox. „this"; e. g. ara-bena are. „this rope." 
 Aira-, pref. def. = tra, „the"; e. g. atra-bep, „the spoons," = 
 
 tra-bep. 
 Atra, pr. rel. „ which"; e. g. tra-bep atra dinne, „the spoons 
 
 which are lost." 
 Atse, = atre, pr. dem. prox. sing, and pi. „this, these;" e. g. 
 
 atr'ei atse, „this matter." See the Note after kotsi. 
 Awa! int. „well! well now! very well!" Germ. „wohlan!" Lat. 
 
 age! e. g. awa, sa kdne! „well, we go!"
 
 147 — 
 
 B. 
 
 B', abbr. of be, which see; e. g. b' 1 fi, „when 1 die." 
 Ba, adv. „now, here;" e. g. k^li ba! „look here!" 
 Ba, V. a. „have, possess;" also „have-for-, have-on-" (as pity on 
 one, see the next word); e. g. o ba he a-kala, „he has no 
 money." As an aux. v., ba with the long form of the Infini- 
 tive of another verb, or also with a verbal noun, expresses 
 duty or obHgation to do what is indicated by the Infinitive 
 of the principal verb, as: ma ba tra gbal, „lhou must write," 
 lit. „thou hast to write." 
 Ba w'uni i-nel, „have mercy" or „pity upon one;" e. g. g ba- 
 
 mi i-nel, „he had pity on me." 
 Ba w'uni tr'el, „be a matter to one, concern one;" e. g. miino 
 tra ba tr'el-i? Yao, mine tra ba tr'el; „does it concern 
 
 o ' 
 
 thee?" „Yes, it concerns me." 
 Baf, V. a. „make" (as a farm), „cultivate, clear" (as land for a 
 
 farm); e. g. o ko baf a-tgf, „he goes to clear land for a 
 
 farm." 
 Bal, 0-, pi. a-, n. „king": e. g. o-bal ka an-tof, „the king of 
 
 the country." 
 BaT, ra-, pi. tra-, n. ,.kingdom, government, office of a king;" 
 
 e. g. ra-bal-r'on, „his kingdom." 
 Bak, v. impers. „be hard, be trying;" e. g. pa bak he, be ma 
 
 memar o-fino, „it will not be hard, if thou doest try well." 
 
 It also serves to express the adv. „hardly", as: pa bak ri 
 
 mo futia an-nesam-n'on, „he hardly saved his life there," 
 
 lit. „it was hard there when he saved his life." It is the 
 
 short form of b^ki. 
 Bak, V. inch, and n. „get" or „be strong; get old, grow up, 
 
 grow; come to the full time" (as applied to pregnancy); e. g. 
 
 I bak ton, „I got old now;" — o ka.si bak, „he will not 
 
 grow" (as a child). 
 Bak, ka-, n. ..strength, hardness, firmness; age;" c. g. ka-bak- 
 
 ka-tsi, ..its hardness" (as of wood); ka-bak-k'on, „his age." 
 Bak ra-for, ka-, n. comp. ..boldness, audacity, impudence, want 
 
 10*
 
 — 148 — 
 
 of modest)';" lit. „strength (as regards, or of) the eye;" 
 
 6. g. ba ka-bak ra-for, „he is bold," lit. „he has boldness." 
 Bak, adj. „lasling"; e. g. ra-ru ra-bak tabana, „a world lasting 
 
 for ever." 
 Bak, ) V. rel. „be strong for-on-with-, be heavy on-" (as a sick- 
 Baki, J ness on a person); „be older than-;" e. g. o baki-mi 
 
 o-tan, he is a little older than I." Short form also: „get 
 
 strong for-, get heavy upon-, be trying for-." 
 B^ka, 0-, pi. a-, n. „one of the Baka nation." See Pref. § 4. d. 
 Bakar, adj. „strong, firm, fast;" (rad. bak.) E. g. o fofa r'im ra- 
 
 bakfir, „he spoke with a strong voice." 
 Bakar, o-, adj. but used adverbially, „fa6t, firm, firmly, tight." 
 
 See an ex. under lin, v. a. 
 Bakar, v. rel. n. (rad. bak) „be strong, be firm, be fast" (as a 
 
 post etc.); „be hard" (as wood); e. g. ak'antr ka bakar, „the 
 
 post is firm." The suffix is rather redundant. 
 Bakas, v. caus. (rad. bak), „make strong, strengthen" (as the 
 
 heart, or body); „make heavy;" e. g. o bakas ka-but-ka-mi, 
 
 = bakas-mi ka-but, „he strengthened, my heart," = „he 
 
 encouraged me." 
 Bakas aiVumpal na- ('a-), „ strengthen the soul of-, refresh one's 
 
 soul;" e. g. bakas aiVumpal-'a-mi, „he refreshes my soul." 
 Bakasne, v. caus. and refl. (rad. bak), „strengthen oneself, refresh 
 
 oneself" (as by food etc.); also „ encourage oneself" (with or 
 
 without ka-but, „heart"); e. g. o bakasne, „he encouraged 
 
 himself." 
 Bakasne ma-der, „refresh one's own body, recruit one's own 
 
 health;" e. g. o bakasne ma-der, „he refreshed his body." 
 B^ke, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „wharf, landing-place, port." From bake, 
 
 „go on shore, land." 
 Bake Loko, n. prop. „The town Port Loko." See Pref. § 4. c. 
 B^ki, V. rel. long form of bak, which see above, 
 B^ki, adj. „strong, hard; heavy, serious" (as a palaver); e. g. 
 
 Ir'el tra-baki, „ a serious matter;" „grievons" (as an illness); 
 
 „great" (as a battle); ..laborious" (as work); e. g. ma-pant 
 
 ma-baki, „hard work;" „old" (of rational objects).
 
 — 149 — 
 
 Baki, 0-, adj. but used adverbially, „strongi>"; e. g. aii-fef ria 
 
 fen o-baki, „the wind blows strongly." 
 Baki, V. impers. „be hard, be trying;" e. g. o b^ki, „it is hard." 
 Baki, V. impers. a. „be hard for-, be trying for-;" e. g. o baki- 
 
 ko tra yg-tsi, „it was hard for him to do it." 
 Baki, V. n. „be strong" (as wood, or tide); „be heavy" (as a 
 
 load, or palaver); „be hard" or „stale" (as bread); „be old" 
 
 (of anim. objects only); „be sad, be distressing" (as news); 
 
 e. g. am'antr ma baki tengn, „the tide is strong to day." 
 Baki ra-for, adj. conip. „bold, impudent, wanting modesty;" e.g. 
 
 w'uni baki ra-for, „an impudent person," 
 Baki, am-, n. „thc old (people);" also „the dead", or „lhe 
 
 manes, the shades;" lit. „the old ones." See Pref. § 12, a. 
 
 and cf. the Hebr. D^ly Dy Hez. 26, 20. 
 Bal, v. a. „drive away, expel, drive;" e. g. 'a bal-kn, .,thoy 
 
 drove him away." 
 Bal-bal, v. freq. a. (rad. bal), „pursue after, chase, drive all about, 
 
 drive far away; persecute;" e. g. 'a bal-bal-ko o-ban, „they 
 
 pursued hotly after him." 
 Bal-bal, ka-, n. verb. „acl of pursuing after, chasing; persecu- 
 tion;" e. g. ka-bal-bal-k'on o-sem, „his chasing the animal." 
 Bala. V. inch. (rad. bal), „get married, marry" (of females); e. g. 
 
 o-bera o pon ba!a. „the woman has got married." 
 Balai, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „basket"; e. g. ka-balai ka-bana, „ a large 
 
 basket." 
 Balane, v. prob. cans, and refl., or spont. (rad, bal), ,.be like." 
 
 Often followed by: mo- „as"; e. g. ra balane mo a-bok. „it 
 
 is like a snake." 
 Balane mo (ho), ,,be like as, resemble;" e. g. ra balane mo ho 
 
 a-bok, „it resembles a snake." 
 Balane, ra-, pi. e-, n. „likeness, representation, picture;" e. g. 
 
 ra-balane-r'on, „hls likeness." 
 Balma, a-, pi. e-, n. „country-knif(', dagger;" e. g. Q ba a-balma, 
 
 „he has a dagger." 
 Bamp, a-, pi. c-, n. „bird"; e. g. a-bamp a-ffno, „a fine bird "
 
 — 150 — 
 
 Bail, V. a. „pain, cause pain to-, hurl;" e. g. ka-sam ka ban- 
 mi, „the sore pains me.'' 
 
 Ban, V. n. „be angry, be cross" (habitually so); „ache, ail;" also 
 „be hot" (as the sun); e. g. ra-bomp-ra-mi ra ban, „my head 
 aches;" ~ ow'uni owe o ban, „this person is cross." 
 
 Ban, adj. ,.angry, cross; painful, severe;" e. g. w'uni ban, „an 
 angry person." 
 
 Ban, 0-, adj. but used as an adv. „severely, hotly, sharply, pain- 
 fully." Cf. yo-w'uni o-bah, under Y. 
 
 Ban, V. a. „fetch"; e. g. ban a-tis, „fetch a knife." 
 
 Ban, ra-, n. „anger, indignation, wrath;" e. g. ra-ban'-d'on, 
 „his wrath." 
 
 Ban, ka-, n. „the sea, as opposed to dry land;" ro-ban, „at sea." 
 
 Bana, v. n. „be large, be big, be great;" e. g. mine bana, „I 
 am great." 
 
 Bana, adj. ,.large, big, great; heavy" (as a tornado); e. g. o-na 
 o-b^na, „a large cow." 
 
 Bana, o-, adj. but used adverbially, „greatly, much;" applied to 
 sewing „with large stitches," e. g. o sot o-bana, „he sews 
 with large stitches." 
 
 Bana, V. rel. (rad. ba), „have-for-, carry-for-;" e. g. o bana-ko 
 k'ota, „he has cloth for him." 
 
 Baiia, v. rel. (rad. ban), „fetch for-;" e.g. b^ua-mi a-tis, „fetch 
 me a knife." 
 
 Banane, v, rel. and refl. „have with oneself, carry with oneself;" 
 e. g. banane an kala, „he carried the money with himself." 
 
 Bani, v. a. „redeem, ransom;" e. g. o bani-mi ka 'ra-trar, „he 
 redeemed me from slavery." 
 
 Bani, ka-, n. verb. „act of redeeming, redemption;" e. g. ka- 
 bani-k'on, „his redemption." 
 
 Banka, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „temporary hut in a farm of a conical 
 form, the roof reaching down to the ground." It is used 
 to cook under, and superior to, and higher than the one 
 called a-gbom. Also „any rude round hut in a farm;" and 
 also „the form of an annular eclipse," about which see the 
 Temne Diet.
 
 — 151 — 
 
 Ban'sa, for banasa, v. caus. and inch. (rad. ban), „get angry, be 
 angry" (occasionally so), lit. „get angered," or „gel made 
 angry;" e.g. o-bal o ban'sa, „the king got angry." Applied 
 to the sea „roar, rage." 
 
 Ban'sa, v. freq. and caus. (rad. ban), „pain, hurt, cause pain to; 
 ail;" e. g. an'antr na bahsa he ko, „the fire did not hurl 
 him." 
 
 Ban'sa, ka-, n. „anger" (occasional); „pain" ; e. g. ka-ban'sa- 
 k'ou, „his anger." Applied to the sea: „ roaring, raging," 
 = the Hebr. f]V.i Jon. 1, 15. 
 
 Bah'sane, v. impers. freq. or intens. caus. and refl. (rad. bah), 
 „grieve, displease to, pain, make angry," Hi. „cause pain to 
 oneself;" e. g. pa bah'sane-na, „it grieved them." 
 
 Bah'sar, v. caus. inch, and rel. (rad. bah), „get angered at-," or 
 „about-," or „with-. be angry Avith-, be displeased," or 
 „ vexed with-," or „about-;" c. g. Pa Sori o bah'sar-mi, I tsi 
 fofar-ko, „Mr. Sori is angry with me; I shall speak to him." 
 
 Bant, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „bone"; e. g. ka-banl ka-lol, „a small 
 bone." 
 
 Bantra, a-, pi. e-, n. „bow; arch;" also „spring" (of a guiilock); 
 fig. „war". See Tradit. pag. 4. 
 
 Bap, ka-, pi. Ira-, n. „country axe, hatchet." 
 
 Bap, V. a. „meet, meet with, find;" e. g. I bap-kg ro-r'oh, „I 
 met him on the road." 
 
 Bap o-fino, „fare well, meet with a happy lot, be well off;" e. g. 
 bap o-fino ro-krifi, „he met with a good lot in Hades." 
 
 Bapar, v. rel. (rail, bap), „be present;" e, g. o bapar he tenon, 
 „he was not present to day." 
 
 Bar, a-, pi. e-, n. „species of hawk white and black living of 
 fish." 
 
 Bar, V. a. „add, put more, increase" (as wages); e. g. I tsi bar 
 ah-ram-'a-mu, „1 shall increase thy wages," 
 
 Bar, V. n. and aux. „go on, continue." As an aux. it ex- 
 presses continuance of the exercise of the energy indicated 
 by the principal verb, or a progress of the same, as: o bar 
 ko sap, „he went on to flog him," = „he flogged him more."
 
 — 152 — 
 
 It also expresses the adv. „more;" or also „more and more"; 
 in the latter case it is general!}' followed by gbo, „but". 
 When it is repealed and followed by gbo, it serves to ex- 
 press the words: „the more — , the more — ." It is gener- 
 ally construed wilh the short form of the Infinitive, some- 
 times also with the verb. noun. See Proverb 7, p. 100. 
 
 Bar, » a-, pi. e-, n. „bar, iron bar; country bar worth about 
 
 B^ra, ) 2s." Derived from the Span. bara. 
 
 Bari, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „twin"; e.g. o kom tra-bari, „she brought 
 forth twins." 
 
 Basar, v.rel. a. „conlinue, continue with-, go on with-, persevere 
 in-, with-;" prob. rel. form of an obs. bas; e. g. basar aka- 
 kciran, „go on with the reading." 
 
 Bcisar, v. rel. n. „continue, persevere;" e. g. o basar he, „he does 
 not continue." 
 
 Basara, v. rel. (properly doubly rel.), „continue for-, go on with- 
 for-, persevere for-; persevere with-" or „in- for-," i. e. „go 
 on with" (a thing) „for" (another, or) „in behalf of" (another); 
 e. g. basara-mi ama-pant ame, „go on with this work for 
 me." 
 
 Bat, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „ water-brook , brook," e. g. ro-bat, „al 
 the brook." 
 
 Bat, adj. „ear]y"; e. g. ka ar'etr ra-bat o der, „at an early sun 
 he came," i. e. soon, when the sun was not up long get. 
 
 Bat, adv. „in the morning, early;" also spec, in the sense of 
 „ fully" when used with the verb sok, „dawn"; e. g. o der 
 bat, „Iie came early." 
 
 Bat, ka-, or ra-, pi. tra-, n. „morning". The pi. is seldom 
 used. E. g. ra-bat ra-fino, „a fine morning." 
 
 Batr, V. a. „seize, take hold of, apprehend;" e. g. batr-ko, 
 „S('ize him." 
 
 Batr, a-, pi. e-, n. „a small young palm-tree." 
 
 Be, adv. „when"; e. g. be I fi-e, „when I die." 
 
 Be, conj. „if"; e. g. be o der he etc., „if he does not come etc." 
 
 Be, n. „bey, king" or „chief". 
 
 Be, adv. in form, but often used in the sense of an adj. „all,
 
 — 153 — 
 
 whole, every; all kind, all sort, all sorts;" as applied to 
 
 place „all over, every where;" e. g. an-fam be, „ari the 
 
 people;" — ey'elr be, „all sorts of things." 
 Be', abbr. of bek,') v. impers. „be sufficient, be enough, suffice;" 
 
 e. g. pa be' he, „il is not enough." 
 Be', abbr. of bek,') v. n. „arrive, reach, be sufficient, be enough, 
 
 suffice;" e. g. o ta be' he, „he has not yet arrived." 
 Befat, v. a. „ comfort, soothe, make quiet" (as a child); e. g. 
 
 befat-ko, „he comforted him." 
 Bei, ra-, pi. tra-, n. „debl" (receivable and payable) ; e. g. o ba 
 
 he ra-beT, „he has no debt" (to pay). 
 Beibal, a-, pi. e-, n. „Bible'. From the English. 
 Bek, v. a. „arrive at, come lo, reach;" e. g. ar'afa ra bek aka- 
 
 petr, „lhe army reached the town." 
 Bek, v. n. „reach, arrive, come, come near;" e. g. o pon bek, 
 
 „he has arrived." 
 B6ka, V. a. „amounl to, make, be worth;" also „call, hold as;" 
 
 e. g. an-gbata aha beka e-sas, „the 3"^ mat," lit. „lhe mat 
 
 which makes three." See next word. 
 Beka w'lmi ra-yem, „call one a liar, give the lie to one;" e. g. 
 
 beka-mi ra-yem, ,,he called me a liar." 
 Beki, v. a. (rad. bek), „be fit for-, be proper for-, be suitable 
 
 for-, suit;" e. g. am'glo ame ma beki ama-panl, „lhis amount 
 
 suits the work." 
 Beki, V. n. (rad. bek), „be fit, be sufficient, be enough, suffice; 
 
 e. g. am'olo ame ma beki, „this price is sufficient. Long 
 
 form of bek. 
 Beki, adj. „fit, proper, suitable" (hs a person, or as lime); suf- 
 ficient, enough; worthy; due;" e. g. w'lini beki, „a worthy 
 
 person;" — a-ram a-beki, „a suitable reward;" — ey'elr 
 
 e-beki, „sufficient materials." 
 Bela,-a-, pi. e, n. „sail" (as of a canoe or ship); e. g. am-bela 
 
 1) These abbr. forms arc used before the negative adv. he 
 „not."
 
 — 154 — 
 
 a-bana, „lhe main sail," lit. „the large sail;" — w'an, yisa 
 
 ri am-bela, „boy, hoist the sail there." 
 Belan, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „side, part, region" (as of a house, or 
 
 country); also „place, stead;" e.g. ka ka-belan-k'on, „in his 
 
 stead." 
 Bern, ra-, pi. tra-, n. „ hedge-hog, grass-cutter," so called because 
 
 this animal cuts grass. It is a kind of urchin, resembling 
 
 the porcupine; but has only strong hairs instead of quills. 
 
 It lives of rice and groundnuts. 
 Bempa, v. a. „make, repair, put in order; perform the usual" 
 
 or „necessary ceremonies for (a thing);" e. g. o bempa 
 
 aka-fantr, „he made the bed." 
 Bempa, ka-, n. verb, „act of making, etc.;" e. g. ka-bempa 'ra- 
 
 ru, „the making of the world." 
 Bempana, v. rel. (rad. bempa), „make-for-; make-with-, make- 
 
 of-" (as a table of wood); e. g. o bempana-mi a-mesa, „he 
 
 made a table for me." 
 Bempane, v. rel. and refl. „make for" or „to oneself;" e. g. o 
 
 bempane a-mesa, „he made a table for himself." 
 Ben, a-, pi. e-, n. „board"; e. g. a-ben a-boh, „a long board." 
 Bena, ra-, pi. na-, n. „rope" (especially the wooden country 
 
 one), „any rope, string;" e. g. ra-bena ra-boli, „a long rope." 
 Bena ra ka-but, ra-, pi. na-bena na tra-bul, „heart-slring." 
 Bene, v. a. „keep, preserve;" e. g. o bene o-sem, „he preserves 
 
 the meat;" also ,bury"; e. g. 'a bene-ko, „they buried him." 
 Bene w'uni o-tot, i „keep one well;" e. g. o bene-ko o-tot, „he 
 Bene w'uni lot, ' keeps him well." 
 Bene w'uni ra-tr'el, „keep one from harm;" e. g. o bene-mi ra- 
 
 tr'ei, „he keeps me from harm." 
 Bene w'uni ra-tr'el 6 tr'el, „keep one from every harm;" e. g. 
 
 K'uru bene-mi ra-trel 6 treT, „God keeps me from every harm." 
 Benena, v. rel. (rad. bene), „prepare-for-, make-ready for-" (as 
 
 food for one); e. g. o benena-mi r'a ra-di, „he prepared some 
 
 food for me." 
 Benene, v. refl. a. „prepare, make ready," lit. „prepare-for one- 
 self" (as things for a journey); e. g. I benene ey'etr-'e-mi.
 
 — 155 — 
 
 „I made m}' things ready." Also „prepare oneself for-, make 
 oneself ready for-" (as for a journey); e. g. o benene ra- 
 tsik, „he makes himself ready for a journey." 
 
 Benene, v. refl. n. „ prepare oneself, make oneself ready;" e. g. 
 I pon benene, „I have made myself ready." 
 
 Benene, ka-, n. verb. „act of making oneself ready, act of pre- 
 paring oneself, preparation;" e. g. ka-benene-k'on, „his pre- 
 paration." 
 
 Bentr, v. a. „prevent, hinder;" e. g. o bentr-mi tra kg ro-kamp, 
 „he prevented me from going to Freetown;" also „wilhhold- 
 from-" (as money from one); e.g. o bentr-mi aii-k'ala-'a-mi, 
 „he withholds my money from me." 
 
 Bep, ka-, pi. Ira-, n. „spoon"; e. g. ka-bep ka-bana, „a large 
 spoon." 
 
 Ber, ma-, n. „infoxicating liquor of any kind;' also „palmwine"; 
 e. g. ma-ber ma-fino, „good palmvvine." 
 
 Bera, adj. „female"; e. g. w'an bera, „a girl," lit. „female child." 
 
 Bera, o-, pi. a-, n. „ woman, female;" e. g. o-bera o-fino, „a fine 
 womau." 
 
 Bera o-bi, o-. pi. a-bera a-bi, n. „ black female." 
 
 Bera o-fera, o-, pi. a-bera a-fera, n. „ white female." 
 
 Bes, V. a. „dig"; e. g. bes a-bi, „dig a pit." 
 
 Bes, V. n. „dig, make a hole," or „grave"; e. g. Ise ri bes, 
 „do not dig there." 
 
 Bes, ka-, n. verb. „act of digging, etc.;" c. g. ka-bes-k'on, „his 
 digging." 
 
 Besa, V. rel. (rad. bes), „dig for-, dig-for-; dig with-, dig-with-;" 
 e. g. besa-mi a-bi, „dig a hole for me," 
 
 Besa, adj. „belonging to digging," as; y'etr e-besa, „digging 
 tools."' 
 
 Bi, adj. „black, dark;" e. g. kota ka-bi, „black cloth." 
 
 Bi, a-, pi. e-, or tra-, n. „pil, hole;" e. g. a-bi a-bolon, „a 
 deep pit." 
 
 Bia, V. inch. (rad. bi), ,.get dark, gel black;" e. g. ka-rinir ka 
 bia, „the sky gels dark." 
 
 Bia, V. impers. inch. „get dark"; e. g. pa bia, „it gets dark."
 
 — 156 ~ 
 
 Bil, a-, pi. e-, or Ira-, n. ,.canoe"; a-bil a-poto, „a ship," lit. 
 
 „a white man's canoe." 
 Bilin, a-, pi, e-, n. „mud-sofa, joined to a wall at the inside of 
 
 a house, any sofa;" e.g. a-bilin a-bana, „a large mud-sofa." 
 Bitin, a-, pi. e-, n. „drum"; e. g. o fer am-bitin, „he beats 
 
 the drum." 
 Bitra, a-, pi. e-, n. „bottle"; e. g. a-bitra a-tsin, „an empty 
 
 bottle." 
 Bo, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „cake, country bread" (as made of rice flour 
 
 and honey; e. g. ka-bo ka-fino, „fine country-bread." 
 Bo, a-, pi. C-, or tra-, or also o- in the sing, and Ira- in the 
 
 pi., n. „a species of antelope of the size of a goat, black, 
 
 and having long retroverted horns," also called: „bushgoat." 
 
 Between its horns it has long red hairs. 
 Bof, ka-, n. „dust" (as in the street); e. g. ka-bof ka-lai, „much 
 
 dust." 
 BoT, a-, pi. e-, n. „servant" ; e. g. a-bol a-bera, „a maid-servant." 
 Bols, adj. „faitened"; e. g. o-na o-fet o-boTs, „a fattened calf." 
 Bok, V. n. „weep, cry, lament;" e. g. ow'ahet o tra bok, „the 
 
 child is cr;ying." 
 Bok, V, a. „weep for-, bemoan, bewail, lament;" e. g. tra ha 
 
 ko bok-ko, „let them go and bewail him." 
 Bok, a-, pi. e-, n. „snake, serpent;" e. g. a-bok a-las, „a bad 
 
 snake." 
 Boka, a-, pi. e-, n. „bill-hook"; e. g. a-boka a-bana, „a large 
 
 bill-hook." 
 Bol, a-, pi. e-, n. „country made pot, earthen pot" (for cooking); 
 
 e. g. a-bol a-fino, „a fine earthen pot." 
 Bol, V. a. „prolong" (as hfe). See the next word. 
 Bol ah-nesam, „prolong life, have long life;" e. g. kaiiko ma 
 
 bol afi-nesam! „mayesl thou have long life!" 
 Bolam, 0-, pi. a-, n. „one of the Bolom nation, Bolom." 
 Boli, adj. „long"; e.g. ra-beha ra-boli, „a long rope." 
 Boli, 0-, adj. but used adverbially, „long, a long time; a long 
 
 way, a far way off, far away;" e. g. o kone o-bgli, ,,he went 
 
 far away."
 
 — 157 — 
 
 Bolo, a-, pi. e-, n. „throal"; e. g. g ^^op-ko ro-bolo, „he held 
 
 him by the throat." 
 Bom, adj. „female"; e. g. aii-fam a-bom, „the women, the 
 
 females." 
 Bom, 0-, pi. a-, n. ,. woman, female;" also „ mother, madam. ^' 
 For the pi. form a-bom Ihey also use: bom-na, placing the 
 prefix behind the noun, which is sometimes done with a few 
 nouns. 
 Bom, a-, pi. e-, n. „shealh, scabbard;" e. g. am-bom iia au- 
 
 gbalo, „the sheath of the cutlass." 
 Bom, V. n. „ease nature, ease oneself; dung;" e, g. o ko bom, 
 
 „he went to ease nature." 
 Boma, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „grave"; e. g. 'a bes ka-boma, „they dig 
 
 a grave." 
 Bomp, ra-, pi. tra-, n. „head"; also „chapter"; e. g. ra-bomp- 
 
 r'gn, „his head." 
 Bon, ra-, pi. tra-, n. „river"; e. g. ra-bon' da-bana, „a great 
 
 river;" for ra-bon ra-bana. 
 Bona, a-, pi. e-, or tra-, n. „nation;" e. g. a-bona a-bana, „a 
 
 great nation." 
 Bondo, am-, n. „the Bondo institution;" also „the ceremonies 
 
 connected with it." See Pref. § 17. 
 Bona, a-, pi. ma-, n. „kindness, favour" (shown and received); 
 „benevolence, grace, mercy;" e. g. o solo ma-bona, „he 
 received kindness." 
 Bone, V. impers. a. ,.gladden, rejoice, cheer;" as: pa bone-ko, 
 
 „he is glad," lit. „it gladdens him." 
 Bone, V. n. „move"; e. g. ara-ril be ra bone, „the whole world 
 
 moves." 
 Bone; ma-, n. „joy, gladness, happiness;" e. g. ma-bone-m'on, 
 
 „his gladness." 
 Bone-tr'eT, ka-, n. comp. „haughtiness, presumption;" e. g. ka- 
 
 bone-tr'el-k'on, „his haughtiness." 
 Bont, k;i-, pi. tra-, n. „navel, navel-string." 
 Bontr, V. a. „call, name, mention;" e. g. bonir am'olo-ma-t.si, 
 „mention the price of it."
 
 — 158 — 
 
 Bontr arVes na-, v. comp. „guess", lit. „call the name of-;" 
 
 e. g. be ma bontr an'es na ar'aka ara yi etc. „if thou doest 
 
 guess the thing, which is etc." 
 Bontr w'uni an'es, „call one by name, call one's name;" e, g. 
 
 bontr-ko an'es, „he called him by his name." 
 Bontr, a-, or i-. pi. ma-, n, „smell, scent, odour" (good or bad); 
 
 e. g. i-bontr i-fino, „a good scent." 
 Bonlra, v. rel. (rad. bontr), „call-for-, mention-," or „name-to-, 
 
 name-for-" (as Ihe name of an object to one); e. g. bontra- 
 
 mi an'es-n'on, „ mention me his name." 
 Bontras, v. freq. a. (rad. bontr), „call over" (as names), „name; 
 
 praise;" e. g. na bontras am'es-ma-nan, „they called over 
 
 their names." 
 Bopar, a-, pi. e-, n. „leaf"; e. g. e-bopar eye, „these leaves." 
 Bor, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „ domestics, people who live under one's 
 
 control; company;" also „crew" (as of a boat); e. g. ka-bor 
 
 ka am-bil, „the crew of the canoe." The pi. is used of the 
 
 domestics of a plurality of masters. 
 Borko, 0-, pi. a-, n. „damsel; a young woman" (married or not); 
 
 e. g. o-borko o-fino, „a fair damsel." 
 Bosne, v. n. „long, have a great desire." Prob. a refl. form of 
 
 an obs. bos; e. g. o bosne traka ow'an-k'on, „he longs for 
 
 his son." 
 Bosne, a-, pi. e, n. „Ionging, anxious desire;" e. g. am-bosne- 
 
 n'on, „his longing," 
 Bot, V, n. „get sweet, be sweet, be delicious, be savoury." Short 
 
 form of boti. E. g. an-s^ka ahe ha hot he, „this palaver 
 
 sauce is not savoury." See the Note after wos, v. n. 
 Bgt, ka-, n. „sweetness, deliciousness;" e. g, ka-bgl ka e-nak, 
 
 „lhe deliciousness of the rice." 
 Bot, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „ball, lump" (as of soap); „pill" (as of 
 
 medicine); e, g. tra-bot tra-sas, „three pills." 
 Botar, V. rel. (rad. hot), „love, like," lit. „be sweet toward-;" 
 
 e.g. botar-ko, „he loves him." 
 Botar, ma-, n. „love"; e. g ma-bgtar ma K'iiru, „the love of 
 
 God."
 
 — 159 — 
 
 Boli, V. n. (rad. bot), „be sweet, be savoury, be delicious" (as 
 food); e. g. an-saka ane iia boti, „this palaver sauce is de- 
 licious." 
 
 Boti-di, adj. comp. „delicious to eat;" e. g. v'etr e-boti-di, „de- 
 licious food." 
 
 Boti-som, adj. comp. „delicious to devour;" e. g. r'a ra-bdti-som, 
 „something delicious to devour." 
 
 Boti-tral, o-, adj. but used adverbially, „sweetly", lit. „s\veet 
 to hear" (applied to singing or music); e. g. an-fet ane iia 
 leii 0- boti-tral, „ these children sing sweetly." See rami 
 below. 
 
 Bolr, V. a. „put, put down, place, set; fix" (as time); e. g. bolr- 
 ni rayer, „pul it aside." 
 
 Botra, V. rel. (rad. botr), „put-for-, place-for-;" e. g. botra-mi-ri 
 ro-k'Qma, „pul it in the box for me." 
 
 Botra w'uni a-tonlo, „put an allurement" or „enticement for 
 one, put a snare for one;" e. g. "a botra-ko a-tonto, „lhey 
 put a snare for him." 
 
 Botra w'uni yanfa, „act deceitfully against one," lit. „put deceit- 
 fulness" or „a trick for one;" e. g. o botra-mi yanfa", „he 
 acted deceitfully against me." 
 
 Botrar, v. rel. (rad. botr), „put-lo-, put-at-, set-to-" (as the mind 
 to a person or thing); e. g. botrar-iii am-mera, „set the mind 
 to it," = „take care of it." 
 
 Botrar am-mera ka—,» „set the mind to-, take care of-, mind, 
 
 Botrar' am-mera ro-, ' set the heart to-;" e. g. o botrar am- 
 mera ronon, „he lakes care of him." 
 
 Bolrar w'uni am-mera, „pul the mind to one, take care of one;" 
 e. g. bolrar-mi am-mera; „he lakes care of me." 
 
 Boya, v. a. „make a present to-\\ith- or of-, present - with -, 
 make a present with- or of-," as: I boya-mu-tsi, „I make 
 thee a present of it;" — o boya-mi owir, „he made me 
 a present with the goal;" — o boya-ko ka Pa Sip, „he 
 made the Leopard a present of him." 
 
 Boya, a-, pi. e-, n. .,presenl, gift;" e. g. a-boya a-fino, „a fine 
 present."
 
 — 160 — 
 
 Biiko, V. n, „bathe, wash oneself;" e. g. I ko biiko, „I go to 
 balhe." 
 
 Biima, a-, pi. e-, n. „young tender shoots," or „leaves" (as 
 from roots left in the ground), „verdure, herb, green;" e.g. 
 e-biima e-lal e yi ri, „there is much green there." 
 
 Bumar. v. rel. (rad. bum), „watch over, mind, guard, take care 
 of;" e. g. biimjir ak'dr, „he watches over the farm." 
 
 Bun, V. n. and aux. „miss, make a mistake." As an aux. it 
 serves to express the adv. „almost, nearlv," as: o bun ko 
 dif, „he almost killed him." 
 
 Bun, ka-, n. verb. „act of missing, mistake;" ka-bun fi, „almost 
 dying." 
 
 Buudas, V. cans. (rad. biinda), „make large, enlarge, make great;" 
 fig. „magnify, glorify;" e. g o bundas an-set-iVofi, „he en- 
 larged his house." 
 
 Bunt, a-, pi. e-, n. „cloud"; e. g. a-bunt a-bi, „a dark cloud." 
 
 Burap, adj. „short" ; e. g k'antr ka-burap, „a short stick." 
 
 But, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „hean" (as the organ; also used figura- 
 tively as the seat of courage, etc.); e. g. ka-but-k'on, „his 
 heart." 
 
 Butu, a-, pi. e-, n. „bag" ; also „pillow"; e. g. a-butu a-yofat, 
 
 „a soft pillow." 
 
 D. 
 
 D', prcf. insep. and indef. „a, an;" c. g. d'im, „a word," for 
 
 da-im. 
 Da, prep. poss. „of"; it is a euph. form of: ra; e. g. ar'on'-da- 
 
 su, „our road;" -ar'on' da K'uru, „the way of God." See 
 
 the Note at the end of this letter. 
 Da, pref. indef., euph. form of ra, „a an;" e. g. r'on' da-fino, 
 
 „a good road." 
 Da-tsi, pr. dem. log. „that", being a euph. form of: ra-tsi; e.g. 
 
 ar'on' da-tsi, „that road." 
 Data, postp. „below, beneath," being a euph. form of. rata; e. g. 
 
 ro-tan" diita, „under the root," for ro-tank rata. This form 
 
 is used after nouns terminating in n, or iik, when the g or 
 
 gk is cut off.
 
 — 161 — 
 
 Dalron, postp., euph. form of ratron, „in the middle, amongst." 
 It is used after nouns terminating in ii, Avhen the g is cut 
 off. E. g. trama ka ar'on' datron, „Iie stood in the middle 
 of the road;" — ka tra-t.sen' datron, „amongst the hills." 
 
 Dayer, postp., euph. form of rayer, „near, close to, at" or „by 
 the side;" e. g. o tas ka 'ra-bon' daver, ^ o tas ro-bon' 
 dayer, „he passed close to the river;" — o tas ro-r'on' dayer, 
 „he passed by the side of the road." It is used after nouns 
 terminating in n, when the g is cut off. See the Note at 
 the end of this letter. 
 
 De, or re, = der, v. n. and aux. „come"; e. g. o de he nan, 
 „he did not come." As an aux. it is construed with the 
 long and with the short form of the Infinitive. De is a euph. 
 form of: re, which see; e. g. o de tra gbal, „he comes in 
 order to write." See more under the form re; what has 
 been stated there, applies also here. 
 
 De, adv. „no". It is pronounced with a strong impetus. E. g. 
 de, I nahk fe ko, „no, I did not see him." 
 
 De, conj. „and"; e.g. pa-la de e-y6ka, „rice and cassadas." 
 
 Der, V. n. and aux. = de, or: re, „come"; e. g. o der romi, 
 „he came to me." It is construed in the same way as: 
 de, which see. 
 
 Der, ka-, n. verb. ,.act of coming, coming;" e, g. ka-der-k'on, 
 „his coming." 
 
 D'er, pi. s'er, n. „face"; ro-d'er, „at the face." 
 
 Der, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „body, skin." The sing, is seldom 
 used, the pi. being used for it; e. g. ma-der-m'on, „his body." 
 
 D'er, n. „place"; def. form: od'cr, „the place;" e. g. d'er o- 
 ffno, „a good place." 
 
 D'er 6 d'er, „everywhere, anywhere;" e. g. K'uru o yi d'er 
 6 d'er, „God is everywhere." 
 
 Di, v. a. „eat", also „take" (as medicine); „wear away, wear 
 off" (as a cutlass a grinding-stone); e. g. o di e-trol, „he 
 took medicine." 
 
 Di, v. n. „eal"; e.g. di ri, „eat of il," lit. „eal there;" di ka-, 
 „eat out of-." 
 
 Teimie - Wcirterliuch. 11
 
 — 162 — 
 
 Di, adj. „eating"; e. g. r'a ra-di, „something to eat," 
 
 Di, ka-, 11. verb. „acl of eating, an eating, meal;" e. g. ka-di 
 
 ka-bal, „a breakfast." 
 Di, pr. obj. = ri, of which it is a euph. form, „it"; e. g. tse 
 
 gbon'-di, „do not touch it." See the Note at the end of 
 
 this letter. 
 Di, adv. loc. „there". It is a euph. form of ri, used before n 
 
 and before n, when the g is dropped. E. g o won di, „he 
 
 was long there." 
 Dia, pr, emph. „it, this," being a euph. form of: ria; e. g. ar'on' 
 
 da ro-Ma-lal dia-re, „this is the road to Malal." 
 Di-a, adv. loc. emph. „there"; e. g. ro ah-gbalan na gbope, di-a 
 
 botr ara-bomp-r'on, „ where the rock was rugged, there 
 
 he put his head;" — di-a o soto-iii, „there he got it.-' 
 Di-an, adv. loc. abs, „there, at that place," it is a euph. form 
 
 of: ri-an; e. g. di-ah I soto-hi, „ there 1 got it." (Cf, -h 
 
 under N.) 
 Dif, v. n. „kill, commit murder;" also „kill beef; be fatal" (as 
 
 an illness); e. g. o poii dif-i? „has he killed beef?" 
 Dif, V. a. „kill, execute, murder;" also „prove fatal to" (as a 
 
 sickness); e. g, 'a dif-ko, „they killed him." 
 Difa, V. rel. „kiIl-to-, kill-for-; kill-with-;" e. g. o difa-mi an- 
 
 troko, „he killed the fowl to me," = „he killed me the 
 
 fowl." 
 Dim, V. a, „destroy, ruin;" e. g. 'a dim aka-petr, „they destro;yed 
 
 the town." 
 D'im, pi. s'im, n. „word, voice;" e, g. ad'im-r'oh, „his word;" 
 
 D'im is a euph. form of: r'im, 
 Dimse, v. n, „go out" (as fire); e. g. an'antr na di'mse, „thf 
 
 fire went out." 
 D'in, adj. num. „one", being a euph. form of r'in; e. g. r'on' 
 
 d'in, „one way." 
 Dinne, v. refl. (rad. dim) „ perish, get lost," lit. ,,destroy one- 
 self;" e. g ka-lome dinne, „the sheep got lost." 
 Dinne, ka-, n. verb. „act of perishing, perishing; destruction, 
 
 ruin, perdition;" e. g, ka-dinne-k'on, „his perdition."
 
 — ]m — 
 
 Dio, adj. „right" (in opposition to left); e.g. ka-tra ka-dlg, „lhe 
 
 right hand." 
 Dio, ka-, n. „the right" (hand); also „the South." 
 Dir, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „moifar" (as to beat rice in); e. g. ka-dir 
 
 ka-bana, „a large mortar." 
 Dira, v. n. „sleep, go asleep;" e. g. iia ko dira, „ihey went to 
 
 sleep," 
 Dis, adv. „yesterday"; e. g. o der dis, „he came yesterday." 
 Dis, V. cans. (rad. di), „give-Io eat, feed;" e. g. e-bamp na dis 
 
 an-fet-'a-naii, „the birds feed their young ones." 
 Dis ra-foi, „yesterday evening, last evening;" e. g. o bek dis 
 
 ra-foT, „he arrived last evening." 
 Dis tratrak, „yesterday night," e. g. na der dis tratrak, „they 
 
 came yesterday night." 
 Do-, prep. „into, in, at, to, from;" e. g. o Avon' do-set, „he 
 
 went into the house." it is a euph. form of ro-, which see. 
 Dokom, postp., euph. form of rokom, „on the top, upon;" e. g, 
 
 yi ro-tsen' dokom, „he is on the top of the hill;" — 
 
 yira ka an-ron' dokom, „he lives on the top of the moun- 
 tain." See the Note at the end of this letter. 
 D'on, pr. poss. „his, her." It is a euph. form of r'on; e. g. 
 
 ra-ban'-d'on, „his anger." 
 D'or, n. „hunger"; def. form ad'or, „lhe hunger." It is a noun in 
 
 ra-; e.g. d'or ra ba-mi, „I am hungry;" lit. „hunger has me." 
 D'uba, n. „ink", = r'uba; e. g. d'liba ra-lal, „much ink;" def. 
 
 form: ad'uba, „the ink " 
 Duni, adj. „male", it is a euph. form of: r'lmi; e. g. w'an duni, 
 
 „a boy," lit. „a male child." 
 
 Note. The euph. forms with d under the preceding letter are 
 used after words terminating in n, when the g is dropped, 
 as: r'on' da-fino, „a good road," for: r'oh ra-fino; — ar'ou' 
 da-tsi, „that road," for: ar'on ra-tsi. 
 
 E. 
 
 E-, pref. def. and iudef. „the"; e. g. e-tis, ,,knives", or „the 
 knives." 
 
 11*
 
 — 164 — 
 
 E, pr. subj. „it; thev;" e. g. ey'elr-'e-mi e di'nne, my things 
 are lost." 
 
 E-, pref. emph. vow. to make nouns with the inseparable pref. 
 y' definite, as: ey'elr, „the things," from: y'etr, „things". 
 Cf. Pref. § •22. b. 
 
 -E? suff. indirect inter, used at the end of a proposition, if 
 already an inter, adverb precedes; e. g. re man kg-e? „where 
 art thou going to?" 
 
 -E, part. expl. often used at the end of conditional propositions, 
 It is of a mere expl. nature, used with sentences depending 
 on the conj. be, „if", and on the adv. ma, me, mo, „when", 
 and on: be, „when"; e. g. be o-bera o nesa he o-wos- 
 k'ga-e etc., „if the woman does not respect her husband etc." 
 But it is also used with nouns not only in the Voc. case, 
 but also otherwise. Sometimes it is added to the suffix-an 
 in addition. (Cf. the suff. -au in loco.) It is also some- 
 times affixed to adverbs, or at the end of exclamatory pro 
 positions depending on: Iro! „how!" orko! „what!" or after 
 the calling of names, when it serves to indicate the Vocative. 
 They also often use it with obligative and participial propo- 
 sitions. 
 
 -E, this form is sometimes used for the preceding one in the 
 capacity of an expletive particle. 
 
 'E, prep. poss. „of"; e. g. ey'etr-'e-mi, „my things," lit. „the 
 things of me." 
 
 'E-mi, pr. poss. „my", lit. „of me." See the preceding word. 
 
 'E-nan, pr. poss. „their", lit. „of them;" e.g. ey'etr-'e-naii, „their 
 things." 
 
 Eyan, pr. dem. rem. „those"; e. g. ey'elr eyan, „thosc things." 
 
 Eye, pr. rel. „which"; e. g. ey'etr eye I sotg, „the things which 
 I got." 
 
 Eye, pr. dem. prox. „these"; e.g. ey'elr eye, „these things." 
 
 F, 
 
 Fai, V. n. „be hot, have a burn, be burned;" e. g. 1 fai ro-tra, 
 „I have a burn on the hand."
 
 — 165 — 
 
 Fai, adj. „hot" (as water); „biirnt" (as a farm); e. g. m'anir 
 
 ma-fai, ,,hot water." 
 Fal, V. a. „ciit one's throat, kill, slaughter, butcher;" e. g. 'a fal- 
 
 ko, „they cut his throat." 
 Fak, a-, pi. e-, n. „skate" (fish). 
 Fak, V. a. „throw down; fell" (as a tree); also „set up" (as a 
 
 krifi for worship); e. g. o fak an-tis-'a-mi, ,.he threw down 
 
 mv knife." 
 Faka, v. rel. „throw-to-, throw -unio-, Ihrow-for-, let drop-" 
 
 or „falI-for-" (as a child, or a thing to one); e. g. faka-mi 
 
 ka-bo, „throw the bread to me." 
 Falan, v. n. „escape from the grave by a sort of transmigration," 
 
 (see Pref. § 10. b.). Also „apostatize" (from a religion), 
 
 „err from the right way" (in the Mohammedan sense of the 
 
 word); fig. „be utterly disappointed in obtaining one's object;" 
 e. g. f^lan ka 'ra-mori, „he apostatized from Islamism." 
 Fale, V. n. (rad. fal), „turn, turn away; be turned away;" e. g. 
 
 fale ronon, „he turned away from him." 
 Fali, V. a. „turn, move away, turn aside, remove, shove aside;" 
 
 e. g. fiili ak'an'r, „lurn the stick aside." 
 Falir, v. n. „fly"; e. g. am-bamp o falir o-boli rokom, „lhe bird 
 
 soars high up." 
 Falira, v. cans. „make to fly about, waft about, drive about" (as 
 
 the wind chaff); e. g. an-fef na falira e-fuk, „the wind wafts 
 
 the chaff about." 
 Fam, a-, n. the [)1. of w'l'mi, ,.person", which see. The sing. 
 
 form o-fam, is not much used; e. g. an-fam ano, „these 
 
 persons," = „this people." 
 Fam a-riini, a-, n. pi. „males, men;" lit. „male persons." 
 Fam a-bom, a-, n. pi. „females, women," lit. „female persons." 
 Fdnta, V. n. „lie down;" e. g. o ko fania, „he went to lie down." 
 Fant'r (for fantar), ka-, pi. tra-, n. „bed"; e. g. ka-fanl'r-k'oii, 
 
 „his bed." 
 Far- far, prob. adj. onom. „making far -far." See Proverb. 0, 
 
 pag. 99 about this word.
 
 — 166 — 
 
 Farki, v. a. „despise, slight, set at nought; degrade;" e. g. o 
 
 farki-ko, „he shghted him." 
 Fas, adv. spec. „on a sudden, suddonI;y, all at once, at once" 
 
 (as if a thing, on which one pulls, gives way at once, or is 
 
 torn off). It indicates quickness or suddennes of separation, 
 
 and is used with wiira, „take" or „pull out," and with gbgti, 
 
 „tear off;" e. g. o \MJra-ki ka ka-tra-k'on fas, „he pulled it 
 
 (cloth) out of his hand on a sudden." 
 Fatr, a-, pi. e-, n, „iron"; also „an iron cooking pot." 
 Fatr, V. n. „be near, be close; come near, go near;" e. g. tse 
 
 ri fatr. „do not go near there." 
 Fatr, V. a. .,go near to, come near to, approach, be close" or 
 
 „near to;" e. g. o fatr-mi, „he is close to me." 
 Fatrane, v. recipr. „come near together, come close to each 
 
 other, approach each other;" e. g. ma fatrane nan, „let us 
 
 come near together." 
 Fatrane, o-, pi. a-, n. „neighbour, one living close to another," 
 
 e. g. o-fatrane-ka-mi, „m}' neighbour." 
 Fatrar, v. rel. n. „draw near;" e. g. ra-fi ra fafrar, „death draws 
 
 near." The suff. is rather redundant here, 
 Fatrar, v. rel. a. „draw near to, approach, be near to;" e. g. 
 
 fatriir-mi, „draw near to me." 
 Fe, — - he, adv. „not"; e. g. w'dni 6 w'uni o nam fe tsi, r»o 
 
 one saw it." This form is generally used after or before the 
 
 letter m. Fe is to be considered as a euph. form of: he, 
 
 which see below. 
 Fef, a-, pi. e-, n. „wind, breeze;" e. g. an-fef ha fen o-baki 
 
 tPnoh, „the wind blows strongly to day." 
 Fela, a-, pi. e-, n. „desire, longing, lust;" also „sexual desire" 
 
 or „desire for sexual commerce;" e. g. a-fela na e-lop na 
 
 wop-mi, „1 have a desire for fish," lit. „a desire of fish 
 
 holds me." 
 Fen, V- a. „blow, play" (as a wind-instrument); blow-on-, blow- 
 
 inlo-;" e. g. o fen aka-sQ, „he blew the trumpet;" — 'a 
 
 feh-ko e-kul, „they blew into his nostrils." 
 Fefi, V. n. „blow" (as the wind, or into some thing); e.g. o fen
 
 — 167 — 
 
 ka e-kiil-v'on, „he blew into his nostrils. Cf. also the ex. 
 under a-fef above. 
 
 Fer, V. n. „pla} on a stringed instrument, make music;" e. g. 
 o-lanba o tra fer, „(he young man is playing on a stringed 
 instrument." 
 
 Fer, V. a. „p!ay, strike" (as a stringed instrument); „beat" (as 
 the drum); e. g. g-yeli owe o fer am-pankiil o-fino, „this 
 minstrel plays the cithern well;" — o-lanba o fer am-bitin, 
 „lhe young man beats the drum." 
 
 Fera, adj. „white, clean;" as applied to rice „deprived of the 
 husks;" e. g. pa-la pa-fera, ,.clean rice." 
 
 Fet, V. n. „be young; be tender" (as roots); „be fresh" (as palm- 
 wine); „be new" (as the moon); e. g. o fet ras, „he is still 
 young." 
 
 Fet, adj. ,.young; lender" (as plants); e.g. e-yoka e-fet, „tender" 
 or „young cassadas." 
 
 Fet, a-, pi. of w'ah(H, which see. The sing, o-fet, is some- 
 times used. 
 
 Fetar, v. rel. (rad. fet), „make white, make clean" (as rice, or 
 clothes); „clear up, make plain" (as a palaver); „cleanse, 
 whitewash" (as a wall); „make to blush." (The natives being 
 of a dark colour get a whitisli appearance when made to blush. 
 Thus if one is convinced of his guilt, after having denied it, 
 by clear facts, and if those present scold him for it, he will 
 blush). With am-mera, „clear one of a charge, justify." 
 (Cf. next word). E. g. o fetar am-pa, „he cleared up the 
 matter;" — 'a fetar-kg tenon, „lhey made him blush to day." 
 
 Fetar am-mera na w'uni, ^ „clear one of a charge, declare one's 
 
 Fetar w'uni am-mera, J innocence, acquit one. justify one," 
 lit. „make clean one's heart;" e. g. 'a f6tar-ko am-mera 
 tenon, „they cleared him of the charge to day." 
 
 Fi, V. n. „die, be dead;" as applied to the phases of the moon, 
 „be done" or „over, die away, be in the last quarter"; 
 hence also „be new"; e. g. o fi ar'on" da-fino, „he died 
 happily," lit. „he died the good road;" — be aiVof na fi. 
 „when the moon is over."
 
 — 168 — 
 
 Fi o-tot, „clie happily, „lil. „die "well." 
 
 Fi. adj. „dead", as applied to the moon „dying away, being in 
 the last quarter, new;" e. g ^v'uni fi, „a dead person." 
 
 Fi, ka-, n. verb. „act of dving"; also „mortality"; e. g. ka-fi ka 
 w'uni, „the mortalitv of man." 
 
 Fi, ra-, pi. tra-, n. „death"; rometimes the abstract stands for 
 the concrete „a dead (one)"; e. g. ra-fi-r'on, „his death." 
 
 Fi, a-, pi. e-, n. „loin, hip" (also used of the meat of an ani- 
 mal slaughtered); e. g. 'a son-ko a-fi, „they gave him one 
 of the loins." 
 
 Fino, V. n. „be good" (morally and physically); „be fair, be 
 beautiful, be lovely, be fine" (as a child); „be kind, be 
 pious; be even, be smooth" (as a rock); e. g. afi-yal afie 
 na fino, „this boat is fine," 
 
 Fino, adj. „good" (morally and physically); „fair, beautiful, fine; 
 pious; smooth" (as a rock or stone); applied to condition 
 „liappy"; also „kind" (as a word, or a person); e. g. a-fam 
 a-fino, „good people;" — r'im ra-fino, „a kind word." 
 
 Fino, 0-, adj. but used adverbially „well, kindly;" e. g. o yo- 
 mi o-fino, „he treated me well." 
 
 Firdaus, n „paradise". From the Ar. J«j4>li, beatorum sedes, 
 paradisus. 
 
 Fisa. adj. „better". See an e.x. pag. 127. 
 
 Fit, ma-, n. „brains, brain;" also „marrow" (of bones), 
 
 Fita, V. a. „casl away, throw away, throw, fling;" e. g. w'an, 
 tse ri fi'ta, „boy, do not throw it away." 
 
 Fita, V. rel. „throw-away for-;" e. g. fila-mi am-bitra aiie, „lhrow 
 this boltle away for me," = „throw me this bottle away." 
 
 Fo, eonj. „thal", = ho; often used before direct and indirect 
 speech, and frequently answering lo the Gr. on. It may 
 often be given by „saying" in direct speech, and by „that" 
 with indirect speech. It is probably the verb, adjective from 
 fo, „sav". E. c. ma vema fo I tak'sa-mu-i? „doesl thou 
 want me to leach thee?" lit. „doesl thou want that I teach 
 thee?"
 
 — 169 — 
 
 Fo, V. n. „say," = ho. It is generally followed by ye, -which 
 seems to be the dcin. pr, for eye, „these" (words); in the 
 l«t- person sing, the pers. verbal pronoun is often, or gene- 
 rally dropped. When followed by ye, it is generally used 
 as an introductory phrase to arrest (he attention of the one, 
 to whom one wants to say something. E. g, fo ye, mail 
 kone ro-Kamp aninaii, „I say, let us go to Sierra-Leone to 
 morrow," for: I fo ye etc., lit. „I say these (words) etc.;" — 
 I fo ye, w'an etc., „I say, boy etc.;" — o fo ye, o gbali he 
 der, „he says he cannot come." Fo alone, or also: fo ye 
 may be used with direct and indirect speech, as: o fo: Man 
 kone nina bat, „he said: Let us go to morrow morning," 
 or: fo ye: Man kone etc., „he said: Let us go etc.," lit. 
 „he said these (words): etc." 
 
 Fo, adj. verb. —- ho, „saying". See fo, conj. 
 
 Fq ye, == ho ye, see fo, v. n. 
 
 Fof, V. n. „speak, talk;" e. g. 1 ko fof ronaii, „I go speak to 
 them;" — o gbali he fof, „he caimot speak." 
 
 Fof, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „speech, word;" in the sing. „act of speak- 
 ing;" e. g. ka-fof-k'on, „his speaking." 
 
 Fof d'im r'in, ,.inake an agreement" or „treaty," lit. „speak one 
 word;" e. g. na fof d'im r'in traka tsi, „they made an agree- 
 ment about it." 
 
 Fofar, V. rel. (rad. fof), ,.speak to, address, speak wi'h, reason 
 with, warn;" e. g. I tsi fofar-ko, „I shall speak to him." 
 
 Fofar, ka-, pi. tra-, n. verb. „act of addressing (one); address;" 
 e. g. ka-fofar-k'on an-fam, „his addressing the people." 
 
 FoT, ra-, pi. tra-, n. „evening"; e.g. ra-foT ra poh bek. „evening 
 has arrived." : . " 
 
 FoT-kara, v. n. comp. „be easy to bring" or „to bring away;" 
 e.g. ow'iini owe o foi-he-kfira . „this person is not easy to 
 bring away." 
 
 Fol-tas, V. impers. comp. „be easy to i)ass;" e. g. pa foi ri tas, 
 „it will \)y easy to pass there;" — o fol ri tas, „it is (was) 
 easy to pass there." 
 
 Fol-tr'eT, V. n. comp. „be of such a character as to be easy to
 
 — 170 — 
 
 deal with, be of a sociable character, be good-natured; be 
 well off;" also ,,make joke" or „jpst of a thing, jest," or 
 „joke about a thing;" as: ma fol he tr'el, „thou doest not 
 joke about a thing;" also „be convenient" (as time). 
 
 Fol-tr'el, adj. „sociable, good-natured; convenient, seasonable" 
 (as time); ,.easy, happv;" e. g. a-loko a-fol-tr'el, „a conve- 
 nient time;" — w'uni fol-tr'el, „a person well off." 
 
 Fol w'dni tr'el, v impers. a. „be easy for-, be well with-" = 
 „be comfortable, be happy, be well off;" e. g. pa fol-ko-tr'el, 
 „it is getting better with him," = ,,he is getting well off;" — 
 foT-ko-tr'el, „he is comfortable," lit. „it is well with him." 
 
 Folr, a-, pi. e-, or tra-, n. „shadow, shade, shelter" (as of a 
 tree); e. g. aiVantr iia yer-su a -folr, „the tree gives us 
 shelter." 
 
 Fok, a-, pi. e-, n. „parcel, any thing wrapped up in the form 
 of a parcel;" e. g. a-fok na m'er, „a parcel of salt." 
 
 Fokia, v. revert, and rel. (rad. fok), „unwrap-for-; bark-for-, take 
 off-for-" (as the cover of a parcel for another); e. g. fokia- 
 mi aiVantr ane, „bark this tree for me." 
 
 Fon, ra-, pi. a-, n. „hair"; e. g. an-fon-n'on, „his hair." 
 
 For, ra-, pi. e-, n. „eye"; e. g. e-for 'e-su, „our eyes." 
 
 Fosa, a-, n. „ power, influence, might, ability;" e. g. o ba he ri 
 a-fosa, „he has no influence ihere," = „he is not able to 
 do any thing there." 
 
 Fot, adj. „addle, barren" (as an egg); ..empty" (as a box, or as 
 the stomach); e. g. ra-mes ra-fot, „an addle egg." 
 
 Fotane, V. refl. „rest oneself, rest, repose;" e g. 1 ko fotane 
 o-tan, „1 go to rest a little." Prob. from an obs. fota. 
 
 Fotane, 0-, n. loc. „resting place, place of repose;" e. g. o-fotane- 
 'o-mi, „my resting-place." 
 
 Fu, adj. „new" ; 8. g. k'ota ka-fu, „new cloth." 
 
 Fuk, e-, n. „chaff" (as of rough rice when beaten in a mortar). 
 That which comes off in threshing or flogging rice (as they 
 say) is called: e-gbafta. 
 
 Fiimpo, V. n. „fall down, fall;" e. g. o fumpo ri, „he fell down 
 there."
 
 — 171 — 
 
 Fiimpo kasi, „bt'come liable lo a fine or penallv, become guilty 
 
 of a breach of Ihe country law." 
 Funk, a-, pi. e-, or tra-, n. „store-house" (for grain or for 
 agricultural productions), „barn"; e. g. a-funk a-bana, „ a large 
 store-house." « 
 
 Fiinti, a-, pi. e-, n. „prisoner of war, captive." 
 Funti, ra-, n. „caplivit}'- ; e.g. ra-funti-ra-nan, „lheir captivity." 
 Fdti, V. n. „escape, be saved;" e.g. o fiiti ri, „he was saved there." 
 Ffiti, ka-, n. verb. „acl of escaping, escape, deliverance, salva- 
 tion;" e. g. ka-fdti-ka-su, „our salvation." 
 Fiitia, V. caus. „make to escape, save;" e. g. kono futia-mi. „he 
 
 saved me." 
 Futia, adj. „saving"; e. g. ar'on' da-fiitia, „the saving way," 
 
 i. e, „the wav by which one is saved." 
 Futia, 0-, pi. a-, n. ,,saviour"; e.g. o-fiitia-ka-mi, „my Saviour." 
 Futia, ka-, n. verb. „aot of saving, a saving;" e. g. ka-fiilia-ko, 
 „the act of saving him," = „his deliverance." 
 
 G. 
 
 Gba, adv. „very, indeed, much, well;" e. g. pa bone-mi tenon 
 
 gba, „I am very glad to day;" — a, K'liru o botar-su gba! 
 
 „oh, God loves us much!" 
 Gba, ka-, pi. tra-, n. ..score, twenty;" e. g. Ira-gba tra-ran, 
 
 „lwo scores," = „forly"; — tra-gba tra-sas, „three scores," 
 
 = „ sixty." 
 GbaT, v. a. „splil" (as wood); „burs!, open" (as a nut); „tear" 
 
 (as cloth); fig. „impart" (as instruction); „interpret" (as dreams); 
 
 e. g. gbai ak'ota, „he tore the cloth." 
 Gbafa, v.rel. „splil-for-; lear-to- or for-; open-for-;" fig. „impart- 
 
 to-;" gbaia-mi ak'ota, „he tore the cloth to me," = „he 
 
 fore me the clolh." , 
 
 Gbalr, v. rcl. (rad. gbal), „impart-to-, give-to-" (as instruction), 
 
 lit. as it were „tear off-lowards-." See the next word. 
 Gbaia w'uni ka-wandi, i ,, impart instruction to one, preach lo 
 Gbalr w'lini ka-wandi, ' one;" e. g. o gbalr-ko ka-wandi, „he 
 
 gave him instruction."
 
 — 172 — 
 
 Gbak, ma-, n, „rust"; e. g. an-fatr na ba ma-gbak, ,,the iron 
 
 is ruslv," lit. .,lho iron has rusl." 
 Gbak, V. a. „cul" (as wood); cut ofl', decide, settle" (as a matter), 
 
 ,, determine"; e. g. o gbak ak'antr, ,.he cut the stick." 
 Gbak, v.»^n. „cut; judge, give an opinion." 
 Gbaka, v. a. „cut; decide, judge" (as a matter); „rule over, 
 
 govern;" e. g. kane mo gbaka an-tof afie-e? „who is govern- 
 ing this country?" 
 Gbaka, ka-, n. verb. ,,act of governing" or ,,of ruling, reign, 
 
 government;" e. g. kane ba ka-gbaka ka an-tof-e? „who has 
 
 the governmen' of the country?" 
 Gbaka, ra-, n. „office of governing (a country); government;" 
 
 e, g. kane ba 'ra-gbaka ra an-tof-e? ,,who has the govern- 
 ment of the country now?" 
 Gbakane, v. recipr. „vie" or „conlend with each other;" e. g. 
 
 'a gbakane ka ka-lam ma-sar, „they vied with each other in 
 
 throwing stones;" — 'a gbakane ka gbiike, ,,they vie with 
 
 each other in running," =: „tliey ran a race." 
 Gbal, V. a. ,, write; make a sketch of, sketch;" e. g. o gbal a- 
 
 reka, „he wrote a letter." 
 Gbal, V. n, „write; make a sketch; e. g. o gbal o-fino, „he writes 
 
 well." 
 Gbal, ka-, n. verb. „acl of writing, writing;" e. g. I naiik ka- 
 
 gbal-k'on an-reka. ,,I saw his writing the letter," = „I saw 
 
 hiin writing the letter." 
 Gbal, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „line, letter, character" fas of a 
 
 book); pi. also „writing"; e. g. ma -gbal ma-fino, „good 
 
 writing." Also „sketch; mark." 
 Gbala, adj. rel. „belonging to writing;" e. g. k'upo ka-gbala, „a 
 
 pen," lit. ,.a feather lo write with." 
 Gbalafi, a-, pi. e-, n. ,,tock, rocky place;" e. g. a-gbalah a-bana, 
 
 „a large rock." 
 Gbalap, v. n. „twiiikle wiih the eyes, twinkle;" e. g. o trii gbalap, 
 
 „he is twinkling with the eyes." 
 Gbfjii, V. n. „be able, can." Often used as an aux. to express 
 
 an ability for the exercise of the energy, indicated by the
 
 — 173 — , 
 
 principal verb, as: o gbali he yO-tsi, = o gbali he tsi jo, 
 
 „he cannot do it." It is generally construed \vith the short 
 
 form of the Infinitive, sometimes also with the long one. 
 Gbali, V. a. ,,be able for-;" e. g. o gbali-tsi, „he is able for it." 
 Gbam, v. a. „beat, pound, bruise to powder" (as in a mortarj; 
 
 e. g. gbam apa-la, ,, pound the rice." 
 Gban, a-, pi. tra-, n. „dry land" (as opposed to the sea); „coun!r\;" 
 
 e. g. ro-gban, „iii the country" (in opposition to the city). 
 Gbah, adv. spec. „very, well, closely;" it is used with bakar, 
 
 „firm, strong, fast," and with wopane, ,,ho]d together, be 
 
 united together;" e. g. ak'antr ka Irania bakar gbaii, „the 
 
 post stands very fast." 
 Gban, v. a. ,,lay across" (as a bridge); „meet; oppose, prevent, 
 
 obstruct" (as a road); ,, waylay"; e. g. 'a gban-ko ro-r'on, 
 
 „lhey waylaid him in the road." 
 Gbfinane, v. recipr. „meet each other;" e. g. I tr"a he ro sa 
 
 ma gbanane, „I d'ont know where me may meet each other." 
 Gbanne, v. refl. a. (rad. gban), ,,meet with, meel ;" also ,,lay 
 
 across oneself," hence „carry on the shoulder;" e. g. o 
 
 gbanne ak'antr, ,,he carried the stick on the shoulder;" — 
 
 gbanne-ko ro-r'on, „he met with him in the road." 
 Gbanne, v. refl. n. „meet, meet together, assemble;" e.g. 'a gbanne 
 
 ro-r'oh, „they meet in the road." 
 Gbanne, a-, pi. e-, n. ,, meeting, assembly;" e. g. an-gbanne iia 
 
 afi-fcim, „the meeting of the peoj)le." 
 Gban's, v. cans. „go to meet;" e. g, o gbah's Pa Sori, „he went 
 
 lo meet Mr. Sori." 
 Gban'sane, v. caus. rel. and recipr., ,, surround, enclose, besiege" 
 
 (as a town, or army), lit. .,make to meet each other around-." 
 
 or „for-", or „against-"; c. g. man gban'sane-ko nan, „let 
 
 us surround him." 
 Gbanta, v. a. „slap, strike, knock; flog, whip; toss" (as waves 
 
 a canoe); e. g. o gbiinta-mi ka a-kos-'a-mi, ,,he slapped me 
 
 on one of my cheeks." 
 Gbantan, a-, pi. e-, n. , , porch, piazza;" e.g. o trama ro-gbantan, 
 
 „he stood in the piazza."
 
 — 174 — 
 
 Gbantane, adj. refl. „spreading itself, making itself known, diffus- 
 ing itself;" also ,, making known, advertising;" e. g. w'uni 
 gbantane tr'el, „a person advertising a matter," or ,,a person 
 making known a matter." Prob. from an obs. gbant. 
 
 Gbante, adj. „different, various, diverse;" e, g. e-bamp e-gbante, 
 „various birds." 
 
 Gbanlrani, a-, pi. e-, n. ,, outskirts" or „boundar} of a farm where 
 it borders on the bush" or „forest"; e. g. o vo ma-mant 
 ro-gbanlrani, ,,he does work at the outskirts of the farm." 
 
 Gbapne, v. refl. (rad. gbap), „fasten itself, fix itself, adhere;" e. g. 
 ma-kima ma gbapne ka e-kos-y'gn, „soot adheres to his cheeks." 
 
 Gb^p'sa, v. freq. and inch. a. ,,gel fastened to, adhere to, stick to; 
 keep close to, attend to;" e. g. w'an, gbap'sa-mi rayer, „boy, 
 keep close to my side." 
 
 Gbaran, adv. „clearly, plainly, well, fully;" e. g. o kane-ko-tsi 
 gbaran, „he told it plainly to him." 
 
 Gbaski, v. a. „separate, part, divorce; divide; distinguish;" e. g. 
 gbaski atra-lome ka ats'ir, „separate the sheep from the goats." 
 
 Gbata, a-, pi. e, n. „mat"; e. g. a-gbata a-lol, ,,a small mat." 
 
 Gbati, V. n. „be numerous, be many, be plentiful; e. g. p§-la 
 pa gbati ri, „rice is plentiful there." 
 
 Gbdti, adj. „many, numerus, much; ' e.g. e-lop e-gbati, „manyfish." 
 
 Gbato, a-, pi. e-, n. „cutlass, sword;" e. g. an-gbato-iVon, „his 
 cutlass." 
 
 Gbatr, v. a. „set" (as a trap); „waylay, lie in ambush for-, set 
 a trap for-;" e. g. o gbatr o-sem, ,,he set a trap for the 
 animal;" — o gbatr-mi ro-r'oii, „he lay in ambush for me 
 in the road." 
 
 Gbatr, v. a. „knock, tap sharply" (as on a door, or on one's 
 head); „strike" (as a bell); „sting" (used of the cerastes); 
 e. g. gbalr-mi, „he knocked me;" — o gbatr aka-rare, 
 „he knocked on the door." 
 
 Gbatro, v. n. „be round about;" e. g. na gbatro ro-petr be, 
 „they were all round the town." 
 
 Gbelen, a-, pi. e, n. „bell; hour;" e. g. pa yi gbo an-gb6len 
 na an-rei ana beka e-sas, „il is but the 3d. hour of the day."
 
 — 175 — 
 
 Gben, adv. „indeed, very, verily, just, exactly." It has often 
 the sense of the adj. „own" without a prefix. E. g. o lopra 
 to gben, „he is now dressed indeed;" — an-lo na-tsi gben, 
 „that very time;" — gw'an-ka-mi gben, „my own child." 
 
 Gbena, v. a. „hate"; e. g. o gbena-mi, „he hates me." 
 
 Gbena, ka-, n. verb. „acl of hating, hatred;" e.g. o gbeha-ko 
 ka-gbena ka-bana, „he hates him very much," lit, „he hales 
 him (with) a great hatred." 
 
 Gbeiia, ma-, n. „hatred;" e g. ma-gbena ama o gbena-mi, ma 
 etc., „the hatred with which he hales me, it etc.'' 
 
 Gbonbe, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „pepper of any kind;" e. g. ka-gbonbe 
 ka-yim, „red pepper, cayenne." 
 
 Gbengben, v. a. „qutstiou, examine by questioning, inquire into 
 by questioning, examine," e. g. I tsi gbengben-ko Iraka tsi, 
 „I shall question him about it." 
 
 Gbepar, v. rel. n. (rad. gbep), „rise, go up on the top, reach the 
 top" or „zenith, reach the highest point, reach the meridian-, 
 (as the sun) ; e. g. ar'etr ra pon gbepar, „the sun has reached 
 the meridian;" — ra-yola-r'on ra gbepar, ,.his gentleman- 
 ship has reached the highest point (its zenith);" — ka-bone- 
 tr'el-k'on ka pon' to gbepar, „his presumption had now 
 reached the highest degree." It is sometimes followed by 
 rokom, „on top,"' as: o pon gbepar rokom, „he has reached 
 the top." 
 
 Gbepar, v. rel. a. (rad. gbep), go on the top of-;" fig. „reach" or 
 „rise to the rank of-;" e. g. o gbepar ra-yola, „he rose to 
 the rank of a gentleman;" — o gbepar an-set, „he went on 
 the top of the house." 
 
 Gbepar 'ra-bomp ratroii, „rise to" or „roach the zenith" or 
 „meridian" (as the sun at noon), lit. „rise to the very middle 
 of the head;" e, g. ma ar'etr ra gbepar 'ra-bomp ratron etc., 
 „when the sun reached the meridian etc." 
 Gbep'trane, v. recipr. (rad. gbep), ,.join together, be close to- 
 gether, be near to each other;" e. g. ma yira sa gbep'trane, 
 „let us sit close together," lit. „let us sit we are close to- 
 gether."
 
 — 176 — 
 
 Gbeia, a-, n. „floiir" (as made of rice); e. g. a-gbera a-lal, 
 ,,much rice-flour." 
 
 Gbes, adv. „all night, the whole night;" e, g nanan gbes, „all 
 last night." 
 
 Gbetgbetne, v. refl. „recline" or ,,sit down with the legs close 
 together" (as the Tcmnes do at their meals), „sit down with 
 legs put on each other," = the Gr. dvaxXhoiwi or drdxei- 
 fiai; or = the Lat. accumbere; hence ,,sit down" or , , recline 
 to a meal." This form is used of old people and of women. 
 Gbatgbatne, or gbaligbi'itine is „'o recline" or „sit down in 
 an improper" or „indecent manner, with the legs stretched 
 out far from each other" or ,,aslride, so as to offend cha- 
 stity." Those who do so are said not to like others to eat 
 with them. This latter form is used of men only. E. g. 
 o-bai won traka kali ana poh gbrtgbetne ka an-fanta iia 
 ka-nantra, ,,the king went in to see those who had sat down 
 to the marriage feast;" — but: vv'an, tse gbatgbatne, .,boy, 
 do not sit down astride." 
 
 Gbetr, adv. „middlingly, just right, just, good, well; quite, fully; 
 accurately, minulely;" e. g. o wan gbo gbetr tenon, „it is but 
 partially clear to day;" — 1 yif-ko-tsi gbetr, „1 asked him 
 minutely about it." 
 
 Gbetr, adj. „middling, right, just right, good, accurate; e.g. ma- 
 panl ma-gbetr, „accurate work;" r'a ra-gbetr, „a thing just 
 right." 
 
 Gbip, V. a. „catch, capture, make-prisoner;" e. g. o gbip an- 
 Iroko, „he caught the fowl." 
 
 Gbipa, V. rel. „catch-for-, capture-for-;" e.g. gbipa-mi an-trokg, 
 „catch the fowl for me," = „catch me the fowl." 
 
 Gbo, adv. „only, but, just; quite; tiien." With a verb it often 
 expresses the words „as soon as." E. g. I naiV-ko gbo win, 
 .,1 saw him but once;" — be I poii gbo-e, I tsi der, „as 
 soon as I have done, I shall come," lit. „when I have but 
 done etc."; — mo o yefa gbo ro-petr, na kone, „as soon as 
 he came from town, they went away." Cf. also the aux. v. 
 bar in loco.
 
 — 177 — 
 
 Gbo gbotr, Just exactlv, but just;" c. g. ar'etr ra putr gbo gboir, 
 mo kone, „the sun was but just risen above the horizon, 
 when he left." 
 Gbo ras, „but just, only just," lit. „only yet," Ger. „eben erst;" 
 e. g. trap gbo ras tra yo ma-pant, „he only just began to 
 do work." 
 Gbo ton, „then now, now;" e. g. man kone gbo ton, sa soto 
 ey'etr-'e-su, „let us then go now, we have got our things." 
 Gbori, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „bunclle" (as of riee cut), .,a hand- 
 ful, a sheave;" e. g. a-gboh na pa-la, „a sheave of rice." 
 Gbonkal, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „dale, vallev." 
 
 Ghonko, a-, pi. e-, or Ira-, n. „okl forest, forest" (where the 
 timber trees have not yet been cut out); e. g. o yi ro- 
 gbonko, „he is in the forest." 
 Gbonkto, a-, pi. e-, n. „kilchen"; e.g. o yi ro-gbonkto, „he is 
 
 in the kitchen." 
 Gbope, V. n. „be rugged, be uneven, be rough" (as ground or 
 a stone); e. g. an-tof na gbope ri, „the ground is rugged 
 there." 
 Gbope-gbope, v. freq. or intens. n. „be very rugged, be very 
 uneven, be very rough;" e. g. an-tof na gl)6pe-gb6pe ri, „lhe 
 ground is very uneven there." 
 Gborka, o-, pi. a-, n. „one not initiated into the secret society 
 of the Bondos" or „of the Porros; one ceremoniously un- 
 clean." Cf. Pref. § 18, a. 
 Gbosa, adj. „belonging to tempting" or „alluring" or „seducing, 
 tempting;" e. g. r'a ra-gbosa ra yi ri, „there is a temptation 
 there," lit. „a tempting thing is there;" from the v. rel. gbosa, 
 „tempt-with-," (rad. gbos, „lempt.") 
 Gboti, V. a. „pluck-oll, tear-off, pull-olf. pluck" (as fruit from 
 a tree, or a rope); e. g. o gboti ma-lenne, „he plucked 
 limes." 
 Gbiike, V. n. „run, run away, flee;" e. g. an-fam be na gbuko, 
 
 „all the people ran away." 
 Gbuke, V. a. „run away from, flee from;" e. g. o gbuke-mi, „he 
 
 Temne - Worterbuch. 1 2
 
 — 178 — 
 
 ran away from me;" — o gbuke am-bok, „he fled from the 
 snake." 
 
 Gbutr, V. n. „be short;" e. g. ak'antr ka gbuir, „lhe stick is 
 short." 
 
 Gbiitrcis, V. cans. „short(M), make short;" passively „be shorten- 
 ed;" e. g. gbutras-ki, „shorlen it;" — ak'antr ka re gbiitras, 
 „the stick will be shortened." 
 
 H. 
 
 Ha, conj. ■■= han „so that, in somnch that;" e. g. iia kane-su 
 fo ow'iini owe o sake; kere o sake soT, ha a-fam na gbali 
 he \s\ trara, „fhey told us that this person turns himself; 
 but he turns himself softly, so that people are not aware 
 of it." 
 
 Ha, adv. = han „till, until;" e. g. I kar-ko, ha pa lela-mi, 
 „1 waited for him, till I was tired," lit. „till it lired me." 
 
 Hali, conj. „though, although;" e. g. be na nane gbo traka kefa, 
 hali na keia he etc., „if ye only think of stealing, although 
 ye do not steal etc." 
 
 Hali, adv. „very, much;" e. g. ak'ota ake I gbali he ki sgnd, 
 1 yema-ki hali, „as for this clolh I cannot part with it, i 
 am much in need of it." 
 
 Halisa, adv. „moreover, yet, still, still yet, yet still;" e, g. na 
 yo ma-pant halisa," = halisa na yo ma-pant, „they still do 
 work;" — kono mo son-su ras ey'etr be, „he is yet giving 
 us all things still." 
 
 Han, coiij. -~ ha, which see. 
 
 Han, adv. = ha, which see. 
 
 He, adv. „nol", = fe which see; e g. o ta der he, „he did not 
 yet come." It is only used with verbs like fe, and both 
 forms might be considered as negative suffixes to form ne- 
 gative verbs. 
 
 Ho, conj. = fo, which see. 
 
 Ho, V. n. „say", = fo, which see. 
 
 Ho, adj. participial „saying", = fo, which see. 
 
 Ho ye, = fo \e, which see.
 
 — 179 — 
 
 I. 
 
 -I? direct inter, sulf. placed at the end of the proposition; e. g. 
 
 I der royan-i? „shall 1 come vender?" — 1 trel toh-i? 
 
 „8hall I leave off now?" 
 'I, abbr. form of ni, pr. obj. „it", used after the letter n. See 
 
 an ex. in Temn. Trad. p. 6. 
 lyoo, adv. „yes"; e.g. ko ow'ahet o pa ho: Ya, toisa-mi am- 
 ""bamp. 0-kara-k'on o pa ho: l.yuo; „and Ihe child said; 
 
 Mother, broil me the bird. His mother said: Yes." 
 
 K. 
 
 K', pref. indef. and insep. .,a. an;" e. g. k'antr. „a stick." for 
 ka-antr. 
 
 o o 
 
 Ka, prep. „in, into; to; al; from; for; with; according; Avhile;" 
 e. g. wur ka aii-sel, „he came out from the house." The 
 sense is indicated bv the verb with which it is used. 
 
 Ka-, pref. def. = aka-, „the"; as ka-bcp, „the spoon." It is 
 the def. form of ka-. 
 
 Ka, prep. poss. „of". It is the def. form of ka; e. g. o-kas ka 
 o-baT, „the father of the king." 
 
 Ka, conj. „and", =- ko and ko; this form is used before words 
 with or before the vowel a; e. g. ka na pa ho: etc., „and 
 they said: etc." 
 
 Ka, adv. „then; when," -^- ke and ko; this form is used before 
 words with or before the vowel a; and in the minor pro- 
 position. If any time is indicated in the antecedent, or il 
 the adv. ma in the sense of „when" precedes; then ka has 
 the sense of „then"; otherwise it has the sense of „when"; 
 e. g. poll gbo der-e, ka na mota kone, „as soon as he 
 had come, then only they left," = „he had just come, be- 
 fore they went away;" — o yi ka der, ka an-lsik na bek, 
 „he was just coming, when the strangers arrived." Sec the 
 Note after ke, adv. 
 
 Ka, pr. subj.def. „it"; e. g. ka-bep ka dinne, „lhe spoon is lost." 
 
 Ka-, pref. indef. „a, an;" e.g. ka-bep, „a spoon." With verb. 
 
 12*
 
 — 180 _ 
 
 nouns it may often be given by „to" with a following Infi- 
 nitive, for whuh the verb, noun often stands. Verb, nouns 
 
 derived from transitive verbs may still take an object in the 
 
 Ace. 
 Ka, prep. poss. „of". It is the indef. form of ka; e. g. ka-bep 
 
 ka Sori, „a spoon of Sori." 
 Ka, pr. subj. indef. ,.i!"; as: k;)-bep-ka-mi ka dinne, „a spoon 
 
 of mine is lost." 
 Ka a-loko lom, „at a certain time, once;" = loko lom 
 Ka-mi, pr. poss. def. „my", lit. „of me;" e. g. ka-bep-ka-mi, „my 
 
 spoon." 
 Ka-mi, pr. poss. indef. „my", lit. „of me;" e. g. ka-bep-ka-mi, 
 
 lit. „a spoon of me," = „a spoon of mine" or „my spoon." 
 Ka-mu, pr. poss. def. „thy", lit. „of thee"; e.g. ka-bep-ka-mu, 
 
 „thy spoon." 
 Ka-mu, pr. poss. indef. „tliy", lit. „of thee;" e.g. ka-bep-ka-mu, 
 
 lit. „a spoon of thee" = „a spoon of thine" or „thy spoon." 
 Ka-nan, pr. poss. def. ,.their", lit. „of them"; e.g. ka-bep-ka-nan, 
 
 „their spoon." 
 Ka-nan, pr. poss. indef. „their," lit. „of them;" e.g. ka-bep-ka-nah, 
 
 „a spoon of them," = „a spoon of theirs" or ,,their spoon." 
 Ka-nu, pr. poss. def. „your", lit. „of you;" e. g. ka-bep-ka-nu, 
 
 „your spoon." 
 Ka-nu, pr. poss. indef. „your", lit. „of you;" e. g. ka-bep-ka-nn, 
 
 „a spoon of you," = „a spoon of yours" or „your spoon;" 
 
 — ka-be|>ka-nu kian, „this (is) a spoon of yours," lit. „a spoon 
 
 of yours this (it)." 
 Ka ka lap'so, i „at last," lit. „at the end;" e. g. o der ka ka- 
 Ka ka-lap'sa, ^ lap'so, „at last became," or „he came at last." 
 Ka-lap'so, i n. but used adverbially, „the last time," lit. ,.the 
 Ka-lap'sa, ^ end;" for which they more generally use the aux. v. 
 
 lapsg, „be last." E. g. me I ko ri ka-lapso, „when 1 went 
 
 there the last time." 
 Ka-lap'so-ka-tsi, ^ .,at last, afterwards," lit. „al the end of it;" 
 Ka-lap'sa-ka-tsi, ^ e. g. ka-lap'so-ka-tsi o son-mi ey'etr-'e-mi, „al 
 
 last he gave me my tilings."
 
 — 181 — 
 
 Ka ka-raran-ka-tsi, \ „afterwards, after this," lit. „at its back" 
 Ka-raran-ka-tsi, ^ or „at the back of it;" e. g. ka ka-raran- 
 
 o 
 
 ka-tsi I tsi der, „aflerwards 1 shall come." 
 Ka ka-raran ake, | „after this/' lit. „at the back (of) this;" e. g. 
 Ka-raran ake, ' ka ka-raran ake o tse tsi so yo, (or: o tse 
 
 so yo tsi), „aftcr this he did not do it again." 
 Ka-raran, n. hut used as a prep. „afler", lit. „thc back;" e. g. 
 
 ka-raran ka ka-tsiin, „after the ^\ar." The preposition ka, 
 
 o 
 
 „at" is dropped before the noun. 
 Ka-su, pr. poss. def. „our", lit. „ofus;" e.g. ka-bep-ka-su, „our 
 
 spoon." 
 Ka-su, pr. poss. indef. „our", lit. „of us;" e. g. ka-bep-ka-su, „a 
 
 spoon of us," = „a spoon of ours," — „our spoon." 
 Ka-tron, n. but used as a prep. ,.bet\veen, amongst, among," 
 
 lit. „the middle;" e. g. ka-lron ka an-fam, „amongst the 
 
 people." See the observation at the n. ka-raran above. 
 Ka-Isi, pr.dem.log. „that"; e. g. ak'antr ka-tsi, ,,'hat log of 
 
 timber" (spoken of) 
 Ka-lsi, pr. poss. neul. „ils", lit. ,,of it;" e. g. ka-ra-ka-t,si, „its 
 
 branch," lit. „the brancli of it." 
 Kabane, adj. „^vonderful, astonishing, extraordinary;" e.g. Ir'ei 
 
 tra-kabano, „a -wonderful thing," 
 Kabi, 0-, pi. a-, n. ..blacksmith". 
 Kadi, adv. „before, ahead, forwards, onward;" e. g. o ko kadi, 
 
 „he went forwards;" — trama kadi, „s1and ahead." 
 K'afa, pi. tr'afa, n. „bonk". This word is used by the Morimen, 
 
 and by those who speak deep Temne, as they call it; the 
 
 common word for it is a-'reka, which see. 
 Kafri, o-, pi. a-, n. ., infidel, unbeliever, hea'hen." From the 
 
 Ar. Isli^ infidclis; Mand. kafir. 
 
 K'afdi, ( pi. tr'airi, n. ., paper". From the Ar. <X^\S, chaila; 
 
 K'airi, ) e. g. k'airi ka-fino, „good paper." 
 
 K'ak, pi. tr'ak, n. „anl in general;" also: „small black ant, sugar- 
 ant" As regards the form Pa Tr'ak-na, the prefix na belong- 
 ing to Pa is here put behind Tr'ak instead of behind Pa, as it
 
 — 182 — 
 
 would not do to say Pa-na Tr'ak; because Tr'ak is here 
 taken as a name to which Pa-na, „Messrs." is applied. Pa 
 belongs to those nouns which may take the indef. pi. prei". 
 behind instead of before the noun, as will be seen from the 
 Temne Grammar. The pr. may follow in the sing., though 
 the noun is in the pi., and vice versa; as all of them are 
 taken as one whole, or the sing, for the whole species. See 
 Fables p. 90. 
 
 Kal, V. n. „return". As an aux. it serves to express the adv. 
 „again-'; e. g. I tsi kal son-mu-tsi, „I shall give it to thee 
 again;" — kal kanta ka-rjire, „shul the door again." 
 
 Kal, V. a. „scorch" (as fire the leaves of a tree etc.; see the 
 adj. below); „ broil"; e. g. an'antr na kal e-bdpar be, ,.the 
 fire scorched all the leaves;" — kal o-sem, „broil the meat." 
 
 Kal, adj. „scorched" (as the leaves of a tree by a fire, or as 
 the feathers of a fowl, or the hairs of a skin on a fire); 
 „broiled"; e.g. e-bopar e-kal, „scorched leaves;" — o-sem 
 o-kal, „broiled meat." 
 
 Kala, a-, n. „goods" (as used for bartering and valued by !he 
 bar, as they call it, from a bar of iron, the first circulating 
 medium introduced here), hence „property, money;" e. g. 
 a-kala a-fera, „cash", lit. „whi!e money," = „silver coin;" 
 a-kala a-bania, „ransom". See the word bar, a- in loco. 
 The word is also used of money in the sing, without any 
 a'djunct; as: o ba a-kala a-gbati, „he has much money." 
 
 Kala, v. caus. (rad. kal), „bring back, return, restore, give back, 
 repay," lit. „cause to return;" also „revenge oneself on-for-;" 
 e.g. kono kala ma-mane-ma-han, „he effected their reconcilia- 
 tion," lit. „he restored their friendship;" — 1 tsi kala-ko-tsi, 
 „I shall revenge myself on him for it," lit. „1 shall give il 
 back to him;" — o kala-mi-t.si, „he returned it to me." 
 
 Kalane, v. spont , or caus. and refl. (rad. kal), „return"; lit. „re- 
 turn of one's own accord" or „bring back oneself;" e.g. man 
 kalane, „let us return;" — o kalane so ro-Bake Loko, „he 
 returned again to Port-Loko." 
 
 Kali, V. n. „look, look about; be awake; live;" — e. g. o kali
 
 — 183 — 
 
 o-fino, „he looks well abou!;" — ko ma ma kali-e? „whal 
 
 art thou looking at?" 
 Kali, V. a, „look al;-' e. g. o kali-mi, „he looked at me," 
 Kali, adj. „\vaking, awake, alive;" e. g vv'iini kali, „a person 
 
 awake." 
 Kali, V. a. „postpone, defer, put off; detain;" e. g. kali ka-kone- 
 
 ka-mu ro-kamp, „posliJone thy going to Freetown;" — o 
 
 kali o-lsik, „he detained the stranger," 
 Kali-kali, v. freq. or inlens. n. „look all about, look out" (as one 
 
 on a watch, or as a spy). 
 Kali w'uni o-nosi-neT, „look with pity (compassion) on one;" 
 
 e, g. kali-mi o-nosi-nel, „he looked with pit;y on me." 
 Kali w'lini o-tot, \ „look well upon one, look wilh favour upon 
 Kali w'uni tot, ' one, lake good care of one;" e. g. o kali- 
 mi tot, „he takes good care of me." 
 K'alma, pi. tr'alma, n. ,,a large black antelope wilh white lips 
 
 and long retroverled horns, about the size of a year old calf, 
 
 and of great strength, so as to fighl with a leopard." lis 
 
 meat has a stmng disagreeable smell. 
 Kama, conj. „lhal"; e. g. kaiie-kn kama o der, „tell liini that 
 
 he may come." 
 Kamu, a-, pi. e-, or tra; or o-, pi. Ira-, n „an iguana, guana." 
 Kamp, ro-, „Freetown (in Sierra-Leone)," so called, because the 
 
 settlers, when Ihey arrived I here, made a camp near the 
 
 shore, lit. „al Iho camp." From the Kngl. 
 Kane? pr. rel. inter. „\\ho"? e.g. kane yo atr'ei al.se-e? „\\ho 
 
 did this thing?" 
 Kane, v. a. „tell, command; sa^- to, relate;" o kane-ko-tsi, „he 
 
 told it to him." 
 Kane, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „saying; history, narration; news;** 
 
 e. g. I ko tral aii-kano na an-tsik, „l go to hear the news 
 
 from the strangers." 
 Kanka, v. a. „coiifine" (as water by a dainj; „obstrucl one's pro- 
 gress; surround, besiege "(as a town); „detain b_y force;" e. g. 
 
 'a kanka an-set, „they surrounded the house."
 
 — 184 — 
 
 K'ankal, pi. tr'ankal, n. „tornado, thunderstorm;" c. g. k'ankal 
 
 ka-bana ka tra der, „lhere is a heavy tornado coming." 
 Kanko! int. expressing the Optative, „may! grant that! o that!" 
 
 e. g. kaiikg K'riru o mar-mi! „may God help me!" It is 
 
 constr. wilh the def. verb. 
 Kant, e-, n. „gum of the eyes;" Ger. „Aiigenbiiller" ; Lai. pi- 
 
 tuita crassa, gramia. 
 Kant, a-, pi. tra-, n. „MOod, bush, wood lands, young forest;" 
 
 e. g. yi ro-kant, „he is in the bush." 
 Kanta, V. a. „shul" (as a door); e. g. k'anta ka-rare, „shul the 
 
 door." 
 Kanti, v. revert, a. (rad. kanfa), ,,open" (as a door); e.g. kanli ka- 
 rare, „open the door." 
 K'antr, pi. tr'antr, n. „stick, log of timber" (felled); „timber- 
 
 Iree" (standing); e.g. k'antr ka-boli, „a long stick." 
 Kapafr, a-, pi. e, n. „breast, chest; bosom;" e. g. o yi ka ah- 
 
 kapatr-n'oii, „he was in his bosom " 
 K'ar, pi tr'ar, n. „louse;" e. g. o ba tr'ar tra-laT, „he has many 
 
 lice." 
 Kar. V. a. „wait, wait for, await, expect;" e. g. Ise ko ri kar, 
 
 „do not wait for him there;" — kar-mi ba, w'an! „wait 
 
 me here, bov!" 
 Kara, o-, pi. a-, n. „mother; mistress;" e.g. o-kara-k'on, „his 
 
 mother." This form is not used when addressing a mother. 
 Kara, v. a. „bring, bring away;" e. g. 'a kara-ko, ,,1hey brought 
 
 him." 
 Kara, v. rel. ,.bring-for-, bring-to-;" e. g. kara-mi n'antr, „bring 
 
 me fire," := „bring fire for me." 
 Karamoko, o-, pi. a-, n. ,, teacher, schoolmaster," lit. ,, reading 
 
 master." Prob. from the Mand. karamo, „schoolmaster". 
 Karan, v. n. „read"'; also ,, learn"; e.g. o karan o-fino, ,, he reads 
 
 well." See the next word. 
 Karan, v. a. „read; learn;" also ,, teach"; e. g ko karan an-rr'ka 
 
 ane, „go read this letter." In the first place from the Mand. 
 
 karan, but ultimately from the Ar. fli", legit.
 
 — 185 — 
 
 K'aran, pi. tr'jiran, n. ,,fire- place, hearth;" e. g. ro-k;jraii, ,,at 
 
 the fire-place. ' 
 Karandi, o-, pi. a-, n. ,, scholar, disciple." Mand. karandino. 
 
 E. g. an-karandi-n'on, ,,his disciples." 
 Karane, v. rel. and refl. (rad. kara), ,, bring ^vith" or ,, for oneself;" 
 
 e. g. karane a-gbata, „he brought a mat with himself." 
 Karmoko, o-, pi. a-, n. = karain(jko, o-, which see. 
 
 K'aro, pi. tr'aro, n. ,, wooden bowl, bowl;" e. g. k'aro ka-bana, 
 „a large bowl." 
 
 Kas, 0-, pi. a-, n. ..father; master;" in the pi. also ,, ancestors, 
 forefathers;" e. g. o-kas-ka-mi, .,mY father." This form is 
 not used for addressing a father. 
 
 Kasa, V. n. ,, intercede, mediate;" also ,,be of a middling quolitv" 
 or ,, stature" (as goods, or people); e. g. Pa Sori o >selo he 
 kasa, „Mr. Sori \NiIl not intercede." 
 
 Kasa, V. a. „intercede for-, interpose between-, interfere between-, 
 interpose in behalf of-; be" or ., stand between-;" also ,. make 
 peace between-, effect a reconciliation between-." Il is al- 
 ways followed by ratron, ,.between"; e. g. kono kasa-su ra- 
 tron, ,,he intercedes for us;" — a-kunk na kasa-su ratron, 
 ,, there is a fence between us." 
 
 K'asi, pi tr'a.si, n. „breach of the law which subjects the offender 
 to penalty, guilt, trespass;" also „i)enally itself." Cf. fiimpn 
 kasi, under F. 
 
 Kasi, V. n. „refuse, be not willing, will not; be saucy, be un- 
 relenting;" 1 kane-ko tra yo ma-pant, ko o kasi, ,.I told him 
 to do work, and he refused." Also used as an aux., when 
 it is construed with the short form of the Infinitive. See 
 bak, V. inch. 
 
 Kasra, adj. „violent"; e.g. w'lini kasra, „a violent person." From 
 the Ar. ^-wJ, violentia. 
 
 Kalr, V. a. ,,put" (as a word, or excuse); ,, fasten; make" (as a 
 
 heap). See the next word. 
 Katr k'ere, ,,make an excuse, make an apology;" e. g. o kalr 
 
 k'ere, „he made an excuse."
 
 — 186 — 
 
 K'atrak, pi. Ir'atrak, n. ,,foot"; e. g. ak'alrak-k'oii, „his foot." 
 
 Katrne, v. refl. n. ('ad. kalr), lit. „iuit oneself, fasten oneself;" 
 hence „mix oneself in a matter, interfere, meddle;" e.g. tse 
 katrne ka ko ri, „do not meddle by going there." 
 
 Katrne, v. refl. a. „put-oneself, inake-oneself" (as an excuse). 
 See next >vord. 
 
 Katrne k'ere , „excuse oneself, make an excuse for oneself;" e. g. 
 
 katrne k'ere, „he excused himself." 
 
 Ke, conj. „and", =^ ka and kg; this form is used before words 
 with or before the vowels e, e and i; e. g. ke me I nan'- 
 ko, etc., „and when I saw him, etc." 
 
 Ke, adv. „then; when," = ka and kg; this form is used before 
 words with or before the vowels e, e and i, and in the minor 
 proposition. If any time is indicated in the antecedent, or 
 if the adv. me ,,when" precedes; then ke has the sense of 
 ,,then"; otherwise it has the sense of „when"; e. g. g yi 
 gbo ka kg ro-Kamp, ke 1 der, ,,he was just about going to 
 Freetown, when 1 came;" -- me 1 bg na bes ro-kunk-e, ke 
 
 1 fir ah-kala ane, „when I was engaged in digging in the 
 jard, then I found this money." 
 
 Note. When ma, or me, or mg, „wheii" occurs in the ante- 
 cedent; then the ka, or ke, or kg is generally left untrans- 
 lated in English. The form ma corresponds with ka, me 
 with ke, and mg with kg. The forms ka, ke and kg in 
 the sense of „then, when" are only used in tlio minor pro- 
 position; but ka ma, ke me, and kg mg, may be used in 
 the antecedent in the sense of „and when", and in the minor 
 in the sense of „then when", or „then" or „when" simply. 
 Sometimes ka, ke and kg may be given by „before". See 
 kg, adv. below. 
 K'e, pi. Ir'e, = k'eh, pi. tsen, n. „property inherited," hence 
 „inheritance, property;" e. g. ak'e-k'gn, „his inheritance;" 
 — g-kas-ka-mi g tsia-mi k'e ka-bana, „my father left me a 
 large inheritance." 
 Ke-6-ke, = ki-o-kl, or =; ko-ko, adv. „at all, by all means, at 
 all events, however;" with a negation „not at all," or „by 
 no means;" e. g. yg-tsi ke-6-ke, „do it by all means;" —
 
 — 187 ~ 
 
 pa back ke-6-ke, tse pal in'antr, „ however hard it may be, 
 do not forget water." 
 
 Kel, ra, pi. tra-, n. „lheft, thiever;y;" e. g. ra-kei-r'oii, .,liis 
 theft." 
 
 Keia, v. n. „steal, practise theft;" e. g. o kela ro-petr, „he stole 
 in the town." 
 
 Keia, v. a. „sleal;" e. g. o keia e-}'6ka ro-k'or, „he stole cas- 
 sadas in the farm." 
 
 Keia, ka-, n. verb. „act of stealing, theft;" e. g. ka-keia-k'on, 
 „his theft." 
 
 K'ek, pi. ts'ek, or Ir'ek, n. „beard"; also fig. „a spider's web;" 
 e.g. ba k'ek ka-boli, „he has a long beard." See the 
 Note after kotsi. 
 
 Kel, ro-, thus they call an arm of the Sierra Leone river, and 
 that part of the Temne country which is contiguous to it. 
 
 Kelfa, 0-, pi. a-, n. „captain of iui army, war-officer, hero, war- 
 rior;" e. g. o-kelfa o-bana, „a great hero." 
 
 Kelfa, ra-, n. ,,office" or „rank of a captain of an army; bra- 
 very, heroism;" e. g. ra-keifu-ron, „his bravery." 
 
 K'eme, pi. tr'eme, n. „hundred"; e. g. tr'eme tra-ran, „two 
 hundred." 
 
 K'enke, pi. tr'enke, n. „a sort of cymbal worn on Ihe thumb, 
 and struck by a thimble on the middle fiisger," or „by se- 
 veral fingers, to accompany the drum." It is made of iron 
 or brass, and resembling a large thimble. 
 
 Kere, conj. „but", e. g. o yema der, kero tr'ei tra benlr-ko, 
 „he wished to come, but something prevented him." 
 
 Kere, adv. „even, yea." See an ex. in Tradit. p. 28. 
 
 Kere, v. a. „carry, lead, carry away;" e. g. w'an, kere ey'elr 
 eye, „boy, carry these things away;" also „carry-to-, carry- 
 for-," as: kere-mi ey'etr eye, „carry these things away for 
 me. " 
 
 K'ere, pi, tr'ere, n. „excuse, apology." Sec the word katr, 
 above, 
 
 K'eren, pi. tseren, or Ir'eren, n. „grass"; e. g. k'eren ka-lai. 
 ,,much grass." See the Note after kolsi.
 
 — 188 — 
 
 Kt'ta, V. a. „ puzzle, perplex, embarrass;" e. g. alr'ei atse tra 
 
 kela-ini, „this thing puzzles me." 
 Keta, V. n. „be puzzling, be perplexing;" e. g. alr'ei atse tra 
 
 kola, „this thing is perplexing." 
 K'etr, pi. tr'elr, or Is'elr, n. „a whip". See the Note after kolsi. 
 Ki, pr. ol)j. „it"; e. g. o >vaT-ki ro-petr, „he bought it in town." 
 Kr, pr. emph. abbr. „it, this" for kia; e. g. ka-lapso-ka-lsi ki' 
 
 taho ake, „this is not the end of it," lit. ,.the end of it 
 
 (its end) it not this." 
 Kl-6-kT, adv. — ke-6-ke, or ko-ko. See ke-6-ke. 
 Kia, j.r. emph. „il, this." Sometimes it refers to the noun k'a, 
 
 „time", when it ma^- be given by „this lime," in which case 
 
 it is sometimes preceded by tenoii, „lo day." E. g. ka-bep- 
 
 ka-mi kia ^i tsi, „this is my spoon," 
 Kia-ke, pr. dem. prox. comp. „lhis" or „i! (isj this" or „this it 
 
 (is)," lit. ,.it this;" e. g. ka-bep-ka-mi kia-ke, „this is my 
 
 spoon," lit. „my spoon it (is) this.' 
 Kia yi, j „namely, Ihal is, that is to say," lit. „il is;" e. g. 
 Kia yi !io, 3 ak'afa ka K'nru, kia \i iho) am-beibal, „lhe book 
 
 of God, that is the Bible." 
 Kil, a-, pi. e, or tra; or o-, pi. tra-, n. „ground-pig." 
 K'lma, pi. ts'ima, » n. „smoke"; e. g. k'l'ma ka-bana, „a great 
 K'imo, pi. ts'iriio, ' smoke." 
 
 Kima, ma-, n. „soor'; e.g. ma-kima nia-lal, „much soot." 
 K'in, adj. num. ,.one"; e.g. ka-bep k'in, „one spoon." 
 Kiha, V. rel. r= koha, which see. 
 Ki'ra, V. a. „agitale, disturb, trouble" (as people, or water); e.g. 
 
 w'an, tse kira am'anir, „boy, do not disturb the water." 
 Kisi, V. n. „ escape, be saved;" e. g. o kisi ri, „he was saved 
 
 there." 
 Kisi, ka-, n. verb. „act of being saved" or „of escaping, sal- 
 vation." 
 Kisia, V. cans. „cause to escape, save;" e. g. kono kisia-mi ri, 
 
 „he saved me there." 
 Ko, V. n. „go". When used as an aux. it may sometimes be 
 
 given by „come, happen." E. g. sa ko rgk pa-la, „wc go
 
 — 189 — 
 
 to reap (tut) rice;" — na kg ro-Kamp, „lhey go to Free- 
 town." 
 Ko, eonj. „and", = ka and ke; this form is used before words 
 with or before the vowels o, o nnd u; e. g. k;i ma na der 
 etc., „and when they came etc." 
 Ko, adv. „then, when," = ka and ko; this form is used before 
 words with or before the vowels o, o and u in the minor 
 proposition. If an}' time is indicated in the antecedent, or 
 if the adv. mo, „when" j. recedes; then ko h.^s the sense of 
 „then"; otherwise it has the sense of „when"; e. g. o \i 
 ka ko ro-Kamp, ko o-tsik o der, „he was about to go lo 
 Freetown, when the stranger came;" — mo o yi ka ko ro- 
 Kamp, tsik der, „when (as) he was about to go to Free- 
 town, (then) the stranger came;" — 1 pon gbo gbal an-reka, 
 ko der, „1 had just written the letter, when (then) he 
 came," = „1 had ju>.l written the letter before he came." 
 See the Note after ke, adv. 
 Kg, pr. obj. „him, her;" e. g. 1 n;uV-kg, „I saw him." 
 Ko? pr. inter. „what'?" e. g. ko ma ma \g-e? „what art thou 
 
 doing?,, 
 K"g, abbr. of k'gn, „his, her;" this form is used if it comes to 
 stand between the two constituent parts of a comp. noun; 
 as: ka-mar-k'g-tr'el, for ka-mar-lr'el-k'gh, „his luckiness." 
 Ko-ko, adv. = ki-6-kT, or = ke 6 ke, which see. 
 Ko iie-e? „what is the matter? why?" for: ko na \i e? lit. 
 
 „what is it?" 
 Ko ne ~ e? „what is the mailer that — ? why — ?" K. g. ko 
 
 iie ma fanta ano-e? „whY doest thou lie down here?" 
 Ko no ba-e? „what is the matter now?" lit. ,,what is it now?" 
 
 for: ko ha yi ba-e? 
 Ko tr'el-e? „how is this?" „how comes this?" lit. „what thing?" 
 Ko tr'ei tra — e? „why — ?" „what is the matter that—?" 
 
 E. g. ko tr'el tra ma der-e? „wliy does! thou come?" 
 Ko'i, for kori, v. a. „salute; visit." This form is used in salu- 
 tations before the obj. pr. of the 2d. pws. plur., as: ko'i-nn, 
 pa-iia! „I salute you. Sirs!"
 
 — 190 — 
 
 K'olo, pi. tr'olo, n. „holIow" fas in a tree); „cavit,v" (as of a 
 bowl); e. g. k'dlo kn-bana, „a large hollow." 
 
 Kolone, v. refl. (rad. kolo), „comrnend oneself, boast;" e. g. o 
 kolone gbo ka-tsin, „he boasts but in vain." 
 
 Rom, V. a. „bring forth, bear, produce" (as a woman a child, 
 or a free fruit); e. g. o-kara owo kom-mi, „the mother who 
 bare me." 
 
 Kom, V. n. „bring forth, bear, be fruitful, bear fruit; bring forth 
 children, be delivered of a child;" e. g. an'antr afie na kom 
 he, „this tree does not bear;" — o-rani-ka-mi o kom he, 
 „m}' wife does not bring forth children" = „is barren." 
 
 Kom, adj. „bringing forth; born, brought forth;" e. g. an'antr 
 a-kom ma-komi ma-fino, „a tree bringing forth good fruit." 
 
 Kom, kcj-, n. verb. ,,act of bringing forth, birth, parturition, de- 
 livery; act of being born;" e. g. ka-kom-k'on, „her parturi- 
 tion," or also „his being born;" — an-Io na ka-kom-ka-mi, 
 I tr'a he ni, „as !o the time of my delivery, I do not know 
 it;" — ka-kom-ko, „the act of bringing him forth," = „his 
 birth." 
 
 Komane, v. rel. and refl. „bear with-" (as a child with a natural 
 spot, or with four fingers on one hnnd), lit. „bring forth with" 
 or „on oneself;" e.g. am-mera-n'oii ana 'a komane-ko na tofal, 
 „he is of a natural mild temper," or „his temper is naturally 
 mild," lit. „his temper with which they bare him is mild." 
 Also simply „bear"; e. g. ya 'a komane-ko gbo, „thus he 
 was born," lit. ,,'hus they just bare him." 
 
 Komane, adj. „innate, inborn, natural, hereditary;" e. g. am- 
 niera iVon a-komano, „his natural temper;" r'a ra-komane 
 ran, „that is a hereditary thing." 
 
 Komar, v. rel. „bear, bring forth," lit. „bear-at-," but the suff. 
 is here redundant; e. g. ro 'a komar-ko, „where he was 
 born," lit. „where they brought him forth." 
 
 Komi, n-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „fruit"; e. g. ma-komi ma-ffno, 
 „good fruit." 
 
 Kom'ra, o-, pi. a-, n. „a woman in childbed," for komara. 
 
 Kom'ra. ra-, pi. tra-, n. „generation, offspring, descendants,
 
 ^' 
 
 — 101 ~ 
 
 posterily;" also „one's domeslics, those under one's con- 
 trol," or „under the head of a family." 'I'hc phir. is used 
 of a plurality of families, the sing, being already a collective 
 noun; e. g. 'ra-komra-ra-mi, „my posterity." 
 
 Kon', pr. emph. abbr. for kono, „he, she; him, her;" e. g. kgn' 
 taho yo tsi, „it is not he who did it," or ,.not he did it;" 
 — kon' son, „he alone." 
 
 K'on, pr. poss. „his, her," for ka ko „of him, of her," with the 
 euph. n added; e. g. ka-bep-k'on, „his spoon." 
 
 K'on, pr. obj. „him, her." This form is used if it follows a comp. 
 loc. prep., which is followed by the prep, ka, k'on being a 
 contraction of ka kg like the preceding pr. pnss. ; e.g. ka-troii 
 ka Sori de ka-troh-k'on, ,.between Sori and between him." 
 
 Kon'a? for kono-a? pr. inter. „where is he?" = Ihe Hcbr. 1ij<- 
 e.g. kon'a Sori? „\vhere is Sori?" The subst. verb „be" 
 is always implied. Cf. the sufl. -A? above. 
 
 Kona, = ki'na, v. rel. (rad. kin, or kon), „]nake-to fall down" or 
 „drop off for-" (as the wind, or a person, fruit from a tree 
 for one); e.g. an-fef na kotia-mi ma-lemre, „lhe wind made 
 limes to fall down for me." 
 
 Kgne, v. refl. (rad. ko), „go away, go, depart, leave, slarl," lit. 
 „go oneself;" as applied to the water „f]ow"; e.g. g kgne 
 dis ra-fgl, „he left yesterday evening " 
 
 Konkon, v. a. „shake, shake off" (as dust fron) cloth), ,.shake out, 
 knock out" (as dirt from the inside of a box by knocking on it), 
 „knock on;" e. g. konkon ak'uma, kama e-di e wur, „knock 
 on the box thai Ihe dirt may come out." 
 
 Kgno, pr. emph. „he, she; him, her;" e. g. kong yg-l.si, „he 
 did it." 
 
 K'gng, pi. tr'gng, n. „lurkish sabre, scimitar, curvaled cutlass." 
 
 Kgng-kgngne, pr. refl. „he himself, she lierself; himself, her- 
 self;" e. g. kgng-kgngne g yO-t.si, „he himself did il." 
 
 Kgngn, pr. abs. „he, she; him, her;" e.g. w'lini las kgngn, „he 
 is a bad person," lit. „a bad (wicked) person he," 
 
 K'gnle, pi. Ir'gnle, ^ n. „an instrument resembling a bell witii 
 
 some rings on il to hold it wilii the 
 
 n. yiiie, pi. 11 ynie, \ 
 K'gnten, pi. tr'gnlen, ^
 
 — 192 — 
 
 fingers, while it is struck with some fingers of the other 
 hand." It is made of iron or brass, and used by Chiefs, 
 when they wish to pause, or stop a little in speaking or in 
 their address to the court, and to give a sign to their women 
 to applaud him by clapping their hands. 
 K'or, pi. Ir'or, n. „belly, abdomen; bowels;" also sometimes ap- 
 plied to the „womb", though they have the word, ka-fanir 
 ka am-poru for it, which signifies „the bed of the foetus;" 
 hence it is also used of the „menses", or the „menstruation" 
 of women (cf. tril k'or), and of „pregnancy"; fig. „the inside" 
 (of a thing); e.g. ak'or-k'on ka siile, „his bowels are loose," 
 — „he has diarrhoea," = o ha k'or ka-sule; — ak'6r-ka- 
 mi ka ban, „my belly aches," = „I have griping pains;" — 
 ak'or ka am-poti, „the inside of the cup." With ro- it is 
 also used as a preposition and postposition; see rok'or. 
 K'or, pi. tr'or, n. „farin"; e. g. o yi ro-k'or, „he is in the farm." 
 Kori, V. a. ,,go to see, visit; salute;" e. g. o ko kori owontr- 
 k'on, „he went to see his brother;" — kori 'u, Pa! „I sa- 
 lute thee. Sir!" 
 Kos, a-, pi, e-, n-. „cheek"; e. g. e-kos-y'oh, „liis cheeks." 
 Kgt, V. n. „walk, go about;" e. g. k(di-ko o tra kot ri, „look 
 him, he is walking there;" - an-yal ane na kot o-fino, „this 
 boat walks well." 
 K'ota, pi. tr'ota, n. „cloth"; e. g. k'ola ka-fino, „fine cloth." 
 Kota, conj. = hdli, „lhough, although, even if;" e. g. kota w'uni 
 k'in ka an-fi-e o Ira der na ronah etc., „ although one of the 
 dead would come to them etc." 
 Kotar, V. rel. (rad. kot), „tie on, tie" (as a cow); e. g. kotar 
 o-na ka ak'antr, „tie on the cow to the post;" — kotar am- 
 bil ro-kantr, „tie the canoe to the post." 
 Kotsi, = kot'ri, for kofari, v. rel. and revert. „untie, loose, let 
 loose" (as a cow, or a bird from a trap); e. g. kotsi am- 
 bamp, „let the bird loose;" — kotsi afi-soT, „loose the horse." 
 From kot, „tie." 
 Note. The r is frequently changed into s, and vice versa after t, 
 as tse, fortre, adv. „donot,not;" or as a i)r. dem. „this, these."
 
 — 193 — 
 
 Kotsine, v. rel. revert, and refl. for kotarine, „loose oneself, make 
 oneself free, untie oneself" (as a cow, or horse, or a bird 
 from a trap, or a person from some difficulty) ; e. g. afi-soT 
 kotsine, „the horse made himself loose." See the preced- 
 ing Note. 
 
 Krifi, 0-, pi. a-, n. „krifi, spirit," 1, e. „demon, tutelary spirit, 
 genius, a being of an intermediate order between God and 
 men, a sort of demigod, and in the opinion of the Temnes 
 an object worthy of adoration," It answers to the Gr. 
 Sccifxoviov or dai'ficor. See Pref. §§. 11 — 13 and 6c<i'ixcov in 
 Passow's Gr. Lexicon. The religion of the Temnes consists 
 properly in the worship of these krifis. 
 
 Krif], adj. „belonging to a krifi," or „produced by a krifi," hence 
 „superior, extraordinary;" e. g. pa-la pa-krifi, „krifi's rice" 
 (as they believe that it is not planted by men, but by 
 krifis), also called: pa-yaka. Krifi is used here to indicate 
 the excellency of a thing like the Hebr. D^rhi< in Jon. 3, 3. 
 or in Gen. 10, 9. 
 
 Krifi, ro-, „the residence" or „abode of krifis and of departed 
 spirits, the invisible" or „fulure world, hades," answering 
 to the Gr. udr^g, and to the Hebr. '^INIJ''. See Pref. § 10; 
 and Tradit. p. 36—40. 
 
 Ka, a-, pi. P-, n. „Mandingo yam" (which is while). 
 
 Kul, adj. „smoked, dried" (as meat); e. g. o-sem o-ktil, „smokod 
 beef." 
 
 Kulo, V. n. „cry, lament;" also „low" (as a cow); „howI"; e.g. 
 'a kulo traka tron, „they lamented for him." 
 
 Kulo, ka-, n. verb. „act of crying" or „lamenting" or „lowing; 
 lamentation, crying;" e.g. ka-kulo-ka-nan, „their lamentation." 
 
 K'lima, pi. tr'iima, n. „box"; also „coffin"; e.g. ar'iima-ra-mu 
 ra yi ro-k'iima, „thy shirt is in the box." 
 
 Kunk, a-, pi. e-, or Ira-, n. „fence, barrier, hinderance;" also 
 „yard", or „the place fenced in;" also „the metal handle 
 on a gun, because it is, as it were, a fence to protect the 
 trigger"; fig. „protection"; e.g. o-kara-ka-mi o yi ro-kunk, 
 „my mother is in the yard;" — a-kunk iia yi-su ratron, 
 
 Temne - Worterbuch. i3
 
 — 194 — 
 
 „there is a fence between us;" — o yi-mi a-kunk, „he is 
 a protection to me." 
 
 K'upo, pi. tr'upo, » n, „feather, pen, quill;" e. g. ak'upo-ka-mi, 
 
 K'lipa, pi. tr'iipa, ' „my pen." The full form for a writing pen 
 is k'upo ka-gbala, lit. „a feather to write with." 
 
 Kur, adj. „old, ancient" (not applied to rational beings, for which 
 they use baki; but to inanimate things, and to irrational 
 beings); e.g. e-16pra e-kur, „old wearing apparel," or „old 
 clothes;" — o-na o-kur, „an old cow." 
 
 K'riru, pi. tr'uru, n. „heaven, sky; deity, God." Though the 
 verb. pr. for this noun according to analogy is ka; yet when 
 applied to God we have employed the general form as used 
 for nouns animate, i. e. o; but when used of „heaven", the 
 form ka. This word may also be used of false gods. E. g. 
 ak'uru ka waran tenon, „the sky is bright to day; — K'Qru 
 bapar d'er 6 d'er, „God is everywhere present." It seems 
 to be cognate to the Gr. 6 xvqioc, „lord." 
 
 K'urumasaba, n. „God, the supreme Being." This is the most 
 solemn name of the Deity. Cf. Pref. § 11. a. 
 
 Kus, V. a. „emply" (as a box); „pour out" (as liquids); also 
 „close by a public procession and festival" (as the great fast, 
 or the Ramadan of the Mohammedans; or the initiatory course 
 of instruction of the Bondo Institution, after which the Bondo 
 girls or women are discharged); hence also: „discharge; keep, 
 hold" (as a feast); e. g. kus ak'unia, „ empty the box;" — 
 'a kus an-sum tenon, „they closed the fast to day by a public 
 procession;" — an-rigba o kus am-bondo tenon, lit. „the 
 headvvoman of the Bondo Institution closed the Bondo cere- 
 monies to day by a public procession," = „the headwoman 
 of the Bondo Institution discharged the Bondo girls to day." 
 
 Kut, n. n. „scoop water, lade water, draw water;" o ko kut, 
 „he goes to scoop water." 
 
 Kut, V. a. scoop, draw, lade" (as water); e. g. sa kg kut m'antr, 
 „we go to draw water." 
 
 Kiila, V. rel. „scoop-for-, bide-for-, draw-for-" (as water); e. g. 
 kuta-mi m'antr, „he scooped water for me."
 
 — 195 — 
 
 Kuta, V. a. „plant, sow" (as rice), lit. „cover over" (the rice 
 sown); e. g. sa ko kuta pa-la, „we go to plant rice." 
 
 Kwea, 0-, pi. a-, n. „one of the Quea people, a Quea Temne." 
 See Pref. § 4. a. 
 
 Kwi, 0-, or a-, pi. tra-, n, „alligator." 
 
 L. 
 
 La, V. n. „be full, increase, be numerous, be plentiful, be abun- 
 dant;" e. g. akaro ka la, „the bowl is full;" — an-fam na 
 la ri, „the people are numerous there." 
 
 La, V. rel. „be full of, be full with, be filled with;" e. g. ak'^ro 
 ka la m'antr, „the bowl is full of water;" — o la ka-tsemp, 
 „he was full of wisdom." 
 
 La, ka-, pi. pa-, n. „rice". The sing, is hardly ever used. E. g. 
 pa-la pa-fino, „fine rice." 
 
 La, V. aux. „use, be used;" it indicates habit of exercising the 
 energy, denoted by the verb, and often serves to express 
 the adverbs „habitually, usually, always," and is construed 
 with the short form of the Infinitive; e. g. mo o la yo, „as 
 he used to do;" — mo mo la yo, „as he is used to do;" 
 — la ko ri, „he used to go there;" — me me la yo, 
 „as I usually do." It answers to the Lat. soleo. 
 
 LMti, V. a. „turn upside down, reverse, turn over" (as a leaf, 
 or as a fish on a grate), „turn up; shift" (as a sail); „turn" 
 (as a canoe its proper course); e. g. lafli am-bil, „turn the 
 canoe upside down;" — lafti am-bela, „shifl the sail." 
 
 Lai, V. n. ,.be many, be numerous, be plentiful, be great;" ap- 
 plied to the sun „be" or „stand slill high (above the 
 horizon);" e. g. ma-lemre ma laT ri, „limes are plentiful 
 there." 
 
 Lai, adj. „many, numerous, great;" e. g. a-fam a-lal, „many per- 
 sons;" r'unia ra-lal, „a great multitude." 
 
 Lai, 0-, adj. but used adverbially „much"; e. g. o fof o-lai traka 
 troh, „he spoke much about him." 
 
 Lakat, a-, pi. e-, n. „stump of a tree, trunk of a tree, after its 
 
 13*
 
 — 196 - 
 
 head," or „branches have been cut off;" e. g. o botr-ni ka 
 
 an-lakal, „he put it on the slump." 
 Lakte, v. n. „look up, lift up the eyes, look upwards;" e. g. 
 
 lakte, „he looked up." 
 Lai, a-, pi. e-, or tra-, n. „grass-field, pasture-field;" e. g. o yi 
 
 ro-lal, „he is on the grass-field." 
 Lama, a-, pi. e-, n. ,.locust"; e. g. e-lama e-lal, „many locusts." 
 Lambe, a-, pi. e-, n. „present in token of respect" or „homage, 
 
 homage, present; e.g. 'a kere-ko a-lambe, „lhey carried a 
 
 present to him in token of respect" (as to a king); — ha 
 
 yo-ko a-lambe, „they did homage to him." 
 Lane, V. a. „believe. believe in, trust in, confide in;" e. g. o 
 
 hine he tsi, „he does not believe it;" — o lane Yisua, „he 
 
 believes in Jesus." 
 Lane, v. n. „beHeve, confide;" e. g. o lane he, „he does not 
 
 believe." 
 Lane, ka-, n. verb. „act of believing" or „of trusting in; be- 
 lieving, faith, confidence;" e. g. ka-lane-k'oh, „his faith;" — • 
 
 ka-lane-ko, „the act of believing in him." 
 Lahba, o-, pi. a-, n. „a young man, a man," espec. „a young 
 
 man dressed in a showy manner to attract the attention of 
 
 females;" e.g. kali o-laiiba o-fino, „look a fine young man." 
 Lank, a-, pi. e, n. „thigh; leg" (as of meat); in the pi. „the 
 
 lap;" e. g. ow'ahet o fanta ka e-l§hk ya o-kara-k'oh, „the 
 
 little child lies in the lap of its mother." 
 Lanka, v. a. „swing" (as in a hammock); ,.stir up" (as rice in 
 
 a bowl of water, so that the stones may settle down, when 
 
 washing it); e. g. 'a lahka-ko ro-tenta, „they swung him in 
 
 the hammock." 
 Lansa, adv. „perhaps; e. g. lansa o der, „pcrhaps he comes." 
 Lap, V. a. „stir up, keep up, poke" (as fire by putting its fuel 
 
 in order or together); e. g. lap an'antr, „stir up the fire." 
 Lap, V. n. „be ashamed, be modest;" e. g. ha lap tra yo-tsi, 
 
 „lhey are ashamed to do it." 
 Lap, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „shame, modesty;" e. g. o ba ma- 
 lap, or: ba i-lap, „he is ashamed," lit. „he has shame;"
 
 -- 19? - 
 
 — won ma-lap, „he got ashamed," lit. „he entered (into) 
 
 shame." The sing, is seldom used. 
 Lapar, v. rel. „be ashamed of-;" also ,.forgive"; e. g. o w'an, 
 
 1 lapar-mu gbo! „oh boy, I am but ashamed of thee!" o 
 
 lapar-mi, „he forgave me." 
 Lapar, ka-, n. verb. „act of being ashamed of, act of forgiving, 
 
 forgiveness;" e. g. ka-lapar-k'on, „his forgiveness." 
 Lapatr, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „a burning stick, a fire-brand, torch;" 
 
 e. g. fil aka-lapalr, „turii the torch to and fro" or „round" 
 
 (to keep it burning). 
 Lapra, a-, pi. e-, n. „a skull-cap, cap;" e. g. a-lapra a-fino, .,a 
 
 fine cap." 
 Lap'ro, i v. doubl. rel. for lapara, (rad. lap), „forgive-to-," lit. 
 Lap'ra, ^ „be ashamed of (one) for" or „on account of" (a thing); 
 
 e. g. lap'ro-mi-tsi, „he forgave it to me." 
 Lap'ro, ^ ka-, n. verb. „act of forgiving-to-, forgiviug, forgive- 
 Lap'ra, * ness; e.g. ka-lap'ro-k'on, „his forgiveness." 
 Lap'so, \ V. cans, and inch. lit. „get made late, get made last, 
 Lap'sa, ' get finished," hence „be last." As an aux. it serves 
 
 to express the adv. „last", or „the last time;" e. g. kono 
 
 lap'so der, „he came last;" — me I lap'so naiV-kg, „\vhen 
 
 I last saw him." It is construed with the short form of the 
 
 Infinitive, and is derived from Ihr obs. root lap, „be late," 
 
 for which they now use the inch, form lapo, „get late, be 
 
 late." 
 Lap'so, \ adj. „last, hindmost;" e. g. ka an-rei a-lap'so, „on 
 Lap'sa, > the last day;" — ana yi a-h]p'so, „they who are last." 
 Lap'so, ^ ka-, n. verb. „state of being last, end; e. g. I yema 
 Lap'sa, > nahk ka-lap'so ka ka-trak, „I want to see the end of 
 
 the palaver." The def. form is sometimes used to express 
 
 the adv. ,,the last hime," for which see ka-lap'so under k; 
 
 as also for: ka ka-lap'so in the sense of „al last." 
 Lap'so ka-, ka-, see ka-lapso ka- under k. 
 Las, V. cat»s. pass. (rad. la), „be filled," hence also „be full" (as 
 
 bottles, or as the moon) ; e. g. an'of na yema las, „the moon 
 
 wants to get full," = „is about to be full."
 
 — 198 
 
 Las, adj. „filled, full;" e. g. ari'of a-las, „the full-moon." 
 
 Las, V. n. ,,be bad" (morall}' and physically); „be wicked, be 
 
 evil; be ugly" (as a person); e. g. ow'uni owe o las gba, 
 
 ,,lhis person is very wicked." 
 Las, adj. „bad; wicked, evil; ugly;" e. g. o-bera o-las, „an ugly 
 
 woman." 
 
 Las, 0-, adj. but used adverbially „badly, amiss, wrong;" e. g. 
 'a rusam-ko o-las, „they brought him up badly;" — o yo- 
 mi o-las; „he treated me badly;" — o yg-tsi o-las, „he did 
 it amiss." Cf. also yo o-las, under Y. 
 
 Las, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „badness, wickedness, iniquity, bad 
 character, evil; e. g. o ba ma-las, „he is of a bad character," 
 lit. „he has a bad ch." or „badnpss" ; — anai-las-ngn, = 
 ma-las-m'oh, „his wickedness." The sing, is but seldom used. 
 
 o 
 
 Lasa, v. inch. (rad. las), „get bad, get spoiled" or „corrupted" (as 
 rice) ; „get ugly" (as one's face by age or sickness) ; as applied 
 to the womb, or to the embryo „abort"; e. g. apa-la pa lasa, 
 „the rice got spoiled;" — ak'or-k'on ka lasa, „she aborted," 
 = „she had an abortion," lit. „her womb got spoiled." See 
 also poru. 
 
 Lcisane, v. cans. rel. and refl. (rad. la), „fill for oneself" (as a vessel) ; 
 also „be filled with-, be full with-" (as a sail with wind) ; \\\. 
 „fill itself with-;" e, g. am-bela na lasane a-fef, „the sail is 
 full with wind;" — o lasane ak'aro, „he filled the bowl for 
 himself." 
 
 Lasar, V. caus. and rel. (rad. la), „fill up, fill, make full" (as a vessel, 
 or as wind a sail) ; „fulfil" (as one's word or promise) ; e. g. 
 an-fcf na Idsar am-bela, „the wind fills the sail;" — am'antr 
 ma lasar ak'aro, „the water fills the bowl;" — Q hisar ar'im 
 ara q tran-iia, „he fulfilled the word, which he promised 
 to them." 
 
 Lasar, caus. rel. and pass. „be filled up, be full" (as a vessel, or 
 sail); „be fulfilled" (as a promise); fig. „be complete" (as a 
 number) ; e. g. ak'aro ka lasar, „the bowl is filled up" = „is 
 full;" — am-bela lia lascir, „the sail is full;" — am'antr ma 
 Ira lasar, „the tide is getting full."
 
 — 199 — 
 
 Lasar, v.caus. (rad.las), „make bad, spoil, corrupt;" also,, transgress, 
 violate" (as a law); lit. „act badly towards;" — o lasar apa-hi, 
 „he spoiled the rice;" also „profane" (as a sacred place). 
 
 Lasarne, v. caus. and refl. „spoil" or ,, corrupt oneself, make 
 oneself offensive; offend, sin;" e. g. o lasarne ka K'uru, ,,he 
 sinned against God;" — lit. ,,act badl_y towards oneself" =^ 
 „make oneself bad." 
 
 Lekane, v. recipr. (rad. lek), „lie with each other, have sexual 
 commerce with each other" (as man and wife; but also used 
 of an unlawful sexual commerce); hence „commit impurity 
 with each other;" e. g. 'a ta lekane he, „they had no sexual 
 commerce with each other as yet." 
 
 Lei, a-, or i-, pi. ma-; or sing, a-, pi. e-, n. „country-bean;" e.g. 
 na di gbo ma-lel, „they ate only country-beans." 
 
 Lela, V. impers. caus. (rad. lelj, „make tired, lire;" e.g. pa ta lela 
 he mi, „I have not yet got tired," lit. „it did not yet tire me," 
 (the inch, sense is implied in the form of the verb. pr. ; — 
 lela-mi, „I am tired," lit. „it tired me." The object be- 
 comes the subject with such impers. verbs in an Eng. trans- 
 lation. 
 
 Lemp, adv. „quickly, straightways; fast; abruptly;" e. g. der ba 
 lemp-a, „come here quickly;" — o gbiike lemp, „he ran fast." 
 
 Lemp -lemp, adv. intens. or emph. „very quickly; very fast;" 
 e.g. an'ei na lolas apa-la lemp-lemp, „the sun ripens the 
 rice very fast." 
 
 Lemne, v. a. „bid farewell to;" e. g. o lemne-mi tenon, „he bid 
 farewell to me to day." 
 
 Lemre, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „lime, species of lemon;" e. g. 
 ma-Iemre ma-lal, „many limes." 
 
 Len, V. n. „sing"; an-fet ane ha len o-fino, „these children sing 
 well." Also „blossom, get blossoms." 
 
 Len, V. a. „sing"; e. g. ha leh i-leh, „they sung a hymn." 
 
 Leh, ka-, n. verb. „act of singing, singing;" e. g. ka-leh-k'oh, „his 
 singing." 
 
 Leh, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „song, hymn, poem;" also „air, tune;" 
 e. g. ah-leh ahe ha rami o-boti-tral, „this song sounds
 
 — 200 — 
 
 sweetly," lit. „this song sounds sweet to hear;" — i-leh 
 i-tofal, „a soft tune." 
 
 Lena, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „tail"; e. g. wop o-na ka ka-lena, „hold 
 the cow hy the tail;" — ka-lena ka-boli, „a long tail." 
 
 Lehi, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „flower; Llossom;" e. g. ma-lehi ma- 
 fino, „fine flowers." 
 
 Ltihken, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „neighbouring yard." AVith ro- it be- 
 comes a prep, or a postp., as also an adv. See rolenken. 
 
 Lefiki, V. a. „serve" (as God); „wait upon, attend to, attend" 
 (as a servant his master); also „treat well;" e. g. o lenki-mi 
 o-fino, „he serves me well;" — o leriki o-tsik, „he treated 
 the stranger well." 
 
 Len'sir, i v. freq. or intens. and rel. (rad. len), ,,praise" or „cele- 
 
 Len'sir, ' brate by singing," ht. „sing about-;" e.g. 'a leiVsir- 
 ko tenon, „they celebrated him by singing to day;" also „mock 
 by a satirical song." 
 
 Lim, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „neck" (as of a person, or of a bottle); 
 e. g. ka-lim ka am-bitra, „the neck of the bottle." 
 
 Limba, o-, pi. a-, n. „one of the Limba nation, a Limba." See 
 Pref. § 4. c. 
 
 Limba, adj. „belonging to the Limba nation" or „country, limba;" 
 e. g. an-tof a-limba, „the Limba country." 
 
 Lin, v. a. „draw close" (as a person); „draw, pull, haul; draw- 
 up" (as an anchor); e. g. lih ara-beha o-bakar, „draw the 
 rope tight;" — lin an-fatr, „draw up the anchor," 
 
 Lin, V. n. „draw, pull;" e. g. w'an, lin o-fino! „boy, pull well!" 
 
 Lo, a-, n. „time"; also „turn"; e. g, me I kane-mu afi-lo fia- 
 tsi, „as I told thee that time;" — ah-lg na-tsi gbeii, „that 
 very time;" — an-lo-'a-mi nia-he, „this is my turn." 
 
 Lo na-tsi, an-, „at that time, then;" e. g. ah-lo ha-tsi ra-fi ra 
 yi he, „at that time there Avas no death." 
 
 Lo non, » „the other day, lately, a short time ago;" e. g. 'a 
 
 Lo nan, ^ yema dif-ko lo hoh, „they wanted to kill him the 
 other day." 
 
 Lokg, v. n. ,,germinate, grow, sprout, come" or „shoot forth" 
 (as seed sown); e. g. pa-la pa Idko, „rice shoots forth."
 
 — 201 — 
 
 Loko, V. a. „gro\v, bring forth, produce;" e. g. an-tgf ane na 
 loko pa-la pa-fino, „this ground produces good rice." 
 
 Loiig, a-, or i-, pi. e-, or ma-, n. „time"; also „da}'"; e. g. aii- 
 loko aiie, „lhis time;" — ma-ldko ma-sas, „three times;" 
 — a-loko a-foT-tr'eT, „a convenient time;" — 1 ko he ri, 
 hali a-loko h'ih, „I did not go there even once;" — aii- 
 loko iia-tsi laho tenon, „thal time (is) not to day;" — a- 
 loko a-beki tra kone nia-ne, „this is a fit lime 1o go," lit. 
 „a fit time to go it this." Cf. the pref, i- under the 
 „Addenda" beliind. 
 
 Loko, 0-, pi. a-, n. „one of the Loko nation, a Loko." See 
 Pref. § 4. c. 
 
 Loko, adj. „belonging to the Loko country" or „nation"; e.g. 
 aii-tof a-loko, „the Loko country." 
 
 Loko lorn, \ = ka a-loko lorn, „at a certain time, some time, 
 
 Loko lom, a- ' once, one day, some day, by and by;" e.g. 1 In 
 der kori-mu loko lom, ,.1 shall come to see thee some dav." 
 
 Loko lom, a-, „another time, another day, some other day;" 
 e. g. I tsi ko ro-Kamp a-loko lom, „I shall go to Freetown 
 some other dav." 
 
 Loko 6 loko, „always; from time to time, now and then," lit. 
 „time and time;" e. g. ye I me yo loko 6 loko, „1hus I 
 always do;" — o der romi loko 6 loko, „he comes to me 
 now and then." 
 
 Lol, V. n. „get ripe" (as fruit), „be ripe;" e.g. ma-lemre ma 
 tra lol, „limes are getting ripe." Also „get red hot, gel 
 fit for the hammer" (as iron). It is the short form of Igli, 
 „be ripe." See the Note after wos, v. n. below. 
 
 Lol, V. n. „be small, be httle," e. g. o-na owe o lol, ,,this cow 
 is small." 
 
 Lol, adj. „small, little;" e. g. w'uni lol, „a little person." 
 
 Lom, V. n. „count, reckon;" e. g, o gbali lom o-fhio, „he can 
 count well." 
 
 Lom, V. a. „counl, reckon;" also „tell, relate;" e.g. lom ah- 
 kala ahe a-fera, „count this cash;" — mo o lom am-pa, 
 „when he related the matter,"
 
 — 202 — 
 
 Lgm, ka-, n. verb, „act of counting" or „of reckoning;" e. g. 
 ka-lom-na, „the act of counting them;" — a-fam a-lai ria 
 yi ri, na tasi ka-lom, „manY persons are there, they are not 
 to count," lit. ,, — — they exceed counting." 
 
 Lorn, adj. „other, another, some, certain; such and such; next;" 
 e. g. w'uni lorn, „a certain person;" — a-fam a-lom na der 
 romi tenon, „some persons came to me to day." 
 
 Lome, ka-, pi. Ira-, n. „sheep"; e. g. ka-lome ka-bana, „a large 
 sheep." 
 
 Lomp, V. impers. „be right, be proper, be fit;" e. g, o lomp he 
 nan-i? ,,'was it not right?" — pa lomp fe tra yo atr'ei atse, 
 „it will not be right 1o do this thing." It is the short form 
 of the impers. v. lompi, which see below. 
 
 Lompar, v. cans. (rad. lomp), „load" (as a gun); „set" (as a trap); 
 lit. prob. „make fit at;" e. g. tse so lompar am-pinkar, „do 
 not load the gun again." 
 
 Lompi, V. impers. „be right, be proper;" e. g. o-16mpi, ,,il is 
 right." 
 
 Lompi, atlj. „proper, right; righteous; fit, exact;" e. g. ma-pant 
 ma-16mpi, „exacl work;" — w'uni lompi, „a righteous person." 
 
 Lompi, ma-, n. „righteousness, justice, propriety; fitness, exact- 
 ness;" ma-16mpi-m'ou, „his righteousness;" — o ba ma- 
 lompi, „he is righteous;" — ma-16mpi-ma-tsi, „the propriety 
 of it." 
 
 Lon, V. a. „pour out, shed, spill" (as liquids); „ upset" (as a 
 vessel with liquid, or as a storm a canoe) ; e. g. Ion am'antr, 
 „pour out the water." 
 
 Lofia, » V. inch. „get spilled; run over, overflow" (as water); 
 
 Lono, ^ „capsize, upset, sink, perish" (as a canoe, or people at 
 sea); e. g. am'antr ma lona, „the water ran over;" — am- 
 bil na loiia ro-ban, „the canoe upset at sea;" — an-farn na 
 lono ro-m'antr, „the people perished in the water." 
 
 Lop, ka-, pi. e-, n. „fish"; e. g. kali, ktj-lop ka-bana! „look, a 
 large fish!" 
 
 Lopra, adj. „belonging to dressing" or „clothing"; also „dres- 
 sed;" e. g. y'etr e-16pra, „clothes" or „wearing apparel."
 
 — 203 — 
 
 Losir, V. a. „clothe, dress, give clothes to;" e. g. o 16sir-mi, 
 „he clothed me." Also „wrap in" (as a corpse in cloth). 
 
 M. 
 
 M', pref. indef. and insep. „a, an;" e. g. m'antr, „w'ater; tide," 
 ; for ma-antr. 
 
 Ma-, pref, indef. ,,a, an;" e, g. ma-bone ma-bana, „a great joy." 
 
 Ma, adv. „how, as," = me and mo; this form is used before 
 words with, or before the vowel a; e g. ar'iin ra K'uru ra 
 trori-su, ma sa ba tra ramne K'Qru, ,,the word of God tells 
 us, how we are to worship God." 
 
 Ma, adv. „when, after; while, as," = me and mo; this form is 
 used before words with, or before the vowel a; e. g. ka nia 
 na nan--ko, na tsela-ko, ,,and when they saw him, they 
 called him;" — ma na dira, „while they slept;" — ma iia 
 ma gbal-e, ,, while they were writing." 
 
 Ma, prep. poss. „of"; e. g. ma-tol ma K'Qru, „the goodness of 
 God." 
 
 Ma, conj. „as, because," = me and mo; this form is used be- 
 fore words with, or before the vowel a; e. g. ma an-fam 
 afie na keia e-trdko, tsfa som o-bal o soinpa-na, „because 
 these people stole fowls, therefore the king punish(^d them." 
 
 Ma — ? adv. ,,why?" = me and mo; this form is used before words 
 with, or before the vowel a, and this sense the forms ma, 
 me and mo have, if they are followed by the in'er. suff -a? 
 at the end of the proposition. The verb, pronouns of the 
 2d. pers. sing, and pi. are sometimes contracted with this 
 adv., the vowel of the pr. being cut off; and in the 3d. pers. 
 plur. they may use 'a after ma? instead of na. The form 
 ma? is used with the 2d. pers. sing, and with all three per- 
 sons in the pi.; the 2d. pers. sing takes the form man, be- 
 fore g and k, which is for: ma an, or also mam, before b, 
 m and p, which is for: ma ma, or for ma am; and in the 
 2d. pers. pi. they may use the form man, for ma na. E. g. 
 ma ma trank-a? „why art thou silent?" — man yo yan-a? 
 or: ma ma yo yaii-a? „why doest thou do so?" — mam
 
 — 204 — 
 
 bes ang-a? „wh}' doest thou dig here?" — ma main bes 
 ano-a? „wh_y arl thou digging here?" — man bes ano-a? 
 „why do ye dig here?" — ma na ma bes ano-a? „whv are 
 ye digging here?" — ma 'a bes ano-a? „Avhy do they dig 
 here?" for ma na bes ano-a? 
 Ma, part. = me and ma, used for various purposes: 
 
 1) for to express the Participle, and the Present, and some- 
 
 times also the Future lenses, in the 2d. pers. sing., and 
 in all three pers. of the pi.; if the form mina „I" is used 
 for the l***- pers. sing., they may also employ it for this 
 person; otherwise they use the form me, which see be- 
 low. E. g. be ma pon an-gbalah, ko ma ma som-e? „if 
 thou hast done with the rock, what wilt thou eat?" — 
 ma na ma gbal-e, „ while they were writing;" — re man 
 ko-e? „where art thou going to?" — See more examples 
 in the Traditions. The 2d. pers. sing, may also take the 
 forms man, and mam. What has been stated about these 
 two contracted or euph. forms under the preceding word 
 ma? applies also here. Cf. also the part, tra under T, as 
 used to form the Future. 
 
 2) for the Obligative Mood in the sense of „must, were, had." 
 
 Sometimes ma alone stands for na ma- or for 'a ma-, 
 „they must, they were, they had," in this Mood. For 
 the 2d. pers. sing, they may also here use the contr. or 
 euph. forms man and mam, about which see under ma? 
 above, and sometimes ma alone. E. g. ma ma pa he ho 
 I kone, =t mam pa he ho I kone, „thou must not say 
 that I am gone;" — ha ma pa he ho o kone, „they must 
 not say that he is gone away." The form ma is used 
 with this Mood for the 2d. pers. sing., and for all three 
 pers. in the pi., as also for the 1st. pers. sing., if the pr. 
 mina is used. It may be observed here with regard to 
 the contr. forms, that the part, and the verb. pr. are some- 
 times transposed without affecting the sense. 
 
 3) for the Hortative Mood in the sense of „let", and ,Jet us". 
 a) If ma is used in the sense of „let", the verb. pr. follows,
 
 — 206 — 
 
 as: ma ma pa he ho I kone, „let Ihee not say that I 
 am gone." But also here, instead of ma ma, they may 
 use the contr. or euph, forms man or mam, according 
 as euphony may require it. (Cf. about these forms the 
 adv. ma? above.) 
 b) If ma is used in the sense of „U't us," it is not followed 
 by the verb, pr.; except if more than two persons are 
 spoken of, in which case the pr. nan „ye" follows the 
 verb. When ma has this sense, it takes the euph. forms 
 mam, man and man; viz. mam before b, m and p; man 
 before d, n and t ; and man before g and k. E. g. man 
 dl nan, „let us eat," lit. „let us eat ye;" — ma fanta, 
 „lel us lie down;" — man kyne, „let us go." When 
 used in the sense of „let" ma is used for the 2d. pers. 
 sing., and for all three persons in the plural. 
 Note. When the particles ma, mam, man and man are fol- 
 lowed by a verb wiib a pers. object, they may be given by 
 „come now!" as: mam paia-mi! „come now accompany me!" 
 = „come now with me!" 
 
 More particulars about the particles ma, me and mo will 
 be found in the Grammar. 
 Ma, pr. subj. „thou"; e. g. ma gbali he yo-tsi, „thou canst nol 
 
 do it." 
 Ma-mi, pr. poss. „my", lit. „ofme;" e.g. ma-lemre-ma-mi, „my 
 
 lemons." 
 Ma mu, pr. poss. „thy", Ht, „ofthee;" e.g. am"aro-ma-mu, „thy 
 
 palmoil." 
 Ma-han, pr. poss. „their" , lit. „of them;" e.g. ma-lemre-ma- 
 
 nan, „their lemons." 
 Ma-nu, pr. poss. „your", lit. „ofyou;" e.g. ma-yi-ma-nu, „your 
 
 state." 
 Ma-lsi, pr. poss. neut. „ils, their ;-^ e. g. ma-komi-ma-Isi, „ils 
 
 fruit." 
 Ma-tsi, pr. dem. log. „lhat, those;" c. g. ma-yos ma-tsi, „those 
 
 deeds." 
 Malane, v. refl. n. „agree, consent to, agree to, assent;" e. g. 
 
 malane he, „he did not agree to."
 
 — 206 — 
 
 Malane, v. refl. a. „accept, receive, agree to" (as to an opinion, 
 etc.); „approve of, consent to; embrace, welcome, receive 
 with pleasure" (as a stranger); e.g. sa malane-tsi, „we agree 
 to it;" — malane o-tsik, „he received the stranger with 
 pleasure." 
 
 Maleika, o-, pi. a-, n. „angel"; Mand. maleika. From the Ar. 
 
 i^Lo, angelus. 
 
 Mam—? „why doest thou — ?" for: ma ma, or for: ma am. 
 See the adv. ma? above. 
 
 Mam, for: ma ma, or for: ma ma; see the part, ma, 1. 2. and 
 3. a above. 
 
 Mam, euph. form of ma, for which see the part, ma, 3. b. above. 
 
 M'amo, n. „thanks". It is often used as an int. in the sense 
 of ,.thank you!" or „have thanks!" lit. „thanks!" E, g. 
 m'amo, pa! „thank thee, Sir!" In order to express emphasis 
 it is repeated, as m'amo! m'amo! „thank you! thank you!" 
 It is also used as a sign of approbation by a master to his 
 people, when working well; and as a sign of congratulation 
 to parents at the birth of a child; in both these cases it is 
 generally repeated, as: m'amo nan 6! m'amo nan o! „thank 
 you! thank you!" or „that's right! that's right!" or like the 
 Ger. „bravo! bravo!" — m'amo nan 6, nyan a-baf! „that is 
 right, ye farmers!" Cf. also: mutsi w'uni m'amo below. 
 
 Man, euph. form of ma, for which see the part, ma, 3. b. above. 
 
 Man — ? „why doest thou — ?" for: ma an. See the adv. ma? 
 
 Man, for: ma an, or for: ma ma, or ma ma; see the part, ma, 
 t. 2. and 3. a. 
 
 Man, euph. form of ma, for which see the part ma, 3. b. 
 
 Man, V. a. „admonish, exhort, advise; bid; warn, chastise;" e.g. 
 man-ko Ira yo-tsi, „he exhorted him to do it;" — o-kas- 
 k'ofi tra man-ko, „his father will chastise him." Before 
 m the n is also changed into m for the sake of euphony. 
 
 Man, ka-, or a-, pi. e-, n. „ exhortation, admonition; counsel, 
 advice; warning, chastisement;" e. g. a-man a-ninis, „an aw 
 ful warning;" — ka-man ka-fino, „a good counsel."
 
 — 207 — 
 
 M^ne, 0-, pi. a-, n. „friend"; e. g. o-mane-ka-mi, „my friend." 
 
 Mane, ma-, n. „ friendship, agreement, concord;" e. g. ma-mano 
 ma-naii, „their friendship." 
 
 Mank, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „maize, Indian corn." 
 
 Mank, v.a. „hide, conceal; disguise;" also „bury" ; e.g. o mank 
 an-tis, „he hid the knife;" — o mank e-nane-y'on, „he 
 disguised his thoughts;" — 'a bene-ko ro-fof, „lhey buried 
 him in the ground." Also „keep-from-, hide -before-" or 
 „from-", as tse mi tsi mank, „do not hide it from me." 
 
 Mank, adj. „hiding, concealing;" pass. „hidden, concealed;" e.g. 
 r'a ra-mank, „a hidden thing." 
 
 Maiikne, v. refl. a. „hide oneself for-, waylay, lie in ambush 
 for-;" also „hide oneself from-" or „before — ; hide-with" 
 or „on oneself;" e. g. 'a mankne-mi ro-r'on, „they lay in 
 ambush for me in the road;" — o mankne-na, „he hid him- 
 self from them;" — o maiikne a-balma, „he concealed a 
 dagger on his person (body)." 
 
 Mankne, v. refl. n, „hide" or „conceal oneself;" e.g. na mahkno 
 ro-set, „lhey hid themselves in the house." 
 
 Mankne, adj. „hidden, concealed, secret;" e.g. tr'e! tra mankne, 
 „a hidden thing" or „matter". 
 
 ' ) adj. num. „four"; e, g. ma-lemre m'iinle, „four limes." 
 M'cinle, ' 
 
 M'antr, n. „\vat,er"; also „soup" or „beef-tea; tide;" e. g. m'antr 
 ma-bdti, „good water," lit. „sweet water," i. e. not salt, but 
 fit to drink; — m'antr ma-baki, „a strong tide." 
 M'anlrar, pi. of n'antrar, which see. i 
 
 Mar, V. a. „help, assist;" e. g. o mar-mi, „he assisted me." 
 Mar, V. impers. a. „be right" or „proper for, befit, behove, be- 
 come;" e. g. pa mar-ko tra yo-tsi, „it behoves him" or „it 
 will become him to do it." 
 Mar, V. aux. indicating duty and propriety, and expressing the 
 Engl. „ought". It is conslr. with the long and with the 
 short form of the Infinitive. E. g. ma mar tra yo-tsi, „thou 
 oughtcst to do it;" — o mar tsi yo, „he ought to do it."
 
 — 208 — 
 
 Mar-tr'el, k§-, n. „luckiness, happiness;" e. g. ka-mar-tr'el-k'on 
 or ka-mar-k'o-tr'el, „his luckiness." 
 
 Mara, v. n. „burn, flame" (as fire). See n'anfr, „fire". 
 
 Marat-marat, adv. onom. „ making maral-marat." This word can- 
 not be given otherwise; it is always used with trgm, „ rumi- 
 nate", indicating the sound which ruminating or chewing the 
 cud causes. See Fables p. 62. 
 
 Mari, ma-, n. „right, propriety, justice;" e. g. kono ba ma-mari, 
 „he is in the right;" it is the contrary of ma-teri, „wrong". 
 
 Mari-tr'ef, v. n. „be lucky, be fortunate, have good luck, be 
 happy;" e. g. kon' mari-tr'el, „he is lucky." 
 
 Mari-tr'ei, adj. „lucky, fortunate, happy;" e. g. w'uni mari-tr'el, 
 „a lucky person." 
 
 M'aro, n. „fat; palmoil;" e.g. m'aro ma-las, „bad palmoil." 
 
 Matas, V. a. freq. (rad. mat), „immerse repeatedly, dip repeatedly, 
 baptize;" e.g. 'a matas-ko ro-m'antr, „they dipped him into 
 the water repeatedly." 
 
 Me, adv. „how, as," = ma and mo; this form is used before 
 words with, or before the vowels e and i; e. g. o trori-mi, 
 me I ba tra yo-tsi, „he showed me how I am to do it;" — 
 mcj me la yo, „as I use to do." 
 
 Me, adv. „when, after; while, as," = ma and mo; this form is 
 used before words with, or before the vowels e and i; e. g. 
 me me gbal-e, „while I was writing;" — ke me I nan'-ko, 
 I tsela-ko, ,,and when I saw him, I called him." 
 
 Me, pr. dcm. prox. for ame, used for the comp. dem. pr. mia- 
 mo, which see. 
 
 Me, conj. „because, as," = ma and mo; this form is used be- 
 fore words with, or before the vowels e and i; e. g. mine, 
 me I tse yg ma-pant, I soto he a-ram, „I, because 1 did 
 no work, (I) got no pay." 
 
 Me — ? adv. „why?" = ma and mo; this form is used before words 
 with, or before the vowels e and i, and this sense me has, 
 if it is followed by the inter, suff. -a? at the end of the 
 proposition, with which it is used. This form is only used 
 for the 1st. pers. sing., and the verb. pr. I is generally dropped
 
 — 209 — 
 
 after me, if another me as the sign of the participle follows. 
 E. g. me I bes ano-a? „\vhy do 1 dig here?-' — me me bes 
 ano-a? „\\hy am I digging here?" for: me 1 me bes etc.? 
 Me, part. = ma and mo, used for various purposes: 
 \) for to express the Participle, and the Present, and some- 
 times also the Future lenses. This form is onlv used in 
 the 1st. pers. sing.; the verb. pr. 1 is then generally drop- 
 ped, so that me stands for: 1 me; e. g. kong me tila-'n, 
 „him I am selling;" — mina me der-an, „I am coming'." 
 — ye me la yo, „lhus 1 am always doing," for: ye I me 
 la yo. Cf. also the part, t.si under T, as used to form 
 the Future. 
 
 2) for the Obligative Mood in the sense of „must, was, had;" 
 
 but me alone often stands for: 1 me, „l nnist, I am, I was, 
 I had," as is also the case when used for the participle 
 etc., as staled under 1. above. The form me expresses 
 the Oblig. Mood in the Isl. pers. sing. only. E. g. me pa 
 he ho kone, = I me pa he ho o kone, „1 must not 
 say that he is gone." 
 
 3) for the Hortative Mood in the sense of „]cl", and „let me". 
 
 Also with this Mood me is only used for the Isl. pers. sing. 
 
 a) If me is used in the sense of „let-', the verb. pr. 1 may 
 
 follow; but it is also often, or generally, dropped, so 
 that me stands for: me I, „lel me."- lit. „let i;" e. g. 
 me I pa he ho o kone, or: me pa he ho o kone, .,lel 
 me not say that he is gone,' 
 
 b) If me is used in Ihe sense of „let me," the verb. pr. 1 
 
 is of course dropped, as: me pa he ho o kone, „let me 
 not say that he is gone,'' and thus may coincide with 
 the form under a, above. 
 Memar, v. rel. (rad. memj, „1ry, altcmpi, endeavour; prove, put 
 to the lest," lit. „make an allempl at-;" e. g. o memar ka- 
 gbal, „he tried to write," lit. „he attempted writing." 
 Mer, V. a. „swallow;" e. g. t.se trom-ni, mer-ni gbo, „do not 
 chew it, swallow it only," 
 
 Temne - WOrterbucli. .> .' ' .' 14 . . >•:
 
 — 210 — 
 
 Mer, ra-, pi. tra-, sometimes na-, n. „tongue"; e. g. ra-mer-r'oh, 
 ,,his tongue." 
 
 M'er, n. „salt", e. g. m'er ma-lai, „much salt." 
 
 Mera, a-, pi. e-, n. ,,mind, heart (as the seat of understanding, 
 not the organ), understanding, sense; conscience; temper; 
 it is properly the intellectual part of man;" e. g. o ba he 
 a-mera, „he has no sense;" — am-mera-n'on na kira-ko, 
 ,,his mind (conscience) troubles him;" — am-mera ana 'a 
 komane-ko, ,,his natural temper," lit. „the mind they bear 
 him with." 
 
 Mero, adj. ,,Ieft" (in opposition to ,, right"); e. g. ka-tra ka-mero, 
 „the right hand." 
 
 Mero, ka-, n. ,,the right hand" (where ka-tra, „hand" is to be 
 understood). 
 
 Mesa, a-, pi. e-, n. „table". From the Span, mesa; e. g. a-mgsa 
 a-lgl, ,,a small table." 
 
 M'etr, pi. of iVetr, n. ,,a fixed time, time, period; festival." The 
 sing, is hardly iver used. E. g. m'etr ma-boli, „a long pe- 
 riod;" — na \o m'etr ma-bana, „they hold a great festival." 
 
 Ml, pr. obj. ,,me'; e. g. o sap-mi, „he flogged me." 
 
 Mia, pr. emph. „it, this; they, them, these;" e. g. am'aro-ma-mi 
 mia y\ tsi, „lhis is my palm-oil." 
 
 Mia-me, pr. dem. comp. ,,lhis, these," lit. „it (is) this, they (are) 
 these." See an ex. under ri'es, ,,name" below. 
 
 Mian, pr. abs. ,,it, this; they, them, these;" e. g. am'es-ma-naii 
 mian, „these are their names," lit. „their names (are) these." 
 (Cf. - n under N.) 
 
 M'im, n. „liver"; e. g. mini ma-bana, „a large liver." 
 
 Min', pr. emph. abbr. „1; me;" e. g. min' taho yo-tsi, ,,it is not 
 1 who did it." 
 
 Mina, » pr. emph. „l; me;" e. g. mina yo atr'ei atse, „I did 
 
 Mine, J this thing." 
 
 Minan, pr. abs. ,,1; me;" e. g. minan-i? ,,is it 1?" 
 
 Min I a, v. n. ,,be bold, venture, dare;" e. g. o mi'nta tra fof, „he 
 ventures to speak." 
 
 Mi'nta, V. a „dare, venture, face, dare to face, dare to go near
 
 — 211 — 
 
 lo-, dare to vie with-, dare to compete with-, be a match 
 for-;" e. g. o minta he ko, „he does not dare to face him" 
 or also ,,he is no match for him." 
 
 Misidi, j a-, pi. e-, n, „mosqi]e, church;" Mand. misero. From 
 
 Misidi, the Ar, (X^suj^jo, oralorium, lemplum Muhammedis as- 
 
 Misiri, ) seclarum. 
 
 Misra, n, „Egypl". From the Ar. w.*ax), Egvptns. 
 
 Mo, adv. „how, as," = ma and me; this form is used before 
 words with, or before the vowels o and u; e. g. ma trara 
 mo yo-tsi-i? „doesl thou know how he did it?" — mo 
 mo la yo, „as he uses to do." 
 
 Mo, adv. „when, after; while, as," =: ma and mo; this form is 
 used before words with, or before the vowels o and u; e. g. 
 mo lapso mu naiik, „when he last saw thee;" — mo o 
 poll kone, iia jira Iraka di, „after he had left, they sat 
 down to eat;" — mo mo dira-e, „wliile he was sleeping." 
 
 Mo, conj. „because, as," = ma and m»j; this form is used be- 
 fore words with, or before the vowels o and u; e. g. kono, 
 mo tse yo ma-pant, o solo he a-ram, „lie, because he 
 did no work, got no pay." 
 
 Mo — ? adv. „why?" := ma and mo; this form is used before 
 words with, or before the vowels o and u; and this sense mo 
 has. if it is followed by the inter, sulf. -a? at the end of the 
 proposition, with which it is used. This form is only used 
 for^lhe 3d. pers, sing., and the verb. pr. o is generally drop- 
 ped after mo, if another mo, as the sign of (he participle 
 follows. E. g. mo g bes ang-a? „why doC' he dig here?" 
 — mo mg bes ang-a? „why is he digging here?" for; mg 
 mg bes ang-a? 
 
 Mg, prep. „according to;" e. g. o yg mg ai'iin ra g-kas-k'gii, 
 „he did according to the command of his faiher.'- This form 
 does not change its vowel for tiie sake of euphony. 
 
 Mg, part. = ma and me, used for various purposes: 
 1) for lo express the Participle, and the Present, and some- 
 times also the Future tenses. This form is only used in 
 
 14*
 
 — 212 — 
 
 the 3d. peis. sing.; the verb. pr. is then generally' dropped, 
 so that mo stands for: o mo; e. g, yo mo la yo, „thus he 
 is always doing," for: yo o mo la yo; — mo mo gbal-e, 
 „while he was writing;" — kgno mo der-an, „he is coming." 
 Cf. also the part. Ira under T, as used to form the Future. 
 
 2) for the Obligative Mood in the sense of „must, was, had;" 
 
 but mo alone often stands for o mo, „he must, he is, he 
 was, he had;" as is also the case when it is used for the 
 participle etc., as stated under 1. above. The form mo is 
 only used for the 3d. pers. sing. — E. g. mo pa he ho I 
 kgne, = o mo pa he ho 1 kone, „he must not say that 
 I am gone." 
 
 3) for the Hortative Mood in the sense of „let, let him," lit. 
 
 „let he." Also with this Mood mo is only used for the 
 3d. pers. sing. — 
 
 a) if mo is used in the sense of „let", the verb. pr. o may 
 
 follow; but it is also often, or generally, dropped, so 
 that mo stands for: mo o, „let him;" e. g. mg o pa he 
 hg 1 kgne, = mg pa he hg I kgne, „lel him not say 
 that I am gone." 
 
 b) If mg is used in the sense of „lel him," the verb. pr. 
 
 is of course dropped, as: mg pa he hg I kgne, „let him 
 not say that I am gone;" and thus the form may be 
 the same with the one under a, above. 
 Mo am'glg ma-, „according to," lit. „according to the value of— ", 
 = mg; e. g. I yg mg am'glg ma ad'im-ra-mu, „I did aiicord- 
 ing to thy word." 
 Mo hg, „as, like;" also „as if;" e. g. w'uni 6 w'iini mo yg he 
 ma-pant mg hg K'liru, „no man works like God;" — yo mg 
 hg ma 'a mam-mu; kere tie yg o-las, „do as they bid thee; 
 but do not do wrong." 
 Mg hg ma, . „according as, as;" e. g. mg hg mo mg yema tra 
 Mg hg me. [ poii yg, „as he will wish to have done." The 
 Mo hg mg, ' use of the different forms depends on euphony; 
 the first being used for the 2d. pers. sing., and for all three
 
 — 213 
 
 pers. in the pi., the second for the 1st. pers. sing., and the 
 third for the 3d. pers. sing. 
 
 Mddu, n. This word is derived from the Susu. The proper 
 sense of the term is „son (of), possessor (of)," like the 
 Hebr '7^'2; for it is also used with common names, not only 
 I with proper ones, as Trima Mydu, „a prater, a loqnacious 
 
 person," lit. ,<^ son of piating." Telma is here, no donb!, 
 the abstr. noun ka-telm;i, „prating, loquaciousness," the prefix 
 being dropped. In the Susu (and sometimes in the Temne 
 also), this word is frequently joined with the name of the 
 mother to form patronymics of males, or the names of sons. 
 Thus Namina Modu, as used in Temne, was Ihe proper name 
 of the Alikali of the Port-Loko territory in Ihe author's lime. 
 Namina was the name of one of his father's wives. As 
 polygamy is common among the Temnes, it is rather a con- 
 venient mode of distinguishing the names of the various 
 children of the different wives, who had one common hus- 
 band. Namina Modu is therefore lit. „the son of Namina." 
 The word Modu is, however, not so frecjucntly used among 
 the Temnes as among the Susus; because the Temnes may 
 express the same thing also in their own way. See Pro- 
 verb 5, p. 99. (Cf. also Tem. Grammar §. 37, 1. Note 2.) 
 
 M'olo, n. „ amount, value, price;" e. g. am'olo ma ak'ota, „the 
 price of Ihe cloth;" — ak'ota ka ba m'olg ma-baki, „the cloth 
 is valuable," lit. „the cloth has a high price." 
 
 M'on, pr. poss. „his, her," lit. „of him;" e. g. ma-bone-m'on, 
 „his joy." 
 
 M'one, n. „poverty; trouble, misery, distress;" e.g. o ba m'one, 
 „he is in trouble," lit. „he has trouble;" = m'one ma wop- 
 ko, lit. „trouble holds him." 
 
 Mone, adj. „poor, miserable;" e. g. w'nni mone, „a miserable 
 person." 
 
 Mori, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a Mohammedan, a mori-man;" derived from 
 mori, „teach, show" (as a road, and in the Mohammedan 
 sense of the word „show the right way," as they pretend 
 to do; for they often set themselves up as teachers). Vei
 
 — 214 — 
 
 more; Mand. morolu „religious people," The Hebr, rn)^ 
 
 „teacher" presents ilself. 
 Mori, adj. „belonging to a mori-man" or „to a Mohammedan;" 
 
 e. g. w'uni mori, „a Mohammedan" or „mori-man." 
 Mori, ra-,n. „the Mohammedan rehgion, Islamism, Mohammedan- 
 ism;" e. g. won' da-mori, „he embraced Islamism," =: o 
 
 ■wofi ka ra-mori, lit. „he entered Islamism." 
 Morka, a-, pi. e-, n. „whife ant, termite;" Lat. termes fatale; 
 
 e. g. e-morka e-lal, „many termites." 
 Mot, i V. aux. „be first; be before, anticipate." As an aux. it 
 Mo'a. ' serves to express the adverbs „first, before;" e. g. kono 
 
 mot bek, „he arrived first;" — mot nan ko ro;yan, „go ve 
 
 first yonder;" — der romi I niota di, „come to me before 
 
 I eat;" -- o mota mi won, „he entered before me." In the 
 
 two last senses it is used transitively. 
 Mgta, adj. „first" ; e. g. ah-rei a-mota,* „the first day." 
 Mote, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „bag, basket (to hang on one's shoulder, 
 
 made of a kind of cane), e. g. ka-mote ka-bana, ,,a large 
 
 bag." 
 Motra, V. n. „sink, go do\\n !o the bottom, sink down, go down" 
 
 (as a stone in the water, or the sun below the horizon); 
 
 also „dive" (as a duck); „be drowned;" e. g. an-fatr na 
 
 moira ro-m'antr, „the iron sank in the water;" — ar'etr ra 
 
 motra, „the sun weul down." Cf. the Lat. mergi, and the 
 
 Gr. (fi'iw. 
 Mu, pr. obj. „thee"; e. g. o tra dif-mu, „he will kill thee." 
 Mun', pr. emph. abbr. „thou; thee;" e. g. mun' tahg, „it is not 
 
 thou." 
 Mun. v. a. „drink; lap" (as a dog); e. g. o mun m'antr, „he 
 
 drank water." 
 Mnn, v. n. „drink"; e. g. o mun he, „he did not drink;" — 
 
 mun ri, „he drank of it," lit. ,.he drank there." 
 Mrino, pr. emph. „lhou; thee;" e.g. mrino mti lasar an-lis, „thou 
 
 didst spoil the knife," = „it was thou who spoiled etc." 
 Mitnoh, pr. abs. „thou, (it is) thou; thee;" e.g. w'dni las munon! 
 
 „lhou art a bad person!" lit. „a bad person thou!"
 
 — 215 — 
 
 Mun's. V. caus. (rad. mun), „give-to drink, make-to drink," Gcr. 
 „tranken", = the Gr. noriXoy; e. g. I mun's-ko, „l gave him 
 to drink." Also „cooI-in water-' (as redhot iron). 
 
 Mut, ka-, pi. tra-, n. ,.back; outside;" e. g. ka ka-mut-k'oii, „on 
 his back;" — ka-mul ka am-poti, „the outside of the cup;" 
 — kala ka-mut, „he returned the back," = „he returned." 
 With the prep, ro-it becomes also a prep, or postp., for which 
 see romiil. 
 
 Mulsi, V. a. „call, call to, bid, express" (as thanks to one, sec 
 the two next words); „invite"; e. g. 1 nui!,si-ko, „1 called 
 him." 
 
 Miitsi m'amo, „give thanks, be thankful," lit. „call thanks." 
 
 Mutsi w'uni m'amo, „give thanks to one, be thankful to one;" 
 also „congratulate one;" as: 1 mutsi-niu m'amo, „l thank 
 thee;" — o mutsi-ko m'amo traka o-komra, „he congratulated 
 
 him on the birth of a child," lit. „ on account of 
 
 the woman in child-bed." 
 
 Mutsi w'uni seke, „sympa!hize with one, express one's sympathy 
 to one;" e. g. i mulsi-ko seke, „I sympathized with him." 
 Lit. „I called pity to him." 
 
 Miitsi w'lini sen'-6, „bid one welcome, welcome one;" e. g. o 
 mutsi-mi sen'-6, „he bid me welcome." Lit. „he called wel- 
 come to me." 
 
 N. 
 
 N', pref. indef, and insep. „a, an;" e. g. n'antr, „a fire," for: 
 
 na-anlr. 
 'N-, abbr. of an-. See an ex. under sva. 
 -'N, suff abbr. form of -an. See the sufT. -an under \. 
 N'-, pref. indef. and insep. „a, an;" e. g. iVantr, „a tree." for: 
 na-anlr. 
 
 c 
 
 -N, a euph. letter added to some Adverbs and Pronouns termi- 
 nating in a vowel, as ton, „now, for: In; yah, „thus", for: 
 ya; konoh, „he", for: kono; etc. This letter corresponds 
 with the Gr. v itfalxvaTixov, These forms are always used 
 at the end of a proposition, though not exclusively; but the
 
 — 21G — 
 
 short forms are never used at the end. See more about 
 
 this in the Grammar. 
 Na-, pref. indef. „a, an," but generally used for the pi. ; e.g. n'antr 
 
 na-bana, „a large fire;" — na-bena na-bdli, „long ropes." 
 Na, pr. subj. „it, they;" e. g. an'anlr na di'mse, „the fire is 
 
 gone out." 
 Na, g-, pi. trn-, n. „ox"; also „cow"; e. g. o-na o-bana, „a large 
 
 cow." 
 Na, part. = nan, which see. 
 
 Na-, pref. indef. „a, an" (sing, and pi.); e. g. a-fam iia-ran, „two 
 
 persons;" — na-set, =: a-set, „a house." 
 Na, pr. subj. „il; they;" e.g. a-bil na yi he ri, „there is no 
 
 canoe there," lit. „a canoe it is not there;" — an-fam iia 
 
 kone, „the people have lefl." 
 Na, pr. obj. „it; them" (also used for nouns in ma-); e, g. o 
 
 bal-na, „he drove them away;" — am'antr loii-ha, „as for 
 
 the water pour it out." 
 Na, prep. poss. „of"; e. g. afi-set na Sori, „Sori's house," lit. 
 
 „the house of Sori." 
 Na, 0-, pi. a-, n. „companion, man, one of a company;" e. g. 
 
 o-ha-mu, „thy companion," lit. ,.one of thee (thine)," = 
 
 0-nan, which see below. 
 Na, pr. emph. ,,they; them;" but often used for the sing. „he" 
 
 when joined with other emph. pronouns, or with proper 
 
 names, implying the copula „and"; e.g. na Pa Kamu-e, „he 
 
 and the Iguana." 
 Nfj, pr. subj. „ye, you;" e. g. na difa-mi o-na, „ye did kill me 
 
 the cow," = „ye killed me the cow." 
 Na-tsi, pr. dem. log. „that, those;" e. g. ah-fam na-tsi, „those 
 
 persons" (spoken of before). 
 Na-t.si, pr. poss. neut. „its, their," lit. „of it; e. g. an-fon-na-tsi, 
 
 „its hair," lit. „the hair (hairs) of it." 
 
 Nabi, 0-, pi. a-, n. „prophet". From the Ar. "xj, propheta. 
 
 Nafas, V caus. (rad. nafa), „make to thrive, make to be well off; 
 e.xecute" or „carry out luckily; make prosperous, help for-
 
 — 217 — 
 
 ward; be of use to-;" e. g. o nafas ka-tsim, „he carried on 
 the war luckily;" — o nafas atr'ei atse, „he carried this thing 
 out luckilv;" — ar'a are ra nafas-mi, „1his thing helps me 
 forward" or „is of advantage to me." 
 
 Naibi, V, a. „reveal, make known" (as a secret); „prove, make 
 clear" (as one's guilt); e. g. naibi ka-keia-k'on, „prove his 
 theft." 
 
 Nak, a-, pi. e-, n. „rice boiled" or „cooked"; e. g. e-nak e-boti- 
 di, „delicious rice." 
 
 Nak-nak, ka-, n. verb. „act of gnashing" or „of striking together" 
 (as the teeth); „act of making a chattering noise with- (the 
 teeth). See the next word." 
 
 Nak-nak e-sek, ka-, n. „act of gnashing the teeth;" e. g. ka- 
 iiak-nak-k'on e-sek, „his guashing of teeth." 
 
 Nakat, adj. „fried" (as moat in a pot); e. g. o-sem o-nakat, 
 „fried beef," = u-sem u-nakal. 
 
 Nal, V. a. „abuse, use abusive language against; challenge;" e.g. 
 nal-mi, „he abused me." 
 
 Nam, V. a. „see"; it is a euph. form of nank, used before b, f, 
 m and p; e. g. mo o nain-mi etc., „when he saw me etc." 
 
 Nam'ra, v. rel. and inch. „gcl satisfied" or „saliated with food;" 
 e. g. o-na o nam'ra lie, „the cow does not get satisfied." 
 Probably from an obs nam. 
 
 Nan', V. a. euph. form of nank, used before g and k; e. g. „I 
 nan'-kg ro-petr, „! saw him in town." 
 
 Nan, part, and adv. = na, used to express the Cotijunctive, and 
 a recently past time, or the Imperfect tense, in which latter 
 case it may be given by the adverbs „to day, before" or 
 „already", or by the aux. verb „did"; e. g. be sya yi naii-e, 
 na bap-mi ka ro-k'or ka o-na, „if it had been I, ye would 
 have met me in the inside of the cow;" — I poh gbal nan, 
 = I pon' na gbal, „1 have written to day;" — 1 kane-mu 
 nail ho: tse ko, „I told thee before: do not go." — I yg-tsi 
 nan, „I did it already;" — kiiU an-soi, gwg I wai nan, „see 
 the horse, which I bouglit to day;" — iia-der na ro-i? „did 
 they come yonder?" The form naii is used more absolutely
 
 — 218 — 
 
 than na; but the latter is often connected with, or prefixed 
 to nouns indicating lime, to make that time more definite, 
 when it may be given by „last" or by „this", according to 
 the nature of the noun, with which it is used; e. g. o der 
 na ra-yan, „he came to day at noon;" — na tratrak, „last 
 night;" — na-bat, „lhis morning." This particle or adv. is 
 always used of a recently past time, or of events having 
 taken place the same day they are spoken of. Cf. also the 
 longer forms nana and nanan below. 
 
 Nan, pr. subj. „ye", a euph. and stronger form of na, generally 
 used behind the verb with the Imperative; e. g. dif-ko nan, 
 „kill ye him;" — der nan and, „come ye here." 
 
 Nan, V. a „bite"; e. g. an-tran o nan-mi, „the dog bit me." 
 
 Nan, = anan, pr. dem rem. „tha!. those;" used if it is the sub- 
 ject of a proposition without the noun; e. g. a-gbata nan, 
 „that is a mat," lit. „a mat that;" but: an-gb^ta anan, „that 
 mat." 
 
 Nan, pr. obj. „them", generally used for to express the poss. 
 pr. of the 3d. pers, pi. in connection with the poss. prep., 
 as: am'aro-ma-nan, „their palm-oil," lit. „the palm-oil of them," 
 
 Nan, pr. abs. „they; them;" e. g. iiaii na yo-tsi, „they did it," 
 = „it is they who did it." 
 
 Nan, 0, pi. a-, n. = o-na, „one of one's family" or „kindred" 
 or ^household, companion, one of one's company;" e. g. o- 
 nah konon, „this (he) is one of their company," lit. „one 
 of their company he;" — owo ka a-naii, „he who is of their 
 company;" — kali o-nan, „iook one of their company." The 
 form o-nan is used more absolutely than o-na, which latter 
 form is used with poss. pronouns. 
 
 Nana, i adv. „to day." They are stronger forms than na and 
 
 Nanah, ' nan, and as to the form nanan it may be used quite 
 absolutely; v\hile nana may be used with nouns indicating 
 time like na, to make this time more definite, as. nana bat, 
 „this morning;" — o-der nana ra-yan, „he came to day at 
 noon;" ■ — o der nanan, „he came to day;" — a-lo reke 
 ma der-e? Nanah, or: I der nanah; „what time didsl thou
 
 — 219 — 
 
 come?" „To day," or „I came to day;" nana ra-foT, 
 „lasl evening;" — na fer a-bitin nana gbes, „thpy beat drum 
 all last night." Also these forms like na and nan are always 
 used of a recently past time. Cf. na and nan above. 
 
 Nane, v. n. „think, suppose;" e. g. tro ma nane-e? „ho\v" or 
 „what doest thou think?" — 1 nane ho Sori konon, „I think 
 it is Sori," lit, „I think that Sori he." 
 
 iS^ne, V. a. „think of, remember, consider, account;" e.g. I nano- 
 tsi, „I remember it;" — I nane-ko ho w'uni fino, „I account 
 him as a good person; — tra sa nane-tsi loko 6 loko, „let 
 us always remember it." 
 
 Nane, a-, or i-, pi. e-, or ma-, n. „lhought; meaning, sense;" 
 e.g. K'liru Inira e-nane-'e-su, „God knows our thoughts." 
 Cf. the pref. i- under 1 above. 
 
 Nank, v. n. „see"; fig. „understand;" e. g. ma nank-i ? „doest 
 thou understand?" or „doest thou see?" 
 
 Naiik, v. a. „see, find; look upon, account;" e. g. sa gbali he 
 nank K'uru, kere K'dru o gbali nank tr'el 6 tr'el atra sa yo, 
 „we cannot see God, but God can see every thing which 
 we do." Fig. ,.perceive, understand." 
 
 Nafika, v. rel. „look with-on-." See the next word. 
 
 Nanka w'uni i-nei, ,,look \\ith pity" or „compassion on one;" 
 e. g. nanka-mi i-nel, „he looks with pity on me." 
 
 Nankane, v. recipr. „see each other face to face, meet each 
 other face to face;" hence also „hold a council, consult to- 
 gether;" e.g. na nankane tenon, „1hey held a council to day." 
 
 ^, , "' I adj. num. „four"; e.g. a-fam iVanle, „four persons." 
 
 Nant, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „mucus of the nose, snot, snivel." 
 
 Nant, V. a. „remove, carry away;" e. g. nant ey'etr-'e-mi, „carry 
 
 my things away;" — sa nant ey'etr eye a-lo iVin, „we carry 
 
 these things away at one time." 
 N'antr, n. „fire"; def. an'antr, „the fire," = „hell"; e. g. an'antr 
 
 na mara par-par, „lhe fire burns briskly;" — an'antr na yo 
 
 he kg o-bah. „the fire did not hurt him."
 
 — 220 — 
 
 N'anfr, pi. \'lntr, n „tree"; e. g. li'nntr a-bana, „a large tree;" 
 
 — ji'intr e-lai, „many trees." 
 Nantra, V. a. „marry" (of the male); e.g. o-lanba o nanlra ow'an 
 
 bera ka Pa Sori, „the man married the daughter of Mr. Sori." 
 N'anfrar, pi. m'antrar, n. ,,tear"; e. g. m'anlrar ma gbaro-ko, 
 
 „he sheds tears," lit. ,.tears flow down from him," or more 
 
 fully: m'antrar ma gbarg-ko e-for, lit. „tears flow down from 
 
 his eyes;" or: am'^nlrar ma gbaro, „the tears flow;" or: 
 
 e-for-y'oii e gbaro m'antrar, lit. „his eyes flow with tears," 
 
 = „he sheds tears." The sing, is hardly ever used. 
 Nap, V. a, „knock, strik«\ beat; knock-wilh-;" an-fam na yema 
 
 ko nap, „the people wanted to beat bim;" — o nap-kg i-sar, 
 
 „he knocked him with a stone." 
 Nap, Y. a. „condemn, find guilty, convince one of his guilt;" 
 
 e. g. 'a nap-ko traka ra-kel, „they condemned him for theft." 
 Nasi, V. a. „wipe off, wipe out, blot out" (as the writing on a 
 
 slate); e. g. K'uru, nasi ama-trel-ma-mi ma-Ias! ,,0 God, 
 
 blot out my sins!" 
 Na.sia, v. rel. „wipe off-for-; wipe ofl-wit!i-; e. g. na.sia-mi ama- 
 
 gbal, „wipe out the letters forme;" — na.sia ama-gbal k'ota, 
 
 „wipe off the letters with a cloth." 
 Natr, V. n. ascend, go up, rise, rise up;" also „go up the coun- 
 try;" e. g. ak'i'ma ka natr, „the smoke rises up;" — o natr 
 
 ro-gban, or also simply: o natr, „he went up the country." 
 Natr, V. a. „go up at-, go up along- or on-; ascend" (as a tree); 
 
 e. g. natr aka-bat, „he went up at the brook." 
 Natra, v. caus. „make-to rise up, raise, make to ascend, take up, 
 
 lift up" (as an oar); e. g. natra ka-tra-ka-mu, „lift up thy 
 
 hand." 
 Ne, pr. dem. prox. „this, these," for: anf". This form is used 
 
 for the comp. dem. pr., as nia-iie, „1his", lit. „it this;" e.g. 
 
 an-gbata-n'on nia-ne, „this is his mat," lit. „his mat it this." 
 Ne, contr. form for: na yi, as; ko ne-e? „whal is the matter?" 
 
 lit. „what is it?" 
 Nel, i-, n. „pity, compassion, mercy;" also „pitiable stale"; e.g. 
 
 ba-ko i-nei, „he had pity on him."
 
 — 221 — 
 
 Nel, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „ country yam, common yam" (very 
 
 white); e. g. ma-nol ma-lai, „many yams." 
 N'el, n. „sun" (as the source of heat); e. g. anei na ban tenon, 
 
 „lhe sun i* hot to day;" as the source of light the sun is 
 
 called ar'etr which see. 
 jV'emi, n. „kind of hammock said to liave been sent by God." 
 
 See Tradit. p. 32. 
 Nemlene, prob. a refl. form of an obs. nemte, „beseech, beg, 
 
 intreal, implore, beg for pardon, beg pardon from;" e. g. 
 
 nemleue-mi, „he begged my paidon." 
 Nepal, a-, pi. e-, n. „!he long grass used for tliatching;" e. g. 
 
 e-nepal e-fino, ,.fine grass." 
 Nepal, adj. „made of grass, thaiched \vilh grass;" e. g. a-set 
 
 a-nepal, „a grass-house," or „a house thatched with grass." 
 Nes, ra-, n. „fear, dread;" e. g. ra-ues-r'gh, „his dread." 
 Nes, a-, pi. e-, n. „spider"; e. g. a-nes a-bana, „a large spider." 
 N'es, pi. m'es, n. „name"; also „characfer; fame;" e. g. am'es- 
 
 ma-naii mfa-me, „these are their names," Ht. „their names 
 
 they these." 
 Nesa, V. n. „fear, be afraid;" e. g. o nesa, „he is afraid;" — 
 
 tse nesa, „do not be afraid." 
 Nesa, V. a. „fear, dread, be afraid of-; respect, honour;" e. g. 
 
 nesa-mu, „iie is afraid of thee." 
 Nesam, a-, pi. e-, n. „breath, life, animal life," = tj ipvxrj; e.g. 
 
 ba he so a-nescim, „he is dead," lit. „he has no life again." 
 Nesam, adj. „living, alive;" e.g. ra ra-nesam, „a living creature." 
 Ni, pr. obj. „it; them;" e.g. ana-bena, kara-ni, „as to the ropes, 
 
 bring them." 
 Ni, a-, pi. e-, n. „portion, share; e. g. kara an-ni-'a-nii, „brii)g 
 
 my share." 
 Ni, a-, pi. e-; or a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „sole of the foot, foot; 
 
 footstep;" e. g. kol ka "ma-ni-ma-mi, „walk in my footsteps." 
 Ni, pr. obj. „il; them;" e. g. an-gbata, o tila-ni, „as to the mat, 
 
 he sold il." 
 Nia, pr. emph. „il, this; they, ihem, these;" e. g. an-tis, nia
 
 — 222 — 
 
 yi-tsi, „lhis is the knife," lit. „the knife it is it," or „ as for 
 
 the knife, this is it." 
 Nia-iie, pr. dem. comp. „this, these," lit. „it (is) this, they (are) 
 
 these;" e. g an-set-'a-mi, nia-iie, „lhis is m;y house," lit. 
 
 „my house it (is) this." 
 Nia yi, j „namely, that is, that is to say," lit „it is-;" 
 Nia yi ho, ^ e. g. 1 ko ban an-reka-'a-mi, lila yi ho am-beibal, 
 
 „I go to fetch my book, that is the Bible." 
 N'imisa, n. ,, trouble of any kind, distress;" e. g. o won n'iniisa, 
 
 „he got into trouble." 
 Nin, e-, n. „dung, excrements" (of men and beasts; that of in- 
 fants they call e-soro); e. g. e-nin ya tra-na, „cow-dung." 
 N'in, adj. num. ,,one"; e. g. a-set n'in, „one house." 
 Nina, \ adv. „to morrow;" the longer form may be used abso- 
 Ninah, ' lutely; and the shorter may be joined with nouns of 
 
 time, to make this time more definite; e. g. I tsi yo-tsi 
 
 ninaii, „I shall do it to morrow;" — o tra kal so nina ra- 
 
 fgl, ,,he will return again to n)orrow evening;" — nina bat, 
 
 „to morrow morning;" — m'na tratrak, ,,to morrow night." 
 
 Cf. also anina, and aniiiaii, under A. 
 Ninis, 0-, n. „lerror; fierceness; awfulness, frightfuhiess;" e. g. 
 
 o-ninis o wop-ko, ,.he feels terrified," lit. „terror holds him" 
 
 or „took hold of him." 
 Ninis, adj. „terrible; fierce; awful, frightful;" e. g. o-sem o-ninis, 
 
 „a fierce animal;" — r'a ra-ninis, „a terrible thing." 
 No, adv. „here, hither;" e. g. o yira no, „he lives here." Cf. 
 
 also and under A. 
 No, prep. „here in, here at, here to;" the adv. „here" is 
 
 implied; e. g. o yi no-petr, „he is here in this town." Cf. 
 
 and, prep, under A. 
 N'of, pi. y'of, n. ,,moon; month; e.g. y'of e-sas, „three months." 
 Not, v. a. ,,take, take away-from-, dismiss-from, take away;" 
 
 „tse noi ey'etr-'e-mi, „do not lake away my things;" — 'a 
 
 nol-ko a-kala, ,,they took money away from him." 
 Non, pr. dem. rem for: liaii, used with lo, „time"; see: lo non 
 
 under L.
 
 — 223 — 
 
 N'on, pr. poss. „i)is, her," lit. „of him, of her," being a con- 
 traction of iia ko, with the euph. n affixed; e. g. an-trar- 
 n'on, „his slaves;" — an-set-fion, ,.his house." 
 
 Nosi-nel, o-, n. „pitiable condition;" also „pitv, compassion;" 
 e. g. o-ngsi-nel o wop-ko, ,,he is in a pitiable condition," 
 lit. ,.a p. c. holds him;" — K'llru o nahka-su o-nosi-nei, 
 „God looked with pity on us." 
 
 Nu, pr. obj. ,,you"; e. g. sa tra bap-nu rn-petr, „Me shall meet 
 you in town." 
 
 N'ump, pi. m'ump, n. „fable, tale, story;" e. g, man tram m'ump, 
 „let us lell stories." 
 
 N'limpal, pi. m'umpal, sometimes also y'limpal, n. „ shadow of a 
 person" (when standing in the sun); ,.shade, soul" or „spirit 
 (of man)," = the Lat. umbra. It is also used of the spirit 
 of God. The animal life is called a-nesam, which see. Cf. 
 Pref. § 12, b. where more particulars will be found about 
 h'umpal. 
 
 Nya, pr. emph. „ye; you;" but also used for the sing. „thou" 
 when joined with other emph. pronouns, or with proper 
 names, implying the copula „and"; e. g. nya yg atr'ei atse, 
 „ye did this thing," — nya kane der Ira dif o-sem-e? „thou 
 and who came to kill the beast?" 
 
 Nyan, pr. abs. „ye; you;" e.g. nyah, nya lascjr am-bil ane, „ye, 
 ye spoiled this canoe." 
 
 o. 
 
 0-, pref. def. and indef. „a, an; the;" e. g. o-baT, „the king" 
 or „a king." 
 
 0-, pref. emph. vow. to make nouns with the inseparable pref. 
 w', and one with d' definite; as: ow'iini, „the person," from 
 w'uni, ^a person;" — ow'an, „the child," from w'an, „child"; 
 etc.; od'er, ,.the place," from d'er, „a place." 
 
 0! int. „oh! o!" denoting wonder, surprise, also grief and com- 
 passion. E g. g, o-puto! „0h, a while man!" — g Pa, I 
 trara atra I pa! „oh Sir, I know what 1 say!" 
 
 0! int. or expl. pari. It is placed at the end of saluting or
 
 — 224 — 
 
 of exclamalory propositions, when like -e it serves to indi- 
 cate the Vocative. It is always used with such words, which 
 are addressed directly to another. If it has any sense with 
 such propositions, it is that of „now" or of the Ger. „doch". 
 Also the Liberated Africans at Sierra-Leone are fond of af- 
 fixing the vowel sound o at the end of a proposition, or of a 
 word, especially ^^hen calling to another; they may often be 
 heard to say — „come-o!-' =-- „come now!" or „come then!" 
 E. g. sen'-o, Pa! „ welcome. Sir!" See more ex. in the 
 Colloq. Phras. p. lOG —110. Cf. also the Grammar about this 
 particle. 
 
 0, pr. subj. „he, she;" e. g. o fi dis, „he died yesterday." 
 
 0, pr. impers. or irrel. „it"; e. g. o lompi, „it is right." 
 
 0, for: pa; or: o pa ho, „he said." See Tradit. p. 68. 
 
 0, conj. or copulative part. „and"; when it is used to join 
 several nouns or names, then the 6 behind the last is to 
 be given by „also", or it may be left untranslated; and when 
 it occurs twice, or behind two nouns, it may be given by" 
 — as well as — ", or by „both — , and — ." E. g. d'er- 
 6-d'er, „every place," lit. „place and place;" — Basi 6 
 Sori 6, „Basi as well as Sori;" — k'ota 6, e-;^6ka 6, a- 
 taba 6, „cloth and cassadas and tobacco also." 
 
 -'0-mi, pr. poss. „my", lit, „of me;" e.g. od'er-'o-mi, „my 
 place;" — o-sem-'o-mi, „my meat." 
 
 '0-mu, pr. poss. „thy", lit. „of thee;" e.g. o-sem-'o-mu, „thy 
 meat." 
 
 '0, prep. poss. „of" for: wo. See the two preceding words. 
 
 O gbo! „oh dear! what is that! oh strange!" e. g. g gbo, i-sar 
 na loko k'ek-e! „oh strange, a stone brought forth a beard!" 
 
 Owe, pr. dem. prox. „1his"; e. g. o-trar owe, „this slave." 
 
 Owo, pr. rel. „who, he who; which;" e. g. o-bal owo fi, „tlie 
 king who died." 
 
 Owon, pr. dem. rem. „lhal, that one;" e. g. o-16nba owgii, „thal 
 young man."
 
 225 
 
 P', pref. indef. and insep pi.; eg. p'ii:, „one"; — p'anle, „four"; 
 
 — pa-la p'in, „one sort of rice." 
 Pa, V. n. „say, speak, lalk about a matler;" e. g. o pa gbo ro- 
 san, „he speaks only at the mouth" (not according to ulial 
 is in his heart); — 'a pa rokin, „thev cmverse together." 
 Pa, V. a. „say; state, talk over" (as a ma ter); „tell; pronounce;" 
 e. g. pa-tsi ronon, „tell it to him;" o pa am-pa, „he stated 
 the matter." 
 Pa, a-, pi. e-, or ma-, n. „saying, word; niatter, palaver; state- 
 ment, subject of inquiry, affair about which one speaks; 
 story;" e. g. o tra pa am-pa ninan, „he will talk over the 
 mailer to morrow;" — mine ba 'ma-iia ma-t.si, „1 have to 
 talk those matters." 
 Pa, 0-, pi. a-pa, or pa-na, n. „Sir, Master, Mr.;" also „father" 
 (when addressing one, otherwise o-kas is u'^ed). When 
 applied to irrational beings il may be given by the del", 
 article „the" in Knglisli, as: Pa Nes, „the Spider," ht. ,.Mr. 
 Spider;" — kori 'u, Pa! „I salute thee. Sir!" Cf. the word 
 k'ak in this Vocab. about the form Pa-na. 
 Pa-, pref. def. = apa-, „lhe"; e. g. pa-la, ^ apa-la, „the rice;" 
 
 — pa-yaka, „the krifi rice." Cf. krifi, adj. in this Vocab. 
 Pa-, pref. indef. pi. e. g. pa-la pa-ffno, „good rice." 
 Pa, pr. impers. or irrel. „it"; e. g. pa bone-ko, „he is glad." 
 Pa, pr. sub. indef. „it": e.g. pa-la pa bak lemp, „rice grows 
 
 fast." 
 Pa, pr.subj.def. „it"; e.g. apa-la pa liisa, „the rice got spoiled." 
 Pa-mi, pr. poss. def. „my". lit. „of me;" e. g. pa-la-pa-mi, ,.my 
 
 rice." 
 Pa-mi, pr. pohs. indef. „my", lit „of me;" e. g. pa-la-pa-mi, 
 
 „rice of mine," = „my rice." 
 Pai, v. n. ,.jump, leap;" e.g. p pal ro tof, ,.he jumped down 
 on the ground;" — o pal ka ka-bat, „he leaped over the 
 brook." 
 Pal, V. n. „be ready" (as for a journey); e. g. ma p.ii-i? „arl 
 
 Temne ■ Worterbuch. 1 3
 
 — 226 — 
 
 thou read}'?- — I pal, man kdne, „I am ready, let us go;" 
 
 — I ta pal he, „I am not yel ready." 
 
 Pal, adv. spec. „very, quite, up to the brim; altogether," used 
 ■with la, „be full, be numerous;" with lasar, „fill, make full;" 
 and with k^si, „refuse, will not." E. g. atr'ak na la ri pai, 
 „lhe ants are very numerous there;" — lasar am-poti pal, 
 „fill the cup up to the brim," or „make the cup quite full;" 
 
 — kasi bak pai, „he will not grow at all." 
 
 Paia, V. a. „accompany"; e.g. Sori o tra paia-mu ri, „Sori will 
 
 accompany thee there." 
 Pakasife, conj. „because"; e. g. o gbali he tsi pen yo, pakdsife 
 
 yi he ri, „he cannot have done it, because he was not there." 
 Pali, adv. „the whole day, all day;" e. g. na tomo pali, „they 
 
 danced all day." 
 Pali gbes, „all day and all night;" e. g. sa tomo pali gbes, „we 
 
 danced all day and all night." 
 Pal, v. a. „forget"; -e.g. o pal an-ldpra-n'on, „he forgot his cap." 
 Paine, v. refl. a. „forget oneself, forget; e. g. o palne-tsi, „he 
 
 forgot it." 
 Pan, v. a. „lack, want, need;" e. g. o pan he r'aka 6 r'aka, „he 
 
 is not in want of any thing." 
 Pan, ka-, n. verb. ,,act of lacking (a thing); slate of being in 
 
 want, want, distress, lack;" e. g. ka-paii-k'on, „his want." 
 P^ne, V. a. „carry in" or „on the arms" (as a child, or as 
 
 wood); „embrace, press to one's bosom." Also used as a 
 
 compliment on meeting with one a second time the same 
 
 day, in the sense of „meet",- when the subj. pronoun is 
 
 dropped. E. g. o ptine e-lok, o kere-yi ro-set, „he look the 
 
 wood in his aims, and carried it into the house." See also 
 
 Colloq. Phras. p. 107 and 1 10. 
 Pani-tr'el, adj. comp. „harmless, innocent, being without fault;" 
 
 e. g. w'iini pani-tr'eT, „a harmless person." 
 Pank, a-, n. „ folly, foolishness;" e. g. an-pank-n'on, „his folly." 
 Pank, adj. „f(>olish"; e.g. w'uni pank, „a foolish person." 
 Pankal, a-, pi. e-, n. „cilhern" or „harp", also called „Kroo- 
 
 harp." It has seven grass strings, is of a triangular form,
 
 — 227 — 
 
 and fixed in one half of a split calabash, and is played with 
 the fingers. E. g. o fer am-pankal, „he plays the harp." 
 
 Pahkal, a-, pi. e-, or Ira- ; or also o-, pi. Ira-, n. „a large ante- 
 lope exceeding in size the common native ox," with white 
 spots, and long horns, commonly called „biish-cow". The 
 female has no horns. It is said to put down its horns back- 
 wards when running through the bush; but when it is in a 
 fury, it raises them upright for selfdefence. 
 
 Pant, a-, or i-. pi. ma-, n. „work, business; e. g. ma-pant ma- 
 baki. „hard work." 'I'he sing, is hardly ever used. 
 
 Pantne, v. n. .,raise oneself, rise up" (as one stooping or kneel- 
 ing down); e. g. o pantne, „he rose up." 
 
 Pantrane, v. recipr. a. (rad. pantr), „mix" or „mingle together, 
 put" or „lay together" (as people money for a common stock); 
 „mix together promiscuously, confound;" e. g. "a pantrane 
 an-kala-'a-nan, „they put their money together." 
 
 Par-par, adv. onom. „briskly, smartly," used v\ith mara, „flame, 
 burn;" e.g. an'antr na mara par-par, „the fire burns smartlv ' 
 or „the fire burns making par-par." 
 
 Pair, V. n. „cook; boil; be boiled, be stewed;" e. g. I pon pair, 
 mail kone di, „I have cooked, let us go to eat;" — amanir 
 ma patr, „the water boils." 
 
 Pair, V. a. „cook, seethe; stew;" e. g. o patr o-sem, „he stewed 
 the meat." 
 
 Patr, adj. „cooked; boiled; stewed;" e.g. o-^em o-patr. „boiled 
 beef." 
 
 Pe, contraction of pa yi, „it is; c. g. tro pe-e?" how is it?" 
 See Colloq. Phras. p. 105. 
 
 Pensa, = pesa, v. n. answer in the negative, contradict, refuse, 
 not concede, deny;" c. g. o pensa ho g trara-mi, „he dis- 
 owned me," lit. „he denied that he knows me;" — tse pensa, 
 w'an! „do not deny, boy!" 
 
 Pensa, \ v. a. „deny, refuse, reject, object to; give a negative 
 
 Pesa, ' answer to-, contradict;" e. g. o pensa-t.si, „he denied 
 it;" — tse pesa-tsi, w'an! „do not deny it, boy!" — o pesa 
 O-trar, „he objected to the slave" (having a fault). 
 
 15*
 
 — 228 — 
 
 P6s\iaiie, V. recipr. (rad. peski), „open in various directions, 
 diverge from each other" (as roads); „lie in different posi- 
 tions" {as bundles); fig. „disagree, be at variance with each 
 other; differ" (as words); e. g. e-pa-'e-mii e peskiane, „thy 
 statements do not agree;" — as'on lia peskiane ri, „the roads 
 diverge from each other there." 
 
 Peskiane, adj. „diverging from each other, diverging off in various 
 directions; being at variance with each other; different;" e.g. 
 s'oh tra-peskiane, „roads diverging from each other;" — 
 sim tra-peskiane, „words being at variance with each other. 
 
 Petr, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „town"; e. g. ka-petr ka-b^na ka ;)i ri, 
 „there is a large town there." 
 
 Pi, pr, obj. „il'; e. g. 1 wal-pi, „1 bought it" (i.e. rice). 
 
 Pia, pr. emph. „it, this;" e. g. apa-la-pa-mi, pia yi tsi, „as to 
 my rice, this is it," = „this is my rice." 
 
 Piar', abbr. of piara, generally used before the int. o. See the 
 next word, and cf. Colloq. Phras. p. 106—107 for examples 
 with this form. 
 
 Piara, v. n. „be all day, spend all day, be well all day, Hve, 
 spend, be." It is often used as an aux. to express the adv. 
 „all day." E. g. o piara yo ma-pant, „he did work all day;" 
 — ha piara tomo, „they danced all day;" — o piara ro 
 Ma-lal, „he was all day at Malal." 
 
 Pika, V. n. „faint, swoon; get senseless" (as by a stroke on the 
 head); o pika, „he swooned away." 
 
 Pil, ka-, n. .,the west;" e. g. o yefa ro-pil, „he came from the 
 west." With the prep, ro- it becomes also a prep, or a post- 
 position. 
 
 Pilor, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „ball" (for a gun), „bullet"; e.g. 
 a-pilor a-bana, „a large ball." 
 
 Pim, V. a. „pick, pluck, pluck off- (as flowers, fruit, or ears of 
 rice), hence also „reap" ; e. g. sa ko pim ma-lemre, „we go 
 to pluck lemons." 
 
 Pima, V. inch. „break, gel broken" (as rope); „tear, get torn" 
 (as cloth); „get loose" (as a horse); e. g. ah-sol o pima, „the 
 horse got loose;" — ak'oia ka pima, „the cloth got torn."
 
 — 229 — 
 
 Pinkar, a-, pi. e-, n. „gun, musket;" e. g. a-pinkar a-ffno, „a 
 fine gun." 
 
 P^lo, V. a. „crown"; also „cro\vn-as-" ; e.g. 'a polo o-bal, „they 
 crowned the king;" - 'a pdlo-ko Q-bal, „they crowned him 
 (as) king" 
 
 P'(5lpala, = p'olpara, n. , gunpowder;" e. g. p'6lpala pa-lai, 
 „much gunpowder." 
 
 P'of), pr.poss. „his, her," lit. „of him, of her," being a contraction 
 of: pa ko with the enph. li; e. g. apa-la-p'on, „his rice." 
 
 Pon, V. n. „have an end, take an end, be over; be finished, be 
 done, be exhausted; be at an end; be expired, be up" (as 
 a fixed time); e. g. apa-la pa poh, „the rice is exhausted;" 
 — ma-pant-ma-mi ma pon, „my work is finished." 
 
 Pon, V. a. „finish, make an end to-; go all over" (as a country); 
 „exhaust" (as provisions); ..wear out" (asclolhes); „destroy" 
 (as a town); „rout" (as an army). As an aux. verb it serves 
 to express the past tense in the sense of „have", or „have 
 done;" and sometimes it expresses the adverb „entirely, 
 completely, altogether." E. g. Q vema pon ama-pant, „he 
 wants to finish the work;" — Q pon e-16pra-y'on, „he has 
 worn out his clothes;" — 'a dim aka-petr, „lhey destroyed 
 the town;" — o poh gbal, „he has written;" — o poh di 
 am-bamp, „he ate the bird altogether," or: o pon ko di, „he 
 ale it altogether." 
 
 Poh, V. impers. „be enough, suffice; be done;" e. g. pa pon, 
 „it is" or ,,will be enough." 
 
 Pon', euph. form of poh, „finish", used before d, n and t; as 
 pon' na gbal, „he has written to day. ' 
 
 Poha, V. rel. „finish-for-, destroy-to-, destroy-for-;" e. g. 'a poha- 
 ko ah-fam-iVoh, „they destroyed him (all) his people." 
 
 Poh's, V. freq. a. (for ponas), „nnish, complete, accomplish; fulfil" 
 (as a promise); „exhaust, spend" (as money); e.g. 1 tsi poh's 
 ama-pant-ma-mi tenon, „1 shall finish my work to day;" — 
 poh's ar'im ara o trah, „he fulfilled his promise," lit. „he 
 accomplished the word which he pledged (said)." 
 Poro, am-, n. „the Poro association." See Pref. § 18. a.
 
 — 230 — 
 
 Poro, a-, pi. e-, n. „porro greegree." See Pref. § 18. b. 
 
 Poru, a-, pi. e-, n. ,, sperm, seed" (for generation) ; also „foetus, 
 embr;yo" (as the result of sexual commerce). Both sexes, they 
 say, have such a poru, and if one has no child, or if a 
 woman does not bear children, they say: o ba he a-poru, 
 „she (he) has no seed," — she is barren;" — am-poru- 
 n'ofi na lasa, „shf had an abbortion," lit. „her embryo got 
 spoiled." 
 
 Pdti, a-, pi. e-, n. „cup, drinking vessel" (with a handle); e. g. 
 kara a-poti, ,, bring a cup." 
 
 Poto, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a white man. a European;" e. g. o-p6to o yi 
 he ka ka petr akP, „there is no white man in this town." 
 
 Polo, adj. „european, belonging to a white man" or „to the 
 white man's country;" e. g. a-bil a-p6to, ,,a ship." lit. „a 
 european canoe." 
 
 Pure, a-, pi. e-, n. „lover, sweetheart, concubine" (used of both 
 sexes); e. g. o ba a-piire, ,,he has a concubine," or also „she 
 has a lover." 
 
 Putr, V. n. „rise' (as the sun, or moon above the horizon); e.g. 
 ah'of iia putr, .,lhe moon rises." 
 
 Putr, V. a. „burst, open fas the leaves which enclose the ear of 
 rice);" pierce, lance" (as a boil); „make known, divulge" (as 
 the death of one), e. g putr am-boya, „open the boil;" — 
 'a putr ara-fi, ,,lhey made known the death" (as by drum- 
 ming). Also „bruise" (as a reed); „clean" (as fish by taking 
 out the intestines and scraping off the scales). 
 
 Putu, a-, pi. e-, n. ,. rectum", Ger. .,Mastdarm"; also „tripe". 
 
 R. 
 
 R', pref. indef. and insep. „a. an;" e g. r'of, „a cerastes", for 
 
 ra-of. 
 Ra, pref. indef. ,,a, an;" e. g. ra-bena, ,,a rope." 
 Ra, pr. subj. „it"; e. g. ara-beiia ra boli, ,,the rope is long." 
 Ra, pr. poss. „of"; e. g. ra-beha ra Sori, „Sori's rope," lit. 
 
 ,,a rope of Sori." 
 R'a, = r'aka. which see.
 
 — 231 — 
 
 Ra, prep, indef. „to, in, from, at." It is an indef. form of ra 
 
 and ro. E. g. o yefa ra-petr, „he came from a town;** ra 
 
 ka-petr, „in a town." 
 Ra-mi, pr. poss. „my", lit. „of me;" e. g. ara-bena-ra-mi, „my 
 
 rope." 
 Ra-nan, pr. poss. „lheir", lit. „of them;" e. g. ara-bena-ra-fian, 
 
 „their rope." 
 R'a ra-boti-som, „something delicious to devour" or „to eat;" 
 
 e. g. 1 tsi som r'a ra-boti-sgrn, „1 shall eat something deli- 
 cious to devour." 
 R'a ra-di, pi. y'etr e-di, „somcthing to eat, food, victual;" e.g. 
 
 son-mi r'a ra-di, „he gave me something to eat." 
 Ra-lr'el 6 tr'el, „from every harm." See: bene w'Qni ra-tr'el 
 
 6 tr'el under B. 
 Rabu, 0-, n. „Lord". Adopted from the Ar. (J^J, dominus. It 
 
 is used of God only. E. g. o-Rabu-ka-su, „our Lord." 
 Raf, V. a. „establish, make, enact" (as a law); „fi.\" (as a spear 
 
 in the ground); also „stab-vvith- ;" e. g. o-bal o raf a-tori, 
 
 ,,the king made a law;" — g raf an-sor ro-tgf, „he fixed 
 
 the spear in the ground;" — o raf-ko a-lis, „he stabbed him 
 
 with a knife," = o rafa-ko a-tis. 
 Rafa, V. rel. „fix" or „put-for-; stab-with;" e. g. rafa-mi ah-sor 
 
 ro-tof, „fix the spear in the ground for me." See also the 
 
 next word. 
 Rafa w'uni a-balma, „stab one with a dagger;" e. g. o rafa-mi 
 
 a-balma, „he stabbed me with etc." 
 R'afa, pi. s'afa, n. „army of war-people, army;" e.g. r'afa ra- 
 
 bana, „a large army-"' 
 Rafar, v. rel. „fix" or „put-for-, put up-against-" (as the porro 
 
 greegree against one). See Pref. § 18. b. 
 Rak-rak, v. n. „shake, be loose" (as a tooth, or a blade in a 
 
 handle); fig. „be of a delicate health" or „constitution"; e.g. 
 
 e-sek-y'oii e rak-rak, „his teeth are loose." 
 R'aka, = r'a, pi. y'etr, n. „something, a thing, an article, a vessel; 
 
 tool, instrument," pi. also „furniture"; e, g. I ba he r'aka 
 
 tra som-mu, 1 have nothing to give thee."
 
 — 232 — 
 
 Raka, a-, pi. e-, n. „camp, place enclosed with a war-fence;" 
 
 e. g. yi ro-r^ka, „he is in the camp." 
 R'aka-6-r'aka, „every thing, any thing;" with a negative „nol 
 
 any thing, not! ing at all;" e. g. o ba he r'aka-6-r'aka, „he 
 
 has nothing at all." 
 Ram, V. n. „pay, pay a fine;" e. g. o ba tra ram, „he has to 
 
 pay a fine." 
 Ram, V. a. „pay, pay for, reward; requite;" e.g. 1 gb§h he 
 
 soto ak'ota, l^mbe I ram-ki, „1 cannot get the cloth, except 
 
 I pay for it." 
 Ram, a-, pi. e-, n. „pay, reward, recompence, wages, premium;" 
 
 e. g soto an-ram-iVon, „he got his pay." 
 Ram tr'el ka 'ra-bomp ra w'uni, „visit a thing upon one" (in 
 
 scriptu'al language); „recompense" (in the way of punishing); 
 
 lit. „pay (requite) a thing upon the head of a person," = 
 
 „send evil upon one judicially." 
 Ramara, v. doubl. rel. (rad. ram), „heaI-for-, eure-for-;" also: 
 
 „cure-with-;" e. g. ramara-mi ow'ahet, „cure me the child," 
 
 or „cure the child for me." 
 Ramne, v. reil. n. „pray"; e. g. o kg ramne, „he goes to pray," 
 
 lit. „pay oneself off," then probably „perform one's duty" 
 
 (as towards God, or to\>ards a krifi), being derived from ram, 
 
 vpay". 
 
 Ramne, v. refl. a. ,,pray to, worship; pray, beg, beseech;" lit. 
 
 probably „pay one's duty towards" or ,,to-". It is used of 
 
 the worship of God and of krifis. E. g. sa ba tra ramne 
 
 K'liru, ,,we must pray to God;" - o ramne o-krifi, „he 
 
 worships a krifi." Cf. the preceding word. 
 Ramne, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „prayer, worship;" e.g. ka-ramne-ka-su, 
 
 „our prayer." 
 Ramne a-krifi, ka-, n. ,, krifi worship," lit. „a worshipping krifis." 
 Rami, v. n. long form of ram, ..sound, tinkle;" fig. „be famous, 
 
 be renowned;" e. g. am-bitii'i na rami o-fino, ,,the drum 
 
 sounds well." See the next word. 
 Rami o-boti-tral, „sound sweetly, sound pleasant to the ear" (as 
 
 a song). See len, a-, „song".
 
 — 233 — 
 
 Rail, pr. dein. rem. = araii, „that'', used when it is the subject 
 of a proposition wilhout Ihe noun; e. g. ra-bena ra-ffno ran, 
 ,,that is a good rope," lit. ,,a good rope that." 
 
 Rail, adj. num. „two"; e. g. a-fam iia-njii, „two persons." 
 
 Rana, v. a. „carry on the back;" e. g. o rana ow'ahet, „he car- 
 ried the child on the back." 
 
 Rdni, 0-, pi. a-, n. „wife"; e. g. o-r^ni-ka-mi, „my wife." 
 
 Raiik, a-, pi. e-, or tra-; or also o-, pi. tra-, n. .,an elephant"; 
 e. g. a-raiik a-bana, „a large elephant." 
 
 Rap, V. a. ,,snrround, go round, go around; e. g. iia r;ip aii- 
 kuiik, „they surrounded the yifd." 
 
 Rap, ka-, n. adultery, fornication" (used of both sexes); e.g. 
 ka-rap-k'on, „his adultery;" — a-fam 'a ka-rap, „adulterous 
 people," lit. „people of adultery " 
 
 Rdran, k.3-, n. „backpart, backside, hinder part" (of a thing); 
 fig. „support, backing;" e. ^- ka-raran ka aii-sot, „the back 
 part of the house;" — o-bal ba ka-raraii ka-bana, „the 
 king has great support." With the prep, ro- it becomes a 
 prep, or a postp. , for which see rorArah. 
 
 Raraii, postp. „behind"; e. g. yi-mi raraii, „he is behind me;" 
 ^= ro raraii. 
 
 Raraii-ka-tsi, ka-, see: ka-raran-ka-tsi, and: ka ka-raraii-ka-tsi. 
 
 Rare, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „door; shutter;" e.g. krinta ka-rare, „shut 
 the door." 
 
 Ras, adv. „yet, still, first;" e. g. kar-mi r<is, „\vait me first;" — 
 fet ras, ,.he is still young." 
 
 Rasa, a-, pi. e-, n. „a creeping plant (bearing a kind of tomata 
 or love-apple), which winds itself round trees very thickly." 
 The natives chew Ihe inner white skin of the plant, after 
 the outer green one is taken otf. and swallow the juice of 
 it. The fruit is eaten by animals, sometimes also by men. 
 They also call this plant k'ororo. } 1. tr'ororo 
 
 Rata, postp. „under, below, beneath," = rorata; e. g. o-wonlr- 
 ka-mu (J yi ro-fuiik raia, „lhy brother is under the store- 
 house." 
 
 Ratron, prep, and postp. „between, in the midst, amongst;" e.g.
 
 — 234 — 
 
 Q las-na ratrdh, „he passed between them;" — yira-su ra- 
 tron, „sit between us;" — o wur ratron ka an-fam, „he 
 came oul from amongst the people." There is a euph. form 
 datrdri, which see. 
 
 Ratron, adv. „be(ween, in the midst;" e.g. o tas ralrdn, „he 
 passed between;" — fgf ar'im o-bakar ralrdn, „accentuate 
 the word in the middle," Ht. „pronounce the word strongly 
 in the middle." 
 
 Ravor, prep, or posfp. „near to, close to, beside, near, at the 
 side;" e. g. o tas-mi raver, „he passed near to me;" — o 
 trama-mi raver, = g trama rayer-ka-mi, „he stands close to 
 me;" — tse yira rayer ka am-mesa, „do not sit near the table." 
 There is a euph. form dayer, which see. 
 
 Rayer, adv. „aside; near;" e. g. o trama rayer, „he stood near;" 
 — botr-yi rayer, „put them aside." 
 
 Re — ? adv. inter. „whereto?" e. g. re man kg-e? „where art 
 thou going to?" 
 
 Re, ma-, n. „sleep"; e. g. ma-re ma ba-mi, „I am sleepy," lit. 
 „sleep has me." Also „vision"; e.g. g nank ma-re, „he 
 saw a vision." 
 
 Re, = de, or = der, v. n. and aux. „come"; de is a euph. form 
 of re. When used as an aux. it may sometimes be given 
 by „go" and by „happen"; it is also used to express a re- 
 mote Future in connection with the particles tsi, or tra, or 
 with ma, me and mg; sometimes also without them, if 
 used for a Future in the Passive. Otherwise it indicates a 
 purpose or intention to exercise the energy, expressed by 
 the principal verb. It is construed with the short, and also 
 with the long form of the Infinite. E. g. g re he nan, „he 
 did not come," = g de he nan; — g tra re dif-kg, „he 
 will kill him by and by;" — ya na ma re yg-mu, „thus they 
 will be doing to thee;" — ak'antr ka re gbulras, or also: 
 ak'antr ka tra re gbiitras, „the stick will be shortened by 
 and by," — g re fila, „he comes to trade;" — g re gbal, „he 
 (came) comes to write", or: g re tra gbal, „he comes (came)
 
 — 235 — 
 
 for the purpose to write." When used for the Future it is 
 best given by „bv and bv." 
 
 Re, adv. „here"; e. g. o yira re, „he lives here." 
 
 Re, conj. „and", = de, which is a euph. form. E. g. mdnon 
 re nninan sa kdne, „thou and I we will go;" — o-kas re 
 o-kara-k'on, „his father and his mother." 
 
 Re, prep. = de, which is a euph. form of it, „with, by;" e, g. 
 pa y\ he re ah-fosa na konoii, „it was not by the power 
 of him," = „il was not by his power;" — o di re mlnan, 
 „he ate with me." 
 
 Rei, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „a day of 24 hours, a day;" e. g. an- 
 rei ane, „lhis dr-y;" — ma-rei ma-sas, „three days." 
 
 Reka, a-, pi. e-, n. „skin, hide; parchment, pa[)er; letter, book;" 
 e. g. ah-reka na ka-lome, „the skin of the sheep;" — o 
 som'ra-mi a-reka, „he sent me a letter." The Mohammedans 
 often use dressed skins to write upon; now Ihey write also 
 on paper. 
 
 Reke? adv. inter. „where?" e.g. reke am-bil-'a-mi-e? „where is 
 my canoe?" 
 
 Reke? pr inter. „which? what?" e. g. a-loko reke ma der-e? = 
 a-lo reke ma der-e? „what time didst thou come?" — ka- 
 pelr ka-reke? „whieh town?" — w'iini reke? „what person?" 
 
 Ren, or ren', ka-, pi. tra-, n. ,,a year"; e. g. k.i-ren k'in, „one 
 year;" — tra-ren' Ira-sas, „three years." The g is some- 
 times cut off before d and t. 
 
 Ren', » V. a. „put on the top of-, load-wilh-, put; e.g. o ren- 
 
 Reii, ' kg ka-tra, „he put the hand upon him;" — o ren-kg 
 ka an-soT, „he put him on the horse;" — g ren' ri ka 'ra- 
 bomp-r'gn, „he put it on his head." Ren' is a euph. form, 
 used before words beginning with d. r and I. 
 
 Ren, ka-, n. probably „night". It is always used with datrgii, 
 when the g is cut ofT for the sake of euphony. See next 
 word. 
 
 Ren' dalrgn, ka-, n. „midnigh1". See Fables p. 62. 
 
 Ren'sa, (for renasa), v. frf(|. and caus. (rad. ren). „mounl, ride 
 upon, go" or „be on the top of, be upon," e. g. tse ren'sa
 
 — 236 — 
 
 e-tok, „do not go on the top of the wood;" — o r^n'sa a-soT, 
 
 „he rides upon a horse;" — ka-lrak ake ka ren'sa-mi, „this 
 
 palaver is upon me." 
 R^n'sa, (for reiigsa). v. freq. and inch. „get on the top, be on the 
 
 top, rest, be;" e. g. o ren'sa ka an-sol, „he got on the horse." 
 
 Also „sit" (as a cap on the head); e. g. an-lapra na ren'sa 
 
 0-fino, „lhe cap sits well." 
 R'etr, pi. s'etr, n. „a sun", def. ar'^tr, „the sun" (considered as 
 
 the source of light; an'ei is the sun as the source of heat); 
 
 e. g, ar'elr ra putr. „the sun rises." The pi. may be used 
 
 if there is a reflection of the sun, as in the water, and there 
 
 appear lo be two suiss. 
 Ri, pr. obj. ^r: di, „it"; e. g. ara-bena gbutras-ri, „as to the rope 
 
 shor'en it." Di is a euph. form. 
 Ri, adv. loc. — di, „there"; e. g. t,se ko ri, „do not go there." 
 
 Di is a euph. form of ri. 
 Ria, pr. eniph. =- dia, „it, this;" e. g. ar'dma-ra-mi ria yi tsi, 
 
 „this is my shir!," lit. „my shirt this is it." Dia is a euph. 
 
 form. 
 Ri-a, adv. loc. rmph. = di-a, „there" ; e. g. ro an-gbalan na gbope, 
 
 ri-a botr ara-bomp-r'on. „where the rock was rugged, there 
 
 he put his head." Di- a is a euph. form of ri-a. 
 Ri-an, adv. loc abs. = di-an, „there"; e. g. ri-an o yi, „there 
 
 he is;" — o yi ri ri-an, = ri-an ri o yi, „he is there" or 
 
 „there he is." Dl-an is a euph. form. (Cf. -n under N.) 
 Rian, pr. abs. ,,il, this;" e. g ara-bena-ia-mi rian, „this is my 
 
 rope," lit. ,,the rope of me it." 
 Rianna, n. „ heaven" (as the residence of the blessed); Mand. 
 
 aryena. From the Ar. aU;^, hortus, paradisus. E. g. ro- 
 
 rianna, „in heaven." 
 Ri'gba, a-, pi. o-, n. „head\voman of the Rondo Institution. E.g. 
 
 an-ri'gba o kus am-bondo, „lhc headwoman of the Rondo 
 
 Institution discharged the Bondo girls" or „cIosed the Hondo 
 
 ceremonies by a public procession." 
 R'im, = d'im, pl.s'im, n. „a N\ord, voice; command;" also „pro- 
 
 mise"; e. g. ar'im-ra-mi, „my word;" — 1 tral r'im ra-bana,
 
 — 237 — 
 
 „I heard a great (strong) voice;'- — ar'im ra K'uru, „the 
 word of God." D'iin is a euph. form of r'im. 
 
 R'in, adj. num. = d'in, „one"; e. g. r'im r'in, „one word;" — 
 ra-bena r'in, „one rope." D'in is a euph. form. 
 
 Ro, adv. loc. „yondt'r, at," oi' „lo some distance;" e.g. kone 
 ro, „go jonder;" — iia ^>i ri ro, „they are (here vender.' 
 Also „where, whereon, wherein;" e. g. ka-fynfr ro o fanta, 
 „lhe bed whereon he lay down;" — o som a-reka, ro o gbai-e 
 ho etc., ,,he sent a letter, wherein he wrote that etc." 
 
 Ro, prep. loc. „at, in, to, from, upon, on;" e. g. o yi ro-set, 
 „he is in the he use;" — o yefa ro-petr, „he came from 
 town;" — Q kg ro-Kamp, „he went to Sierra-Leone." The 
 sense of this prep, is indicated b\ the verb with which it 
 is used. There is a euph. form do-, which see. 
 
 Ro-be, „wherever"; e.g. ro ma ko be i l.si iram-mu, „wherever 
 thou goesi, 1 shall follow thee." 
 
 Roder,"prep. and postp. „at the face;-' e.g. roder-ka-mi kadi, 
 „before my face;" — o _yi-mi roder kadi, „he is before my 
 face." 
 
 Rod), adv. loc. „ahead, before; on, onwards, forwards;" e.g. sa 
 ko he rodi, „we do not go ahead;" — ko rodi, „go forwards" 
 or „go on" or „go before;" — trania rodi, „stand ahead. '- 
 Cf. also kadi. 
 
 o 
 
 Rodi, pr(>p. and postp. „before, in front, beyond;" e.g. o yi-mi 
 rodi, „he is before me," = o vi rodi-ka-mi; — kara-mi a ra- 
 beha ara fanta rodi ka aran, „ bring me the rope which lies 
 beyond that one;" — o trama rodi ka an-set, „he stands 
 before the house." 
 
 R'of, pi. s'of, n. „a horned viper, cerastes;" e. g. r'of ra-bana, 
 „a large horned viper." 
 
 Rok, v. a. „cut, reap" (as rice); fig. „decide, settle, judge" (as 
 a matter); e. g. a ko rok pa-la, „lhe\ go to reap rice," — 
 Q-bal tra rok am-pa, „the king will settle the matter." 
 
 Rok, ka-, n. verb. „act of cutting" or „reaping, harvest; act of 
 deciding" or „seltling" or „judging;" e. g. ka-rok-k'oh pa- 
 la, „his reaping rice;" — ka-rok ka-fino, „a good harvest."
 
 — 238 — 
 
 Rok an-tduka, ka-, n „1he judgment" fas of the last dav). 
 Roka, V. rel. „cut-for-; cut-with-; reap-for-, reap-with-; reap 
 
 with-" (as with jov); fig. „decide-for-;" e. g. o roka-ko a-tis, 
 
 „he cut him with a knife;" — o roka-mi pa-la, „he reaps 
 
 (cuts) rice for me;" — o-bal o tra roka-mi am-pa, „the king 
 
 will settle tlie matter for me." 
 Rokaiu adv. loc. „\Aithout, out, out of doors;" e. g. wur rokan, 
 
 „come out;" - ylra rokan, „sit without;" — o trama rokaii, 
 
 „he stood without;" — - 'a kere-ko rokan, „the>' led him out." 
 Rokan, prep, and postp. „al the outside, without;" e. g. o vi 
 
 rokaji ka ah-set, „he is at the outside of the house." 
 Rokin, adv. „together, to one place, at one place, at the same 
 
 place;" e. g. lia tonklane rgkin, „they assembled together;" 
 
 — botr-na rokin, „put ihem together." 
 Rokom, adv. loc. „up, on high, upwards, above, from above;" 
 
 e. g. yi ri rokom, „he is there above;" — an-gbal ana beka 
 
 ma-ran rokom, „the second line from above." Cf. also rorata. 
 Rokom, = dokom, prep, and post(i. „above, on the top, at the 
 
 top;" e. g. 0' vi rokom ka aii-set, = o yi ka aii-set rokom. 
 
 „he is on the top of the house." Dokom is a euph. form. 
 Rokor, adv. loc. „at the inside, within;" e. g. na yi ri rokor, 
 
 „it is there within." 
 Rokor, prep, and postp. „wilhin. into, at" or „in the inside;" 
 
 e. g. ria yi-mi rokor, „it is within me;" — botr-ni rokor ka 
 
 am-poli, = botr-ni ka am-poti rokor, „put it into the cup." 
 Rolenken, adv. loc. „ yonder, to the neighbouring yard, to some 
 
 distance, to the other side;" e.g. „sa kone rolenken, „we 
 
 go to the neighbouring yard." 
 Rolenken, prep, and postp. „on the other side, beyond;" e. g. 
 
 ka-petr ka yi rolenken ka ka-tseh, = ka-pttr ka yi ka ka- 
 
 tsen rolenken, „the town lies on the other side of the hill." 
 Rom, a-, pi. e-, n. „leprosy"; e. g. o ba a-rom, „he is a leper," 
 
 lit. „he has leprosy;" = a-rom na wop-ko. 
 Romi, pr. comp. „to me, from thee, with me; towards me; against 
 
 me; at" or „to my place, there" or „yonder at" or „to my
 
 — 239 — 
 
 place;" e. g. o der romi, „he came to me;" — o di romi, 
 „he ate at my place." 
 
 Romori, adv. loc. „to Ihe other side" (as of a brook); e. g. o 
 kone romori, „he went over to the other side" (of the water). 
 
 Romdri, prep, and postp. „to the other side, beyond, to the op- 
 posite side" or „shore"; e. g. o tas romori ka 'ra-boii. .,he 
 passed over to the other side of the river." 
 
 Romp, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „pestle" (for a mortar); e. g. ka-romp 
 ka-lol, „a small pestle." 
 
 Romu, pr. comp. „to thee, with thee, from thee, at" or „to thy 
 place, there" or „yonder to" or „at thy place; against thee; 
 towards thee;" e.g. o yi romu. „he is there with thee;" — 
 tra der romu, „he will come to thee." 
 
 R'oh, or r'on', pi. s'on, n. „way, road;" e. g. o trori-mi ar'on, 
 „he showed me the way." The euph. form r'on' is used before 
 words beginning with d, as: trori-mi ar'on' da ro Ma-Ial, „shovv 
 me the wny to Malal;" — r'on' da-fino, ,,a good road." 
 
 R'on, pr. poss. „his, her," lit. „of him, of her;" e. g. ar'iima- 
 r'on, „his shirt." 
 
 Ron, a-, pi. e-, n. „image, figure, idol, mask" (usually made of 
 wood and painted); e, g. o won a-ron, „he put on a mask." 
 
 Ron, a-, or i-, pi. ma-; or also sometimes a-, in tiie sing, and 
 e-, in the pi. n. ..mountain"; the pi. ma-ron is used of a 
 ,,chain of mountains," hence they call the Colony of Sierra- 
 Leone: ro Ma-ron, lit. „al the mountains." E. g. a-ron a- 
 boli rokom, „a lofty mountain." 
 
 Ronan, pr. comp. „to them, with lliem, from them; towards 
 them; against them; at" or „to their place, there" or „yonder 
 at" or „to their place;" e. g. o di ronan, „he ate at their 
 place;" — 'a kalano ronan, „they returned home," lit. „they 
 returned to their place." 
 
 Ronkat, v. n. „be bitter; be harsh, be acerb" (as unripe limes); 
 e. g. ma-ber ma ronkai, „the palmwine is bitter." 
 
 Ronko, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „branch of a palm-tree with" or „wilh- 
 out the side-leaves, palm-branch;" e.g. o gbak ka-ronko, „he 
 cut a palm-branch."
 
 — 240 — 
 
 Rgndii, pr. comp. „to him, with him; towards him; against him; 
 at" or „to his place, there" or „^onder at" or „to his place;" 
 e. g. der roiioii, „he came to him;" - o pa rohoii, „he 
 said to him;" — 'a yefa roiion, „the\ came away from him;" 
 — k^Iano roiion, „he returned to his place (home)." 
 
 Rqiiu, pr. comp. „to you. with you, from you; against you; to- 
 wards you; ai" or „to your place, there" or „yonder at" 
 or „to your place;" e. g. o kone ronii, „he went yonder to 
 your place;" — o der ronii, „he came to you." 
 
 Ro-pil, see Pil, ka-, n. 
 
 Roraran, ndv. loc. „i)ehind, at the place behind, behind" (ihe 
 house); „abaft, aback;" e. g. o yi ri rorjirtui, „he is there 
 behind;" — trama roraran, „stand behind," or „sland abaft." 
 
 Roiaran, prep, and postp. „behind, at the back part;" e. g. o 
 Ir^ma mi roraran, = o Irama rcrdrari-ka-mi, „he stands be- 
 hind me," or also „he backs me;" — o yi roraran ka an- 
 kunk, „he is behind the fence." 
 
 Rorata, adv. loc. „below, beneath;" e. g, ra yi ang roraia, „il 
 is here below;" — ka rokom ha rorata, „from the top down 
 to the bottom." 
 
 Rorata, prep, and postp. „lielow, beneath, under, at the bottom;" 
 e. g. re ma botr an-tis-e? 1 botr-ni rorata ka am-mesa, 
 „where didst thou put the knife?" „l put it under the 
 table;" — owo yi rorata -k'ori, „who is under him" (i. e. 
 under his power); — ka an-lof rorata, or: rorata ka an-fof, 
 „ under the earth " 
 
 Ros, V, n. „serve up food" (especially rice by taking it out from 
 the pot, in which it was cooked, with a spoon into a dish, 
 with or without c-nak, „rice"); e. g. o bap-na 'a tra ros, 
 „he met them serving up rice " 
 
 Ros, V. a. „dish up, serve ui>" (as food); e. g. a ros e-nak, „they 
 served up rice." 
 
 Ro-torofi, see Tgrgn, ki-, n. 
 
 Ru, v. a. „plail, weave;" e. g. g Ira ru kota ka-fino, „he is 
 
 weaving fine cloth." 
 
 Ru, ra-. pi. tra-, n. „lbe world, the universe;" e. g. ka 'ra- 
 
 ru
 
 — 241 — 
 
 arA ma der-e, sa Ira rgk ey'elr, eye sa poh sak ano-rQ, „in 
 the world to come we shall reap the things, which we have 
 sown in this world." 
 Ruba, V. a. „bless"; e. g. o riiba-na, ,.he blessed them." 
 Ruba, a-, pi. e-, n. „a blessing"; e. g. aii-ruba-iVoiK „his blessing;" 
 
 — a-ruba nan, „that is a blessing," lit. „a blessing that." 
 
 s ' 
 Ruhu, 0-, n. „Spiril" (of God). From the Ar. ^., anhelitus, 
 
 spiriliis. E. g. o-ruhu ka K'llru, „the Spirit of God." 
 R uma, pi. s'uma, n. „a shirt, robe, the long garment worn by the 
 
 Mandingos;" e. g. ar'uma are ra iino, ,,this robe is good." 
 
 Also „ afterbirth." 
 Runi, Q-, pi. a-, n. „a man, male;" e. g. a-riini a-sas, „lhree men;" 
 
 — an-rimi, „lhe males." 
 
 Runi, adj. „male"; e. g. a-fam a-runi, „men", lit. „male per- 
 sons;" — w'ahet runi, .,a boy," lit. „a male child." 
 
 Riini o-bi, Q-, pi. a-riini a- bi, n. „a black male, black man, negro." 
 
 Rtini o-fera, Q-, pi. a-riini a-fera, n. „a white male, a white man, 
 a European." 
 
 R'unia, pi. s'dnia, n. „multitude, crowd;" e. g, r'linia ra a-fam 
 ra-bana ra yi ri, „there was a great crowd of people there." 
 
 Runkatr, v. a, „mix" (as solids with liquids); „knead" (as dough); 
 e. g. runkatr e-lof re m'antr, „mix the earth with water." 
 
 Rusam, v. a. „ bring up, raise up, nurse; nourish;" e.g. mlna 
 riisam-ko, „1 brought him up;" — e-nak e rusam-sii, „rice 
 nourishes us." 
 
 s. 
 
 S', pref. indef. insep. „a, an;" e.g. s'adka, „ sacrifice;" as'^dka- 
 lr'on,"„his sacrifice." It is a form of tr', or ts' for: Ira-. 
 Cf. the form I' below. 
 Sa, pr. subj. „we;" e. g. sa naii-ko dis, „ we saw him yesterday." 
 S^bat, a-, pi. e-, n. „sabbath." From the English. 
 
 S'adka, n. „sacrifice." Fr. the Ar. «j<Xo, quicquid datur Deo 
 sacrum. The pi. is indicated by joining with it the adj. lal 
 
 Temne - Worterbuch. 16
 
 049 
 
 or gbali, „manv," as: s'^dka tra-lal. „many sacrifices." InVei: 
 sadaka. 
 
 Sak, V. a. ,, scatter disperse; sow;" e. g. sa ko sak pa-la tenon, 
 „we go to sow rice to day;" — sak aii-fam, „he disper- 
 sed the people; — ara sa ma s^ik, ria sa ba ka-pim," what 
 we are sowing, that we have to reap (pluck)," 
 
 Sak, ka-, pi. tra-, n. ,,rib ;" also „side;" e. g. fanta ro tra- 
 sak, „lie on the side;" - tra-sak-tr'on, „his ribs" 
 
 Scika , V. rel ,,scatter-with- , scatter-for-; sow-for-, sow-with- ; 
 sow 'with-;" e. g. saka e-troko apa-la, „scatter the rice for 
 the fowls; — saka-mi pa-la, „sow rice for me." 
 
 Saka, a-, pi. e-, n. .,a country dish," also called „palaver-sauce," 
 (being prepared of various herbs with fish and palm-oil); e. g. 
 a-saka a-boti-di, „a delicious palaver sauce," 
 
 S^kane, v. spont. or rather recipr, (rad. sak), „disperse;" e. g. 
 an-fam na sakane, ,,the people dispersed." Also ,, separate 
 from each other, pari," (as man and wife). 
 
 Sakar, v. rel, (rad. sak), „bespatter-with-, bespatter," also, „blot, 
 stain;" e. g. sakar ak'ota-k'on d'Qba, ,,he stained his cloth 
 with ink," 
 
 Sake, v. n. ,,turn , turn oneself; become changed " or „altered," 
 fig „become converted," (with or without mera, „mind"); 
 e. g. gbdli he so sake, ,,he cannot turn himself again;" — 
 o-tem owe sake gba, „this old man is much changed." 
 
 Sake, ka-, n. verb. ,,act of turning oneself; act of being" or 
 ,, gelling changed, change;" fig. ,, conversion;" e, g. ka-sakg- 
 k'on ro-toron, ,,his turning himself towards the east;" — ka- 
 sake-k'on, „his conversion," 
 
 Sake ma-der, „become flesh, become man;" e. g. sake ma- 
 der, „he became man " 
 
 Sdki, V. a. „lurn, change, make;" fig. „convert" (with mera); 
 e. g. saki-ko o-mori, „he made him a Mohammedan;" — 
 s^ki am-mera-no'n, „he converted him." 
 
 Sakine, v. refl. a- „turn oneself into- , change oneself into-," 
 (as a person into a leopard); „make oneself-;" e, g. sakine 
 o-s^ntki, „he made himself a Santki (minister)."
 
 — 248 — 
 
 Sal, V. a. „form, build" (as a house, or a pot of mud or clay); 
 e. g. sal a-se!, ,,he built a house." 
 
 Sal, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „fmger," also „toe" (of Ihe fool); 
 e. g. ma-Scil-m'on, „his fingers." 
 
 S^la, V. rel. (rad. sal), „form-for-, build-for-; build-\^ith-, form- 
 w'ith-;" e. g. o sala-mi a-set, „hc built a house for me." 
 
 Salma, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „psalm;" e. g. ma-salma ma-sas, 
 „ three psalms." Adopted. 
 
 Salkar, adj. „salted, salt;" e. g. o-sem g-salkar, „salt meat." 
 
 Sam, ka-, pi. Ira-, n. „an open running sore, a sore, ulcer; 
 wound;" e. g. ka-sam ka-bana, „a large sore." 
 
 Sam, adj. „sacred, holy;" e. g. d'er o-sam, „a sacred place." .^ 
 
 Samas, v, caus, (rad. sam), „make sacred, make holy, set apart 
 from common use; sanctify;" e. g. 'a samas od'er owe, 
 „lhey made this place sacred," 
 
 San, ka-, pi. tra-, n „mouth, lip," (also used of the lips of a wound); 
 fig. „advocate;" e. g. ka-sah-ka-mi, „my mouth," or also 
 „my advocate;" — Ira-san tra ka-sam, „the lips of the wound." 
 
 San ka o-bai, ka-, n. „an ambassador, a herald," lit. „the mouth 
 of a king." 
 
 S'§ni, n. „acerbily" (as of unripe limes); „qualily of setting the 
 teeth on edge;" fig. „pity, regret;" e. g. s'ani tra yi ka e- 
 sek-'e-mi, „my teeth are set on edge," lit. „acerbity is to 
 my teeth;" ~ ma-lemre ma ba s'i]ni, „thc limes are acerb," 
 lit. „the limes have acerbity," or „such a qualii> as to set 
 the teeth on edge;" — as'ani tra wop- mi „my teeth are set 
 on edge," lit. „the state of having set the teeth on edge 
 holds me;" — o ba s'ani trdka trgn, „he has pity on ac- 
 count of him." See Proverb 1, p. 08. 
 
 Sanne, v. refl. for: saime (rad. san), „bow oneself down, bend one- 
 self down, stoop; make a compliment", (of males only); „bend 
 itself" (as the blade of a knife); „submit to one's authority, 
 submit;" e. g. o sanne roiidh, „he bowed down to him," 
 or „he mode a compliment to him," or ,.he submit' ed to 
 him;" — an-lis na saime, „the knife bends itself;" — o sanne, 
 „he stooped down." 
 
 16*
 
 — 244 — 
 
 S^ntki, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a minister (of a king);" e. g. Q-s5ntki o- 
 las, „a bad minister." 
 
 Santr, e-, n, „seed/* (especiall;>' of rice), e. g. o ba e-santr 
 traka kuta, „he has (rice) seed to plant (sow)." 
 
 S^ntrak, a-, or i-, pi. ma-; or also sometimes a-, pi. e-, n. „nail," 
 (of the fingers or toes); „talon, claw," (of beasts); e. g. 
 ba e-s^ntrak e-boli, „he has long nails." 
 
 Sap, V. a. „strike, flog, beat," (as a person, or as waves a canoe); 
 also „thresh" (as rice); „ catch " (as a bird); „get," (as 
 trouble); „scoop, lad out," (as water from a bowl, or food 
 from a dish); e. g. 'a sap-ko, „lhey flogged him;" — o sap 
 a-rom, „he got leprosy;" — 'a sap e-nak, „they took out 
 the rice;" — q sap-mi ka-tsiii, „he flogged me for nothing;" 
 — sap m'one, ,M got trouble," lit. „he catch trouble," 
 (as the Liberat. Africans sav). 
 
 Sap, V. n. or pass. „be flogged; be caught:" e. g. o sap ro- 
 bolo. „he was caught by the throat." 
 
 Sap, ka-, n. verb. „act of flogging" or „of threshing, etc.;" e.g. 
 ka-sap-k'on, „his flogging," (actively or passively); „also: a 
 flogging; a threshing." 
 
 S^pa, V. rel. „flog-with-; thresh-with-; flog-for-; thresh-for- ; 
 lade out-for-;" e. g. 'a sapa-ko k'etr, „they flogged him with 
 a whip;" — s^pa-mi apa-la, „thresh the rice for me." 
 
 S^par, a-, pi. e-, n. „digger," (being a sort of hoe, but running 
 paraUel with the handle, and not forming an angle; it is 
 used to dig holes with for the sinking of posts for houses); 
 e. g. a-s^par a-b^na, „a large digger." Also „an iron bar" 
 (used to dig holes with). 
 
 Sapas, V. freq. a. (rad- sap), „catch in a trap, catch, ensnare, 
 entrap;" e. g. ow'^n owe o sapas e-bamp na-ran, „this boy 
 caught two birds in a trap." 
 
 Sar, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „a stone;" e, g. ma-sar ma-lal, „many 
 stones." 
 
 Sara, v. a. „carry on the head, carry, put on the head, be load- 
 ed with on the head; put on" (as a cap); „take upon 
 oneself" (as a palaver); „have upon oneself; suffer, have," 
 (as trouble); e.g. I sAra-ko, or: 1 siira-ko ro-bomp, „1 car-
 
 — 245 — 
 
 ried him on the head;" — o sara a-lapra, ,,he put on a 
 cap;" — mina sara air' el Ira-tsi, ,.I take that matter upon 
 me;" — o sara m'one, ,,he suffers trouble." 
 
 Sas, adj. num. ,,three;" e. g. a-fama-sas, or: a-fam ria-sas, „three 
 persons;'' — ma-rei ma-sas/' three days." 
 
 Sas, ra-, n. „state of being three, trinity." 
 
 Sebe, a-, pl.e-, n. „an amulet, a charm" (as hung round the arm, 
 or neck, etc., and enclosed in leather or cloth; e. g. o ba 
 e-sebe e-lai, „he has many charms". 
 
 Sek, V. a. „fie, tie on," (as a person, or a charm); „gi^d-^vilh-;" 
 e. g. na sek ama-tra-m'on, „theY tied his hands;" — sek 
 o-na ka ak'antr, ,.tie the co^v to the post;" — 1 sek-ko a- 
 gbato, „I girded him with a cutlass," or ,,I lied him on a 
 cutlass;" — sek an-trol, „tie on the charm." Also ., fasten," 
 as: ko sek am-bela, „go fasten the sail." 
 
 Sek, ra-, pi. e-, n. „a tooth;" e. g. e-sek-^'on , ,.his teeth." 
 
 Sekeli inl. „I pity thee!" It is always followed by; 6, and is pro- 
 
 Seke! ' perly a noun signifying ,,pity.'" See Colloq. Phras. p. 
 108. 110., and cf also mutsi w'uni seke. 
 
 Sekne, v. refl. a. (rad. sek), ,, lie-on oneself, tic-round oneself, gird 
 oneself with-;" e. g. o sekne a-gbato. ,,he tied a cullass round 
 himself;" — o sekne a-trol, „he tied a charm on liimself." 
 
 Sel, ma-, n. „laughter; scorn, scornfulness, mockery;" e. g. ma- 
 sel-m'on, „his laughter." Also , .object of mockery," as: 'a 
 saki-ko ma-sel, ,,they made him an object of mockery." 
 
 Sel-tr'el, adj. „inclined to ridicule" or ,,mock at a thing, scorn- 
 ful;" e. g. w'lini sel-tr'el, ,,a scornful person." 
 
 Sgline, V. refl. n. (rad. soli), „lean oneself on backwards, recline 
 oneself, recline;" e, g. g seline ka aiVantr, „he leaned him- 
 self against the tree." 
 
 Seline, V. refl. a. ,.lean oneself upon-backwards, lean oneself 
 back against-; rely on-, repose on-, trust on-;" e.g. o seline 
 an-set, ,,he leaned himself back against the house;" — o 
 seHne K'iiru, „he relies on God." 
 
 Selo, V. n. „will, be willing, consent;" e.g. o pA ho: 1 spIq, 
 „he said: I will."
 
 — 240 — 
 
 Selo, ma-, n. „AviIl, pleasure; readiness;" e. g. ma-s6lo-m'on, 
 
 „his will." 
 Sem, 0-, n. ,,beef, meat," e. g. o-.sem o-fino, „good beef." 
 Sem, a , pi. e-, or tra-; or also sing, o-, pi. tra-, n. „a wild animal, 
 
 venison, a beast of the chase, animal, quadruped;" e.g. 
 
 o-sem o-ninis, „a fierce animal" See the two next words. 
 Sem e-trol, e-, n. ,, cattle of the larger kind," lit. „beasts reared 
 
 up." The small cattle are called: y'etr e-lrol, lit. „things 
 
 reared up." 
 Sem ka ka-petr, o- , pi. tra-sem tra ka-petr, n. „a tame beast," 
 
 lit. „a beast of the town." The sing, mav also take the 
 
 form: a-sem 'a ka-petr, and the pi. e-sem ya ka-petr. The 
 
 pi. may be given by: „cattle."*) 
 Sem ka ro-kant, o-, pi. tra-sem tra ro-kant, n. „a wild animal," 
 
 lit. „a beast of in the wood." The sing, may also take the 
 
 form a-sem 'a ro-kant , and the pi. e-sem ya ro-kant. See 
 
 the Note for the preceding word. 
 Sen'! 1 int. „welcome!" It is always followed by : 6, and is pro- 
 Senel'bably a noun signifying „welcome." See Colloq. Phras. p. 
 
 107. 110. 
 Sene ! int. answering to the English ,,God bless thee!" It is 
 
 used after sneezing. See Colloq. Phras. p. 108. 
 S^na, a pi. e-, n. „a greegree, charm," (used to detect thieves 
 
 with). It generally consists of a goat's horn, to which some 
 
 of its hair, strips of cloth, and some beads, etc. are tied. 
 
 When it is made use of, fearful curses are pronounced ag- 
 ainst the offender, which the greegree is to execute upon 
 
 the hidden criminal. 
 Sehe, n. prop. See Proverb. 3, p. 99. 
 Sene! int. see sen'! above. 
 Sefik, adv. „all, whole; fully, entirely." It has often the sense 
 
 of an adj. =: be ; t\ g. tam ha sehk, ,,he conquered them 
 
 *) Note. There are still some other forms for the smg. 
 and pi., as will be seen in the Grammar.
 
 — 247 — 
 
 all," or „lhe whole of them ;" — mo o pori kane sehk, 
 
 etc, ,,when he had said all, etc." 
 S6no; a-, or i-. pi. ma-, n. „arrow."' (made of a kind of cane 
 
 with an iron beard); e. g. o ba ma-seno ma-lal, „he has 
 
 many arrows."' 
 Set, a-, pi. P-, n. ,,a house, abode, dwelling, building; nest," (as 
 
 of birds) ; e. g. o sal a-set, „he buill a house ; — o _yi ro- 
 
 set, „he is in the house.'" 
 
 X • 
 
 Setani, n. „Satan. the devil." Fr. the Ar. (j|ia>ui, satanas, dia- 
 
 bolus. . 
 
 Sele, ka-, pi. tra-, n. a rod. slick," (as to flog with, or to drive 
 
 cows away with); e. g. ka-sete ka-boli, .,a long rod." 
 
 V 
 
 Sim, V. a. „break, break off, break in two," (as a stick); ..break 
 
 down, pull down" (as a house); o sim ak'antr, ..he broke 
 
 the stick in two." 
 Si'mtar, atlj. (rad. sim) , „sudden. unexpected;" e. g. ra Ti ra- 
 
 simtar, „a sudden death." 
 Sip, 0-, pi, tra- n. ,,a leopard;" e, g. o-sip o-bana, „a large 
 
 leopard." 
 Site, V. n. „break the wind" 
 So, adv. ,, again, also;" e. g. tse so yo-t.si, „do not do it 
 
 again." 
 So, V, n „bend , bow" (as the knee); also „sting. pierce, stab; 
 
 pierce-with-, stab-with-;" e. g. o so-mi a-lis, „he stabbed 
 
 me with a knife." See next word. 
 So tra-wu, „kQeel down," lit. ,,bend the knees;" e. g. o so 
 
 tra-wu-tr'on, „he kneeled down." 
 S6fali, a-, pi. e-, or tra; or also sing, o-, pi. tra-, n. ..an ass;" 
 
 e. g. ren'sa a-s6fali, „he rides upon an ass." 
 Sol, a-, pi. e-, or tra-; or also sing, o-, i)l. Ira-, n. ..a horse;" 
 
 e, g. wal a-soT, ,,he bought a horse." 
 SoT, adv. , , softly, quietly, calmly, easily,; slowly; secretly;" e g. 
 
 o yo-tsi SOI, „he did it softly ;•" — o kot soi, „he walked 
 
 slowly; — I gbiili yo-tsi soi, ,.lie can do it easily." 
 Sok, V, impers. ,,dawn;"e. g. yokane, p§ sok! „get up, it dawns!"
 
 — 248 — 
 
 Sdkane, V. refl. „hnnt;" e. g. o ko s6kane, „he goes (went) a 
 hunting." 
 
 Sdkane, ka-, n. „act of hunting, hunting;" e. g. ka-sdkane-k'on, 
 „his hunting." 
 
 Sdki, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a seer, one having four eyes" (as they call 
 it), „one having to do with familiar spirits, one possessed 
 of second sight, augur, wizard," e. g. ow'uni owe o yi o- 
 sdki, „this person is a wizard." 
 
 Sdko, V. n. „be awake, be sleepless, be up during the night, 
 spend the night." As an aux. it expresses the adv. „all 
 night." E. g. 'a sdko tdmo, „they danced all night;" — 
 sdko gbes, „he was awake all night," or „he was up all 
 night; — o sdko romi „he spent the night with me." 
 
 Som, V. a. „send;" also „cause;" e. g. Pa Sdri o sQm-kg romi, 
 „Mr. Sori sent him to me;" — tsta som-kg o yO-tsi, „this 
 caused him to do it." Also „send-to-," as: o som-ko a-reka, 
 „he sent a letter to him." 
 
 S5m, V. n. „send"; also „be the cause;" e. g. rf sOm traka tsela- 
 ko, „he sent to call him;" — tsfa som o dinne, „this caused 
 him to perish," lit. ,,this is the cause he perished." 
 
 Som, ka-, pi. tra-; or a-, pi. e-, n. ..message;" e. g. o k^re-ko 
 a-som, ,,he carried a message to him." 
 
 Som, V. a. „devour, eat;" e. g. o som am-bamp t^rap, „he de- 
 voured the bird entirely." Also „nibble" (as a rat a wooden 
 bowl.) 
 
 Som, euph. form of son, ,, give", used before m; see: soil, below. 
 
 Sdmpa, adj. „troubling"; also passively „punished, troubled;" e.g. 
 tr'el tra-sdmpa, „somi4hing troubling," or ,, something which 
 causes trouble." 
 
 Sdmpa, ka- pi. tra-, n. „act of punishing, punishment" (in- 
 flicted); e. g. ka-sdmpa-k'on, „his punishment." 
 
 Sdmpane, v. refl. „sufl'er," lit. „trouble" or „punish oneself; 
 be afflicted;" e. g. ow'uni owe o sdmpane o-lai, „this per- 
 son suffers much." 
 
 Sdmpane, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „suflering, punishment" (endured);
 
 — 249 — 
 
 ^affliction;" e. g, ka-sompane ka-biina ka Avop-ko, „he is 
 greatly afflicted," lit. „great affliction liokis him," 
 
 Som'ra, (for: somara), v. doubl. rel. (rad. som) „scnd-to-, send- 
 for-;" also simply „send;" e. g. Pa Sori o s6m'ra-mu-ni, 
 „Mr. Sori sent it to thee;" — o som'ra-ko ro-k'or, he sent 
 him to the farm." 
 
 Son, adv. ^alone, only;" e. g. min' sOn , ,,l alone;" — kon' 
 son, „he alone;" — kon' son taho, „not he alone." 
 
 Sgn, V. a. give, deliver;" e g. o som-mi ka-bo, „he gave me 
 country-bread;" — o son an-kala ka o-kas-k'on, „he gave 
 the money to his father," =; o sgii o-kas-k'on an-kala, 
 
 Sona, V. rel. (rad. so), „bend-for-, bow-lo-," (as the knees to 
 one. See next word. 
 
 Sona w'uni lra-\vu," bow the knees lo" or „for one, kneel down 
 before one;" e. g. 'a sona-ko tra-wn, ,.they bowed the knees 
 before him," = „they kneeled down before liim." 
 
 Sonala, a-, pi. e-, or Ira-, or sing, o-, pi. Ira , n. „a lion;" e, g. 
 a-s6iiala a-bana, „a large lion." 
 
 Sond, V. a. abr. (rad. son), „deiiver up, give up, give away; resign" 
 (as an office); „part with; e, g. gbal o send an-tof, „the king 
 gave the country away;" — 'a sond-kg ronan, ,,they deliver- 
 ed him up to them;" — 1 gbali he ni sond, „1 cannot part 
 with it." 
 
 Sor, adj. „daubed over with mud, mudded, made of mud; e.g. 
 a-sel a-sor, „a mud-house." 
 
 Sor, a-, pi. e-, n. ,.a Fula javelin, spear; a stick with an iron 
 fork used for throwing;" also „a long stall tipped with brass" 
 or „silver, borne by old men as a sort of badgf of honour." 
 
 Sdro, e-, n. „excrements of infants; e. g. e-soro ya ow'ah^l, 
 „the excrements of the infant." 
 
 Sot, V. n. „sew;" e. g. o sot o-bann, „he sews with large 
 stitches;" — o sot o-fino, „he sews well." 
 
 Sot, a-, or i-, pi, ma-; or also a-, pi. e-. n. ,,a trick, an artifice; 
 cunning, stratagem;" e. g. o-trar owe o ba a-sot a las. „this 
 slave has a bad trick." The pi. form ma-sol , is also used in 
 the sense of „craftiness, cunningness,"
 
 — 250 — 
 
 Sole, V. 11. „piss, urine, make water." 
 
 Soto, V. a. „receive, get, acquire, obtain;" also „gel into" (as 
 
 into some state); e. g. sa pon solo ah-ram-'a-su, „we have 
 
 got our pay;" — o soto i-nel, „he obtained mercy," or also 
 
 „he is in a pitiable stale so as to deserve pity." 
 Soto, kti-, n. verb. „act of getting" or „obtaining." 
 Solo a-mera, v. n. „gel sense, come to the years of discretion;" 
 
 e. g. o pon' to solo a-mera, he has now come to the years 
 
 of discretion." 
 Solona, v. rel. „oblaiu-for-, get-for-;" e. g. som-mi an-kala ana 
 
 ma sdlona-mi, „give me Ihe money, which thou didst get 
 
 for me." 
 Su, pr, obj. „us;" e. g. o sap-su, „he flogged us." 
 Sil, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „pipe" (as made of corkwood); „trun)pet;" 
 
 e. g. fen aka-sQ, „blow the trumpet." 
 Sule, V. n. „have diarrhoea, have loose bowels; be loose" (as 
 
 Ihe bowels); e. g. ak'or-ka-mi ka sule, my bowels are loose." 
 Sule, adj. „loose" (as bowels); e. g. o ba k'or ka-sule, „hc has 
 
 loose bowels." 
 Siilima, o-, pi. a-, n. „one of the Sulima nation, a Suliina." 
 Sum, a-, n. „a fast;" e. g. 'a wop ah-sQm, „they hold the fast," 
 
 or „the Ramadan." Fr. the Ar. -5-0, abstinentia a cibo, potu 
 
 etc., ab aurora usque ad solis occasum, jejunium. 
 
 Suma, e-, n. „ times." The sing, is not used; it always oc- 
 curs in the phrase: e-siima ye, ,,now-a-days, now at this 
 time;" e. g. reke Yisua o yi e-suma ye-e? „where is Jesus 
 now?" 
 
 fe'ul, V. a. „rub" (as in washing or otherwise); „strike; stroke;" 
 also „shoot with-, fire off-, discharge," (as a gun); „shoot;" 
 e.g. I sut-ko, „1 rubbed him;" — sut ka-tra-k'on, „he 
 rubbed his hand;" — sut am-pihkar, „he discharged the 
 gun." 
 
 Sutne, V. refl. „rub oneself" (as in washing); „strike" or „knock 
 oneself;" e. g. sutne 0-lOt, „rub thyself well." 
 
 Sutar, V. rel. „shoot at-, fire a'-, shoot," (with or without pihkar);
 
 — 251 — 
 
 e. g. o siitar-ki}, or: o siUar-ko a-pinkar, „ht' shot him," 
 lit. „he shot at him," or „he shot at him with a gun;" — 
 sutar am-bamp, „he shot the bird." 
 
 Sutara, v. doubl. rel. „shoot at-with-, fire at-'vvitli-," e. g. 'a 
 sutara-ko a-piiikar, „lhe.y shot at him \vi!h a gun." Also 
 „shool at-for-,'- as „sulaia-mi-ko, „shoot at him fur me," 
 = ,, shoot him for me." 
 
 Sja, pr. emph. ,,we;" but al^o used for the sing. .,1" when 
 joined with other empb. pronouns, or with proper names, 
 implying the copula „and;" e. g. sva Pa Sori sa kone, „I 
 and Mr. Sori we go;" — sya an-Temne sa t'ra he ama- 
 Irei ame, or; sva 'n-Temne etc., „we Temnes do not kno\\ 
 these things." 
 
 T. 
 
 T', pref. indef. insep. „a, an;" e.g. t'amasere, „an evidence;" 
 it is an abbr. form of trii, which is evident from Ihe fact 
 that the adjective takes the pref. tra-, as t'amast'ic tra- 
 gbaraii. „a clear evidence." 
 
 Ta, adv. „yel; more;" e, g. o ta der he, „he did not yet come." It 
 sometimes serves to express the comparative degree, as: rian 
 pa-la pa ta la, „there rice is more plentiful " 
 
 Ta, prep. „except, unless;" e. g. ma gbali he soto raka, ta ma 
 ko ri, „thou wilt not gel any thing, unless thou doest go 
 there." 
 
 Tabana, adv. „for ever, ever;" with a negative „never." E. g. 
 an'antr na ro-yahannama na gbali he dimse labana, „lhe fire 
 in hell will never go out. " 
 
 Tabana, adj. ,,everlasting, eternal;" e.g. an'antr nu-tabana, „the 
 everlasting fire." 
 
 Tabana tankan, adv. emph. „for ever ;ind ever, ever, at any tmie, 
 to all eternity," = tankan tabana, with a negative „never 
 at any time, not at anv time." E. c. sa tra vi ro-rianna ta- 
 bana tankan, „we shall be in heaven for ever and ever;" 
 — labana tankan 1 bun be an-loh'-a-mu , „I never at any 
 lime transgressed thy commandment."
 
 — 252 — 
 
 Taho, adv. „not; e. g. ye taho, „not so;" — kgn taho yO-lsi, „il 
 is not he >vho did it," or „not he did it;" — niin' taho, 
 „it (is) not I;" — ey'etr-'e-mi yia taho, „these are not my 
 things." This negative may be nsed more absolutely without 
 a verb, which is not the case with he, or fe, and tse. It 
 generally implies the substantive verb „be" like the Hebr, 
 
 T^kas, v. n., „learn;" e. g. w'an, ma takas o-fino! „boy, thou 
 
 doest learn well!" 
 Takas, v. a. „learn;" e.g. ma lakas ka-gbal-i? „didst thou learn 
 
 to write?" 
 T^k'sa, V. cans. „ make-to learn, teach, instruct;" e. g. ma yema 
 
 ho I tak'sa-mu-i? „ doest thou wish me to teach thee?" 
 Tak'sa, v. rel. (for: takasa), „ I each- for-;" e. g. tak'sa-mi-ko. 
 
 „instruct him for me;" — o tak'sa ii-fym ka-tsemp ka-bana, 
 
 „he taught people with great wisdom." 
 Tak'sa, ka-, n. verb, „act of teaching, teaching, instruction;" e. g. 
 
 ka-tak'sa-k'on, ,.his instruction." 
 Talane, Q-, n. „boundary, termination, end;" e. g. o-t^lane wa 
 
 an-tof, „the end of the eartli;" — an-nesam-'a-su ano- 
 
 rfi na ba o-tAlane, „our life in this world takes an end," lit. 
 
 „ — — has an end." 
 Talom, adv. „or;" e. g. ma gbali tran' do-gban \A6m ro-ban, 
 
 „lhou canst go by land or by water." 
 Tam, V. n. ..get the victory, conquer, be victorious;" e. g. am-bona 
 
 ane na tam ka ka-tsim loko 6 Igko, „this nation gets always 
 
 the victory in war." 
 Tam, V. a. „conquer overcome, subdue, defeat;" e.g. an-Temne 
 
 na tam am-B61am, „the Temnes conquered the Boloms." 
 T'amasere, n. „evidence, witness, testimony; e. g. at'amasere- 
 
 tr'on tr^ka ovv'uni owe, „his evidence about this person." 
 Tambe, prep. „except, unless;" e. g. 1 tsi kalane nfnan, tambe 
 
 k'ankal ka benlr-mi, „I shall return to morrow, unless a tor- 
 
 nado prevent me. 
 Tambe, conj. ,,unless, except;" e. g. I gbali he soto ak'ota, tam- 
 be I ram-ki, „1 cannot get the cloth, except I pay for it."
 
 — 253 — 
 
 T^me, V. n. „awake. , be awake;" e. g. Qw'ah.jl y tdme tgn, 
 
 „the child is awake now." 
 T^mi, V. a., „awake, rouse from sleep;" e. g. t^e .ami-ko," do 
 
 not awake him." 
 T^mi, adj. „conquering, victorious." It may follow a proper 
 name without a prefix, when il is emphatic and may he 
 given by „the Conqueror," as: Farma Tami, „Farma the 
 Conqueror." 
 Tamm, adv. spec. „quile, entirely, in profound silence, altoge- 
 Iher, completely," used with trank „be silent;" dim „de- 
 stroy;" and yira, „sil;" e. g. o-tem o yira tamm, „the old 
 man sat in profound silence;" ~ o trank tamm, „he is 
 quite still." 
 T^m'ro, V. rel. inch, and pass. n. (for: tamaro or tamara), (rad. tam), 
 „get overcome, get routed, get defeated;" fig. „get tired, get 
 beaten, not succeed, fail to obtain one's object, get baffled 
 in one's attempts, be" or „get disappointed;" e.g. an-Ldko 
 fia tam'ro, „the Lokos were defeated;" — 1 tap tra soto 
 pa-la; kere I tam'ro, „I endeavoured to gel rice: but I failed 
 to obtain my object." 
 Tam'ro, V. rel. inch and pass. a. lit. „get conquered by-, get 
 overcome by-," or „in-," (as an army in war); hence: „nol 
 obtain-, fail to obtain, not get, miss; lose;" e. g. 'a tam'ro 
 o-na, „they missed the cow" (which they sought to catch); 
 — o tam'ro am-bok, „he did not get the snake;" ~ 1 
 tam'ro-ko, „I missed him" (as in pursuing after one). 
 Tam'ro, ka-, n. „defeat, overthrow; discomfiture; disappointment;" 
 
 e. g. ka-tam'ro ka ar'afa-r'oh, „the defeat of his army." 
 Tan, 0-, adj. but used adverbially „(a) little;" e. g. 1 dlra gbo 
 
 Q-tan, „I slept but little." 
 Tan, adj. „litlle, few;" e. g. m'anir ma-tan, „a little water;" — 
 
 ma-rei ma-tan, „a few days." 
 Tan', for: tank, which see. This form is used before d. See 
 
 o ' o ' 
 
 Fables p. 56. 58. 
 T^na, V. n. „be able, prevail." As an aux. il serves to express 
 the Engl. aux. „can", and indicates ability to accomphish
 
 — 254 — 
 
 what is denoted by Ihe principal verb, which follows in the 
 short form of the Infinitve. E.g. o tana he, „he is not 
 able;" — ah-fam ane na Xiuva he J'O ma-pant, „these persons 
 are not able to do work." 
 
 Tdna, v. n. „be able for-, prevail over, be a match for-, be equal 
 to-, be able to keep up" or „to compete with-;" e. g. g-lanba 
 owe o tana he Qwon, „this young man is no match for that 
 one;" — I tana-ko, I am able to compete with him;" — 
 ow'an tana-tsi, „lhe boy is able for it." 
 
 Taniis, V. caus. „ enable, make able;" e. g. I lanas-ko tra yo-tsi, 
 „I enabled him to do it." 
 
 Tani. conj. „lest, that not;" e. g. i.se ko ri, tani na sek-mu, „do 
 not go there, lest they tie thee." 
 
 Tani, adv. „soon, shortly, by and by;" e. g. 1 tsi der tani, or: 
 tani I tsi der, „I shall come soon;" — o tra sap-mu t^ni 
 „he will flog thee shortly." It may be joined with nouns 
 indicating time, to make that time more definite, as: tani 
 Iratrak, „to night," or „this night," lit. „soon to night," 
 
 Tank, a-, pi. e-, n. „root," (of a tree or shrub); e. g. a-tank 
 a bana, „a large root." Cf. Fables p. 56. 58. 
 
 Taiika, ^ adv. „ever, for ever, always, at all times; some day, 
 
 T^nkan, J one day, any time; much, very." With a negative 
 „never," It is also sometimes used in the sense of an adj. 
 denoting „much, many." E, g. ma nafi'-ko tankafi-i? „didst 
 thou ever see him?" — sii tra yi ri tahkan, „we shall be 
 be there for ever;" — I tsi tsela-mu so tankafi, „I will 
 call thee again some day;" — o tra tru tankan, „he is very 
 sick;" — tse tsi so tanka yo, „never do it again," lit „do 
 not do it ever again;" — o dif a-fam tankan, „he killed 
 much people." The form tankan is used more absolutely, 
 or at the end of a proposition. (Cf. -n under N.) 
 
 Tanka be, „very much, exceedingly; e.g. o lasar ak'ota tanka be, 
 „he spoiled the cloth very much." 
 
 Tankan 6 tankan, „for ever and ever, to all eternity, eternally." 
 With a negative „never, not at any time;" e.g. an'antr na 
 ro yahannama na gbali he dimse tankan 6 tankan, „the fire 
 in hell will not go out for ever and ever."
 
 — 255 — 
 
 T^nkan tab.'ma, — tabana tankan, which see. 
 
 Tanta, ka-, pi. tra-, n. waterfall, cascade, cataract;" e, g. o vi 
 ro-tania, „he is at the waterfall." 
 
 Tapan , adv. „formelv, once, in former (old) times, long ago, 
 
 before-time;" e. g. w'i'ini o vi ri ro-Ma-lal tapan, „lhere was 
 
 . once a person at Malal;" — an-fam ana yi ka ka-petr ake 
 
 tapaii, „the people who were in ihis town in former tim.es." 
 
 Tarap, adv. ,,enlirel.y, altogether; completely, quiic; well;" e.g. 
 afi-kala-i'i'on iia dinne tarap, „his money is lost altogether ;" 
 — I trara-ko tarap, „I know him well." 
 
 Tas, V. impers. a ..surpass, exceed." It may he used to express 
 the Comparative and Superlative degrees, as: sa poii he 
 botar K'uru pa t.is r aka 6 raka, „we have not loved God above 
 every thing," lit. „ — — it surpasses every thing. 
 
 Tas, V. a. „siirpass, pass, excel;" e. g, kono las an-nabi be, 
 „he is superior to all the prophets," lit. „he surpasses all 
 the prophets;" — ma tas-mi traka a-fosa, „thou art stronger 
 than I," lit, „lhou excellest me as regards strength." These 
 examples will show that also this form is used to express 
 the Comparative and Superlative. This is also the case with 
 the next word, which see. 
 
 Tas, v. n. „go on, pass, pass on, pass along: pass away" (as 
 smoke); also „exceed excel;" e.g. o tas ka an-set-'a-mi, 
 „he passed at my house;" — ak'ima ka tas. „the smoke 
 passes away;" — I ba a-kala a-gbati, kere kgno tas, „I have 
 much money, but he has more," = „he has more money 
 than I." 
 
 Tas, ka-, n. verb. „act of passing" or „of passing along" or 
 „by;" e. g. ka-las-k'on an-set-'a-mi, „his passing at my 
 house." 
 
 Tasa, V. caus. and pass. „ exceed, pass, surpass;" e. g. I tasa yi, „I 
 am more than that," or „I exceed thus," lit. „I was made 
 to exceed thus." Also this form may be used to express 
 the Comparative and Superlative. 
 
 Tasale, a-, pi. e-, n. „a brass pan used for ablutions by the Mo- 
 hammedans at their prayers, pray-kettle."
 
 — 256 — 
 
 T^si, V. a. „surpass, exceed, be superior to, excel; e. g. an-sel- 
 n'on na tasi an-set-'a-mi , „his house is superior to my 
 house." Also „be too much for-," (as food for a number 
 of persons); e. g. ey'etr e-di eye e tassi-na, „this food is 
 too much for Ihcm." Like tas above this form is also much 
 used to express the Comparative and Superlative; for which 
 purpose tasi is also used intransitively. Tasi is the long 
 form of tas. 
 
 Tel, V. n. „rot, get rotten, decay, be rotten;" e. g. e-tok e tel, 
 „the fire-wood gets rotten." 
 
 T61i, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „ a trap, snare" (for birds, or other 
 animals, made of bamboo leaves, or of wooden rope); e. g. 
 gbatr ma-leli, „he set a trap." 
 
 Telma, adj. „chatting, prating, loquacious;" e. g. w'Qni telma, 
 „a loquacious person," = „a prater." 
 
 Telma, ka-, n. verb. „chatting, prating, loquaciousness;" e, g. 
 ow'uni owe ba ka-telma, „this person is fond of chatting;" 
 — w'iini ka-telma, „a loquacious person," lit. „a person (of) 
 loquaciousness." 
 
 T^lma Modu, „a prater, a chatting person, babbler;" e.g. kane 
 Telma Modu kc4ma o trank, „tell the prater to be silent." 
 Cf. the word Modu under M, and Proverb 5, p. 99. 
 
 Tem, 0-, pi. a-, n. „old man. Sir." It is a title of respect to 
 old men; e.g. o-tem, kori 'u! „I salute thee, Sir!" The 
 indef. pref. na- may be 'put also behind the noun, as is the 
 case with a few nouns of this class, as: lem-na, or: iia-tem, 
 „old men;" but: a-lem-na, „the old men." 
 
 T^mne, o-, pi. a-, n. „one of the Temne nation, a Temne." About 
 its derivation see Pref. §. 2. 
 
 Temne, adj. „belonging to the Temne country" or „people, of 
 Temne origin, temne;" e. g. an-lof a-temne, „the Temne 
 country." 
 
 Ten, V. a. „seek, look for-, try to obtain"; e. g. ko r'aka ma ten-e? 
 „whatdoest thou look for?" 
 
 Ten, ka-, n. verb. „act of looking for;" e. g. ka-ten-k'on o-na, 
 „his looking for the cow."
 
 — 257 — 
 
 Tena, v. rel. „se.ek-for-, get -for-, provide -for-; procure -for-; 
 supply-with what is necessary;" e.g. w'an, ko tena-mi o-na, 
 „boy, go look me for the cow;" — o-lem o tena-ini y'etr 
 e-di, „lhe old man supplies me with food;" — K'uru o 
 lena-mi o-fino, „God provides well for me." 
 
 Tenon, adv. „to day, this day;" e. g. o yo-tsi tenon, „he did 
 it to day." 
 
 Tenon ra-fol, „this evening;" e. g. o tra der tenon ra-fgl, „he 
 will come this evening." 
 
 Tenon ra-yaii, „to day at noon;" e. g I tsi kone tenon ra-yan, 
 „I shall leave to day at noon." 
 
 Tenon tratrak, „to night, this night;" e. g. o kas-ka-mi o tra 
 der tenon tratrak, „my father will come to night." 
 
 Tens, V. freq. or intens. a. (rad, ten), „search for-, look for- 
 carefully, seek;" e. g. ko na tens ri-c? „what do ye search 
 for there?" 
 
 Tensa, v. freq. or intens. and rel. „search for- in behalf of-; look 
 for- diligently in behalf of-, seek carefully for-;" e.g. tensa- 
 mi nan aii-lapra-'a-mi, „seek ye my cap for me." Also „seek 
 an occasion for-" (as for war, or palaver); e. g. o tensa ka- 
 tsim, „he seeks much for an occasion of war" or „of a fight." 
 
 Tenta, a-, pi. e-, n. „a hammock"; e. g. o fanta ro-tenta, „he lies 
 in the hammock." 
 
 Teri, ma-, n. „wrong" (the contrary of: right), „injustice; im- 
 propriety, wrongness" (as of an action); „fault, blame;" e.g. 
 ba ma-teri, „he is in the wrong;" — 'a son-ko ma-leri, 
 „they gave him wrong;" — ma-teri ma atr'ei atra o yo, „the 
 impropriety of the thing which he did." 
 
 Tesa, V. n. „be pleased, be gratified; please, give pleasure, be 
 acceptable, be agreeable;" e. g. K'liru o tesa traka jis'jidka- 
 tr'on, „God was pleased with his sacrifice;" — as'adka-tr'on 
 tra tesa ka K'iiru, „his sacrifice was acceptable to God;" — 
 an-fef ane na tesa he, „this wind is not agreeable." 
 
 Tesane, v. impers. refl. „please to-, give pleasure to-, delight," 
 lit. „give pleasure to oneself;" e. g. pa tesane-mi traka tron, 
 „I am pleased" or „delighted with him," lit. „it gives plea- 
 
 Temne - Worterbuch. 1 7
 
 — 258 — 
 
 sure to me on account of him;" — pa lesane-ko, „he is 
 delighted," lit. „it delights him." 
 
 Tesas, v. caus. „make to be pleased, gratify, delight, cheer; make 
 acceptable, ingratiate oneself with-; e. g. sa ba tra lesas o- 
 bal, „we must make the king pleased;" — atr'ei atse tra 
 lesas-mi, „lhis thing delights me." 
 
 Tete, adv. ,,presently, now, just now, immediately;" e. g. tro 
 sa ma yo tete-e? „how shall we do now?" — kane yo tete 
 atr'ei atse-e? „who did now this thing?" — o-lanba o bek 
 tete, „the young man came just now;" — yO-tsi tete, „do 
 it immediately." 
 
 Tetu, a-, pi, e-, n. „a messenger, an apostle;" e, g. o som'ra 
 a-telu ka o-bal, „he sent a messenger to the king." Some 
 use the pref. o- in the sing, and a-, in the pi., as: o-tetu-ka- 
 mi, „my messenger," but this form is not much used. 
 
 Ti, ma-, n. „pus, matter" (as of a sore); e. g. ma-ti ma-lai ma 
 wur ka ka-sam, „much pus came out from the sore." 
 
 Tila, V. a. „sell"; e. g. o tila ak'ota, „he sold the cloth." 
 
 Tila, V. n. „trade"; e. g. o der tra tila, „he came to trade." 
 
 Tihkar, v. rel. „press down upon-, press upon-," (as upon a 
 debtor); „force" (as one to do a thing); „bear upon-" (as 
 on a sail); e. g. w'an, tiiikar am-ben, „boy, press upon the 
 board;" — o tihkar-mi tra ram-ko afi-kala, „he pressed upon 
 me to pay him the money;" — o tinkar-ha tra ko ri, „he 
 forced them to go there;" — tinkar am-bela, w'an! „bear 
 upon the sail, boy!" 
 
 Tis, a-, pi. e-, n. „a knife, a country knife;" e.g. kdra ba a-tis,! 
 „ bring a knife here!" 
 
 Tit, V. a. „choose, select, make a choice of-, pick out;" e. g. 
 kali, e-lop e-gbati, ma gbali tit e-lom, „look, there are many 
 fish, thou canst pick out some." 
 
 To, adv. = tQii, „now, then, already;" e. g. kali to ak'ota ake, 
 „look now at this cloth;" — na pon' to dis wal ey'etr, „they 
 had bought the things already yesterday." See also ton 
 below.
 
 — 259 — 
 
 Tof, a-, pi. Ira-, n. ..country, land;" e. g. an-lof a-lemne, „lhe 
 Temne country." 
 
 Tof, a-, n. „soil, ground;" e. g. a-tof a-fino, „good soil." The 
 def. form is also used for the terraqueous globe, as: an-tof, 
 „the earth" or „lhe world;" e.g. an-tof be, „the whole earth." 
 
 Tof, e-, n. „ground, earth" (as dug out to make mud with for 
 to build houses); hence also „dirt, mud" (i. e. earth mixed 
 with water); e. g. ttie sakar-mi e-tof, „do not bespatter me 
 with dirt." 
 
 Tofal, adj. „peaceful, quiet, meek, soft, gentle" (of animate and 
 inanimate objects); „tame" (as a horse); „mild" (as liquors); 
 „cool" (as food); „safe, out of danger; etc.;" e. g. w'iini 
 tofal, „a quiet person;" — an-tof a-temne na yi a-tofal, 
 „the Temne country is quiet;" — ma-rei ma-tofal, „peace- 
 ful days;" — a-sol a-tofal, „a tame horse;" — ow'uni owe 
 
 ba a-mera tofal, „lhis person is of a soft temper." 
 Tofal, 0-, adj. but used adverbially „gently, softly, easily; peace- 
 fully, in peace;" e. g. o yo-lsi o-tofal, „he did it softly';" — 
 'a ban-ko o-tdfal, „they fetched him gently;" — kone o- 
 tofal! „go in peace!" 
 
 Tdfal, ma-, n. „peace; gentleness, meekness; jtameness; mild- 
 ness;" e. g. ba ma-tofal ro-mera, „he has peace in his 
 heart;" — ma-tofal ma an-sol, „the lameness of the horse." 
 Toflo, \ V. inch, (for: tofalg), „get quiet, get easy, become paci- 
 Tof'la, f fied" or „quiet; get cool" (as the sun, or food, or 
 anger); „abate" (as pain); e.g. am-mera-'a-mi na tdf'lo he, 
 be 1 nam fe ow'an-ka-mi, „my mind does not get easy, if 
 
 1 do not see my child;" — an'ei na toflo Ion, „the sun 
 gets cool now." 
 
 Tofla, i V. impers. and rel. „get" or „become easy with-, get 
 Toflo, ' better with-, gel comfortable with-, get out of danger 
 with-" (as with a sick person). It is difficult to give the 
 literal sense of this verb in English, where the object becomes 
 Ihe subject; e.g. pa toflo-ko, „he gels better" (as a sick 
 person), or more lit. „it gets better with him;" — pa toflg- 
 
 17*
 
 — 260 — 
 
 mi tenon ro-mera, „I feel easy to day in my mind," lit. 
 „it got easy with me to day in the mind." 
 
 Tgl, V, a. „burn, set on fire" (as a house, or person); „scald" 
 (as hot water one's hand); e. g. 'a to! an-set, „they burned 
 the house;" — am'antr ma-fai ma to! ka-tra-ka-mi, „the hot 
 water scalded my hand." 
 
 Tols, V. freq. or intens. a. „sel on fire" (as many houses) ; „broil, 
 roast on the fire" (not in a pot); „bake" (as bread); e. g. 
 ar'afa ra tols e-set be, „lhe war -people burned all the 
 houses;" — tols g-sem, „roast the beef." 
 
 Toisa, V. freq. or intens. andrel. „set-on fire for- ; broil-for-, roast- 
 on the fire for- ; bake-for- ; e. g. toisa-mi o-sem, „roast the 
 beef for me." 
 
 Tok, ka-, pi, e-, n. „ fire-wood;" e. g. ma yema wal e-tok-i? 
 „doest thou want to buy firewood?" 
 
 Tok, V. a. „ extol, praise;" e. g. 'a tok o-bal, „they extolled the 
 king." 
 
 Tokas, ka-, n. verb. „act of praising, praising, praise;" e.g. 
 ka-tokas K'uru, „the act of of praising God." 
 
 Toko, adv. „ apart, by itself, separately;" e. g, o yira toko, „he 
 lives by himself;" — botr atr'^ntr atse toko, „put these slicks 
 separately." 
 
 Toko, » adv. „now, then," = to, and ton; e.g. kone tokon, 
 
 Tdkon, ' „go now;" — an-loko na poii toko tas, „the lime is 
 now passed" or „is now up." The form lokoh is used more 
 absolutely, or at the end of a proposition. 
 
 Tomo, V. n. „dance"; e. g. an-fam na tra iomo ro-petr, „the 
 people are dancing in town." 
 
 Ton, adv. = to, „now, then, already;" e.g. der ton, „come now;" 
 — ka ka-kal-ka-mi I bap ton na pon tila an-wul-'a-mi, „at 
 my return I found then (that) they had sold my children." 
 It is also sometimes used to express the adv. „too, too much," 
 as: ra-bena ra bdli ton, „the rope is too long," lit. „the 
 rope is long now." Ton is a more abs. form, and also al- 
 ways used at the end of a proposition, which is not the case 
 with to. Cf. the form to above, and the letter n under N.
 
 — 261 — 
 
 Ton, a-, pi. e-, n. „a law, commandment;" e. g. e-tofi ya K'uru, 
 „the commandments of God;" — o-bal o raf a-ton a-fu, „the 
 king made a new law." 
 
 Tonka, v. n. „debate a matter, talk a palaver; expostulate, plead 
 at the bar, litigate, judge;" e. g. Pa Sori, mQno tdiika, „Mr. 
 Son, do thou talk the matter." 
 
 Tonka, v. recipr. ,,implead each other" (at law); „plead with 
 each other, have a law-suit," or „go to law with each other, 
 debate a case with each other;" e.g. na ko tonka ro ka o- 
 bal, „they go to have a law-suit with each other at the 
 king's place." 
 
 Tonka, a-, pi. e-, n. „a legal case, a law-suit, a matter" or „case 
 to be settled, a case about which thev plead at the bar;" e.g. 
 Pa Sori de minan sa ba a-tohka, „Mr. Sori and I have a 
 law-suit;" — o-bal o tra rok an-tonka, „the king will settle 
 the case." 
 
 Tonkas, v. cans. lit. „make to plead," hence „carry to law, im- 
 plead, prosecute by law, give palaver to, sue, litigate with, 
 expostulate with-; judge" (as a person, not matters), „try, 
 enter into judgment wilh-;" e. g. o tonkas-mi ka-l.sin, „he 
 sued me for nothing;" — tse mi tdnkas! „do not enter into 
 judgment with me!" 
 
 Tonkla, v. a. „collect, assemble, gather together;" e.g. 'a tonkla 
 ey'etr-'e-iian be, „they collected all their things;" — o tonkla 
 an-fam na ka ka-petr be, „he assembled the people of the 
 whole town." 
 
 Tonklane, v. recipr. or refl. „assemble, gather themselves, troop 
 together, meet together;" also „accumulate itself" (as sand); 
 e. g. na tonklane tenon, „they met together to day;" — afi- 
 fam be na ro-petr lia tonklane rokin, „all the people of the 
 town assembled together." 
 
 Tonto, V. a. „coax, flatter, persuade, entice" (hy sweet words); 
 „beguile; allure, tempt;" also „soothe, appease" (as a child 
 crying); e. g. na tonto-ko kama kon' so o ko ri, „they coaxed 
 him, that he also might go there;" — o tonto gbo a-fam, „he 
 only beguiles people;" — tonto ow'ahet, „soothe the child."
 
 — 262 — 
 
 Tonto, a-, pi. e-. n. „a trap" or „snare put hy sweet and enticing 
 words, allurement; any thing given to another for the pur- 
 pose to procure his friendship again which was lost by having 
 offended him, or in order to induce him to do a thing, or 
 to comply with one's wish;" e. g. o botra-mi a-tdnto, „he 
 put a snare for me." 
 
 Tor, V. n, „comp down, go down, descend; set" (as the sun); 
 „come away" (as the afterbirth); e. g. w'an, tor! „boy, come 
 down!" — tor ro-gban, „he came down the country;" — 
 ar'etr ra tor, „the sunset." With ro-bil, „embark", lit. „go 
 down into the canoe." Cf. the Hebr. Ti^ Jon, 1, 3. 
 
 Tora, V. cans. „make to come down, bring down; let down, send 
 down;" e. g. K'uru kono tora k'om, „it is God who sends 
 down rain" or „who causes to rain;" — w'an, ko tora am- 
 bela, „boy, go let down the sail." Also fig. „ humble, de- 
 grade, abase, bring down low;" as: kono tora-ko, „he 
 humbled him." 
 
 Torane, v. cans, and refl. orspont. „bring oneself down" or „come 
 down of one's own accord;" fig. „humble oneself; come 
 down in one's circumstances" or „affairs; be in a low state" 
 (as one's body, or as regards outward circumstances). E. g. 
 torane ro-set, w'lini tora he ko, „he came down from the 
 house himself, no one brought him down;" — o torane hali, 
 „he has come down much in his circumstances." 
 
 Tdrori, ka-, n. „the east, sun-rise;" e. g. o yefa ro-tdron, „he 
 came from the East." With the prep, ro- it becomes also 
 a prep, or a postp. 
 
 Tdrofi, adj. „eastern"; e. g. a-tof a-tdrofi, „an eastern country." 
 
 Tot, adj. „good, kind, good-natured, gracious;" e. g. w'uni tot, 
 „a kind person." 
 
 Tot, 0-, adj. but used adverbially, „kindly, well, good;" as ap- 
 plied to dying „happily"; e. g. o yo-mi o-tgt, „he treated 
 me kindly;" — siitne o-tot, „rub thyself well;" — o fi o- 
 tot, „he died happily." 
 
 Tot, ma-, n. „kindness, goodness, good nature, graciousness;" 
 e. g. o-tem owe o ba ma-tot ma-bana, this old man is very
 
 — 263 — 
 
 kind" or „very good-natured," lit. „this old man has great 
 kindness." 
 Tr', pref. indef. andinsep. (for: tra-), „a, an;" e.g. tr'antr, ,.sticks", 
 for: tra-antr. 
 
 o o 
 
 Tr', part, (for tra), „let", which see. 
 
 Tr' 'o — ! (for: tre ho — !) or for: tse ho — ! „mind that — 
 not — !" do not—!" lit. „not that — !" See Fables p. 52. 
 
 Tra-, pref. indef. „a, an;" e. g. Ira-bep, „spoons". It is sing, 
 and pi. 
 
 Tra, prep. poss. indef. „of"; e.g. tra-bep-tra-mi, „spoons of mine," 
 lit. „spoons of me," =: „my spoons." 
 
 Tra, prep, indef. „for, as to, as regards; on account of; etc.," 
 e. g. tasi-mi tra ka-yenk ma-der, lit. „he surpasses me in 
 health," = „he is more healthy than I;" — pa yi he tra 
 ra-tru o tse bapar, „it is not on account of sickness that 
 he was not present." It is the indef. form of tra, which 
 see below, 
 
 Tra, pr. subj. indef. „it; they;" e.g. tra-bep-lra-mi tra dinne, 
 „spoons of mine are lost." 
 
 Tra, part, to form the Present tense and the Participle with all 
 persons in both numbers, excepting the I***- pers. sing.; for 
 which they use the form tsi, or tri. E. g. o tra der, „he 
 is coming;" — o tra sap-mu, „he will flog thee," This part, 
 is used if the Future is to be expressed positively, i. e. if 
 there is no doubt about the event, which is to take place; 
 otherwise they use the forms: ma, me and mo. Cf. the 
 examples under the part, ma, 1. 
 
 Tra-, pref. def. „the", = atra-; e, g. tra-bep, or atra-bep, „the 
 spoons." 
 
 Tra, prep. poss. def. „of"; e. g. tra-bep-lra-mi, „my spoons," 
 lit. „the spoons of me;" — tra-bep tra Sori, „the spoons 
 of Sori," 
 
 Tra, prep. = traka, „for, to, in order to; about, concerning, as 
 regards, as to; with; on account of, by." It is also used 
 as the sign of the Infinitive. E. g. a-fcim na gbali he fiiti 
 tra ma-yos-ma-han ma-fino, „men cannot be saved on ac-
 
 — 264 — 
 
 count of their good works;" — sa ba tra kal so ninan, „we 
 have to return again to morrow;" — Yisua o fi tra afi-fam 
 be, de Ira trannu so, „ Jesus died for all people, and for 
 you also." The form traka, which is used, definitely and in- 
 definitely is more frequently employed. Tra is the def. form 
 of tra which compare, as also traka. See more about this 
 prep, in the Grammar. 
 
 Tra, pr. subj. def. „it; they;" e. g. tra-bep tra dinne, „the 
 spoons are lost." 
 
 Tra, conj. = tsa, which see. 
 
 Tra, part. „let", used to form the Hortative Mood. When used 
 with the pr. o, „he, she" or 'a „they", which is for fia, 
 they generally drop the vowel of the part,, and contract its 
 consonants with the following pr., as tr' o ko di, .,let him 
 go eat," or „let him go to eat," lit. „lel he go eal," for; 
 tra ko etc.; — tr' 'a dif-ko, „let them kill him," lit. „Iet 
 they kill him," for: tra ha dif-ko; — tra sa kg ro-Kanip, 
 „let us go to Freetown." 
 
 Tra, ka-, pi. ma-, n. „a hand; handle;" e, g. ma-tra-m'on, „his 
 hands;" — ka-tra ka am-poti, „the handle of the cup." 
 
 Tr'a (for: trara), „know", which see. This form is used before 
 the negative adverbs fe and he, „not", as: I tr'a he tsi, 
 „I do not know it." 
 
 Tra-mi, pr. poss. indef. „my", lit. „of me;" e. g. tra-trala-tra- 
 mi, „hoes of mine" or „my hoes." 
 
 Tra-mi, pr. poss. def. „my", lit. „of me;" e. g. tra-trala-tra-mi, 
 „my hoes," lit. „the hoes of me." 
 
 Tra-mu, pr, poss. indef. „thy", lit. „of thee;" e. g. tra-trala-tra- 
 mu, „hoes of thine," = „thy hoes." 
 
 Tra-mu, pr. poss. def. „thy", lit. „of thee;" e. g. tra-trala-tra- 
 mu, „thy hoes," lit. „the hoes of thee." 
 
 Tra-iian, pr. poss. indef. „their", lit. „of them;" e.g. tra-bep- 
 tra-hah, „spoons of theirs," = „their spoons." 
 
 Tra-nah, pr. poss. def, „their", lit. „of them;" e. g. tra-bep- 
 Ira-han, „their spoons," lit. „the spoons of them."
 
 — 265 — 
 
 Tra-nu, pr. poss. indef. „yonr", lit. „of you;" e.g. tra trala- 
 
 Ira-nu, „hoes of yours," = „vour hoes." 
 Tra-nu, pr. poss def. „\our", lit. „of you;" e.g. Ira-lrala-tra-nu, 
 
 „your hoes," lit. „the hoes of you." 
 Tra-tsi, pr. dcm. log. „thal, those;" e. g. tra-bep tra-lsi, „tho5e 
 
 spoons" (spoken of before). 
 Irak' (for: traka), prep, which see. 
 
 Irak, a-, pi. e- or trn-; or sing, o-, pi. tra-, n. „a harnessed ante- 
 lope," commonly called ,.deer". 
 Irak, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „a staff of authority, a walking staff, a staff;" 
 also „palaver, matter;" e.g. ka-trak ka-bana, „a great matter." 
 Tr'ak, pi. of k'ak, which see. 
 
 Traka, prep. = tra, and tra, which see; „for, for to, to, m 
 order to; about, concerning, as to, as regards; on account 
 of; with; etc." It is a def. and an indef. form, and may be 
 %sed either for: tra or for: tra; but traka is more frequently 
 used than either tra or tra, and like tra it is also used as 
 a sign of the Infinitive. E. g. Q fai o-na o-fet g-bois traka 
 .iron, „he killed the fattened calf for him;" - traka kane 
 ma yo ma-paiit-e? „for whom doest thou do work?" — am- 
 mira-n'on na kira-kg traka alra o poii yo, „his conscience 
 troubles him about what he has done" or „on account of 
 what he has done;" — ye pa yi traka w'uni 6 w'uni afi-lo 
 lia-tsi, „thus it was wiih every man that time." 
 Note. Before the prefix a- the vowel of the prep, is often 
 dropped, as: o pa fo o tas-mi trak' a-fosa, „lie says that 
 he is stronger than I," lit. „lie says that lie surpasses me 
 as regards strength." 
 Traka 'ra-bomp ra — , „for the sake of- , on account of—," 
 lit. „for the head of—;" e. g. ma yema dim aka-petr be 
 traka 'ra-bomp ra kar-pah ka a-fam tramat-i? „wilt thou 
 destroy the whole town on account of the lake of five per- 
 sons?" 
 Traka tsi, „therefore, wherefore, for this reason," lit. „for it" 
 or „on account of it;" e. g. ma ta poh he ram ak'ota; traka 
 tsi 1 gbijH he mu ki son, or 1 gbali he sgm-mu-ki, „thou
 
 — 266 — 
 
 hasl not yet paid for the cloth; therefore I cannot give it 
 to thee." 
 
 Tral, V, n. „hear; undersland; obey;" e. g, ma tral mg ow'6r o 
 som ak'aro-i? „doest thou hear how the rat nibbles the bowl?" 
 — I tral o-fino, „I understand well;" — ow'an owe o tral 
 he ko-ko, „this boy does not obey at all." 
 
 Tral, V. a. „hear; understand; obey; listen to, hearken to;" e. g. 
 ow'an owe o tral he ar'im-ra-mi, „this child does not hear" 
 or „listen to my word;" — o tral he mi, „he does not obey 
 me;" — an-fet aue na tral ar'im ra o-kas-ka-nan loko 6 loko, 
 „these children always hear (obey) the word of their father." 
 This form is not used with a personal object, except in ne- 
 gative propositions; if there is a personal object in positive 
 propositions the form trala is useJ, which see. 
 
 Tral, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a hearer, one hearing;" e. g. kere tse na 
 gbo yi a-tral; kere yi na so a-yo na atra na tral, „but be 
 ye not hearers only; but be ye also doers of what ye hear." 
 
 Tral, adv. spec. „quite, altogether;" it is used with tsin, „be 
 naked," and with the noun ka-tsin, as used adverbially in 
 the sense of „for nothing, in vain, without cause;" e. g. 
 o-bera owe o tsiii tral, „lhis woman is quite naked;" — na 
 ramne gbo ka-tsin tral, ,.ye pray but in vain altogether," 
 
 Trala, ka-, pi. trii-, n. „a country hoe, a hoe;" e. g. ka-trala 
 ka-boli, „a long hoe." 
 
 Trala, v. a. „hear, hearken to, listen to, obey;" e. g. ma trala 
 am-bamp-i? „doest thou hear the bird?" — gWan-ka-mi o 
 trala ar'im-ra-mi, „my child listens to my word;" — o trala 
 he ko, „he does not obey him." Also „feel" (as a smell, 
 or scent); see next word, Cf. also tral, v. a. above. 
 
 Trala am-bontr na-, „get the scent of-, come upon the track 
 of-" (as a dog upon the track of something lost, or of a 
 person), lit. „feel the scent of-;" e. g. be an-tran o trala 
 am-bonlr-n'on, ro o ko be, tra Irafi-ko, „if the dog gets 
 the scent of him, wherever he goes to, he will follow him," 
 
 Trala i-bontr, „feel a smell" or „scent"; e. g. I trala i-bontr 
 i-f[no, I feel a good smell.",
 
 — 267 — 
 
 Trala w'uni i-bontr, „feel a smell on one;" e. g. na trala he 
 ko i-bontr na an'antr, „thej' did not feel a smell of the fire 
 on him." 
 
 Tralne, v. refl. a. „feel" (as pain etc.); e. g- I tralne r'a ra-las 
 ka ka-tra-ka-mi, „I feel something bad on my hand;" lit. 
 „hear"' or „feel oneself." 
 
 Tralne dor, „feel hungry;" e. g. o trjjlne d'or, „he felt hungrv;" 
 lit. „feel hunger." 
 
 Tralpe, v. n. „jump down, light down, come down; step, go, 
 jump;" e. g. am-bamp o tralpe ro-tof, „the bird lighted down 
 on the ground;" — o-lanba o tralpe ro-manir, „the young 
 man jumped (down) into the water." It is also applied io 
 the lightning, or rather to the thunder, when striking into 
 a house; because the Temnes believe that it is the thunder 
 which comes down. 
 
 Tram, euph. form of Iran, „follow", used before m, as: o tram- 
 mi, „he follows me." See tran. 
 
 Tram, v. a. „publish, give public notice of-, inform of-, make 
 known, proclaim" (as a law); „tell" (as tales); e.g. ko trani- 
 tsi ro-petr be, ,,go publish it in the whole town;" — o 
 Iram-tsi ka an-fam be, „he gave notice of it to all the people;" 
 
 — tram-ko, „he made him known;" — man der n;}n tram 
 m'ump, „come let us tell tales." 
 
 Trama, v. n. „stand; be." As an au.x. it serves to express the 
 English „be about, be on the point," to exercise the energy, 
 denoted by the principal verb, which follows in the long form 
 of the Infinitive. E. g. o-tem o trama ri ro-set, „the old 
 man stands there in the house;" — o trama tsin, „he is 
 naked;" — o-bera o trama traka fi, „the woman is on the 
 point of death," lit. „- stands to die" or „is about to die;" 
 
 — trama o-fino, ,.he is well off." — Also „stop" (as one 
 walking); „stay, live" (as at a place); e. g. r'im ra Isela-ko: 
 Trama! „a voice called to him: Stop!" — o trama ras ro- 
 Bake Loko, „he still stays at Port Loko." 
 
 Triima, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „attitude, posture; state, condition; 
 situation, place, lot; independence; estate, dwelling; etc.;"
 
 — 268 — 
 
 e.g. ma-trama-m'on ma tesa he, „his atlilude does not please" 
 or „is not agreeable;" — o ba ma-tr§.ma ma-fino, „he is 
 well off," lit. „he has a good condition;" — ma-trama-m'on 
 ma \i ro-tsen' dokom, „his estate is on the top of the hill." 
 The sing, is seldom used; as: anai-trama-n'on fia tesa he, = 
 ma-trama-m'oii ma tesa he. 
 
 o - 
 
 Tr§ma kadi, = Irama rodi, „stand before" or „beyond, go be- 
 fore, walk before, be ahead, be first, precede" (as to space 
 or time), „lead the way, place oneself at the head;" also 
 „be contrary" or „unfavourable" (as windj: e. g. k'in ka tra- 
 lome, Qv/Q trama kadi, etc., „one of the sheep which led the 
 way, etc.;" — an-fef na trama k§di, „the wind is contrary." 
 
 Trama rayer, „ stand near, stand close by, stand aside;" e. g. 
 g-wontr-k'on o trama rayer, „his brother stood close by." 
 
 Trama rodi, = trama kadi, which see; e. g. o trama rodi ka 
 ka-rare, ,,he stood before the door." 
 
 Trama rokan, stand without;" e. g. o-tem o trama rokan, „the 
 old man stands without." 
 
 Trama w'uni kadi, --- trama w'dni rodi, „ stand before one" or 
 „beyond one, go" or „walk before one, be at the head of 
 one, be in front of one, precede one" (in distance or time); 
 also „be in one's way, oppose one;" as applied to wind 
 „be contrary to one, be against one." E. g. kong trama- 
 na kadi, „he goes before them;" — Be Foki o trama Ali- 
 kali Mdrba kadi, „Bey Foki preceded Alikali Morba;" — 
 o-lahba owe o trama-mi kadi, I ebali he sdto r'aka, ..this 
 young man is in my way, I cannot get any thing;" — an- 
 fef ha trama-su kadi tenon, „the wind is against us to day." 
 
 Trama w'uni rayer, „sland close to one, stand near (to) one;" 
 e. g. o-tem o trama-mi rayer, „the old man stands close 
 to me." 
 
 Trama w'iini rodi, = trama w'dni kadi, which see. 
 
 Trama w'Uni roraran, „stand behind one," hence „defend, take 
 one's part, plead one's cause, back;" e. g. o-bal o trama-kg 
 roraran, „the king takes his part." 
 
 Tramar, v. caus. „make to stand, set up, raise" (as a house of
 
 — 269 ~ 
 
 limber); „place, put, put up; make;" e.g. Inimar ak'antr, 
 „set up the post;" tramar ka-tuli ro-bil , „put up the mast 
 in the canoe;" — ko tramar am-pdti ka- am-mesa, „go put 
 the cup on the table;" — o tran^gi" Qw'ahet tsin, „he made 
 the child naked." 
 
 TrSmar, v. rel. (rad.tram), „proclaim-to-, make-known to-, publish- 
 to-; acquaint-with-, in form- about-; e. g. an-tetu o tramar an - 
 fam ara-kel, „the messenger made known the theft to the 
 people." 
 
 Tramas, v. freq. or intens. a. „proclaim, make known, publish- 
 all about; „e. g. o-bai q tramas an-tgn ka an-fam-n'on be, 
 „the king proclaimed the law to all his subjects," lit. 
 „to all his people." 
 
 Tramat, adj. num. „five;" e. g. a-fam tramat, „five persons." 
 
 Tramat de ran „seven," lit. „five and two;" e. g. a-fam tramat 
 de rail, „ seven persons." 
 
 Tramat re sas, „eight," lit. „five and (with) three;" e. g. tra-bep 
 tramat re sas, „ eight spoons." 
 
 Tramat ro kin, „six," lit. „five to one;" e. g. e-gbala tramat 
 ro kin, „six mats." 
 
 Tramat ro ii'anle, » „nine," lit. „five to four;" e. g. e-tis tramat 
 
 Tramat ro iVahle, ' ro n'anle, „nine knives." 
 
 Tramtramne, v. refl. a. „medidate upon-, think about-, reflect 
 upon-, muse upon-, consider of-;" e. g. o tramtramne atr'ei 
 tra-tsi, tro au-udne-na-lsi na yi-e, „he thought about that 
 thing, what I he meaning of it might be." 
 
 Tran, a-, pi. e-, n. „a dog;" e. g. a-tran a-bana, „a large dog." 
 
 Tran', euph. form of tran, v. n. „follow," which see. It is used 
 before d and ii; e. g. I tsi tran'-nu, „I shall follow you," 
 See another example under talom. 
 
 Tran v. n. „follow; pass, go;" e.g. o tran roraran, ,,he followed 
 from behind;" — o tran fe ro-r'on, „he did not pass in 
 the road." 
 
 Trail, v. a. „follow, go after-, follow after-," also „pass, go upon-; 
 follow up-, trace;" e. g. I tran-ko ro-r'on, „I followed him 
 in the road;" — o Iran-na ro-Bake-Loko, „he followed them
 
 — 270 — 
 
 to Port Loko;" — o trari ar'oh are, „he passed this road;" 
 — I tsi trafi atr'ei tra-tsi, „I shall follow up that matter." 
 It has the euph. or abbr. forms tram and Iran', which see in 
 loco. 
 
 Trail, V. a. „lock," (as a door); „fasten-with a nail, nail" (as a 
 board);" drive in," (as a nail); „make costive," (as medicine 
 the bowels); „tell, pledge," (as a word); „pledge-to-," (as a 
 word to one); see the two next words. E. g. trafi aka-rare, 
 „lock the door;" — o poh trail am-bil, „he has nailed the 
 canoe." 
 
 Trail r'im, „make a promise," lit „pledge a word;" e. g. o tral 
 fo o-bal poh Iran r'im, fo w'iini 6 w'dni owo mo dif o- 
 laiiba, o tra nantra ow'an-k"oh o-bera, „he heard that the 
 king had made a promise, that whosoever kills the man, 
 shall have his daughter to wife." 
 
 Trail w'dni r'im, „make a promise to one;" e.g. o traii-mi r'im 
 traka aii-kala, „he made me a promise about the money." 
 
 Traiiane, v. caus. and refl. lit. „make oneself to follow after," 
 hence „folIow up-, go after-," (as after the scent of a thing); 
 „trace, track;" also „hold to-, keep to-," (as to one's word, or 
 to a road), hence „fulfil; follow after-, follow, do according-; 
 imitate, follow the habits of-;" e. g. o traiiane ar'im-r'oh, 
 „he held to his promise;" — o tranane 'ma-ni ma o-kas- 
 k'on, „he followed the footsteps of his father;" — tse 
 traiiane o-kas-ka-mu, „do not imitate thy father." See 
 also next word. 
 
 Traiiane am-bontr iia-, „follow the scent of-, follow the track 
 of-;" e. g. an-tran o traiiane am-bontr ha ow'or, „the dog 
 followed the track of the fillentamba," 
 
 Trand, v. abr. a. (rad. trah), „chain, fetter, put-in chains;" e. g. 
 o-bal g trand-ko, „the king chained him." 
 
 Trand, v. abr. a. (rad. trail) „follow, follow after-; resemble, 
 be like to" (as one to another in character, or otherwise) ; 
 e. g. trand-ko, „he followed after him." 
 
 Trando, adj. „succeeding, following, second;" e. g. ka an-rei a- 
 trando, „on the following day."
 
 — 271 — 
 
 Trank, a-, pi. e-, n. „a species of anteater" or „anlbear," living 
 principally on the termites. It is of the size of a goat, with 
 a long small mouth, long claws, and lives in holes under 
 the earth. It has no teeth. 
 
 Trank, 0-, n. „a cold, coldness" (as of water); „freshness, green- 
 ness," (as of a tree or leaf); also „an ague;" e.g. g-trank 
 wa am'antr, „the coldness of the water;" — o-trank o wop- 
 mi, „I got an ague fit;" — o-trank o wop-ko na tratrak, 
 „he got a cold last night." Also „rawness" (as of meat). 
 
 Trank, v. n. „be silent;" e. g. trank naii ! „be ye silent!" 
 
 Tr'anle, | adj. num. „four;" e. g, tra-trala tr'iinle, „four hoes;" 
 
 Tr'anle, — tr'antr tranle, „four sticks;" — tra-gba tranle, 
 „four scores" = 80. 
 
 Trarin, adv. spec. „steadily, attentively, indeed." It indicates 
 continuance, and is used with kali, „look at-, look; be alive;" 
 e. g. kali-mi trahii, „he looked steadily at me;" — sa 
 nah'-ko o-kali trann, „we saw him alive indeed." 
 
 Trahnan, pr. comp. „for them; about them; against them; etc.;" 
 It is always preceded by: tra, or traka. E. g. o fa! o-na 
 traka trannan, „he killed a cow fot them." 
 
 Trannu, pr. comp. ,.for you; about you; against you; etc." It 
 is always preceded by: tra or traka; e. g. tra trannu faho o 
 dif o-na, „it is not for you" or „on account of you (that) 
 he killed the cow." 
 
 Tr'antr. pi. of k'antr, which see. 
 
 or o ' 
 
 Trap, V. n. „begin, commence;" e. g. 'a ta trap he tra rok, „they 
 did not yet begin to reap;" — o ta trap he, „he did not 
 yet begin." — It is often used as an aux. to indicate the 
 commencement of an action, or of the exercise of the energy, 
 denoted by the principal verb, which follows in the long 
 form of the Infinitive; or the aux. may also he construed 
 with the verbal noun; as: o trap ka-gbal an-reka, = o trap 
 tra gbal an-reka , „he began to write the letter," lit. „he b. 
 writing the letter;" — o trap ka-pan r'aka, „he began to 
 be in want," lit „he began to lack a thing." 
 
 Trap, v. a. „begin, commence;" also „invent;" e. g. o trap ka-
 
 — 272 — 
 
 )'o ma-pant, lit. „he began the doing (of) work," = „he began 
 with the work;" — kono trap ka-sal e-bol , „he invented 
 the making of earthen pots." When trap v. n., as an aux., is 
 construed with the verb, noun, it might also he considered 
 as a transitive form, and as belonging here. 
 Trap, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „l!eginning, commencement;" also „fashion, 
 manner; sort, kind, species;" e. g. „ka ka-trap ka 'ra-ru are, 
 „at the beginning of this world;" — o kiita pa-la mo ka- 
 trap ka-fu, „he plants rice according to a new fashion;" 
 — ba e-bamp ka tra-trap tra-gbante, „he has birds of 
 various species." 
 Trap, V. a. „chop, wound;" also „fell," (as a tree); „chop" or 
 wound-with-;" e. g. o trap-mi, „he chopped me;" — 'a trap- 
 ko a-gbcito, „lhey wounded him with a cutlass; — o trap 
 li'antr, „he fell a tree." 
 Trapa, v. rel. „chop" or „wound- for-; chop" or „wound-with-; 
 fell-for-; fell-with- ;" e.g. o trapa-mi a-gbcito, „he cut me 
 wilh a cutlass;" - trapa-mi aiVantr aiie, „fell this tree for 
 me;" — trapa-mi-ko, „chop him for me." Also used with one 
 Ace. in the sense Ojf „chop" or „cut with-," as: 'a trapa 
 ka-bap ka tra-sak, „they cut the ribs with a hatchet," lit. 
 „they cut with a hatchet at the ribs." 
 Trapi v. a. „create, begin; be the author of-, make -from the 
 first; also „invent, contrive, beget," (of the male); e. g. 
 K'liru kono tnipi at'ruru de an-tof, „it is God who created 
 the heavens and the earth;" — Pa Sori kono trapi-mi, „Mr. 
 Sori he begat me." It is the long form of trap. 
 Trapi ka-fi, „be the author of death," lit. „begin dying;" e. g. 
 
 kono trapi ka-fi, „he became the author of death." 
 Trapi, ka-, n. „act of creating (a thing, or person), creation;" 
 e. g. ka-lrapi ara-ru are, „the creation of this world," lit. 
 „the creating this world." 
 Trapia, v. rel. „create-for-; create-with-;" e.g. ara-rfi are K'uru 
 trapia-ri ar'im-r'on, „as for this world God created it by 
 his word."
 
 — 273 r- 
 
 Trar, o-, pi. a-, n. „a slave;" e. g. o wal a-lrar ria-ran, „he bought 
 
 two slaves;" — o-lrar o-rQni, „a male slave." 
 Trar, ra- n. „slaveTy, bondage;" e.g. o won ra-trar, „he got 
 
 into slavery. 
 Trar o-bera, o-, pi. a-trar a-bera, „a female slave." 
 Tr'ar, pi. of k'ar, which see. 
 
 Trara, v. n. „know, understand; be acquainted;" e. g. o trara 
 o-fino, „he understands well;" — o trara ro-petr, „he is ac- 
 quainted in town." It is often used as an aux. to indicate 
 skill in the exercise of the energy, denoted by the principal 
 verb, which follows in the short form of the Infinitive, 
 as: o-bera o trara yak, „the woman understands washing," 
 or „ knows to wash clothes;" — o-lanba owe o trara tak'sa, 
 „this young man can teach well," lit. „— — understands 
 teaching," or „to teach." With negative propositions the 
 conlr. form tr'a is used, as: o tr'a he taksa, „he does not 
 understand to leach." Cf. also tr'a above. 
 Trara, v. a. „know , understand, be acquainted with; be aware 
 of-; e.g. „1 trara-ko o-fino, „1 am well acquainted with 
 him;" — o Irara-tsi, „he knows it;" — ma trara am'olo 
 ma ak'6ta-i? „doest thou know the price of the cloth?" — 
 tr'a he tr'el 6 tr'el, „he knows nothing at all;" — I trara 
 ka-ramne o-fino, „I understand the prayer well." — Cf. 
 the preceding word about the contr. form tr'a. 
 Trara, ka-, n. verb. „ faculty of knowing, knowledge;" ka-lnira- 
 
 k'on, „his knowledge." 
 Trara-tr'ei, v. comp. u. .,be learned, he ;i« complished, be clever;" 
 
 e. g. ow'uni owe o trara-tr'ei, „ti)is person is learned." 
 Trara w'dni r'aka, „care for one, rei^ard one. treat one accor- 
 ding to rank" or „circumstances," lit. „know something for 
 one;" e.g. o-lahba owe o tr'a he w'rini r'aka. „this young 
 man does not care for a person.' 
 Trasam, v. onom. n. „sneeze;" e. g. o tra trasam, „he is sneezing." 
 Trasam-trasam, v. onom. freq. or intens. n. „sneeze much, sneeze 
 repeatedly;" e. g. o-tem o tra trasam-tnjsam, „lhe old man 
 was snetzing repeatedly." 
 
 Temnc - W'orterbucli. 18
 
 — 274 — 
 
 Trassu, pr. comp. „for us, about us; on account of us; against 
 us; etc." It is always followed by Ira, or traka. E. g. 
 Yisua fi tra trAssu be, „ Jesus died for all of us," or „for 
 us all." 
 
 Tratrak, n. „ night;" adverbially „at night, in the night;" e. g. 
 ts61a-mi tratrak, „he called me at night;" — I dira he 
 na tratrak, „1 did nol sleep last night." Its prefix is ka-, 
 but it is seldom used. See more about this form in the 
 Grammar. 
 
 Tr'atrak, pi. of k'atrak, which see. 
 
 Tralsen, adj. „true; righteous, just ;" e.g. an-tratsen, „the righ- 
 teous." It is properly the noun tra-tsen, „truth," but used as 
 an adj., the pref. (rf the noun being taken as a radical pari of 
 the word, (when used adjectively), which is sometimes the case. 
 
 Tre, = tse, adv. „not, do not." See tse; and of. the Note 
 after kotsi. 
 
 Tr'eT, pi. ma-trel, n. „a thing, matter, palaver, case; trouble, harm;" 
 e. g. atr'ei atle, „lhis matter;" — tr'el Ira \i he „there is no 
 palaver;" — tra ba he trei, „it does not matter," = „it 
 is of no consequence;" — ma-trel ma no-ru, „the things 
 of this world." — See also: won' do-treT. It is sometimes 
 also used in the sense of „characler," especially in the pi. 
 This word has an insep. pref. in the sing., and a separable 
 one in the pi. , the insep. pref. of the sing, being taken as 
 radical in the plural. 
 
 Trel, V. a. „leave, abandon, forsake; leave off, desist from;" e. g. 
 ar'afa ra trel ah-raka tenon tra ko tsim, „the war-people left 
 the camp to day to go to war;" — ow'uni owe o pon trel o- 
 rani-k'on, „this man has left his wife; — o trel ka-sap 
 ow'ahet, „he desisted from flogging the child." Also „leave 
 behind," (as property); „cede; etc.;" as: tse trel am-pinkar- 
 'a-rnu, „do not leave thy gun behind." 
 
 Tr'el 6 tr'el, „any thing, every thing; any matter; only trouble, 
 nothing but trouble;" with a negative „not any thing, not 
 any matter;" e.g. o-lanba owe o trara tr'el 6 tr'el, „this 
 young man knows every thing;" — tra ba he tr'el 6 tr'ei, „it
 
 — 27o — 
 
 does not matter at all." — See also: bene w'uni ra-tr'el 
 6 tr'ei. 
 Tr'ei tra-las, „sin;" also „danger;" lit. „a bad thing," or „soine- 
 thing bad" ; e. g. trei tra-las tra yi he ri, „there is no danger 
 there;" — o yo tr'ei tra-las, „he committed sin." 
 Tr'eme, pi. of k'eme, which see. 
 Tr'eme tramat re sas, „ eight hundred;" e. g. tra-ren tr'eme 
 
 tramat re sas, „ eight hundred years." 
 Treme tramat ro kin, „six hundred." 
 Tr'ere, pi. of k'ere, which see. 
 
 Tri, pr. obj. for: tsi, which see. Cf. the Note after kotsi. 
 Tri', pr. emph. abbr. „it, this; these," for: trfa; e. g. tra-bep atra 
 ma yema tsia-tse-i? De, tri' taho; „are these the spoons 
 which thou doest want?" „No, not these." 
 Tro? adv. inter. „how? of what kind? how much? how many?" 
 e. g. tro sa ma yO-e? „how are we to do?" ~ tro na yi-e? 
 „how many are ye?" 
 Tro? pr. inter. „what?" e. g. tro som o pa yafi-e? „what is 
 the cause (that) he says so?" or „what is the cause (that) 
 he speaks thus?" — tro ma nane? „what doest thou think?" 
 Tro, ka-, pi. tra-, n. verb. „act of beating rice (in a mortar);" 
 e.g. an-loko ka-tro, ,,the time of beating rice (for supper)," 
 (which is done from 4 — 6 o'clock P. M.. hence also „the 
 time from 4—6 o'clock." The pi. form of ka-tro is used 
 of a plurality of places, where rice is beaten. 
 Tro pe-e? for: tro pa yi-e? „how is it?" or ,.what news?" or 
 also „how art thou?" = tro pe nni-e? Cf. Colloq. Phras. p. 
 105. See next word. 
 Tro pe mu-e? for: tro pa yi-mu-e? ,.how art thou?" or „how 
 
 is it with thee?" Cf. Colloq. Phras. p. 105. 
 Trgfatr, adj. num. „ten;" e. g. a-fam trofatr. „ten persons." 
 Trofatr n'in, „ eleven;" e. g. ma-sar trofatr n'in, „ eleven 
 
 stones." 
 Troko, a-, pi. e-, n. „afowl;" e.g. a-troko a-bana, „a large 
 
 fowl." 
 Trol, V. a. „rear," (as cattle); „tend, mind, attend to, take care 
 
 18*
 
 — 276 — 
 
 of," (as of cattle, or also of men) ; e. g. o trgl e-troko, „he 
 
 rears up fowls;" — o-bal o trol tra-na-tr'on o-fino, „the 
 
 king minds his cows well;" — K'firu o trol-mi, „God lakes 
 
 care of me." 
 Trol, adj. „ reared, reared up." (as cattle); „tended, minded, 
 
 taken care of;" e. g. y'etr e-trol, „things reared up," — 
 
 „ small cattle." 
 Trol, 0-, pi. a-, n. „one lending cattle, herd's man, shepherd;" 
 
 e. g. o-trol ka o-bal, „lhe herd's man of the king." 
 Trol adj. „ clever, skilful;" e. g. w'uni trol, „a clever person," 
 
 — „an artisan." 
 
 Trol a-, pi. e-, n. „medicine;" also „ charm, amulet, countrv- 
 medicine;" — e. g. o di e-trol, „he took medicine;" — 
 sekne a-trgl, „he lied a charm round himself." 
 
 Trom, V. n. ruminate, chew the cud;" e.g. ow'ir o ira Irgm, 
 „the goat is ruminating." 
 
 Tr'on, pr. poss.. „his, her," lit. .,of him. of her;" e. g. tra-bep- 
 Ir'on, „his spoons." 
 
 Tron, ka-, pi. tra , n. „middle, midst, centre; trunk of the body, 
 waist;" e. g. ka-tron ka ka-petr, „the middle of the town;" 
 
 — ka-troh-k'on, „his waist." With the prep, ra-, it be- 
 comes a prep, or a postp. — See ratron, prep. 
 
 Tron, pr. „him, her," this form is used after tra or Ir^ka, as: 
 
 fai Q-na traka tron, „he slaughtered a cow for him." 
 Tron ka --, ka-, used as a prep., see ka-tron ka — . undef K. 
 Trond, v. abr. a. „cook for-," (as for a krifi, or for the dead, 
 
 being considered as a sacritice); e. g. 'a kg trond Q-krifi, 
 
 „lhey goto cook for the krifi." 
 Troiikcir, v. rel. (rad. tronk), „abscond with-, run awa\ to-, flee 
 
 to-, take refuge with-;" e. g. o-trar o trohkar Pa Sori, „the 
 
 slave absconded with Mr. Sori." 
 Tronkar, v. rel n. „abscond, run away;" e.g. o-trar o tronkar 
 
 kao-bai, „the slave run away to the king." With this form 
 
 the suff. is rather redundant. 
 Trori, v. a. „show, inform; show-to- inform- of-;" e. g. 1 ko 
 
 trori-mu ar'on, „1 go to show thee the road;" — an-tetu
 
 — 277 — 
 
 Irdri-mi atra o-bai o k^ne-ko, „lhe messenger informed 
 me of what the king told him;" — w'Qni lorn o trnri-mi, 
 fo o-bal pon fi, „some person informed me, that the king 
 
 has died." 
 Trdtroko, adj. „first," e. g. an-rei a-trotroko, „the first day;" 
 
 - an-fam a-trotroko, „the first people." 
 Tru, V. n. „be sick, be ill;" e. g. Pa Sori o tru, „Mr. Sori 
 
 is sick." 
 Tru, ra- pi. tra, n. „sickness, illness;" e. g. ra-trCi ra-baki ra 
 wop-ko, „°he is very ill," lit. „a heavy sickness holds 
 
 him." 
 Tru k'or, „have the menses;" e. g. o-bera o tru k'or, „the wo- 
 man has the menses." 
 TruT, v. impers. „be hard, be diffieult;" e. g. pa trul he tra yO 
 
 atr'ei atse, „it will not be hard to do this thing." 
 Trutrka-, pi. Ira-, n. „envy, jealousy;" e. g o ba ka-trntr 
 traka o-rani-k'on , .,he is jealous on account of his wife," 
 lit. „he has jealousy on account of his wife." 
 Ts', pref. indef. and insep. for: tr'; see the Note after kotsi. It 
 is an insep. form of: tra-; e.g. ts'ek. „beards," = tr'ek, 
 for: tra-ek. 
 Tsa, conj °= tra, „for, because;" e. g. K'liru o gbali su nank, 
 tsa \i d'er 6 d'er, „God can see us; for he is everywhere." 
 — I nesa, \sa min' tsih, ,.I was afraid, f«ir I am naked." 
 See the Note after kotsi. 
 tse, adv. = tre, „not, do not." Often used with the Imperative; 
 as: tse tsi yo, „do not do it;" — tse fair ri, or: Ise ri 
 fatr, „do not approach there;" — tse falr-na. „do not go 
 near to them;" — tr' 'a tse kg bene ro-petr, „let them not 
 bury him in the town." 
 Tse-wop ar'im ra-, ka-, ,.the not holding (obeying) the word 
 of-;" e. g K'uru o Ira sompa-nu traka ka-tse-wop ar'im- 
 r'on, „God will punish you for not obeying his word." 
 Tsel, adj. „not related, strange, foreign, other;" e. g. a-fam a-tsel 
 de an-fam-n'on gben na bolar he ko, „slrange people and
 
 — 278 — 
 
 his own people do not like him;" — k'antr ka-tsel, „a 
 foreign language." 
 
 Tsela, V. a. „call, invite;" e. g. kg Isela am-boi-'a-mu, „go call 
 thy servant." Also „hail," as: an-fam anan iia tra tsela-su, 
 „those people are hailing us;" also „name," e. g. 'a tsela- 
 ko Sori, „thev called him Sori." 
 
 Tsemp, V. n. „gct wise, get inleUigent, get sense, get prudent; 
 get sober; be wise, be intelligent, etc.;" e. g. o-laiiba owe o 
 ta tsemp he, „this young man has not yet got wise;" — 
 mono ma tsemp he, „thou hast no sense." It is the short 
 form of tsempi. Cf. the Note after -wos, v. n. 
 
 Tsemp, ka-, n. „ wisdom, intelligence, prudence, sense; discretion; 
 soberness;" e. g. Yisua o tak'sa a-fam ka-tsemp ka-bana, 
 „Jesus taught people with great wisdom;" — ow'uni owe 
 ba ka-tsemp, „this person has intelligence." 
 
 Tsempi, v. n. „be wise, be prudent, be intelligent, be discreet, 
 have sense; be sober;" e. g. o-tem owe o tsempi, „this old 
 man is wise;" — o-lanba owe o tsempi so, „this young 
 man is sober again." 
 
 Tsempi, adj. „wise, prudent, intelligent; sober;" e. g.w'uni tsempi, 
 „a wise person." It may follow a proper name without 
 a prefix, in which case it is emphatic, and may be given 
 by „the Wise," as: Be Foki Tsempi, „Bey Foki the Wise." 
 Cf. Proverb 3, p. 99. 
 
 Tsen, V. a. „cut up" (as an animal slaughtered), „cut, carve" (as a 
 fowl), lit. „separate the joints of-," (as butchers do with 
 cattle slaughtered);" e. g. 'a pon tsen o-na, „they have cut 
 up the cow." 
 
 Tsen, tra-, n. „truth, veracity; justice." Also used adverbially 
 in the sense of „iiidepd, truly, in truth." E. g. atra-tseii 
 tra am-pa-n'oh, „the truth of his statement;" — ow'uni 
 owe ba ka-tsemp tra-lseri! „this person has sense indeed!" 
 
 Tsen', ka-, pi. tra-, n. for: tsen; this form is used before d. 
 See next word. 
 
 Tsen, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „a hill;" e. g. o yi ro-tsen' dokom, „he 
 is on the top of the hill;" — ka-tsen ka-lgl, „a Httle hill."
 
 — 279 — 
 
 Tsenfsene, adv. „indeed, truly, surely;" e. g. „o tra dcr (entsene, 
 „he will surely come." 
 
 Tsep, V. a. „plant;" e. g. 1 tsi Istp ri y'intr," „I shall plant 
 trees there," 
 
 Ts'er, pi. of w'er, which see. 
 
 Tser, V. a. „let go, let, dismiss, let loose; forgive; allow, per- 
 mit;" e. g. Iser-kg, „let him go;" — o-bal o tser an-fam, „the 
 king dismissed the people;" — I tser-mu a-inera fino, „I 
 forgive thee with all my heart," lit. „— — with a good 
 heart;" — tser an-tis, w'an! „let go the knife, boy!" 
 
 Tsera, v. rel, „let go- for-; remit- to-" fas a debt to one); „for- 
 give- to-;" e. g. tsera-mi an-tis, wan! „let go the knife for 
 me, boy!" — o-tem o tsera-mi atr'ei tra-las, atra 1 yO-ko, 
 „the old man forgave me the evil thing, which I did to him;" 
 — I tsera-ko ara-bel-r'on, „I remitted him his debt." 
 
 Tsi, part. = tri, to form the Participle, and the Future tense 
 in the !«'• pers, sing, — E. g. 1 tsi der romu ninan, „I shall 
 come to thee to morrow." Cf. the Note after kolsi, as also 
 what has been stated under the pari, tra; because what has 
 been said there, applies also to this form. 
 
 Tsi, pr. sub. and obj. = tri, „it; these; they, them;" e. g. 
 atr'antr kara-tsi and, „as for the sticks bring them here." 
 
 Tsia, V. n. „remain, stay; be left;" e. g. o t.sia ro-Ma-Ial, „he 
 remained at Malal;" — o-tem o tsia ri son, „the old man 
 was left there ulone;" — ma-rei ma-sas ma tsia gbo, „oi)ly 
 three days remained;" — na tra tsia naii ka-raran-ka-tsi 
 mo ho ma na yi tapan, „they would remain afterwards as 
 they were before," 
 
 Tsia, V. a. „leave, let remain, spare;" e. g. pa-la apa an-fam na 
 poii tsia, „lhe rice which the people have left;" — an-fam 
 na tsia a-kala a-gbati ro-sel, „the people have left much 
 money in the house" (for themselves), 
 
 Tsia, V. rel. „leave, leave-to-, bequealh-to-;" e. g. ma-tofal mia 
 I tsia-nu, „i)eace I leave to you;" — o-kas-ka-mi q tsia- 
 mi gbo a-kala a-tan, „my father left me but little monev;"
 
 — 280 — 
 
 — o-tem fsfa-mi k'e ka-bana, „the old man left me a 
 large properly." 
 
 Tsia, pr. emph. „i1, this; they, them, Ihese;" tra-bep-tra-mi tsia 
 yi tsi, „these are my spoons," lit. = the Germ. „Meine 
 Loffel diese sind es." 
 
 Tmb ba, „therefore, for this reason, this is the reason," lit. „it 
 has," or „this has;" e. g. ra-bomp-ra-mi ra ban -mi; tsia ba 
 ma narik fe mi tenon, „my head pained me; this is the 
 reason (that) thou didst not see me to day." 
 
 Tsia ba tsi, „therefore, this is the reason," lit. „it (this) has it;" 
 e. g. ow'ahet-k'on o lasar apa-U; tsia ba-tsi o ban'sa, „his 
 child spoiled the rice; this is the reason (that) he got angry." 
 
 Tsian, copj. ^therefore, for this reason, this is the reason," lit. 
 „it, „or"lhis." It is properly the aiis. form of the pr. Isi, „it." 
 E. g. ow'an o pon yo tr'el tra-las; tsiau o mafikne, „the 
 hoy has done something bad; therefore he hides himself." 
 
 Tsik. 0-, pi. a-, n. „a male stranger, pilgrim, guest;" e.g. o-tsik 
 der romi tenon, „a stranger came to me to day." 
 
 Tsik. ra-, pi. tra-. n. „state of being a stranger, strangership , 
 sojourn, pilgrimage;" e. g. ra fsik-r'on ro-Kamp, „his sojourn 
 at Freetown." 
 
 Tsim, V. n. „war, fight, strive, struggle;" e.g. o ko tsim, „he 
 went to war;" - o tra t.sim ri, „he is fighting there." It 
 is, however, more frequently used in a recipr. sense, „ fight 
 together, war against each other, wage war against each 
 other, strive together;" c. g. tsia som iia tsim, „this is the 
 reason they carry on war with each other;" — iia tsim- ri 
 ma-rei ma-raii, „they fought there for two days." 
 
 Tsim, V. a. „fight with-; war against-, wage war against-, invade;" 
 e. g. I ko tsim-ko, ,,I go to fight with him;" — an-fam na 
 tsim-ko, „the people fought against him;" — Alikali Fatima 
 Brema o tsim an-tof a-ldko, „Alikali Fatima Brema waged 
 war against the Loko country." 
 
 Tsim, ka-, pi. Ira-, n. „war, fight, battle, combat;" e. g. 'a tsim 
 ri ka-t.sim ka-baki, „they fought a great battle there;" —
 
 — 281 — 
 
 fi ka ka-tsim, „he died in the battle," — a tam'ro ka- 
 tsim, „they lost the battle." 
 
 Tsima, adj. „belonging to fighting" or „to war;" e. g. y'etr e- 
 Isi'ma, „arms," or „war-implcments," lit. „things belonging 
 to war." 
 
 Tsimne, v. refl. lit. „fight with oneself," hence: „struggle, ago- 
 nize," (as a dying person); fig. „exen oneself much, try 
 hard;" e. g. o tsimne tra sdto pa la, „he exerted himself much 
 to get rice." Also used in a recipr. sense „compete" or 
 „contcnd with each other, "as: 'a tsimne traka o-bera, „they 
 contend with each other about the woman." 
 
 Tsimone, v. rel. and refl., or v. spont. lit. „fight for oneself," 
 or „fight of one's own accord," hence „make haste, hasten, 
 be quick;" e. g. tsimone, kama ma kone, „make haste that 
 thou ma} est go;" — o t.simone traka kalaiie, „he hastened 
 to return." 
 
 Tsin, V. n. „be naked," (as the bodvj; „be bare," (as the head); 
 „be empty," (as a bottle); e. g. ra-bomp-r'on ra tsiri , „his 
 head is bare;" am-bitra na t.sin, „the bottle is empty." 
 
 Tsin, adj. „naked; bare; empty;" e.g. ra-bomp ra-tsin, „a bare 
 head; - a-bilra a-tsin, „an empty bottle." 
 
 Tsin, ka-, n. „emptiness." It is often used adverbially in the 
 sense of „for nothing, without cause, in vain; gratis." E. g. 
 ka-tsih ka am-bitra, „the emptiness of the bottle;" o yo- 
 tsi gbo ka-tsin, „he did it just for nothing;" — I gbali he 
 som-mu-ni ka-tsin, „I cannot give it to thee gratis." 
 
 Tsir, ma-, n. „blood;" e. g. ma-tsir ma wur-ko, „he bleeds," 
 lit, „blood comes out from him." 
 
 Tsis, V. n. „be drunken, be intoxicated;" e. g. ow'Qni owe o 
 tsis, „this person is drunken." 
 
 Tsis, adj. „drunken, intoxicated;" e. g. w'uni t.sis, „an intoxi- 
 cated person." 
 
 Tubi, V, n. „repent;" Mand. tubi. Fr. the Ar. CjLj, conversus 
 
 fuit a peccalis; poenilenliam ob delictum ostendit. E.g. sa
 
 — 282 — 
 
 ba tra tubi tnjka ra-bonip ra ma-trel-ma-su ma-las, „we have 
 to repent on account of our sins." 
 
 Tiibi, ka-, n. verb. „repen!ance;" e.g. ka-lubi-ka-nan, „their re- 
 pentance." 
 
 Tuk, a-, pi. e-, n „rice straw, stalk of rice after the ears are 
 plucked off," which is generally left standing in the ground, 
 sometimes also cut off, and taken home; and from the roots 
 of which the rice called. e-pas§r (second crop) comes out, 
 which IS of an inferior quality. 
 
 Tiili, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „a mast," (as of a canoe or ship); also „the 
 turret" or „spire on the top of the conical roof of a country 
 house," which is properly the post supporting the conical 
 roof in the middle, reaching down to the ground, and pro- 
 jecting at the ou'side of the roof on the top, forming, as 
 it were, a little spire. E. g. ka-tuli ka-bana, „the main mast," 
 lit. „the great mast;" — tramar ka-tuli ro-bil, „pul up the 
 mast in the canoe." 
 
 Tunt, V. a. „measure, weigh;" e.g. tunt ak'ota, „m(asure the 
 cloth." 
 
 Tup, V. n, „endeavour, try, try hard, exert oneself," (as to get 
 something); e.g. I tup tra soto pa-Ki; kere I tam'ro, „I 
 endeavoured to gel rice; but I was disappointed." 
 
 Tiipas, V. n. prob. a freq. form from an obs. tup, „praclise divination, 
 divine, make country fashion," (as they call it), „tell fortune," 
 (by means of sand, or small stones of different colours) ; e. g. 
 tra tiipas traka Pa Sori, „he is making country fashion for 
 Mr. Sori." 
 
 Tiisi, V. a. „pull out," (as roots, or ihe feathers of a fowl); 
 „unroot," (as plants); „pluck," (as a fowl); „ex(ract," (as a 
 tooth); e.g. „tusi e-yoka , „pull out the cassadas;" — o- 
 bera o tri.si am-bamp, „the woman plucked the fowl." Cf. 
 
 the Ar. yiJu, and the Hebr. li'ni extraxit. 
 
 U-, pref. indef. „a, an;" used by some as an indef. form of o-; 
 but it is not generally used, o- being used definitely and in-
 
 -^ 283 — 
 
 definitely ; it seems to have crept in from the Boloin. E. g. 
 u-sem, „meat;" but o-sem, „the meat" 
 'U, abbr, form of: mu, „thee," used with kori, „salute," as: kori 
 'u, Pa! „I salute thee, Sir!" 
 
 W. 
 
 W, pref, indef and insep. „a, an;" as: w'ir, „a goat," for: wo-ir. 
 
 Wa, pr. poss. „of;" e. g. o-trank wa am'antr, „lhe coldness of 
 the water." 
 
 ■VV'ahet, pi. a-fet, n. „a little child;" e. g. a-fet a-riini, „boys;" — 
 w'ahet riini, „a boy;" — ah-fet na tra wol, „the children 
 are placing together." Sometimes they use for the sing, the 
 form o-fet; w'ahet is probably a contraction of: w'an fet, „a 
 young child." 
 
 Wai, V. a. „buy, purchase;" e. g. „I wal kota, „I bought cloth." 
 
 Waia, V. rel. „purchase- for-, purchase" or ,,buy-wilh-;" e. g. 
 waia-mi k'ota, „buy me cloth;" — I waia-hi k'ota, „I bought 
 it with cloth," (as a mat). 
 
 "VV'an, pi. a-wut, n. „a child," (larger than w'ahet). It is also 
 used, without any adjunct, in the sense of „son; boy; young 
 man, youth; friend"; —the Gr. iraig and i^aigog. E. g. ow'an- 
 ka-mi o-runi , „my son;" — w'an, yentia-mi an-tis, „boy, 
 hand me the knife." It is sometimes even applied to an 
 old person in the sense of „friend;" and the pi. is also 
 used of the „yonng ones" of beasts. 
 
 Wan, ka-, pi. ira-, n, „a chair, a seat;" also „throne;" e. g. o 
 bempa ka-wan, „he made a chair." 
 
 Wan diini, pi. a-wut a-runi, ,,a male child, boy;" also „a man." 
 
 "VV'an bera, pi. a-vvul a-bera, „a female child, a girl." 
 
 "Wandi, ka-, tra-, n. „instruclion, speech, preaching; lesson;" 
 e. g. fof ka-wandi ka-las tenon, '„he delivered a bad speech 
 to day;" — o gbalr an-fam ka-wandi, „he preached to the 
 people," lit. „he imparted instruction to the people." 
 
 Wahki, V. revert, a. ,.take away the protecting charm from-, de- 
 prive- of the protecting charm," (as a farm or fruit-tree);
 
 — 284 — 
 
 fig. ..deprive of proteclion, outlaw, proscribe;-' e.g. o w^nki 
 an'anlr, „he look away the protecting charm from the tree;" 
 — o-bal wanki-mi, „the king outlawed me." 
 
 Warafi, v. n. „be bright, be clear," (as the sky or atmosphere); 
 e. g ak'tiru ka waraii, „the sky is clear." 
 
 Wek, V. a. „draw," (as milk from a cow); „wring out, squeeze 
 out," (as wet cloth, or a sore); e. g. wek ak'ola," wring 
 out the cloth;" — ma ba tra wek aka-sam, „thou must 
 squeeze out the sore." 
 
 W'er, pi. ts'er, n. „arat;" e.g. ow er owe, „this rat." 
 
 Win, adv. „once, one time; one, one and the same, alike, the same;" 
 e. g. I nan'-ko gbo win, „I saw him but once;" — an-tori- 
 n'on ye ma-selo-m'on ma yi gbo win, „his law and his 
 will are just the same." With a negative „never," as: I tr'a 
 he mu win, „I never knew thee." 
 
 Win win, „now and then;" Ger. „hie und da," lit. „once once;" 
 e. g. yO-isi gbo win win, „he did it only now and then." 
 
 W'ir, pi ts'ir, n. „a goat;" e. g. ts'ir tra-bana, „large goals." 
 
 Wot! int. „alas!" It is expressive of pain, grief, lamentation or 
 pity. E. g. woi minah! „alas for me!" See Colloq. Phras. 
 p. 108. 
 
 Wol! WoT! int emph. „alas! alas!" See Colloq. Phras. p. 108. 
 
 Wol, V. n. „play, play together;" e. g. an-fel na tra wol, „the 
 children are playing together." As to its sense it is rather 
 recipr., but iiol as to its form. 
 
 Woma, adj. „in the husk" (applied to grain); e. g. pa-la pa- 
 woma, „rough rice," or „rice in the husk." 
 
 Won, V. a. „shake out, shake" (as cloth, or the law-broom); 
 ..shake ofl" (as something from one's cloth); ..flap, clap" 
 (as the wings); „ply" (as a whip); e.g. won ak'ola, „shake 
 the cloth;" — o won am-bok , „he shook off the snake." 
 
 Won, V. n. „be long, stay long; last long, last;" e. g. na won 
 di, „they stayed long Ihere;" — an-sel aiie na tra won, 
 „ihis house will last long;" — o won he, „he will not be 
 long." It is the short form of woni.
 
 — 285 — 
 
 Won', euph. form of won, „go in," used before the prep, do-, 
 as: won' do-set, „he went into the house; — won' di, 
 „go in there." See next word. 
 Won, V. n. „go in, come in, enter;" of the sun „sel, go down," 
 = the Hebr. N12. E. g, g won ka aii-sct, „he went into 
 the house," = o won' do-set; — o won gbo, „he went just 
 in;" — ar'etr ra won, „the sun set." 
 Won, V. a. „get into, enter into, gel into" (as into some stale, 
 or something into one's body); „enter" (as a house); ,,join" 
 (as a compan;\'); „embrcice" (as a rehgion); „put on, wear" 
 (as clothes); also „get" (as a sore pus); e. g. o won ra-trar, 
 ,.he became a slave" or „he got into slavery;" — o won' 
 da-nes, for: o won ra-nes, „he got afraid." lit. „he entered 
 into fear;" — na won an-set, „the} entered the house;" 
 — woii a-wonane, „he joined a company;" — o won' 
 da-mori, „he embraced Islamism;" — ka-sam ka won ma-ti, 
 „the sore suppurates" or „gels pus;" — o won ar'uma-r'oA 
 loko 6 Idko, „he puts on (wears) his shirt always;" — e-tof 
 e won-mi ro-for, „some earth got into my eyes," lit. „earth 
 got into me at the eyes." With the last ex. the obj. pronoun 
 of the veib serves to express the poss. pronoun. 
 Note. It may be observed here, that this verb is very fre- 
 quently used in connection with an abstract noun, to form 
 comp. inch, verbs; when won may often be given by „ be- 
 come, get, get into." Also wur in the sense of „ bring forth, 
 produce, get", is often used in a similar way, as will be 
 seen from the Temne Grammar and Dictionary. Of. also 
 wona below. 
 Won, = owoh, pr.dem. rem. „thal, that one;" this form is used 
 if the pr. without the noun is the subject of a proposition, 
 as: w'uni las woii, „that is a bad person," lit. „a bad per- 
 son that." 
 Won ka a-fam, „beoome fashion among people," lit. „enter into 
 
 people." 
 Won' do-tr'ei, „get into trouble;" e. g. o-lanba o won" do-tr'eT^ 
 „lhe young man got into trouble."
 
 — 286 — 
 
 Won w'lini yanfa, for: won w'uni a-Vcinfa, „form a conspiracy 
 against one, conspire against one;" e. g. 'a won-ko yahfa, 
 „the.y conspired against him." 
 
 Wdna, V. cans. „make to go in, cause to enter, bring in, lead 
 in;" e.g. o w6na-mi ro-sel, „he brought me info the house;" 
 — o woiia-ko ra-trar, .,he enslaved him," lit. „he led him 
 into slavery:" — o wona-ko ma-lap. „ho made him ashamed" 
 or „he brought shame (disgrace) upon him." 
 Note. By this caus. form the comp. inch, form with won may 
 be made transitive or causative. 
 
 Wonane, a-,n. „a company, a society," (especiall\ one whose mem- 
 bers have engaged to assist each other in farm-work); e. g. 
 
 won afi-wdnane, „he joined the farming company." 
 Wonane, v. spont. (rad. won), „gel fever, gel warm" or „hol, have 
 
 fever;" e. g. ow'ahet o wonane, „the child got fever." 
 WoiVs, V. caus. (rad. won) „make to go in" or „to enter, put-on-, 
 clothe-with-;" e. g. won's-ko ar'uma, „pnt him on the shirt," = 
 „clothe him with the shirt;" — 1 woii's-ko e-16pra, „I put 
 him on the clothes;" — o won*s-mi y'elr, „he clothed me," 
 lit. „he made me to enter things," (wohs showing here that 
 wearing apparel is intended by y'etr; for this caus. form of 
 won is to he kept distinct from the other caus. form woria 
 above; because w oil's is always used of putting on clothes, 
 or wearing apparel, or war implements.) 
 Wont, V. n. „graze, feed;" e. g. tra-na na Ira wont ro-lal, „the 
 
 cows are grazing on the grass-field." 
 Wont, V. a. „graze, feed on; look for-," (as for medicine); e.g. 
 
 1 ko wont e-trol ro-kant, „I go to look for medicine in the 
 bush;" — Ira-na iia pofi wont od'er be, „the cows have 
 grazed the whole place." 
 
 Wont, ka-, n. verb. „acl of grazing, act of feeding, a grazing;" 
 e. g. ka-wont ka tra-na, „the grazing of the cows." 
 
 Wonlr, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a brother" or„sister"; also „brother" (with- 
 out any adjunct), „one born of the same parents;" Germ. 
 „Geschwisler".
 
 — 287 — 
 
 Wontr o-bera, o-, pi. a-, n. „a sister"; e. g. o-\vonfr-ka-mi o-bera, 
 „my sister." 
 
 Wontr o-rfini, o-, pi. a-, n. „a brother"; e. g. o-wontr-ka-mi o- 
 runi, „my brother." 
 
 Wop, V. a. „take hold of-, hold, seize, apprehend; hit" (as the 
 ball of a gun); „keep. obev" (as a law); e. g. a wop-ko, 
 „they seized him;" — an-rom na wop-ko, ,.lepros\' has seized 
 him;" — o wop an-toh na K'uru, „he keeps the law of 
 God." Also „catch" (as fish), as: ma wop e-lop-i ? „didst 
 thou catch fish?" 
 
 Wop, ka-, n. verb. „act of taking hold of-." or „of seizing, cap- 
 ture; a holding, a keeping;" e. g. ka-wop-k'oii an-ton ^na 
 K'liru, „his keeping the law of God." 
 
 Wop a-sum, „hold a fast, fast;" e.g. 'a wop a-sum, „they hold 
 a fast." 
 
 Wopa, V. rel. „take hold of-by-, hold-wilh-, hokl-for-, seize- 
 for-;" e. g. w6pa-mi-ko, „seize him for me;" — o w6pa-ko 
 ka-tra, „he held him with the hand." 
 
 Wopa wuni t'amasere, „bear evidence against one," lit. „hold 
 one with an evidence;" e. g. o wopa-kg t'amasere, „he bore 
 evidence against him." 
 
 Wopne, v. rcfl. a. „hold oneself to-, take hold of-, hold oneself 
 on-, trust in-, cleave to-; take refuge with-;" e, g. 1 bun 
 fumpo; kere I wopne ak'antr, „l almost fell; but I held 
 myself on the slick;" — o wopne-mi tra nemteDe-mu, kama 
 ma tse ko sap, „he took refuge with me to beg thee, that 
 thou mightest not flog him." 
 
 W'or, pi. tr'or, n. „a species of deer generallv called fiUen- 
 tamba" (being a beautiful animal with long slender legs, and 
 a white and brown spotted skin); e. g. i nank w'or, „1 saw 
 a fiUentamba." 
 
 Worap, V. n. „dream"; e. g. 1 woriip na Iralrak, „1 dreamed 
 last night." 
 
 Wos, V. n. „get dry; be dry; get hard, be hard" (as bread); 
 „gel parched, be parched" (as soil); e.g. ad'uba ra wos, 
 „the ink gets dry."
 
 — 288 — 
 
 Note. This is the short form of wosi, and expresses the inch, 
 form also, as is the case with all the short forms of this 
 class of verbs ; while the long form is used more positively, 
 and never in negative propositions. 
 
 Wos, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a husband"; e, g. o-wos-k'on, „her husband." 
 
 Wosa, v. a. „answer to-, answer for-, answer; answer to- in the 
 affirmative," Ger. „bejahpn". Also „acknowledge, confess; be 
 willing for-;" e. g. o wosa he kg, „ht' did not answer him;" — 
 tse w6sa-ko, „do not answer him;" — a wosa-tsi, „thev 
 confessed it;" or also „the\ were willing for it;" — g wosa 
 atr'ei-tr'gn tra-las, „he acknowledged his sin." Also „be 
 accountable for-." 
 
 Wosa, V. n. „ans\ver, answer in the affirmative; confess; be 
 willing, consent;" with traka „account for-;" e. g. g wosa he, 
 „he did not answer;" — mung ba tra wosa traka atr'ei tra- 
 Isi, „thou hast to account for that matter." 
 
 Wosa, ka-, n. verb. „act of answering" or „of answering for-, 
 etc.;" e. g. miing ba ka-w6sa atr'ei ira-tsi, „thou hasl to 
 account for that matter," lit. „lhou hast the accounting for 
 that matter." 
 
 Wosi, v. impers. „be drv;" e. g. pa-w6si, „il is dr)-," This form 
 was only met with in a Proverb. See Proverb 2, p. 98. 
 
 Wosi, V. n. „be dry, be hard;" e. g. ka-bo ake ka wosi, „lhis 
 bread is dry," See: wos above, of which this is the long form. 
 
 Woso, ka-, pi. lri\-, n. „a yellowish" or „whilish clay, with which 
 the Bondo girls rub their body, while under the charge of 
 the Bondo head-woman, and of which they make chalk." 
 
 Woto, ka-, or ra-, pi. Ira-, n. „a baboon, the African orang-outang, 
 chimpansee," (simia salyrus, or simia troglodytes). The,, grey 
 baboon" is called: ka-diimbu, or: ka-nimbu (eynocephalus 
 hamadryas). 
 
 Wgtr, V. a. „brpak to pieces, break, smash" or „dash to pieces;" 
 e. g. tse wgtr am-bgl, „do not break the earthen pot to 
 pieces." 
 
 Wu, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „knee"; see: so, v. a. „bow, bend." 
 
 Wul, a-,pl. e-. n. „a thousand"; e.g. e-wul e-sas, „threc thousand."
 
 — 289 — 
 
 Wul, a-, pi. e-, n. „a loop, noose, trap" (to catch venison and 
 birds in); e. g. o sap a-bamp ka an- wul, „he caught a bird 
 in the trap." 
 
 W'lini, pl.a-fam, n. „a person; man, one, someone;" e.g. w'lini 
 k'in, „one person;" — w'Qni lorn o trori-mi-tsi, „some per- 
 son informed me of it." 
 
 Wuni, ra-, n. „manhood, human nature;" e. g. ra-wdni-r'oh, 
 „his human nature." 
 
 Wuni bana, pi a-fam a-bana, n. „a gianl," lit. ,.a big person." 
 
 W'uni bom, pi. a-fam a-bom, or: bom-na, n. „a woman," lit. 
 „a female person." Cf, bom, o-, under B. 
 
 Wuni lorn, „some person, some one, a certain person." Cf. 
 w'Qni above. 
 
 W'uni 6 w'iini, „every one, any one;" with a negative „not any 
 person, no man, none, no one;" e. g. w'lini 6 w'uni o gbaii 
 he yo alr'ei atse, „no man can do this thing;" — w'uni 6 
 w'uni gwo tse ko lane, „every one who does not believe 
 in him." 
 
 Wur, V. n. „go out, come out, go forth, come forth;" also „jut 
 out" (as a stone from a wall); „project" (as a point of land 
 into the sea); ,,rise" (as the sun, = the Hebr. i<^\)■, etc. 
 With the prep, ro- this verb may have the sense „go out 
 to-" or „from-" or „in-" or „into-," or „come out to-" 
 or „from-" or „in-" or „inlo-"; thus: o wur ro-petr, may 
 signify „comc" or „go out from the town," or also „come 
 out (from some place) into the town." E. g. o wur ro-set, 
 „he came out from the house," = o wur ka an-sef; — na 
 wur he tenon, „they did not come out to day;" — ar'etr ra 
 wur, „the sun rises." 
 
 Wur, V. a. „pul forth, send forth, produce, emit, gel;" also 
 „come out from-;" e. g. ma-leni ma wur i-bontr i-fi'no, „the 
 flowers smell sweetly," lit. „the flowers put forth a good 
 smell;" — an-sal-iVoh iia wur ma-tsir, „his finger bleeds," 
 lit. „his finger emits blood;" — aii-fatr ha wur ma-gbak, 
 „the iron gets rusty;" — an'anir ha wur e-bopar, „the tree 
 gets leaves;" — ah'aiilr ha wur ma-lehi, „the tree gels blos- 
 
 Temne - Worteibuch. 1 9
 
 — 290 — 
 
 soms;" — aii-nes o wur tr'atrak tra-lal, „the spider got 
 many legs" (i. e. when it came into existence, of. Fable II. 
 p. 56); — ma-t^ir ma wur-ko, „lie bleeds," lit, „blood comes 
 out from him." See also the Note after won, v. a. 
 
 Wur i-bontr, „emit a smell, smell." See ex. under the preceding 
 word. 
 
 Wura, V. cans. „make to come out, pull out, draw out, take out; 
 put forth, stretch forth" or „out; find out, invent;" e. g. 
 wiira a-tis, „he took out a knife;" — kono wura an-gbatg 
 ka am-bom-ria-tsi, „he drew out the cutlass from its sheath;" 
 — wura gbo ara-bomp-r'en, „it only stretched forth its 
 head." 
 
 Wut, a-, pi. of w'an, y\hkh see. 
 
 Y. 
 
 y, pref. indef. andinsep. „a, an," as y'etr, „things", for: ye-etr. 
 
 \a, 0-, pi. a-, n. „mistress, lady, madam;" also „mother" (when 
 addressing her, otherwise o-kara is generally used); e.g. kali 
 0-ya-ka-mi, „see my mistress;" — kori 'u, Ya! „I salute thee, 
 Madam!" This form corresponds \\ilh pa, „masler, etc," 
 
 Ya, prep. poss. „of"; e.g. ey'etr ya Sori, „Sori's things," lit. 
 „the things of Sori." 
 
 Y'a, adv. = ye and yo, „thus, so, in this way, in the same 
 manner, the same kind." This form is used before words 
 with the vowel a, as: ya na yo-e, „thus they did;" — ya 
 na pa, „thus they said;" — ya a-fam na ma la yo, „so 
 people are always doing." 
 
 Ya-tsi, pr, poss, neut. ,.ils; their," lit. „of it;" e. g. e-bgpar- 
 ya-tsi, ,,its leaves" (as of a tree), 
 
 Ya-tsi, pr. dem. loc. „that; those;" e. g. ey'etr ya-tsi, „lhose 
 things" (spoken of). 
 
 Yahannama, n. „hell, place of torment;" Mand. yahaniba; Ful. 
 
 G ^ -- -- 
 
 tsahannima. From the Ar. *.A.^^5 gehenna, infenii ignis, 
 infernus. E. g. ro-yahannama, „in hell." 
 YaT, adj. ..worthless, of no value, trifling, vain, vile, mean;" e.g. 
 w'dni yal, „a mean person;" — r'a ra-yal, „a worthless thing."
 
 — 291 ~ 
 
 YaT, ra-, n. „\voilhlPSsness, vanity, vilencss, meannes;" e. g. ra- 
 vaT-r'on, „his meanness." 
 
 Yak, V. n. „wash clothes;" e. g. 'a ko yak ro-bat, „they go to 
 \vash clothes at the brook;" — o-bera gwe o Ir^ra yak, „this 
 woman can wash well," lil. „kno\vs to wash." 
 
 Yak, V. a. „wash" (as clothes); „cleanse" (as a sore); e. g. yak 
 aka-sam-ka-mu, „ cleanse thy sore;" — 1 ko yak ey'ytr-'e-mi 
 e-16pra, „1 go to wash my clothes." 
 
 Y^ka, ka-, pi. pa-, n. „rice of a superior quality," also called: 
 pa-la pa-krifi, „krifi rice." Cf. the word krifi, adj. 
 
 Yal, a-, pi. P-, or tra , n. „a boat"; e. g. a-yal a-fino, „a fine 
 boat." 
 
 Y'an, ra-, pi. tra-, n. ,, middle pari of the day, noon, midday;" 
 also „lhe clear pari of the day from sun-rise to sun-sel;" 
 e. g. der na ra-yan, ,,he came to day at noon." The pi. 
 is hardly ever used. 
 
 Yari, adv. = ya, „thus, in this way;" e. g. 1 yema he ki van, 
 „I do not want it in this way," (as a wooden bowl). Yan 
 is the abs. form of ya. fCf, h under N.) 
 
 Yanfa, a-, pi. e-, n. „a trick; deceitfulness, deceitful character, 
 deceit, treaciiery;" e. g. owuni owe o ba yanfa, „this per- 
 son is deceitful," lil. ,.this p. has deceitfulness;" — o yg-mi 
 yanfa, „he played me a trick," lit. „he did me a trick" or 
 „deceilfuincss". 
 
 Yanfa, adj. „deceitful, treacherous; e. g. w'uni yanfa, „a deceit- 
 ful person." 
 
 Y'afikra, n. „long Irowsers, as worn by theMandingos and Susus;" 
 e. g. y'ankra y'in, „one pair of Irowsers;" — ey'ankra-y'gn, 
 „his trowsers." 
 
 •tT,s , i <^d). num. „i()ur"; e.g. e-lis yanle, ,.lour knives." 
 Yanle, ' 
 
 Yc'inle, ma-, n. „a kind of millet," also called: k'ene, pi. p'^ne. 
 
 Yao, adv. „yes; well;" e. g. ma yefa ro-Bake Ldkg-i? Yao. 
 
 „doesl thou come from I'ort-Loko?" „Yes." 
 
 Yari, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. ,.a cat"; e. g. a-yari a-fel, „a kitten." 
 
 Yarg, a-, pl.e-; or a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „a diamond snake," also 
 
 19*
 
 — 292 — 
 
 called „ devil" or „ magic snake" (much dreaded by the Na- 
 tives). See Pref. § 13. b. 
 
 Yawe! int. „oh dear! alas! ah! oh!" indicating disappointment 
 or regret. E. g. vawe, pa-ka-mi! „alas, my father!" This 
 expression is used by wonten when crying after the death of 
 their husband. 
 
 Ye, pref. indef. used with the num. adj. ran, „two", and with 
 other adjectives in the def. state; e. g. e-gbala ye-ran, „two 
 mats." 
 
 Ye, adv. = ya, yo, „tl)us, so, in this way, in the same manner, 
 the same kind;" e. g. ye taho-i? „is it not so?" — ye pa 
 yi, „lhus it is;" — ye 1 me la yo, „thus 1 am always doing." 
 It is generally used before words with the vowels e, i and a. 
 
 Ye, pr. dem. prox. (for: eye), „this; these;" used with the comp. 
 dem. pronoun yia-ye, „it (is) this; they (are) these;" and in 
 the phrase: e-suma ye, „at this time." Cf. suma, e-. — It 
 is also often used after: fo, or: ho, „say"; about which see: 
 fo ye. 
 
 Yefa, V. n. „come away, go away" (from); „depart; descend, 
 originate;" e. g. o yefa ro-petr, „he came away from the 
 town;" — yefa rondii, „he went away from him," or „he 
 turned away from him." 
 
 Yehudi, o-, pi. a-, n. „a Jew"; e.g. a-yehudi a-laT, „many Jews." 
 
 Yeli, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a public singer" (who extols or degrades one 
 by singing); also „minstrel, courtjester, merry Andrew" (as 
 kept by chiefs for their amusement); „a public beggar." 
 
 Yem, ra-, pi. tra-, n. „a lie, a falsehood;" e. g. o ba ra-yem, 
 ^he is a liar," lit. „he has falsehood." 
 
 Yema, v. n. „lell a lie" or „falsehood, lie;" e. g. o yema gbo, 
 „he told but a lie." 
 
 Yema, v. n. „want, wish." As an aux. it has often the sense 
 of „be about, be upon the point." E. g. I yema mun, „I 
 want to drink;" — ka-sam ka yema yenk, „the sore wants 
 to heal" or „is about to get heal;" — pa yema sok, „it is 
 about to dawn" or „it wants to dawn;" — ma-lemre ma 
 yema lol-afi, „the limes are about to get ripe." When used
 
 } adv. „no\v"; e.g. pa yenen tdkon! „speak then now!" 
 
 — 293 — 
 
 as an aux. , it is construed with the short form of the In- 
 finitive. 
 
 Yema, v. impers. „\vant, be about." See the preceding form. 
 
 Yema, v. a. „want, need, be in need of;" e. g. I vema-ni hali, 
 „1 want it much." 
 
 Yem'sa, v. freq. and rel. (rad. vema), „tell a lie about-" or 
 „againsl-" or „of-"; e. g. o ^em'sa-mi gbo, „he only told 
 a lie about me." 
 
 Yeneii, 
 
 Yenen, 
 
 Yenk, v. n. „gel well, get heal" (as a sore); with negative pro- 
 positions also „be well, be heal;" e. g. ka-sam ka pon yehk, 
 „the sore has got well." It is the short form of yenki, „be 
 well, be heal." See the Note after wos, v. n. above. 
 
 Yenk ma-der, ..get well in body, get restored to health." 
 
 Yehk ma-der, ka-, n. „ state of being well, health;" e. g. ka- 
 yenk-k'on ma-der, or: ka~yenk ma-der-k'on, „his health." 
 
 Yenkas, v. cans. „heal, cure, make well," (often used with ma- 
 der, „body"); e. g. o sgm-mi e-trol tra yenkas-mi, „he gave 
 me medicine to cure me." See next word. 
 
 Yenkas wuni ma-der, „cure a person's body, make one well, 
 restore one's health;" as: o yenkas-mi ma-der, „he restored 
 me to health," lit. ,Jie cured me (as to the) body." The 
 obj. pr. serves here, as it were, for a poss. pronoun. 
 
 Yenlr, v. a. „deliver, hand over, give, give up, deliver up;" e. g. 
 yentr an-reka, „he delivered the letter;" — 'a yentr-ko, 
 „they delivered him up." Also „deliver up-with-" or „by-", 
 as: 'a yentr-ko a-sot, „they betrayed him," lit. „they deliv- 
 ered him up by a stratagem," 
 
 Yentra , V. rel. „deliver-to-, hand-to-, hand-for-;" e.g. w'an, 
 
 yentra-mi a-lis, „boy, hand me a knife." 
 Yer, v. a. „share, give; divide, share out to-, distribute, appor- 
 tion;" also „share-with-;" e. g. yer-mi mun, „give me to 
 drink;" — o yer o-sem, „he shared the meal;" — Q yer- 
 mi ka-bo, „he gave me of the bread," or „he shared the 
 bread with me,"
 
 ~ 294 — 
 
 Y^rane, v. a. recipr. „share among each other;" e. g. iia jerane 
 ak'ota, „lhe}' shared the cloth among each other." 
 
 Yerane, v. rel. and refl, „share in-, have a part" or „share in-, 
 partake of-oneself;" e. g. o yerane o-sem, „he has a share 
 in the meat." 
 
 Yese, V. n. „get loose" (as rope); ,.get" or „be in disorder, 
 get" or „be scattered" (as a bundle of sticks); „go to ruins, 
 decay, dilapidate, fall to pieces," (as a house); e. g. an-set 
 na yese, „the house goes to ruins;" — ka-fant'r ka ye^e, 
 „lhe bed is not made." « 
 
 Y'etr, pi. of r'a, or r'aka, which see. 
 
 Y'etr e-di, pi. of r'a ra-di, which see. 
 
 Y'etr e-16pra, n. „wearing apparel, clothes;" e. g. o ba y'etr 
 e-16pra e-fmo, „he has fine clothes." 
 
 Yi, adv. „thus, so;" it may be sometimes given by „this"; e.g. 
 kanko K'uru pa tse mu yi yi! „God grant that it may not 
 be thus with thee!" 
 
 Yi, v. impers. „be"; e. g. ye pa yi, „thus it is." 
 
 Yi, v. n. „be, exist;" e. g. Pa Sori o yi he ri, „Mr. Sori is not 
 there;" — o kas-ka-mi o yi ro-petr, „my father is in the 
 town." 
 
 Yi, V. a. „be to-, be-for-, be with-; consist of-; happen to-, 
 befall;" e. g. tr'ei tra yi-mi ro-niera, „I have something at 
 heart," lit. „something is with me in the mind;" — tra yi- 
 mi traka kg ro-kamp, „I intend to go to Freetown;" — o 
 kane ria atra ma yi-iia, „he told them what would befall 
 them." 
 
 Yi, ma-, n. „state, condition;" e. g. ma-yi-m'on ro-krifi, „his 
 condition in Hades." 
 
 Yi, pr. obj. „it; them;" e. g, ey'efr-'e-mi kere-yi ro-set, „as to 
 my things carry them into the house." 
 
 Yia, pr. emph. „if, this; they, them, these;" e. g. e-gb^ta-'e-mi 
 yia-ye, „these are my mats," lit. „my mats they these;" 
 — ey'etr eye yia I yema, „these things them I want." 
 
 Yian, pr. abs. „it, this; they, them, these;" e. g. ey'etr-'e-mi 
 yian, „these are my things," lit. „my things they" or
 
 — 2D5 — 
 
 „these". These abs. forms iinpl^ the copula „be". (Cf, -n 
 under N.) 
 
 Yif, V. a. „ask; ask-fur-, beg-for-;" e. g. o yif-mi traka an-reka 
 loko 6 loko, „he always asks me for the letter;" — o jif- 
 ria r'aka, „he begged them for something;" — na yif-ko ho 
 ye: Tra sa ko-i? „they asked him: Shall we go?" 
 
 Yiki, a-, n. „ glory, majesty; d'gnity, state, honour;" e. g. an- 
 \iki-iVon, „his glory;" — o-bal owe o ba a-yiki a-b^na, „this 
 king has a great state." 
 
 Yikis, V. caus. „ glorify, dignify, honour;" e. g. an-fam fia yikis- 
 ko, „the people glorified him." 
 
 Yi'm'ra, v. dim. and inch, (rad yim), „^^ither, fade" (as leaves), 
 lit. „get reddish;" e.g. e-bdpar ya an'antr e tra yim'ra, „the 
 leaves of the tree are withering." 
 
 Y'in, adj.num. „one"; e.g. y'ahkra y'in, „one pair of troAvsers." 
 
 Y'intr, pi, of iVaulr, which see. 
 
 Yira, V. n. „sit down, sit; live, dwell; also „settle" (asdreggs); 
 e. g. yira and, „he sits here," or „he lives here;" — ko 
 yira ri, „go sil down there." It is probably a rel. and caus. 
 form of: yi. 
 
 Yisa, V. a. „hoisl" (as a sail); „cock" (as a gun); e, g. w'an, 
 yisa ri am-bela, „boy, hoist the sail there." 
 
 YO, V. n. „act, do;" e. g. yo o yo, „Ihus he did." 
 
 Yo, V. a. „do; make," (as a table); „Taise," (as an army); „do- 
 with-, do-to-, treat;" e. g. o yo ma-pani, „he does work;" 
 — 1 yo-ko mo a-boT, „I treated him as a servant;" — tse 
 so yQ.-tbi, w'an! „do not do it again, boy!" As an aux. it 
 indicates causation of the energy, denoted by the principal 
 verb, and is construed with the def. verb, as: kdng yo-ko 
 kela, „he caused him to steal." lit. „he made him he 
 steal;" ~ mrino yo-ko o fi, „thou wast the occasion of his 
 death." 
 
 Yo, ka-, n. verb. „act of doing" or „making, a treating, a doing;" 
 also „habit, fashion;" e. g. ka-yo-k'on a!r'ei atse, „his doing 
 this thing;" — ka-yo-k'on kia-ke, „lhis is his fashion."
 
 — 296 — 
 
 Yo, 0-, pl.a-, n. „a doer"; e.g. an-yo I'la ar'i'm ra K'Qru, „the 
 
 doers of the word of God." 
 Yo, adv. „lhiis, so, in this way, in the same way" or „manner, 
 
 the same kind;" e. g. yo o pa, „thus he said;" — yg o yo, 
 
 „thus he did." This form is used before words with the 
 
 vowels o and u. 
 Yo o-las, „act wrong, do wrong;" e. g. o yo o-las, „he acted 
 
 wrong." 
 Yo w'uni ka-tsiii, „treat one in a mean" or „vile manner;" e.g. 
 
 lanba o yo-mi ka-tsin, „the man treated me in a vile 
 
 manner," 
 Yo w'lini o-baki, „deal hardly with one, treat one severely;" 
 
 e. g. 'a yo-ko o-baki, „they treated him severely." 
 Yo w'uni o-bah, „hurt one, harm one, injure one," lit. „treat 
 
 one painfully;" e. g. aii-fam na yo-na o-baii, „lhe people 
 
 hurt them." 
 Yo w'lini o-las, „do wrong to one, treat one badly;" e. g. o- 
 
 w'uni owe o yo na o-las, „this person treated them badly." 
 Yo w'uni o-tot, „do good to one, treat one kindly" or „well"; 
 
 e. g. ah-fam ahe ha yo-mi o-tol, „these people treated me 
 
 well." 
 Yo w'lini Ir'ei tra-fino, „lreat one well," lit. „do one a good 
 
 thing;" e. g. o-tem o yo-mi tr'el Ira-fino, „the old man 
 
 treated me well." 
 Y'of, pi. of h'of, which see. 
 Yofat, adj. „soft" (as a pillow); e. g, ka-fanl'r ka-yofat, „a soft 
 
 bed." 
 Yoka, V. a. „take, take up, take away; lake on oneself, assume" 
 
 (as an office); e. g. o yoka ak'antr, „he took up the stick;" 
 
 — yoka an-troko, „he took away the fowl;" — o yoka 
 
 ra-yola, „he made himself a gentleman," lit. „he took (as- 
 sumed) the rank of a gentleman;" — o yoka ma-der ma 
 
 w'lini, or simply: o yoka ma-der, „he look on himself a 
 
 human body," = „he became man." 
 Yoka, a-, pi. e-, n. „a cassada root;" e.g. e-yoka e-fino, „good 
 
 cassadas."
 
 — 297 — 
 
 Yuka k'or, „conceive, become pregnant," lit. „take a bell^y;" 
 e. g. o-bera o yoka k'or, „lhe woman conceived." 
 
 Yokane, v. refl. n. „lake oneself up," hence „rise, get up; rise 
 up as—;" e.g. w'an, j'okane, pa sok! „boy, gel up, it 
 dawns!" — an-fam be na jokane, „all the people got up;" 
 — yokane o-kelfa, „he rose up as a war-officer;" — o 
 yokane ka ra-fi, .,he rose from death." Also fig. „recovcr, 
 get well again" (rise up, as it were, from a sickness), as: 
 o-lem poll yokane so, „the old man got well again." 
 
 Yokane, v. rel. and refl. „take to oneself, lake on" or „upon 
 oneself, assume;" e. g. o yokane ra-kelfa, „he look on bim- 
 self the office of a captain of the army," = ,.he made him- 
 self a captain of the army;" — o yokane ma-der ma w'lini, 
 „he took on himself a human body," = „he became man" 
 or „he became incarnale," for which they may also say 
 simply: o yokane ma-der. 
 
 Yola, 0-, pi. a-, n. „a gentleman, a rich man;" e.g. o yi o-y6!a 
 o-bana, „he is a great gentleman." 
 
 Yola, ra-, n. „slale" or „rank of a gentleman, genllemanship;" 
 e. g. ba ra-yola, „he is a gentleman." 
 
 Y'on, pr. poss. „his, her/' lit. „of him, of her;" e. g. ey'elr- 
 y'on, „his Ihings." 
 
 Yon, adv. = yah which see. This form is not much used; they 
 rather use yah for it. 
 
 Yoii, ka-, pi. tra-, n. „a bamboo stick hollowed out to about the 
 middle of its length;" it is used to catch fish with. On 
 one of its ends it is widely opened, and then gels more and 
 more narrow; at the other end it is lied togethfr. If the 
 fish goes in at Ihe o[)en end, and reaches the middle of it; 
 it cannot come out again. The slick is left in the water for 
 this purpose sometimes a whole day. 
 
 Yona, V. rel. (rad.yo), „do-for-, make-for-; do-with-, make-wilh-; 
 do work with-;" e.g. o-lahba o yona-mi ma-pant, „the young 
 man does work for me;" — o yona-mi a-mesa, „he made a 
 table for me;" — o yona ka-bap, „he does work with the 
 axe;" — yona ka-bap ake ma-pant, „do work with this axe."
 
 — 298 — 
 
 Yona, adj. „belonging to doing work with, doing with, using 
 for;" e, g. y'etr e-yona ma-pant ro-tof, „tools lo do work 
 with in the ground," = „agricultural implements." 
 
 Ydne, V. refl. (rad.yo), „happen, come to pass, take place;" also 
 „be fulfilled" (as a jirophecy); lit. „do itself;" e.g. atr'ei atse 
 tra ydne tenon, „this thing happened to day;" — atra K'Qru 
 pa tapah-e, tra yone tenon aii-lo an6, „what God spoke long 
 ago, has come to pass at this day," or „whal God foretold, 
 has been fulfilled at this time." 
 
 Yos, a-, or i-, pi. ma-, n. „a deed, work, achievement, action; 
 custom, habit, manners;" e. g. ma-yos-mon, „his deeds;" — 
 ma-YOS ma am-bona ane, „the customs of this nation;" — 
 ma-yos-m'on ma-kabane, „his wonderful deeds;" — an-ygs 
 ane an^ o yo ria tesa he, „this deed which he did does 
 not please."
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 iiL ^^mn 1973 
 
 •Lpie 1973 
 iiy^^i^lAR S 1 1375 
 
 IV' Iw. ' <-^'' "^ I ■ 
 
 • > 
 
 ^ FEB 4;\3&'^- 
 
 Form L9-Series 44 4 
 
 
 «tC'D LO-URl 
 
 MftR 181985 
 
 I NOV 0619^^ 
 
 iH/i/ia 
 
 B9F 
 
 lUK^ 
 
 ^U6V5 l# 
 
 OlJL i " ii 
 
 %Wli^ 
 
 DEC^
 
 ¥: 
 
 3 1158 00 
 
 90 4829 
 
 PL 
 
 8735 
 S3^1c 
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILIT 
 
 ||!H I'll III 111 111 I' l|!|'l"iliil 
 
 ill III] III ill ill i> iiii 
 
 AA 000 668 877 4